MARSHALL STREET & NORTHEAST WPC FACILITIES - ODOR CONTROL IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT - 05-0062-UT
v Mq<IM&CREED RECEIVED E N G I N E E R S
?? JUN 2„ 2008 SURVEYORS
June 6, 2008
Mr. Thurston Lamberson
TLC Diversified, Inc.
2719 -17th Street East
Palmetto, Florida 34221
M&C 00992-0177(14)
RE: Construction Administration Services
Marshall St. and Northeast WPCF odor Ccrarol Improvements
G ty I i:,oject N.r,. 05MGUIT
Dear Mr. Lamberson:
The work of the above referenced project is completed and acceptable as of April 1, 2008
for the Northeast Water Pollution Control Facility, and May 9, 2005 for the Marshall
Street Water Pollution Control Facility; listed dates being the dates remaining punchlist
items were complete.
However, if at some later date any defects appear due to construction, you will be
expected to accept the responsibility according ..to. the Guarantee of the General
Conditions which reads:
"The Contractor shall remedy any defects in the work at his own expense and pay for
any damage to other work resulting there from which appear within a period of one year
from the date of final acceptance".
At this time we have also included your "Contractor's Evaluation" for this project.
Sincerely,
McKIM & CREED, P.A.
Mitchel A. Chiavaroli, P.E.
A p D
66
1365 H a m l e t Avenue Sr. Project Manager
C l e a r w a t e r , FL 3 3 7 5 6 cc: Gary A. Johnson, C.G.C., Public Services Director
John Milligan, WPC Superintendent
Perry M. Lopez, Construction Manager, Clearwater
7 2 7 .4 4 2.7 19 6 Lan-Anh Nguyen, Clearwater
Susan Chase, Official Records and Legislative Services
Fax 727.461.3827 Project File
Warranty File
www.mckimcreed.com
S:\0992\0177\60-ConAdm\TLC It1060608.doc
OFFICIAL RECORDS AND P L A N N E R S
LEGISLATIVE SRVCS DEPT
CITY OF CLEARWATER CONSTRUCTION DIVISION
CONTRACTOR'S PAST PERFORMANCE REPORT
Contractor: TLC Diversified, Inc. FIN Project No.: N/A
Address: 2719 -17th Street East County: Manatee Route: N/A
City/State/Zip: Palmetto Florida 34221 Type of Work: Wastewater Treatment Plants
Phone: (941) 722-0621 _ Fax No.: (941) 722-1382
Project Name & Number: Marshall St. / Northeast WPC Facilities Odor Control Improvements
Contract Number: 05-0062-UT Final Contract Amount: $219,085.00
Completion Date: Northeast APC Facility - A ril l 2008
Completion Date: Marshall Street APC Facility -ME 9 2008
ANSWER ALL QUESTIONS
Performance
1. Pursuit of the Work.
Maximum
Value
12
2. Proper MOT and Minimize Impacts to Traveling Public.
3. Timely and Complete Submittal of Documents.
4. Timely Completion of Project.
5. Coordination / Cooperation with CI Personnel,
Property Owners and Utilities Company.
6. Mitigate Cost and Time Overruns
7. Environmental Compliance
8. Conformance with Contract Documents.
G ca S
ttch Chiavaroli, PE (signature) ate Perry M. Lopez
McKim & Creed (CEI for Project) Construction Man
12
8
16/20 note #4
10
12
10/12 note #4
20
Total Score 00/106 0-
Rated
Value
9
NA
6
0
10
11
10
18
64
gnature)
(City of Cie rw
(J i 76 0
Date
r'
oo
"i CITY OF CLEARWATER
,,=
"C-2 = ?? Posr OFFICE Box 4748, CLEARWAI'ER, FLORIDA 33758-4748
TELEPFIoNE (727) 462-6126 FAx (727) 462-6989
-. ATER,
,
?rss/t / 00,
PUBLIC SERVICES
DL:PnRxMErrr -
Ml?i 3 % March 2, 2009
McKim & Creed, P.A.
Attn: Mr. Mitchel A. Chiavaroli, P.E.
1365 Hamlet Avenue
Clearwater, Florida 33756
RE: Warranty Check
Marshall St. and Northeast WPCF Odor Control Improvements (05-0062-UT)
Dear Mitch:
Attached please find a copy of the Warranty Letter for the above referenced project as well as a copy
of the City of Clearwater Office Communication Form for your use for the warranty check.
Please have the project inspected for any defects or damages that may have occur during the past year
and let us know of your findings before April 1, 2009 for the Northeast Plant and May 9, 2009 for the
Marshall St. Plant.
Very truly yours,
Perry M. L z
Construction Manager
City of Clearwater
/ae
cc: Gary A. Johnson, C.G.C., Public Services Director
Lan-Anh Nguyen, Engineering Specialist II
Jack Sadowski, Marshall St. WWTP Lead Operator
Roger Hooey, Northeast WWTP Lead Operator
Susan Chase, Official Records and Legislative Services
Project File
Warranty File
L rJ
T m. EMPLOYMENT AND AYFIRMATIVEA,c7'm EMPLOYER"
v McK M&CREED
June 6, 2008
Mr. Thurston Lamberson
TLC Diversified, Inc.
2719 --17th Street East
Palmetto, Florida 34221
ENGINEERS
SURVEYORS
P L A N N E R S
M&C 00992-0177(14)
RE: Construction Administration Services
Marshall St. and Northeast WPCF odor Ccarol Improvements
C ty l'roj0ct No. OS-'J062JT
Dear Mr. Lamberson:
The work of the above referenced project is completed and acceptable as of ,April 1, 2008 .
&' * 4th'e Nof4f"hdd'** X!Control FaeilitV, and May 9, 2008 for the Marshall
Street Water Pollution Control Facility; listed dates being the dates remaining punchlist
items were complete.
However, if at some later date any defects appear due to construction, you will be
expected to accept the responsibility according. -to, the Guarantee of the General
Conditions which reads:
"The Contractor shall remedy any defects in the work at his own expense and pay for
any damage to other work resulting there from which appear within a period of one year
from the date of final acceptance".
At this time we have also included your "Contractor's Evaluation" for this project.
Sincerely,
McKIM & CREED, P.A.
Mitchel A. Chiavaroli, P.E.
1365 Hamlet Avenue Sr. Project Manager
Clearwater, FL 33756
cc: Gary A. Johnson, C.G.C., Public Services Director
John Milligan, WPC Superintendent
Perry M. Lopez, Construction Manager, Clearwater
727.442-7196 Lan-AnhNguyen, Clearwater
Susan Chase, Official Records and Legislative Services
Fax 727.461.3827 Project File
Warranty File
www.mckimcreed.com
8:111982\0177160-ConAdm%TLC ItrO60608.doc
.r
CITY OF CLEARWATER
PUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT
CONSTRUCTION DIVISION
OFFICE COMMUNICATION
TO: Mitch Chiavaroli, PE SUBJECT: One Year Warranty Check
McKim & Creed, P.A.
DATE: March 2, 2009
MESSAGE: Marshall St. & Northeast WPCF Odor Control Improvements
City Project No. 05-0062-UT
Northeast APCF - warran inspection due before April 1, 2009.
Marshall St. APCF - warrant inspection due before May 9, 2009.
Contractor: TLC Diversified, Inc.
2719 - 17t Street East
Palmetto, Florida 34221
Phone: 941 722-0621
Fax: 941 722-1382
SIGNED:
DATE:
REPLY:
SIGNED:
Form - Office Communications for Warranty Checks
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
AND
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
MARSHALL STREET & NORTHEAST WPC
FACiliTIES
ODOR CONTROL IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT
Prepared For
LL..
()
o
>-
J-
Issue for Bid
OCTOBER 2006
., Ie
CONS1RUC17ON GROUPS
CG C041816
UG C053963
Diversified
.
Inc.
. GENERAL CONTRACTING GROUP
. ENVIRONMENTAL CONSTRUCTION GROUP
. UNDERGROUND UTILITIES GROUP
,,!el~VI!()
.IAN j 1 1007
cn"v ATTORNEY
Jan. 26,2007
Office of the City Attorney
City Hall Building
112 So Osceola Ave. Third Floor
Clearwater, Fl. 33756
Re: Our Job 06-26 Marshall Street/Northeast WPC Facilities Odor Control Project
(05-0062- UT)
LETTER OF TRANSMITTAL
We are sending you X_Attached _Under separate cover via:
_Shop Drawings
_Specifications
Prints
_Copy of letter
Plans
_Change Order
_Samples
X Other
These are transmitted as checked below:
_For approval _Approved as Submitted
_For your use _Approved as noted
_Returned for Corrections, Please resubmit
_Pay Request
X_As requested
For Review
This Transmittal contains:
Copies
5
5
5
Remarks:
Date
No.
Description
Executed Contracts
Executed Bonds
Certificate of Insurance
Joanne R. Lamberson
Vice- President
CC: Chrono
0626File
MAIN OFFICE. 2719 17TH STREET EAST. PALMETTO. FL 34221 .941-722-0621 . FAX 941-722-1382
EAST COAST. 7233 SOUTHERN BOULEVARD. B-1 · WEST PALM BEACH. FL 33413.561-478-2025. FAX 561-478-7159
'I
~ EMERGENCY CALL LIST
TO: Public Works Administration/Engineering; Police Communications;
Traffic; Fire Department; Utilities Dispatch/Gas; Public
Service/ Road & Drainage; Public Utilities/Water; Public
Utilities/Wastewater; Assistant Public Services Director;
Building Construction Manager; Construction Inspector;
FROM: Public Works Administration/Engineering
PROJECT: Marshall Street/Northeast WPC Facilities Odor Control Project -
(05-0062-UT)
LOCATION: Marshall Street - 1605 Harbor Drive, Clearwater, Florida
Northeast WPA - 3290 SR 580, Clearwater, Florida 34695
33755
The following Contractor has been awarded the above project by the City
Commission action dated: Thursdav. Januarv 18. 2007
PROJECT IS TO BEGIN:
CONTRACTOR'S NAME AND ADDRESS:
NAME:
ADDRESS:
TLC Diversified, Inc.
2719 17th Street East
Palmetto, FL 34221
PHONE NO.:
(941) 722-0621
FAX NO. (941) 722-1382
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY - PLEASE NOTIFY: (Please List 3)
NAME: hAVfb 61t~WfJ
ADDRESS: 27/Gf )7t...~ ST e. fJlr/"He:rTO I 1=L 3+ZZ1
PHONE NO.: '1-+1-7ZZ-0c;Z/ of{. <:1+1- UJI5-/QqS
NAME : 6~r b RHo b€'S
ADDRESS: 27lq /7-t.J4S,e-. fJAL.N~rr(J/FL 34ZZ1
PHONE NO.: q4/- 7 ~7-08.fq
NAME: (!J12,4 b bl)Jl.€A.( /tAMf
ADDRESS: Z7/~ 17b S, € ~ {"k€TIo I Ft 54ZZ/
PHONE NO.: '+1-722-062.1 aIL q4-l- q/5-38f-lJ
EMERGENCY TRAFFIC MAINTENANCE PERSON
NAME:
PHONE NO.:
bAVlb ~HObE5
<141 - 737-tJ943
NOTE: IT SHALL BE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR TO NOTIFY THE
TRAFFIC ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT & THE CLEARWATER POLICE DEPARTMENT
WHEN WORK COMMENCES AND WHEN STREETS ARE TO BE CLOSED TO TRAFFIC.
-.
..
TO: City of Clearwater
ATTN: Public Works Construction
P.O. BOX 4748
Clearwater, Florida 33758-4748
The following personnel are authorized by me to sign submittals for
Marshall Street/Northeast WPC Facilities Odor Control Project (05-0062-UT)
NAMES:
MAIlJL S ~(,f>H
J""A""'~ MVR..PH Y
bAV/~ B"-cWN
8J2AUlJ2.OIKAHP
bAN It-Lit NAiL
By:J~~ ~i.Jer~l~~;d~ tnc.
DATE: I/f.~~ 7
TITLE: rf<..~S ,J~EAJT
COMPANY NAME:
...:;)
~
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Table of Contents
SECTION I.................................................... ADVERTISEMENT FOR CONSTRUCTION PROJECTS
SECTION II..................................................................................... .INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
SECTION III............................................................................................ GENERAL CONDITIONS
SECTION IV......... .......................................................................... TECH~ICAL SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION V........................................................................ .., ... ... ..... ... . CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Table of Contents
TOC-1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION I
ADVERTISEMENT OF BIDS & NOTICE TO CONTRACTORS
MARSHALL STREET and NORTHEAST WPC FACILITIES ODOR CONTROL IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT
CONTRACT# 05-0062-UT
CLEARWATER, FLORIDA
Copies of the Contract Documents and Plans for this project are available for inspection and/or purchase by
prospective bidders at the Municipal Services Bldg., Public Works Administration Office, 2nd Floor, 100 So.
Myrtle Ave., Clearwater, Florida, between the hours of 8:30 a.m. and 4:30 p.m. Monday thru Friday, beginning
on Monday, October 23,2006, until no later than close of business three days preceeding the bid opening. A
charge of $ 100.00, none of which will be refunded, will be made for each set.
The work for which proposals are invited consists of modifications to the existing odor control system at the
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities. The odor control unit (Zabocs™, manufactured by U.S. Filter)
will be supplied by the Owner. The Contractor will be responsible for the construction of the concrete pad that
the unit will be placed on, improvements to the existing odor control piping and ductwork, installation of new
odor control piping and ductwork, installation of new influent channel covers, installation of a system drain and
process water lines connecting the unit to the existing plant utilities, and also installation of the necessary
power connections.
A Mandatory Pre-bid Conference for all prospective bidders will be held on Thursday, November 16, 2006 at
10:00am in Room 130 of the Municipal Services Building, 100 So. Myrtle Ave., Clearwater, Florida 33756-
5520. Representatives of the Owner and Consulting Engineer will be present to discuss this Project.
Sealed proposals will be received by Purchasina Manaaer. at the Purchasina Office, located at the
Municipal Services Buildina.100 So. Mvrtle Ave.. 3rd Floor. Clearwater. Florida 33756-5520 until 1:30
P.M. on Thursday, November 30, 2006, and publicly opened and read at that hour and place for
MARSHALL STREET and NORTHEAST WPC FACILITIES ODOR CONTROL IMPROVEMENTS
PROJECT (0S-0062-UT).
A complete bidders package containing plans, specifications, bond forms, contract form, affidavits and proposal
form is available only to City pre-qualified contractors in the construction category of Wastewater &
Water Treatment Facilities with a minimum pre-qualification amount of .1500.000.
Contractors, suppliers, or others who are not prEHjualified but who may be interested as a possible
subcontractor, supplier, etc., may purchase a "Subcontractor" package consisting of plans, specifications, and
pay items worksheet.
A 10% bid bond is required for all City of Clearwater projects.
The right is reserved by the City Manager of the City of Clearwater, Florida to reject any or all bids.
The City of Clearwater, Florida
William B. Home, II, City Manager
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section I
1-1
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section I
1-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION II
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
Table of Contents
1 COPIES OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS........................................................................................... 11-2
2 QUALIFICATION OF BIDDERS....................................................................................................11-1
3 EXAMINATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SITE ......................................................... 11-1
4 INTERPRETATIONS AND ADDENDA ......................................................................................... 11-2
5 BID SECURITY OR BID BOND .................................................................................................... 11-2
6 CONTRACT TIME....... ......................... ..................... ..... ..... ................. ...... ........ .......................... 11-3
7 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES....... ............... ................... ........ ....... ....................... .............. ................. 11-3
8 SUBSTITUTE MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT ..............................................................................11-3
9 SUBCONTRACTORS .............. .... ...................... ..... .... ... ....... .... ...... ...... .... ..... ......... ....... ... ... ..... .... 11-3
10 BID/PROPOSAL FORM.. ............ ........ ......................... .............................................. ................... 11-4
11 SUBMISSION OF BIDS ................................................................................................................11-4
12 MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS........................................................................... 11-4
13 REJECTION OF BIDS .................................................................................................................. 11-5
14 DISQUALIFICATION OF BIDDER................................................................................................ 11-5
15 OPENING OF BIDS ...................................................................................................................... 11-5
16 LICENSES, PERMITS. ROYALTY FEES AND TAXES ................................................................11-5
17 IDENTICAL TIE BIDSNENDOR DRUG FREE WORKPLACE ..................................................... 11-5
18 AWARD OF CONTRACT ......................... .......... ............ ............................................................... 11-6
19 BID PROTEST ................................................................ ........................................ ...................... 11-7
20 TRENCH SAFETY ACT ................................................................................................................ 11-7
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section II
TOC-1
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section II
TOC-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1 COPIES OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS
1.1 Complete sets of the Bidding Documents are available for the sum stated in the Advertisement for Bid
from the Office of the Purchasing Manager. This amount represents reproduction costs and is non-
refundable. A complete bidders package containing plans, specifications, bond forms, contract form,
affidavits and bid/proposal form is available only to pre-qualified bidders. Contractors, suppliers, or
others who are not pre-qualified but who may be a possible subcontractor, supplier, or other interested
person may purchase a "Subcontractor" package consisting of plans, specifications, and list of pay
items.
1.2 Complete sets of Bidding Documents must be used in preparing bids. Neither the City nor the
Engineer shall be liable for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use of incomplete sets of
Bidding Documents, by Bidders, sub-bidders or others.
1.3 The City, in making copies of Bidding Documents available on the above terms, does so only for the
purpose of obtaining Bids on the Work and does not confer a license or grant any other permission to
use the documents for any other purpose.
2 QUALlFICA liON OF BIDDERS
2.1 Each prospective Bidder must pre-qualify to demonstrate, to the complete satisfaction of the City of
Clearwater, that the Bidder has the necessary facilities, equipment, ability, financial resources and
experience to perform the work in a satisfactory manner before obtaining drawings, specifications and
contract documents. An application package for pre-qualification may be obtained by contacting the
City of Clearwater, Engineering Department, Engineering Services Division at P.O. Box 4748,
Clearwater, Florida 33758-4748 (mailing address); 100 South Myrtle Avenue, Clearwater, Florida
33756-5520 (street address only) or by phone at (727) 562-4750. All qualification data must be
completed and delivered to the Director of Engineering at the above address not later than fourteen
(14) days prior to the time set for the receipt of bids. Bidders currently pre-qualified by the City do not
have to make reapplication.
3 EXAMINATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SITE
3.1 It is the responsibility of each Bidder, before submitting a Bid, to (a) examine the Contract Documents
thoroughly; (b) visit the site to become familiar with local conditions that may in any manner affect cost,
progress, performance or furnishing of the work; (c) consider and abide by all applicable federal, state
and local laws, ordinances, rules and regulations; and (d) study and carefully correlate Bidder's
observations with the Contract Documents, and notify Engineer of all conflicts, errors or discrepancies
in the Contract Documents.
3.2 In reference to the Technical Specifications and/or the Scope of the Work for identification of those
reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at the site which have been utilized by the
Engineer in the preparation of the Contract Documents, bidder may rely upon the accuracy of the
technical data contained in such reports but not upon non-technical data, interpretations or opinions
contained therein or for the completeness thereof for the purposes of bidding or construction. In
reference to those drawings relating to physical conditions of existing surface and subsurface
conditions (except Underground Facilities) which are at or contiguous to the site and which have been
utilized by the Engineer in preparation of the Contract Documents, bidder may rely upon the accuracy
of the technical data contained in such drawings but not upon the completeness thereof for the
purposes of bidding or construction.
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section II
11-1
3.3 Information and data reflected in the Contract Documents with respect to Underground Facilities at or
contiguous to the site are based upon information and data furnished. to the City and Engineer by
owners of such Underground Facilities or others, and the City does not assume responsibility for the
accuracy or completeness thereof unless expressly provided in the Contract Documents.
3.4 Provisions conceming responsibilities for the adequacy of data fumished to prospective Bidders on
subsurface conditions, Underground Facilities, other physical conditions, possible conditions, and
possible changes in the Contract Documents due to differing conditions appear in the General
Conditions.
3.5 Before submitting a Bid, each Bidder shall, at Bidder's own expense, make or obtain any additional
examinations, investigations, explorations, tests and studies and obtain any additional information and
data which pertain to the physical conditions (surface, subsurface and Underground Facilities) at or
contiguous to the site or otherwise which may affect cost, progress, performance or furnishing the
work in accordance with the time, price and other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents.
3.6 On request in advance, City will provide each Bidder access to the site to conduct such explorations
and tests at Bidder's own expense as each Bidder deems necessary for submission of a Bid. Bidder
shall fill all holes and clean up and restore the site to its former condition upon completion of such
explorations and tests.
3.7 The lands upon which the Work is to be performed, rights-of-way and easements for access thereto
and other lands designated for use by the Contractor in performing the Work are identified in the
Contract Documents. All additional lands and access thereto required for temporary construction
facilities or storage of materials and equipment are to be provided by the Contractor. Easements for
permanent structures or permanent changes in existing structures are to be obtained and paid for by
the City unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents.
3.8 The submission of a Bid will constitute an unequivocal representation by the Bidder that the Bidder has
complied with every requirement of these Instructions to Bidders and that, without exception, the Bid is
premised upon performing and fumishing the Work required by the Contract Documents by such
means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction as may be indicated in or
required by the Contract Documents, and that the Contract Documents are sufficient in scope and
detail to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions of performance and furnishing
of the work.
4 INTERPRETATIONS AND ADDENDA
4.1 All questions as to the meaning or intent of the Contract Documents are to be directed to the Engineer.
Interpretations or clarifications considered necessary by the Engineer in response to such questions
will be issued by Addenda, either by mail or facsimile transmission, to all parties recorded by the
Purchasing Manager as having received the Bidding Documents. Questions received less than ten
(10) days prior to the date for opening of Bids may not be answered. Only information provided by
.formal written Addenda will be binding. Oral and other interpretations of clarifications will be without
legal effect.
4.2 Addenda may also be issued to modify the Bidding Documents as deemed advisable by the City or
Engineer.
5 BID SECURITY OR BID BOND
5.1 Each Bid must be accompanied by Bid Security made payable to the City of Clearwater in an amount
equal to ten percent (10%) of the Bidder's maximum Bid price and in the form of a certified or cashiers
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section II
11-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
check or a Bid Bond (on form attached) issued by a surety meeting the requirements of the General
Conditions. A cash bid bond will not be accepted.
5.2 The Bid Security of the Successful Bidder will be retained until such Bidder has executed the
Agreement and fumished the required Payment and Performance bonds, whereupon the Bid Security
will be retumed. If the Successful Bidder fails to execute, deliver the Agreement and furnish the
required Bonds within ten (10) days after the award of contract by the City Commission, the City may
annul the bid and the Bid Security of the Bidder will be forfeited. The Bid Security of any Bidder whom
the City believes to have a reasonable chance of receiving the award may be retained by the City until
the successful execution of the agreement with the successful Bidder or for a period up to ninety (90)
days following bid opening. Security of other Bidders will be retumed approximately fourteen (14) days
after the Bid opening.
5.3 The Bid Bond shall be issued in the favor of the City of Clearwater by a surety company qualified to do
business in, and having a registered agent in the State of Florida.
6 CONTRACT TIME
6.1 The number of consecutive calendar days within which the work is to be completed is set forth in the
Technical Specifications.
7 UQUIDA TED DAMAGES
7.1 Provisions for liquidated damages are set forth in the Contract Agreement.
8 SUBSTITUTE MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
8.1 The contract, if awarded, will be on the basis of material and equipment described in the Drawings or
specified in the Specifications without consideration of possible substitute or "or equal" items.
Whenever it is indicated in the Drawings or specified in the Specifications that a substitute or "or equalJ'
item may be furnished or used, application for its acceptance will not be considered by the Engineer
until after the effective date of the Contract Agreement. The procedure for submittal of any such
application is described in the General Conditions and as supplemented in the Technical
Specifications.
9 SUBCONTRACTORS
9.1 If requested by the City or Engineer, the Successful Bidder, and any other Bidder so requested, shall,
within seven (7) days after the date of the request, submit to the Engineer an experience statement
with pertinent information as to similar projects and other evidence of qualification for each
Subcontractor, supplier, person and organization to be used by the Contractor in the completion of the
Work. The amount of subcontract work shall not exceed fifty percent (50%) of the Work except as
may be specifICally approved by the Engineer. If the Engineer, after due investigation, has reasonable
objection to any proposed Subcontractor, supplier, other person or organization, he may, before
recommending award of the Contract.
Agreement to the City Commission, request the Successful Bidder to submit an acceptable substitute
without an increase in Contract Price or Contract Time. If the Successful Bidder declines to make any
such substitution, the City may award the contract to the next lowest and most responsive Bidder that
proposes to use acceptable Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other persons and organizations.
Declining to make requested. substitutions will not constitute grounds for sacrificing the Bid security to
the City of any Bidder. Any Subcontractor, supplier, other person or organization listed by the
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section 1/
1/.3
Contractor and to whom the Engineer does not make written objection prior to the recommendation of
award to the City Commission will be deemed acceptable to the City subject to revocation of such
acceptance after the Effective Date of the Contract Agreement as provided in the General Conditions.
9.2 No Contractor shall be required to employ any Subcontractor, supplier, person or organization against
whom he has reasonable objection.
10 BID/PROPOSAL FORM
10.1 The Bid/Proposal Form is included with the Contract Documents and shall be completed in ink or by
typewriter. All blanks on the Bid/Proposal Forms must be completed. The Bidder must state in the
Bid/Proposal Form in words and numerals without delineation's, alterations or erasures, the price for
which he will perform the work as required by the Contract Documents. Bidders are required to bid on
all items in the Bid/Proposal form. The lump sum for each section or item shall be for furnishing all
equipment, materials, and labor for completing the section or item as per the plans and contract
specifications. Should it be found that quantities or amounts shown on the plans or in the proposal, for
any part of the work, are exceeded or should they be found to be less after the actual construction of
the work, the amount bid for each section or item will be increased or decreased in direct proportion to
the unit prices bid for the listed individual items.
10.2 Bids by corporations shall be executed in the corporate name by the president or a vice-president (or
other corporate officer accompanied by evidence of authority to sign) and the corporate seal shall be
affixed. The corporate address and state of incorporation shall be shown below the Signature. If
requested, the person signing a Bid for a corporation or partnership shall produce evidence
satisfactory to the City of the person's authority to bind the corporation or partnership.
10.3 Bids by partnerships shall be executed in the partnership name and signed by a general partner,
whose title shall appear under the signature and the official address of the partnership shall be shown
below the signature.
10.4 All names shall be typed or printed below the signature.
11 SUBMISSION OF BIDS
11.1 Sealed Bids shall be submitted at or before the time and at the place indicated in the Advertisement for
Bids and shall be submitted in the bid envelope provided with the bid documents. If forwarded by mail,
the Bid shall be enclosed in another envelope with the notation "Bid Enclosed" on the face thereof and
addressed to the City of Clearwater, attention Purchasing Manager. Bids will be received at the office
indicated in the Advertisement until the time and date specified. Telegraphic or facsimile bids received
by the Purchasing Manager will not be accepted.
12 MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS
12.1 Bids may be modified or withdrawn by an appropriate document duly executed (in the manner that a
Bid must be executed) and delivered as described in the Advertisement of Bids. A request for
withdrawal or a modification shall be in writing and signed by a person duly authorized to do so.
Withdrawal of a Bid will not prejudice the rights of a Bidder to submit a new Bid prior to the Bid Date
and Time. After expiration of the period for receiving Bids, no Bid may be withdrawn or modified.
12.2 After a bid is received by the, City, the bidder may request to modify the bid for typographical or
scrivener's errors only. The bidder must state in writing to the City that a typographical or scrivener's
error has been made by the bidder, the nature of the error, the requested correction of the error, and
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section II
11-4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
what the adjusted bid amount will be if the correction is accepted by the City. The City reserves the
right at its sole discretion to accept, reject, or modify any bid.
13 REJECTION OF BIDS
13.1 To the extent permitted by applicable State and Federal laws and regulations, the City reserves the
right to reject any and all Bids, and to waive any and all informalities. Grounds for the rejection of a bid
include but are not limited to a material omission, unauthorized alteration of form, unauthorized
alternate bids, incomplete or unbalanced unit prices, or irregularities of any kind. Also, the City
reserves the right to reject any Bid if the City believes that it would not be in the best interest of the
public to make an award to that Bidder, whether because the Bid is not responsive or the Bidder is
unqualified or of doubtful financial ability or fails to meet any other pertinent standard or criteria
established by the City. The City reserves the right to decide which bid is deemed to be the lowest
and best in the interest of the public.
14 DISQUALlFICA rlON OF BIDDER
14.1 Any or all bids will be rejected if there is any reason for believing that collusion exists among the
bidders, the participants in such collusion will not be considered in future proposals for the same work.
Each bidder shall execute the Non-Collusion Affidavit contained in the Contract Documents.
15 OPENING OF BIDS
15.1 Bids will be opened and read publicly at the location and time stated in the Advertisement for Bids.
Bidders are invited to be present at the opening of bids.
16 LICENSES, PERMITS, ROYALTY FEES AND TAXES
16.1 The Contractor shall secure all licenses and permits (and shall pay all permit fees) except as
specifically stated otherwise in the Technical Specifications. The Contractor shall comply with all
Federal and State Laws, County and Municipal Ordinances and regulations, which in any manner
effect the prosecution of the work. City of Clearwater building permit fees and impact fees will be
waived except as specifically stated otherwise in the Technical Specifications.
16.2 The Contractor shall assume all liability for the payment of royalty fees due to the use of any
construction or operation process, which is protected by patent rights except as specifically stated
otherwise in the Technical Specifications. The amount of royalty fee, if any, shall be stated by the
Contractor.
16.3 The Contractor shall pay all applicable sales, consumer, use and other taxes required bylaw. The
Contractor is responsible for reviewing the pertinent State Statutes involving the sales tax and sales
tax exemptions and complying with all requirements.
17 IDENTICAL TIE BIDSNENDOR DRUG FREE WORKPLACE
17.1 In accordance with the requirements of Section 287.087 Florida Statutes regarding a Vendor Drug
Free Workplace, in the event of identical tie bids, preference shall be given to bidders with drug-free
workplace programs. Whenever two or more bids which are equal with respect to price, quality, and
service are received by the City for the procurement of commodities or contractual services, a bid
received from a business that certifies that it has implemented a drug-free workplace program shall be
given preference in the award process. Established procedures for processing tie bids will be followed
if none or all of the tied bidders have a drug-free workplace program. In order to have a drug-free
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section II
11.5
workplace program, a contractor shall supply the City with a certificate containing the following six
statements and the accompanying certification statement:
(1) Publish a statement notifying employees that the unlawful manufacture, distribution, dispensing,
possession, or use of a controlled substance is prohibited in the workplace and specifying the actions
that will be taken against employees for violations of such prohibition.
(2) Inform employees as to the dangers of drug abuse in the workplace, the business's policy of
maintaining a drug-free workplace, any available drug counseling, rehabilitation, and employee
assistance programs, and the penalties that may be imposed upon employees for drug abuse
violations.
(3) Give each employee engaged in providing the commodities or contractual services that are under
bid a copy of the statement specified in subsection (1).
(4) In the statement specified in subsection (1), notify the employees that, as a condition of working on
the commodities or contractual services that are under bid, the employee will abide by the terms of the
statement and will notify the employer of any conviction of, or plea of guilty or nolo contendere to, any
violation of chapter 893, or of any controlled substance law, of the United States, or of any state, for a
violation occurring in the workplace no later than five (5) days after such conviction.
(5) Impose a sanction on, or require the satisfactory participation in a drug abuse assistance or
rehabilitation program if such is available in the employee's community, by any employee who is so
convicted.
(6) Make a good faith effort to continue to maintain a drug-free workplace through implementation of
this section.
I certify that this firm does/does not (select only one) fully comply with the above requirements.
18 AWARD OF CONTRAGT
18.1 Discrepancies between words and figures will be resolved in favor of words. Discrepancies in the
multiplication of units of work and unit prices will be resolved in favor of the unit prices.
Discrepancies between the indicated sum of any column of figures and the correct sum thereof will
be resolved in favor of the correct sum.
18.2 In evaluating the Bids, the City will consider the qualifications of the Bidders, whether or not the
Bids comply with the prescribed requirements, unit prices, and other data as may be requested in
the Bid/Proposal form. The City may consider the qualifications and experience of Subcontractors,
suppliers and other persons and organizations proposed by the Contractor for the Work. The City
may conduct such investigations as the City deems necessary to assist in the evaluation of any Bid
and to establish the responsibility, qualifications and financial ability of Bidders, proposed
Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons, and organizations to perform and furnish the Work in
accordance with the Contract Documents to the City's satisfaction within the prescribed time.
18.3 If the Contract is to be awarded, it will be awarded to the lowest responsible, responsive Bidder
whose evaluation by the City indicates to the City that the award will be in the best interest of the
City.
18.4 Award of contract will be made for that combination of base bid and alternate bid items in the best
interest of the City, however, unless otherwise specified all work awarded will be awarded to only
one Contractor.
Marshall Street and Northeast WPCFaci/ities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section II
11-6
I
.!
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
19 BID PROTEST
19.1 RIGHT TO PROTEST: Any actual bidder who is aggrieved in connection with the solicitation or award
of a contract may seek resolution of his/her complaints initially with the Purchasing Manager, and if not
satisfied, with the City Manager, in accordance with protest procedures set forth in this section.
19.2 PROTEST PROCEDURE:
A. A protest with respect to the specifications of an invitation for bid or request for proposal shall
be submitted in writing a minimum of five (5) work days prior to the opening of the bid or due
date of the request for proposal. Opening dates for bids or due dates for requests for
proposal will be printed on the bidlrequest document itself.
B. Protests in respect to award of contract shall be submitted in writing a maximum of five (5)
work days after notice of intent to award is posted, or is mailed to each bidder, which ever is
earlier. Notice of intent to award will be forwarded to bidders upon telephonic or written
request. Protests of recommended award should cite specific portions of the City of
Clearwater Code of Ordinances that have allegedly been violated.
C. Exceptions to the five (5) day requirements noted in both A and B above may be granted if the
aggrieved person could have not been reasonably expected to have knowledge of the facts
giving rise to such protest prior to the bid opening, posting of intent to award, or due date for
requests for proposals. Request for exceptions should be made in writing, stating reasons for
the exception.
D. The Purchasing Manager shall respond to the formal written protest within five business days
of receipt. The Purchasing Manage~s response will be fully coordinated with the appropriate
Department Director and the Assistant City Manager.
E. If the protestor is not satisfied with the response from the Purchasing Manager, he/she may
then submit in writing within five business days of receipt of that response his/her reason for
dissatisfaction, along with copies of his/her original formal protest letter and the response from
the Purchasing Manager, to the City Manager.
F. The City Manager as Purchasing Agent for the City has the final authority in the matter of
protests. The City Manager will respond to the protestor within ten work days of receipt of the
appeal.
19.3 STAY OF PROCUREMENT DURING PROTEST: In the event of a timely protest, the Purchasing
Manager shall not proceed with the solicitation or award of contract until all administrative remedies
have been exhausted or until the City Manager makes written determination that the award of
contract without delay is necessary to protect the best interest of the City.
20 TRENCH SAFETY ACT
20.1 The Bidder shall comply with the provisions of the Florida Trench Safety Act (Sections 553.60-
553.64, Florida Statutes) and the provisions of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration's
(OSHA) excavation safety standards, 29 C.F.R.s 1926.650 Subparagraph P, or current revisions of
these laws.
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section II
11-7
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section II
11-8
.1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION III
GENERAL CONDITIONS
Table of Contents
1 DEFIN ITIONS .............................................................................. ............ ..... ........... .................... 111-1
2 PRELIMINARY MATTERS....................... ......... ............................................... ........... ................. 111-4
2.1. DELIVERY OF BONDS AND CERTIFICATES OF INSURANCE ............................................. 111-4
2.2 COPIES OF DOCUMENTS................................................ .................. .................................... 111-4
2.3 COMMENCEMENT OF CONTRACT TIMElNOTICE TO PROCEED; STARTING THE PROJECT
.................................................................................................................................................. 111-4
BEFORE STARTING CONSTRUCTION ............................. .............. ......;. ...................... ......... 111-4
PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE. ........ .......................... ................ ................................ 111-5
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, INTENT .......................................................................................... 111-5
INTENT........................ ............... ........ ........ ......................................................... ..................... 111-5
REPORTING AND RESOLVING DiSCREPANCiES.... ................................................,........... 111-6
AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; REFERENCE
POINTS....................................................................................................................................... 111-6
4.1 AVAILABILITY OF LANDS.......... ....... ........ ........... .............. ......................... ...................... ...... 111-6
4.2 INVESTIGATIONS AND REPORTS ......................................................................................... 111-6
4.3 PHYSICAL CONDITIONS, UNDERGROUND FACiLITIES...................................................... 111-6
4.4 REFERENCE POINTS ....................................................................;..... ................................... 111-7
5 BONDS AND INSURANCE..................... .................................................... ................ ................. 111-7
5.1 . PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND/CONTRACT BOND................................................ 111-7
5.2 INSURANCE.......................................................................................... .................................. 111-8
5.2.1 WORKER'S COMPENSATION INSURANCE.................................................................... 111-8
5.2.2 PUBLIC LlABILlTYAND PROPERTY DAMAGE COVERAGE.......................................... 111-9
5.2.3 COMPREHENSIVE AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY.................. .............................................. 111-10
5.3. WAIVER OF RIGHTS ............................................................................................................. 111-10
6 CONTRACTORS RESPONSiBILITIES...................................................................................... 111-11
6.1 SUPERVISION AND SUPERINTENDENCE .......................................................................... 111-11
6.2 LABOR, MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT............................................................................... 111-11
6.3 SUBSTITUTES AND .OR EQUAL. ITEMS...................................................................... ....... 111-12
6.4 RESPONSIBILITY FOR SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS AND OTHERS .......................111-12
6.5 USE OF PREMISES... ............ .......... ........ ............. ......................................... ...... .................. 111-13
6.6 LICENSE AND PATENT FEES, ROYALTIES AND TAXES ................................................... 111-14
6:7 LA W$ AND REGULATIONS....... .................................... .......... ............ ............... .... .............. 111-14
6.8 PERMITS. .:.: ::........................... ................... ........ .................................... .:............................. 111-14
6.9 SAFETY AND PROTECTION ................................................... .... .......................................... 111-14
6.10 EMERGENCiES........... ...... ........................ ............................................................................ 111-15
6.11 DRAWiNGS...... ...................................................................................................................... 111-16
6.11.1 SHOP DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES................................................................................ 111-16
6.11.2 AS-BUlL T ORA WINGS... ............ .......... ........................ ............ ........ ....... ........................ 111-17
6.11.3 CAD STANDARDS ..................... .............. ...................... ........... ... .... ........ ....... ................ 111-18
2.4
2.5
3 .
3.1
3.2
4
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Contrallmprovements Project
Section III
TOC-1
6.11.4 DELIVERABLES: ........ .......... ........... ........... ............ ............ ............. ..... .............. ............. 111-20
6.12 CONTRACTOR'S GENERAL WARRANTY AND GUARANTEE ............................................ 111-20
6.13 CONTINUING THE WORK.............................................................. ....................................... 111-21
6.14 INDEMNIFICATION ......... ............................................................................................... ........ 111-21
7 OTHER WORK.............. ....................................................................................................... ..... 111-22
7 .1 RELATED WORK AT SITE ............. ................. ........................ ....................... ................. ....... 111-22
7 .2 COORDINATION.... ...................................... ............................. ..................................... ........ 111-22
8 OWNERS RESPONSIBILITY ...................... ........ ................ ...................................................... 111-23
9 ENGINEER'S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION .................................................................111-23
9.1 OWNERS REPRESENTATiVE........ .................. ......................... ..... .............. ...... .............. .... 111-23
9.2 CLARIFICATIONS AND INTERPRETATIONS ..................................,.................................... 111-23
9.3 REJECTING OF DEFECTIVE WORK. ............. ............... .................... ........... ............ ............ 111-23
9.4 SHOP DRAWINGS, CHANGE ORDERS, AND PAYMENTS .................................................. 111-24
9.5 DECISIONS ON DiSPUTES.... ............................................................... ................................ 111-24
9.6 LIMITATIONS ON ENGINEER'S RESPONSIBILITIES .......................................................... 111-24
10 CHANGES .IN THE WORK .......,.............................................................~....... ........................... 111-25
11 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRiCE..................................;................................................. 11I-26
11.1 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRiCE................................................................................. 111-26
11.2 ALLOWANCES AND FINAL CONTRACT PRICE ADJUSTMENT .........................................111-26
11.3 UNIT PRICE WORK ............................................................................................................... 111-27
12 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT TIME ...................................................................................... 111-27
13 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS, CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE
WORK..... ............... ......... ............... .......; ...... ... ..... ... ......... .... ......... ......... .............. ..... .... ..... ..... ... 111-28
13.1 TESTS AND INSPECTION ....................................:................................................................ 111-28
13.2 UNCOVERING THE WORK............ ........ ......... ................ .......... ......... .................................... 111-28
13.3 ENGINEER MAY STOP THE WORK ..................................................................................... 111-29
13.4 CORRECTION OR REMOVAL OF DEFECTIVE WORK........................................................ 111-29
13.5 WARRANTY/CORRECTION PERIOD .................OH............................................................... 111-29
13.6 ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK ........................... ..................................................... 111-30
13.7 OWNER MAY CORRECT DEFECTIVE WORK .....................................................................111-30
14 PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION .............................................................. 111-30
14.1 APPLICATION FOR PROGRESSPA YMENT ........................................................................ 111-31
14.2 CONTRACTOR'S WARRANTY OF TITLE ............................................................................. 1I1~31
14.3 REVIEW OF APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENTS ..........................:...................111-31
14.4 PARTIAL UTILIZATION.... .........:....................... ............ ............ ......... ................. .................... 111-32
14.5 FINAL INSPECTION........... ........ ........ ..... ....... ............................ ............ ....... .......... ...... .........; 111-32
14.6 FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT .... ........ ....~.............................................. ................... 111-33
14.7 FINAL PAYMENT AND ACCEPTANCE.. .......... ....... ................ ............ .............. .............. ...... 111-33
14.8 WAIVER OF CLAIMS ................................. ......... ...:......... .................. ...................... .............. 111..34
15 SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION .......................................................................111-34
15.1 OWNER MAY SUSPEND THE WORK................................................................................... 111- 34
15.2 OWNER MAY TERMINA TE........... ......................................................................................... 111-34
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section III
roG-2
II
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.1
I
I
-I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
15.3 CONTRACTOR MAY STOP WORK OR TERMINATE........................................................... 111-35
16 DISPUTE RESOlUTION..... .................. .......... ............... ............ ............................................... 111-35
17 MISCELLANEOUS ... .................. .............. ................................................................................. 111-36
17.1 SUBMITTAL AND DOCUMENT FORMS ...... ............. ........... ..... ................. ..:....... ....... .......... II 1-36
17.2 GIVING NOTICE.. ........................................ ......... ............. ........................................ ............. 111-36
17.3 NOTICE OF CLAIM ........ ............................ ......................... ................................................... 111-36
17.4 PROFESSIONAL FEES AND COURT COSTS INClUDED................................................... 111-36
17.5 ASSIGNMENT OF CONTRACT.. ...... ...................... ........................ ..... ............................. ..... 111-36
17.6 RENEWAL OPTION.... ............. ......................... ................ ................................... .......... ........ 111-36
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Contrallmprovements Project
Section III
TOC-3
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Contrallmprovements Project
Section III
TOC-4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1 DEFINITIONS
Addenda
Written or graphic instruments issued prior to the opening of Bids which clarify, correct or change
the Bidding Requirements or the contract documents.
Agreement
The written contract between OWNER and CONTRACTOR covering the Work to be performed;
other Contract Documents are attached to the Agreement and made a part thereof as provided
therein.
Application for Payment
The form accepted by ENGINEER which is to be used by CONTRACTOR in requesting progress
or final payments and which is to be accompanied by such supporting documentation as is
required by the Contract Documents.
Approve
The word approve is defined to mean satisfactory review of the material, equipment or methods for
general compliance with the design concepts and with the information given in the Contract
Documents. It does not imply a responsibility on the part of the Engineer to verify in every detail
conformance with the Drawings and Specifications.
Bid
The offer or proposal of the bidder submitted on the prescribed form setting forth the prices for the
work to be performed.
Bidding Documents
The advertisement or invitation to Bid, instructions to bidders, the Bid form, and the proposed
Contact Documents (including all Addenda issued prior to receipt of Bids).
Bonds
Performance and payment bonds and other instruments of security.
Change Order
A written order to Contractor signed by Owner and Contractor authorizing an addition, deletion or
revision in the Work, or an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Time issued on or after
the effective date of the Agreement. .
City
The City of Clearwater, Florida.
Contract Documents
The Agreement, Addenda (which pertain to the Contract Documents), Contractor's Bid (including
documentation accompanying the bid and any post-Bid documentation submitted prior to the
execution of the Agreement) when attached as an exhibit to the Agreement, the Bonds,
Instructions to Bidders, these General Conditions, any Supplementary Conditions, the
Specifications and the Drawings, any other exhibits identified in the Agreement, together with all
Modifications issued after the execution of the Agreement. .
Contract Price
The Contract price constitutes the total compensation (subject to authorized adjustments) payable
by Owner to Contractor for performing the Work.
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section III
111-1
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section 1/1
1/1-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Contract Time
The number of days or the date stated in the Agreement for the completion of the Work. .
Contractor
The Person with whom the Owner has entered into the Agreement.
Day
Liens
Liens, charges, security interests or encumbrances upon real property or personal property.
Milestone
A principal event specified in the contract Documents relating to an intermediate completion date or
time prior to the final completion date.
Notice to Proceed
A written notice given by the Owner to the Contractor fixing the date on which the Cont~actTime
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
will commence to run and on which Contractor shall start to perform his obligations under the
Contract Documents.
Owner
The City of Clearwater, Florida
Person
A natural person or a corporation. partnership. firm, organization, or other artificial entity.
Project
The total construction of which the Work to be provided under the Contract Documents may be the
whole or a part as indicated elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
Partial Utilization
Use by Owner of a substantially completed part of the Work for the purpose for which is intended
(or a related purpose) prior to Final Completion of all the Work.
Shop Drawing
All drawings, diagrams. illustrations. schedules and other data which are specifically prepared by or for
Contractor to illustrate some portion of the Work and all illustrations. brochures. standard schedules.
performance charts, instructions, diagrams and other information prepared by a supplier and submitted by
Contractor to illustrate material or equipment for some portion of the Work.
Specifications
Those portions of the Contract Documents consisting of written technical descriptions of materials,
equipment, construction systems, standards and workmanship as applied to the Work and certain
administrative details applicable thereto.
Subcontractor
A person having a direct contract with Contractor or with any other Subcontractor for the
performance of a part of the Work at the site.
Substantial Completion
The Work (or a specified part thereon which has progressed to the point where, in the opinion of
Engineer. as evidenced by Engineer's definitive certificate of Substantial Completion. it is
sufficiently complete, in accordance with the Contract documents, so that the Work (or specified
part) can be utilized for the purposes for which it is intended; or if no such certificate is issued,
when the Work is complete and ready for final payment as evidenced by the Engineer's
recommendation of final payment. The terms "substantially complete" and "substantially
completed" as applied to all or part of the Work refer to Substantial Completion thereof.
Supplementary Conditions
The part of the Contract which amends or supplements these General Conditions.
Supplier
A manufacturer, fabricator. supplier. distributor. materialman or vendor having a direct contract with
Contractor or with any Subcontractor to furnish materials or equipment to be incorporated in the
Work by the Contractor.
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities.Odor Contrallmprovements Project
Section III
111-3
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Contrallmprovements Project
Section III
111.4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Underground Facilities
All pipelines, conduits, ducts, cables, wires manholes, vaults, tanks, tunnels or other such facilities
or attachments, and any encasements containing such facilities which have been installed
underground to furnish any of the following services or materials: electricity, gases, steam, liquid
petroleum products, telephone or other communications, cable television, sewage and drainage
removal or treatment, traffic or other control systems or water.
Unit Price Work
Work to be paid for on the basis of unit prices.
Work
The entire completed construction or the various separately identifiable parts thereof required to be
furnished under the Contract Documents. Work includes and is the result of performing or
furnishing labor and incorporating materials and equipment into the construction, and performing or
furnishing services and furnishing documents, all as required by the Contract Documents.
Work Change Directive
A written directive to Contractor, issued on or after the Effective Date of the Agreement and signed
by the Engineer, ordering ah addition, deletion, or revision in the Work, or responding to differing or
unforeseen physical conditions under which the Work is to be performed or emergencies. Work
Change Directive will not change the Contract Price or Contract Time, but is evidence that the
parties expect that the change directed or documented by a Work Change Directive will be
incorporated in a subsequently issued Change Order following negotiations by the parties as to its
effect, if any, on the Contract Price or Contract Times.
2 PRELIMINARY MATTERS
2.1 DELIVERY OF BONDS AND CERTIFICATES OF INSURANCE
When Contractor delivers the executed Agreements to Owner, Contractor shall also deliver to Owner such
Bonds and Certificates of Insurance as Contractor may be required to furnish by this contract.
2.2 COPIES OF DOCUMENTS
Engineer shall furnish to Contractor four copies of Contract Documents for execution. Additional copies will
be furnished, upon request, at the cost of reproduction.
2.3 COMMENCEMENT OF CONTRACT TIME/NOTICE TO PROCEED; STARTING
THE PROJECT
The Contract Time will commence on the day indicated in the Notice to Proceed. Contractor shall start to
perform the work on the date the Contract Time commences to run. No work shall be done at the site prior
to the date which the Contact Time commences to run.
2.4 BEFORE 5T ARTING CONSTRUCTION
Before undertaking each part of the Work, Contractor shall carefully study and compare the Contract
Documents and check and verify pertinent figures shown thereon and all applicable field measurements.
Contractor shall promptly report in writing to Engineer any conflict, error or discrepancy which Contractor
may discover; and shall obtain a written interpretation or clarification from Engineer before proceeding with
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
any work effected thereby; however, Contractor shall not be liable to Owner for failure to report any conflict,
error or discrepancy in the Drawings or Specifications, unless Contractor had actual knowledge thereof or
should reasonably have known thereof. .
No verbal agreement or conversation with any officer, agent or employee of Owner or Engineer, either
before or after the execution of this Contract, shall affect or modify any of the terms or obligations herein
contained, Contractor shall not commence any work at any time without approved insurance required by
these General Conditions. Failure to obtain this insurance will be the sole responsibility of the Contractor.
2.5 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE
Within twenty days of Award of Contract and before the start of the Work, the Engineer may schedule a
conference to be attended by Contractor, Engineer and otherS as appropriate to establish a working
understanding among the parties as to the Work and to discuss the schedule of the Work and general
Contract procedures.
3 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, INTENT
3.1 INTENT
The Contract Documents comprise the entire Agreement between the Owner and the Contractor
concerning the Work. They may be altered only by written agreement. The Contract Documents are
complementary; what is called for by one is as binding as if called for by all. It is the intent of the Contract
Documents to describe a functionally complete project (or part thereof) to be constructed in accordance
with the Contract Documents. Any Work, materials or equipment which may reasonably be inferred from
the Contract Documents or from prevailing custom or from trade usage as being required to produce the
intended result will be furnished and performed whether or not specifically called for. When words or
phrases, which have a well-known technical or construction industry or trade meaning, are used to describe
Work, materials or equipment, such words or phrases shall be interpreted in accordance with that meaning.
Clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents shall be issued by the Engineer. Reference to
standards, specifications, manuals or codes of any technical society, organization or association, or to the
code, Laws or Regulation of any governmental authority, whether such reference be specific or by
implication, shall mean the latest standard specification, manual or code, or Laws or Regulations in effect at
the time of opening of Bids except as may be otherwise specifically stated in the Contract Documents.
However, no provision of any referenced standard specification, manual or code (whether or not specially
incorporated by reference in the responsibilities of Owner or Contractor as set forth in the Contract
Documents) shall change the duties and responsibilities of Owner, Contractor or Engineer, or any of their
agents or employees from those set forth in the Contract Documents. Clarifications and interpretations of
the Contract shall be issued by Engineer. Each and every provision of law and clause required by law to be
inserted in these Contract documents shall be deemed to be inserted herein, and they shall be read and
enforced as through it were included herein, and if through mistake or otherwise, any such provision is not
inserted, or if not correctly inserted, then upon the application of either party, the Contract Documents shall
forthwith be physically amended to make such insertion.
The various Contract Documents shall be given precedence, in case of conflict, error or discrepancy, as
follows: Modifications, Contract Agreement, Addenda, Supplementary Conditions, General Conditions,
Drawings, Technical Specifications. In a series of Modifications or Addenda the latest will govern.
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section III
111-5
3.2 REPORTING AND RESOLVING-DISCREPANCIES
If, during the performance of the Work, Contractor discovers any conflict, error, ambiguity or discrepancy
within the Contract Documents or between the Contract Documents and any provision of any such Law or
Regulation applicable to the performance of the Work or of any such standard, specification, manual or
code or of any instruction of any Supplier, Contractor shall report it to the Engineer in writing at once, and
Contractor shall not proceed with the Work affected thereby (except in an emergency) until an amendment
or supplement to Contract Documents has been issued by one of the methods provided in these General
Specifications, provided however, that Contractor shall not be liable to Owner or Engineer for failure to
report any such conflict, error, ambiguity or discrepancy unless Contractor knew or reasonably should have
known thereof.
4 AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS;
REFERENCE POINTS
4.1 AVAILABILITY OF LANDS
Owner shall furnish, as indicated in the Contract Documents, the lands upon which the Work is to be
Performed, rights-of-way, easements for access thereto, and such other lands which are designated for the
use of contractor. Owner shall identify any encumbrances or restrictions not of general application but
specifically related to use of lands so furnished with which contractor will have to comply in performing the
Work. Easements for permanent structures or permanent changes in existing facilities will be obtained and
paid for by Owner, unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents.
4.2 INVESTIGA liONS AND REPORTS
Reference is made to the Supplementary Conditions and Technical Specifications for identification of those
reports of investigations and tests of subsurface and latent physical conditions at the site or otherwise
affecting cost, progress or performance of the Work which have been relied upon by Engineer in
preparation of the Drawings and Specifications. Such reports are not guaranteed as to accuracy or
completeness and are not part of the Contract Documents. Contractor shall promptly notify Engineer in
writing of any subsurface or latent physical conditions at the site, or in an existing structure, differing
materially from those indicated or referred to in the Contract Documents. Engineer will promptly review
those conditions and advise if further investigation or tests are necessary. Owner or Engineer shall obtain
the necessary additional investigations and tests and furnish copies to the Engineer and Contractor. If
Engineer finds that the results of such investigations or tests indicate that there are subsurface. or latent
physical conditions, which differ materially from those, indicated in the contract Documents, and which
could not reasonably have been anticipated by Contractor, a work change or Change Order will be issued
incorporating the necessary revisions.
4.3 PHYSICAL CONDITIONS, UNDERGROUND FACILITIES
The information and data shown or indicated in the Contract Documents with respect to existing
Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the site is based on information and data furnished to Owner or
Engineer by the owners of such Underground Facilities or by others. Unless otherwise expressly provided
in the Contract Documents; Owner and Engineer shall not be responsible for the accuracy or completeness
of any such information or data; and the cost of all the following will be included in the Contract Price and
Contractor shall have full responsibility for: (i) reviewing and checking all such information and data, (ii)
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section 11/
111.6
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
~I
I
I
I
I
I-
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
locating all Underground Facilities shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, (iii) coordination of the
Work with the owners of such Underground Facilities during construction, and (iv) the safety and protection
of all such Underground Facilities and repairing any damage thereto resulting from the Work. The
Contractor is required to call the LOCAL PUBLIC UTILITY NOTIFICATION CENTER prior to any
excavation per State regulations and to notify any utility owners who are not a member of the LOCAL
PUBLIC UTILITY NOTIFICATION CENTER prior to any excavation. The LOCAL PUBLIC UTILITY
. NOTIFICATION CENTER is an agency for the protection and location of utilities prior to any excavation
and contact number is available in local telephone directory.
4.4 REFERENCE POINTS
Engineer shall. provide engineering surveys to establish reference points for construction, which in
Engineer's judgment are necessary to enable Contractor to proceed with the Work. Contractor shall be
responsible for laying out the Work, shall protect and preserve the established reference points and shall
make no changes or relocations without the prior written approval of Owner. Contractor shall report to
Engineer whenever any reference point is lost or destroyed or requires relocation because of necessary
changes in grades or locations, and shall be responsible for the accurate replacement or relocation of such
reference points by professionally qualified personnel. The Contractor is referred to the Technical
Specifications for more specific information regarding the provision of construction surveys. Excessive
stake replacement caused by negligence of Contractor's forces, atter initial line and grade have been set,
as determined by the Engineer, will be charged to the Contractor at the rate of $100.00 per hour. Time shall
be computed for actual time on the project. All time shall be computed in one-hour increments with a
minimum charge of one hour.
5 BONDS AND INSURANCE
5.1 PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND/CONTRACT BOND
Contractor shall furnish a Performance Bond and Payment Bond, each in an amount at least equal to the
Contract Price as security for the faithful performance and payment of all Contractor's obligations under the
Contract Documents. These bonds shall remain in effect at least one year after the date when final
payment becomes due, unless a longer period of time is prescribed by laws and regulations or by the
Contract Documents. Contractor shall also furnish such other Bonds as are required by the Supplementary
Conditions. All Bonds shall be in the form prescribed by the Contract Documents and shall be executed by
such sureties as are named in the current list of "Companies Holding Certificates of Authority as Acceptable
Sureties on Federal Bonds and as Acceptable Reinsuring Companies" as published in Circular 570
(amended) by the Audit Staff, Bureau of Government Financial Operations, U.S. Treasury Department. All
bonds signed by an agent must be accompanied by a certified copy of such agents' authority to act. All
bonds shall be deemed to contain all of the Conditions of Section 255.05, Florida Statutes, even if such
language is not directly contained within the bond and the Surety shall be licensed and qualified to do
business in the State of Florida. The Owner reserves the right to reject any surety. If the Surety on any
Bond furnished by the Contractor is declared bankrupt or becomes insolvent or its right to do business is
terminated in any state where any part of the Project is located or it ceases to meet the requirements of
these Contract Documents, the Contractor shall within five days after notice thereof substitute another
Bond and surety, both of which must be acceptable to the Owner.
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Contro, Improvements Project
Section'"
"'-7
5.2 INSURANCE
Contractor shall purchase and maintain such liability and other insurance as is appropriate for the Work
being performed and fumished and as will provide protection from claims set forth below which may arise
out of or result from Contracto~s performance and furnishing of the Work and Contracto~s other obligations
under the Contract Documents, whether it is to be performed or fumished by Contractor, and Subcontractor
or Supplier, or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform or furnish any of the
Work, or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable for the following: (i) Claims under worke~s
compensation, disability benefits and other similar employee benefit acts; (ii) Claims for damages because
of bodily injury, occupational sickness or disease, or death of Contracto~s employees; (iii) Claims for
damages because of bodily injury, sickness or disease, or death of any person other than Contractor's
employees; (iv) Claims for damages insured by customary personal injury liability coverage which are
sustained by any person as a result of an offense directly or indirectly related to the employment of such
person by Contractor, or by any other person for any other reason; (v) Claims for damages, other than to
the Work itself, because of injury to or destruction of tangible property wherever located, including loss of
use resulting therefrom; and (vi) Claims for damages because of bodily injury or death of any person or
property damage arising out of the ownership, maintenance or use of any motor vehicle. The Contractor
shall deliver to Owner, with copies to each additional insured identified in the Supplementary Conditions,
certificates of insurance (and other evidence of insurance requested by Owner or any other additional
insured) which Contractor is required to purchase and maintain in accordance with this paragraph. The
policies of insurance so required by this paragraph to be purchased and maintained shall: (i) include as
additional insured (subject to any customary exclusion in respect of professional liability) City of Clearwater
and any other persons or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions, all of whom shall be listed as
additional insured, and include coverage for the respective officers and employees of all such additional
insures; (ii) include completed operations insurance; (iii) include contractual liability insurance covering
Contractor's indemnity obligations in Article for Contracto~s Responsibilities; (iv) contain a provision or
endorsement that the coverage afforded will not be canceled, materially changed or renewal refused until at
least thirty days prior written notice has been given to the Owner, and Contractor and to each other
additional insured identified in the Supplemental Conditions to whom a certificate of insurance has been
issued (and the certificates of insurance furnished by the Contractor as described in this paragraph); (v)
remain in effect at least until final payment and at all times thereafter when Contractor may be correcting,
removing or replacing defective Work in accordance with Article for Correction of Defective Work; (vi) with
respect to completed operations insurance, and any insurance coverage written on a claims-made basis,
shall remain in effect for at least two years after final payment. Contractor shall furnish Owner and each .
other additional insured identified in the Supplementary Conditions to whom a certificate of insurance has
been issued evidence satisfactory to Owner and any such additional insured, of continuation of such
insurance at final payment and one year thereafter and (vii) Name and telephone number of the authorized
insurance agent for the Insurer.
The limits of liability for the insurance required shall provide coverage for not less than the following
amounts or greater where required by laws and regulations:
5.2.1 WORKER'S COMPENSA liON INSURANCE
Contract Award Amount Contract AWard Amount
Under $1,000,000. $1,000,000. and Over
(1) Workers' Compensation Statutory Statutory
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Faci/ities
Odor Contra/Improvements Project
Section III
111..8
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
(2) Employer's Liability
$500,000.
$1,000,000.
5.2.2 PUBLIC LIABILITY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE COVERAGE
Comprehensive General Liability including Premise/Operations; Explosion, Collapse and Underground
Property Damage; Products/Completed Operations, Broad Form Contractual, Independent Contractors;
Broad Form Property Damage; and Personal Injury liabilities:
Contract Award Amount Contract Award Amount
Under $1,000,000. $1,000,000. and Over
(1) Bodily Injury: $500,000. Each Occurrence $1,000,000. Each Occurrence
$1,000,000. Annual $1,000,000. Annual Aggregate
Aggregate
(2) Property Damage: $500,000. Each Occurrence $1,000,000. Each Occurrence
$1,000,000. Annual $1,000,000. Annual Aggregate
Aggregate
(3) Personal Injury, with $1,000,000. Annual $1,000,000. Annual Aggregate
employment exclusion deleted Aggregate
Marshall Street and Norlheast WPC Facilities
Odor Contrallmprovements Project
Section III
111-9
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Contrallmprovements Project
Section III
111-10
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
5.2.3 COMPREHENSIVE AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY
including all owned (private and others), hired and non-owned vehicles:
Contract Award Amount Contract Award Amount
Under $1,000,000. $1,000,000. and Over
.
(1) Bodily Injury $500,000. Each Person $1,000,000. Each Person
$500,000. Each Accident $1,000,000. Each Accident
(2) Property Damage $500,000. Each Occurrence $1,000,000. Each Occurrence
Receipt and acceptance by the Owner of the Contractor's Certificate of Insurance, or other similar
document does not constitute acceptance or approval of amounts or types of coverages, which may be less
than required by these Contract Documents. Owner shall not be responsible for purchasing and
maintaining any property insurance to protect. the interests of Contractor, Subcontractors or others in the
Work. The Owner may at its option require a copy of the Contractor's Insurance Policy(s). All insurance
policies required within this Contract Document shall provide full coverage from the first dollar of exposure
unless otherwise stipulated. No deductibles will be accepted without prior approval from the Owner.
Lon~shore and Harbor Worker's Compensation Act: Section 32 of the Act, 33 U.S.C. 932, requires an
employer, with employees in maritime employment, to secure the payment of benefits under the Act either
by insuring with an insurance carrier authorized by the U.S. Department of Labor, or to be authorized by the
U.S. Department of Labor as a self-insurer.
For General Contractors: Section 4(a) of the Act provides that every employer shall be liable for and shall
secure the payment to his employees of the compensation payable under Sections 7, 8, and 9 of the Act. In
the case of an employer who is a subcontractor, only if such subcontractor fails to secure the payment of
compensation shall the contractor be liable for and be required to secure the payment of compensation.
5.3 WAIVER OF RIGHTS
Owner and Contractor intend that all policies purchased in accordance with Article on Insurance will protect
Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants and all other persons or entities
identified in the Supplementary Conditions to be listed as insured or additional insured in such policies and
will provide primary coverage for all losses and damages caused by the perils covered thereby. All such
policies shall contain provisions to the effect that in the event of payment of any loss or damage the
insurers will have no rights of recovery against any of the insured or additional insured thereunder, Owner
and Contractorwaive all rights against each other and their respective officers, directors, employees and
agents for all losses and damages caused by, arising out of or resulting from any of the perils covered by
such policies and any other property insurance applicable to the work; and, in addition, waive all such rights
against Sub-contractors, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants and all other persons or entities identified in the
Supplementary Conditions to be listed as insured or additional insured under such policies for losses and
damages so caused. None of the above waivers shall extend to the rights that any party making such
waiver may have to the proceeds of insurance otherwise payable under any policy so issued. In addition,
Owner waives all rights against Contractor, Subcontractors, Engineer, Engineer's Consultant and the
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
officers, directors, employees and agents of any of them for: (i) loss due to business interruption, loss of
use or other consequential loss extending beyond direct physical loss or damage to Owner's property or the
Work caused by, arising out of or resulting from fire or other peril, whether or not insured by Owner and; (ii)
loss or damage to the completed Project or part thereof caused by, arising out of or resulting from fire or
other insured peril covered by any property insurance maintained on the completed Project or part thereof
by Owner during partial utilization, after substantial completion or after final payment.
6 CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITIES
6.1 SUPERVISION AND SUPERINTENDENCE
Contractor shall supervise, inspect and direct the Work competently and efficiently, devoting such attention
thereto and applying such skills and expertise as may be necessary to perform the. Work in accordance
with the Contract Documents. Contractor shall be solely responsible for the means, methods, techniques,
sequences and procedures of construction, but Contractor shall not be responsible for the negligence of
others in the design or specification of a specific means, method, technique, sequence or procedure of
construction which is shown or indicated in and expressly required by the Contract Documents.
Contractor shall be responsible to see that the completed work complies accurately with the Contract
Documents. Contractor shall keep on the work at all times during its progress a competent resident
superintendent, who shall not be replaced without notice to Owner and Engineer except under
extraordinary circumstances. The superintendent will be Contractor's representative at the site and shall
have authority to act on behalf of Contractor. All communications to the superintendent shall be as binding
as if given to Contractor.
Contractor shall employ only competent perso.ns to do the work and whenever Engineer shall notify
Contractor, in writing, that any person on the work appears to be incompetent, unfaithful, disorderly, or
otherwise unsatisfactory, such person shall be removed from the project and shall not again be employed
on it except with the written consent of Engineer.
Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for additional engineering and inspection costs incurred as a result of
overtime work in excess of the regular working hours or on the Owner's normally approved holidays. At
Owner's option, overtime costs may either be deducted from the Contractor's monthly payment request or
deducted from the Contractor's retention prior to release of final payment or the Engineer may elect to
receive a monthly check from the Contractor in the amount of the overtime costs. Minimum number of
chargeable hours for inspection costs on weekends or holidays shall be four hours. The cost of overtime
inspection per hour shall be $40.00 per hour.
Contractor shall provide and maintain in a neat and sanitary condition, such sanitary accommodations for
the use of Contractor's employees as may be necessary to comply with the requirements of Laws and
Regulations and the Engineer.
6.2 LABOR, MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
Contractor shall provide competent, suitably qualified personnel to survey, layout and construct the work
as required by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall at all times maintain good discipline and order at
the site. Except as otherwise required for the safety or protection of persons or the work or property at the
site or adjacent thereto, and except as otherwise indicated in the Contract Documents, all work at the site
shall be performed during regular working hours and Contractor will not permit overtime work or the
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section III
111-11
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section III
111-12
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
performance of work on Saturday, Sunday, or any legal holiday without Owner's consent given after prior
notice to Engineer.
Unless otherwise specified in the General Requirements, Contractor shall furnish and assume full
responsibility for all materials, equipment, labor, transportation, construction equipment and machinery,
tools, appliances, fuel, power, light, heat, telephone, water, sanitary facilities, temporary facilities, and all
other facilities and incidentals necessary for' the furnishing, performance, testing, start-up and completion of
the Work.
All materials and equipment installed in the Work shall be of good quality and new, except as otherwise
provided in the Contract Documents. If required by Engineer, Contractors shall furnish satisfactory
evidence (including reports of required tests) as to the quality of materials and equipment. The Contractor
shall provide suitable and secure storage for all materials to be used in the Work so that their quality shall
not be impaired or injured. Materials that are improperly stored, may be rejected by the Engineer without
testing.
All materials and equipment shall be applied, installed, connected, erected, used, cleaned and conditioned
in accordance with the instructions of the applicable manufacturer, fabricator, supplier, or distributor, except
as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents.
6.3 SUBSTITUTES AND "OREQUAL" ITEMS
Whenever an item of material or equipment is specified or described in the Contract Documents by using
the name of a proprietary item or the name of a particular Supplier, the specification or description is
intended to establish the type, function and quality required. Unless the specification or description contains
or is followed by words reading that no like, equivalent or "or equal" item or no substitution is permitted,
other items of material or equipment or material or equipment of other Suppliers may be accepted by
Engineer. If in Engineer's sole discretion an item of material or equipment proposed by Contractor is
functionally equal to that named and sufficiently similar so that no change in related Work will be required, it
may be considered by Engineer for approval. If in the Engineer's sole discretion an item of material or
equipment proposed by Contractor does not qualify as an "or equal" item, it may be considered as a
proposed substitute item. Contractor shall submit sufficient information as required by the Engineer to allow
the Engineer to determine that the item of material or equipment proposed is essentially equivalent to that
named and is an acceptable substitute therefore. Request for review of proposed substitute and "or equal"
will be not be accepted by Engineer from anyone other than Contractor.
Request for substitute and "or equal" items by Contractor must be submitted in writing to Engineer and will
contain all information as Engineer deems necessary to make a determination. All data provided by
Contractor in support of any proposed substitute or "or equal" item will be at Contractor's expense.
Engineer will be allowed a reasonable time to evaluate each proposal or submittal made per this
paragraph. Engineer will be sole judge of acceptability.
6.4 RESPONSIBILITY FOR SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS AND OTHERS
Contractor shall be fully responsible to Owner and Engineer for all acts and omissions of the
Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons performing or furnishing any of the work under a direct or
indirect contract with Contractor just as Contractor is responsible for Contractor's own acts and omissions.
Nothing in the Contract Documents shall create for the benefit of any such Subcontractor, Supplier or other
person any contractual relationship between Owner or Engineer and any Subcontractor, Supplier or other
person, nor shall it create any obligation on the part of Owner or Engineer to payor to see to the payment
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
of any moneys due any such Subcontractor, Supplier or other person. Contractor shall be solely
responsible for scheduling and coordinating the work of Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons
performing or furnishing any of the work under a direct or indirect contract with Contractor. Contractor shall
require all Subcontractors, Suppliers and such other persons performing or furnishing any of the work to
communicate with the Engineer through Contractor.
The divisions and sections of the Specifications and the identifications of any Drawings shall not control
Contractor in dividing the work among Subcontractors or Suppliers or delineating the work to be performed
by any specific trade.
All work performed for Contractor by a Subcontractor or Supplier will be pursuant to an appropriate
agreement between Contractor and the Subcontractor or Supplier which specifically binds the
Subcontractor or Supplier to the applicable terms and conditions of the Contract Documents for the benefit
of Owner and Engineer.
Contractor shall not payor employ any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or organization whether
initially or as a substitute, against whom Owner or Engineer may have reasonable objection. Contractor
shall not be required to employ any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or organization to furnish or
perform any of the work against whom Contractor has reasonable objection.
Owner or Engineer will not undertake to settle any differences between Contractor and his Subcontractors
or between Subcontractors.
6.5 USE OF PREMISES
Contractor shall confine construction equipment, the storage of materials and equipment and the
operations of works to the site and land areas identified in and permitted by the Contract Documents on
other land areas permitted by Laws and Regulations, right-of-way, permits and easements, and shall not
unreasonably encumber the premises with construction equipment or other materials or equipment.
Contractor shall assume full responsibility for any damage to any such land or area, or to the owner or
occupant thereof or of any adjacent land or areas, resulting from the performance of the Work. Should any
claim be made by any such owner or occupant because of the performance of the Work, Contractor shall
promptly settle with such other party by negotiation or otherwise resolve the claim by arbitration or other
dispute resolution proceed in or at law. Contractor shall, to the fullest extent permitted by Laws and
Regulations, indemnify and hold harmless Owner, Engineer, Engineer's Consultant and their officials,
directors, employees and agents from and against all claims, costs, losses and damages arising out of or
resulting from any claim or action, legal or equitable, brought by any such owner or occupant against
Owner, Engineer or any other party indemnified hereunder to the extent caused by or based upon
Contractor's performance of the Work.
During the progress of the Work, Contractor shall keep the premises free from accumulations of waste
materials, rubbish and other debris resulting from the Work. At the completion of the Work or at intervals
established by the Engineer, Contractor shall remove all waste materials, rubbish and debris from and
about the premises as well as all tools, appliances, construction equipment and machinery and surplus
materials. Contractor shall restore to original condition all property not designated for alteration by the
Contract Documents.
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
odor Control Improvements Project
Section //I
111.13
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Contrallmprovements Project
Section III
111-14
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
6.6 LICENSE AND PATENT FEES, ROYALTIES AND TAXES
Contractor shall pay all license fees and royalties and assume all costs incident to the use in the
performance of the work or the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product or
device which is the subject of patent rights or copyrights held by others. If a particular invention, design,
process, product or device is specified in the Contract Documents for use in the performance of the work
and if to the actual knowledge of Owner or Engineer its use is subject to patent rights or copyrights calling
for the payment of any license fee or royalty to others, the existence of such rights shall be disclosed by
Owner in the Contract Documents.
To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless
Owner, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants and the officers, directors, employees, agents and other
consultants of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses and damages arising out of
or resulting from any infringement of patent rights or copyrights incident to the use in the performance of
the Work or resulting from the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product or
device not specified in the Contract Documents, and shall defend all such claims in connection with any
alleged infringement of such rights.
Contractor shall pay all sales, consumer, use and other taxes required to be paid by Contractor in
accordance with the Laws and Regulations of the State of Florida and other governmental agencies, which
are applicable during the performance of the work.
6.7 LAWS AND REGULATIONS
Contractor shall give all notices and comply with all Laws and Regulations applicable to furnishing and
performance of the Work. Except where otherwise expressly required by applicable Laws and Regulations,
neither Owner nor Engineer shall be responsible for monitoring Contractor's compliance with any Laws or
Regulations. If Contractor performs any work knowing or having reason to know that it is contrary to Laws
or Regulations, Contractor shall bear all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by or arising out of
such work: however, it shall not be Contractor's primary responsibility to make certain that the
Specifications and Drawings are in accordance with Laws and Regulations, but this shall not relieve
Contractor of Contractor's obligations to Owner to report and resolve discrepancies as described above.
6.8 PERMITS
Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, Contractor shall obtain and pay for all
construction permits and licenses. Owner shall assist Contractor, when necessary, in obtaining such
permits and licenses. Contractor shall pay all governmental charges and inspection fees necessary for the
prosecution of the Work, which are applicable at the time of opening of Bids. Contractor shall pay all
charges of utility owners for connections to the work, and Owner shall pay all charges of such utility owners
for capital costs related theretc:> such as plant investment fees.
Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, City of Clearwater Building Permit Fees will be waived.
6.9 SAFETY AND PROTECTION
Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precautions and
programs in connection with the Work. Contractor shall take all necessary precautions for the safety of, and
shall provide the necessary protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to: (i) all persons on the work site
or who may be affected by the work, (ii) all the Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
therein, whether in storage on or off the site;, and (iii) other property at the site or adjacent thereto,
including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures, utilities and Underground Facilities
not designated for removal, relocation or replacement in the course of construction. In the event of
temporary suspension of the work, or during inclement weather, or whenever Engineer may direct;
Contractor shall, and. shall cause Subcontractors, to protect carefully the Work and materials against
damage or injury from the weather. If, in the opinion of Engineer, any portion of Work or materials shall
have been damaged or injured by reason of failure on the part of the Contractor or any Subcontractors to
so protect the Work, such Work and materials shall be removed and replaced at the expense of Contractor.
The Contractor shall initiate and maintain an accident prevention program which shall include, but shall not
be limited to the establishment and supervision of programs for the education and training of employees in
the recognition, avoidance and prevention of unsafe conditions and acts. Contractor shall provide first aid
services and medical care to his employees. The Contractor shall develop and maintain an effective fire
protection and prevention program and good housekeeping practices at the site of contract performance
throughout all phases of construction, repair, alteration or demolition. Contractor shall require appropriate
personal protective. equipment in all operations where there is exposure to hazardous conditions. The
Engineer may order that the work stop if a condition of immediate danger to Owne~s employees,
equipment or if property damage exists. This provision shall not shift responsibility or risk of loss for injuries
of damage sustained from the Contractor to the Owner, and the Contractor shall remain solely responsible
for compliance with all safety requirements and for the safety of all persons and property at the site of
Contract performance. The Contractor shall instruct his employees required to handle or use toxic materials
or other harmful substances regarding their safe handling and use. The Contractor shall take the necessary
precautions to protect pedestrians and motorists from harm, and to prevent disruptions of such traffic due to
construction activity.
Contractor shall comply with all applicable Laws and Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction for
safety of persons or property and to protect them from damage, injury or loss; and shall erect and maintain
all necessary safeguards for such safety and protection. Contractor shall notify owners of adjacent property
and of Underground Facilities and utility owners when prosecution of the work may affect them, and shall
cooperate with them in the protection, removal, relocation and replacement of their property. All damage,
injury or loss to any property caused, directly or indirectly, in whole or part, by Contractor, any
Subcontractor, Supplier or any other person or organization directly or indirectly employed by any of them
to perform or furnish any of the work or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, shall be
remedied by Contractor. Contractor's duties and responsibilities for safety and for protection of the Work
shall continue until such time as all the Work is completed and Engineer has issued a notice to Owner and
Contractor that the Work is acceptable.
6.10 EMERGENCIES
In emergencies affecting the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at the site or adjacent
thereto, Contractor, with or without special instruction or authorization from Owner or Engineer, is obligated
to act to prevent damage, injury or loss. Contractor shall give Engineer prompt written notice if Contractor
believes that any significant changes in the Work or variations from the Contract Documents have been
caused thereby. If Engineer determines that a change in the Contract Documents is required because of
the action taken by Contractor in response to such an emergency, a Work Change Directive or Change
Order will be issued to document the consequences of such action.
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section III
111-15
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section III
111-16
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
6.11 DRAWINGS
6.11.1 SHOP DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES
Contractor shall submit Shop Dr,awings to Engineer for review and approval as called for in Ule Technical
Specifications or required by the Engineer. The data shown on the Shop Drawings will be complete with
respect to quantities, dimensions, specified performance and design criteria, materials and similar data to
show Engineer the materials and equipment Contractor proposes to provide and to enable Engineer to
review the information. Contractor shall also submit Samples to Engineer for review and approval. Before
submitting each Shop Drawing or Sample, Contractor shall have determined and verified: (i) all field
measurements, quantities, dimensions, specified performance criteria, installation requirements, materials,
catalog numbers and similar information with respect thereto, (ii) all materials with respect to intended use,
. fabrication, shipping, handling, storage, assembly and installation pertaining to the performance of the
Work, and (iii) all information relative to Contractor's sole responsibilities in respect to means, methods,
techniques, sequences and procedures of construction and safety precautions and programs incident
thereto. Contractor shall also have reviewed and coordinated each Shop Drawing or Sample with other
Shop Drawings and Samples with the requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents. Each
submittal will bear a stamp or specific written indication that Contractor has satisfied Contractor's
obligations under the Contract Documents with respect to Contractor's review and approval of that
submittal. At the time ofsubmissiorl, ContractbrshallgiveEngineer specific written notice of such
variations, if any, that the Shop Drawing or Sample submitted may have from the requirements of the
Contract Documents, such notice to be in a written communication separate from the submittal; and, in
addition, shall cause a specific notation to be made on each Shop Drawing and Sample submitted to
Engineer for review and approval of .each such variation.
Engineer's review and approval of Shop Drawings and Samples will be only to determine if the items
covered by the submittals will, after installation or incorporation in the Work, conform to the information
given in the Contract Documents and be compatible with the design concept of the completed Project as a
functioning whole as indicated the Contract Documents. Engineer's review and approval will not extend to
means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction (except where a particular means
method, technique, sequence or procedure of construction is specifically and expressly called for by the
Contract Documents) or to safety precautions or programs incident thereto. The review and approval of a
separate item as such will not indicate approval of the assembly in which the item functions. Contractor
shall make corrections required by Engineer, and shall return the required number of corrected copies of
Shop Drawings and submit as required new Samples for review and approval. Contractor shall direct
specific attention in writing to revisions other than the corrections called for by Engineer on previous
submittals.
Engineer's review and approval of Shop Drawings or Samples shall not relieve Contractor from
responsibility for any variation from the requirements of the Contract Docum~nts unless. Contractor has in
writing called Engineer's attention to each such variation at the time of submission and Engineer has given
written approval of each such variation by specific written notation thereof incorporated in or accompanying
the Shop Drawing or Sample approval; nor will any approval by the Engineer relieve the Contractor from
responsibility for complying with the requirements of paragraph above discussing field measurements by
the Contractor.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
6.11.2 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS
The Contractor shall keep and maintain one set of blueprints, As-Built Drawings, in good order and legible
condition to be continuously marked-up at the job site. The Contractor shall mark and annotate neatly and
clearly all project conditions, locations, configurations and any other changes or deviations which may vary
from the details represented on the original Contract Plans, including revisions made necessary by
Addenda, Shop Drawings, and Change Orders during the construction process. The Contractor shall record
the horizontal and vertical locations, in the plan and profile, of all buried utilities that differ from the locations
indicated or which were not indicated on the Contract Plans and buried (or concealed), construction and
utility features which are revealed during the construction period.
The As-Built Drawings shall be available for inspection by the Engineer at all times during the progress of
the Project.
The As-Built Drawings shall be reviewed by the City Inspector for accuracy and compliance with the
requirements of "As-Built Drawings" prior to submittal of the monthly pay requests. The pay requests shall
be rejected if the marked-up blueline prints do not conform to the "As-Built Drawings" requirements. As-
Built Drawings shall be submitted to the City Inspector for approval upon completion of the project and prior
to acceptance of final pay request.
Prior to placing new potable water mains in service, the Contractor shall provide the Engineer intersection
drawings, as specified for the water mains.
The City's acceptance of the "As-Built Drawings" does not relieve the Contractor of the sole responsibility
for the accuracy and completeness of the As-Built Drawings.
6.11.2.1
General
The Contractor/Consultant shall prepare an "AS-BUILT SURVEY" per chapter 61G17-6, Florida
Administrative Code (see definition below), signed and sealed by a Florida registered land surveyor. Two
hard copies of signed and sealed as-builts and an AutoCAD file will be provided for this purpose.
Definition: 61G17-6.002(8)(a) As-Builts Survey: a survey performed to obtain horizontal and/or vertical
dimensional data so that constructed improvements may be located and delineated: also know as Record
Survey.
This survey shall be clearly titled "As-Built Survey" and shall be signed and sealed by a Florida registered
land surveyor. The survey must be delivered to the City of Clearwater Construction Division upon
substantial completion of the project. If this condition is not met, the City will procure the services of a
Professional Surveyor and Mapper registered in the State of Florida and will back charge the contractor a
fee of $1 ,800 per day or any portion thereof to provide the City with the required As-Built Survey.
6.11.2.2 Sanitary and Storm Sewer Piping Systems
1. Manholes and inlets shall be located by survey coordinates (northing, easting and elevation) based on
the approved horizontal and vertical datum or utilize the stationing supplied on the construction plans.
New sanitary service connections and replaced sanitary service connections shall be dimensioned to
the nearest downstream manhole. All manholes, cleanouts and catch basin invert and rim elevations,
manhole and catch basin dimensions, pipe sizes, and pipe material shall also be noted on the plan
view and also on the profile if one exists.
2. Pipe materials and areas of special construction shall be noted.
Marsha" Street and Northeast WPC Faci'ities
Odor ControUmprovements Project
Section '"
"'-17
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section 1/1
1/1-18
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
'I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
6.11.2.3 Pressure Pipe construction (Water, Reclaimed Water, Forcemain)
All pipes shall be located by survey coordinates (northing, easting and elevation) based on the approved
horizontal and vertical datum or utilize the stationing supplied on the construction plans. Coordinates shall
be at all pipe bends, tees, valves, reducers, and deflections. Also all new and replaced service connections
for potable and reclaimed water will be located as described above. Additionally there must be survey
coordinates no further than 100 feet apart on linear type construction and shall denote top of pipe elevation
at those points.
6.11.2.4 Electrical and Control Wiring
The as-built drawings shall include all changes to the original Contract Plans. The as-built drawings shall
also include the size, color, and number of wires and conduit. For projects where this information is too
voluminous to be contained on the blueline prints, the.Contractor shall prepare supplemental drawings, on
same size sheets as the blueline prints, showing the additional conduit runs, 1-line diagrams, ladder
diagrams, and other information. The wiring schematic diagrams shall show termination location and wiring
identification at each point on the ladder diagram.
6.11.2.5 Horizontal and Vertical Control
The As-Built survey shall be based on the original datum used for the construction design plans or if
required by the City the datum shall be referenced to the North American Datum of 1983/90 (horizontal)
and the North American Vertical Datum of 1988. The unit of measurement shall be the United States Foot.
Any deviation or use of any other datum, (horizontal and or vertical), must be approved by the City of
Clearwater Engineering Department.
6.11.2.6 Standards
The As-Built survey shall meet the Minimum Technical Standards per Chapter 61G17 and the Clearwater
CAD STANDARDS set forth below. In addition to locating all improvements that pertain to the as-built
survey it is the requirement of the City to have minimum location points at every change in direction and no
more than 100 feet apart on all pressure pipes.
6.11.2.7 Other
The As-Built drawings shall reflect any differences from the original Contract Plans, in the same level of
detail and units of dimensions as the Plans.
6.11.3 CAD 51 ANDARDS
6.11.3.1 Layer Naming
6.11.3.1.1 Prefixes and Suffixes
01 prefix denotes digitized or scanned entities
EP prefix denotes existing points - field collected
EX prefix denotes existing entities - line work and symbols
PR prefix denotes proposed entities -line work and. symbols
FU prefix denotes future entities (proposed but not part of this contract) - line work
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I'
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
TX
and symbols
suffix denotes text - use for all text, no matter the prefix
611312
L
N
OfT
. . . . aver ammg e mllons:
GAS gas lines and appurtenances
ELEC power lines and appurtenances
PHONE telephone lines and appurtenances
CABLE cable TV lines and appurtenances
BOC curbs
.
WALK sidewalk
WATER water lines and appurtenances, sprinklers
STORM storm lines and appurtenances
TREES trees, bushes, planters
SANITARY sanitary lines and appurtenances
FENCE all fences
BLDG buildings, sheds, finished floor elevation
DRIVE driveways
EOP edge of pavement without curbs
TRAFFIC signal poles, control boxes
TOPBANK top of bank
TOES LOPE toe of slope
TOPBERM top of berm
TOEBERM toe of berm
SEAWALL seawall
CONCSLAB concrete slabs
WALL walls, except seawall
SHORE shoreline, water elevation
CL centerline of road
CLD centerline of ditch
CLS centerline of swale
CORNER property comers, monumentation
..
BENCH benchmark, temporary benchmarks
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilitie$
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section 1/1
1/1-19
Marshall Street and N(jrlheast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section III
111.20
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Other layers may be created as required, using above format.
6.11.3.2 Layer Properties
All layers will use standard AutoCAD linetypes, bylayer.
All layers will use standard AutoCAD colors, bylayer.
All text will use standard AutoCAD fonts.
6.11.3.3 Text Styles
Text style for EX layers will use the simplex font, oblique angle of 00, and a text height of .008 times the
plot scale.
Text style for PR and FU layers will use the simplex font, oblique angle of 22.50, and a text height of .010
times the plot scale.
6.11.4
DELlVERABLES:
The as-built survey shall be produced on stable based Mylar or vellum material, 24" x 36" at a scale of 1" =
20' unless approved otherwise. The consultant shall deliver all drawing files in digital format with all project
data in Land Development Desktop (LDD) R1 or later, including all associated dependent files. When LDD
is not available, upon approval by the City of Clearwater Project Manager, a standard ASCII file can be
delivered with all associated drawing and dependent files. The ASCII file shall be a comma or space
delimited containing code, point number, northing, easting, elevation and description for each data point.
Example below space delimited ASCII file:
POINT # NORTHING EASTING
284 1361003.838 264286.635
ELEV
25.00
DESC
BCV
or Comma Delimited ASCII File:
284,361003.838,264286.635,25.00, BeV (PNEZD)
An AutoCAD Release 2000 drawing or later drawing file shall be submitted.
NOTE: If approved deviation from Clearwater or Pinellas County CAD standards are used the consultant
shall include all necessary information toaid -in manipulating the drawings including either PCP, CTS file or
pen schedule for plotting.
The drawing file shall include only authorized fonts, shapes, line types or other attributes contained
in the standard AutoDesk, Inc. release. All block references and references contained within the
drawing file shall be included.
Please address any questions regarding format to Mr. Tom Mahony, at (727)562-4762 or email address
T omMahony@myClearwater.com
6.12 CONTRACTOR'S GENERAL WARRANTY AND GUARANTEE
Contractor warrants and guarantees to Owner, Engineer and Engineer's Consultants that all Work will be in
accordance with the Contract Documents and will not be defective. Contractor's warranty and guarantee
hereunder includes defects or damage caused by abuse, vandalism, modification or operation by persons
other than Contractor, Subcontractors or Suppliers. Until the acceptance of the Work by the Owner, the
Work shall be under the charge and care of the Contractor, and he shall take every necessary precaution
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
against injury or damage to any part thereof by action of the elements, or from any other cause whatsoever,
arising from the execution or non-execution of the Work. The Contractor shall rebuild, repair and make
good, at his own expense, all injuries or damages to any portion of the Work occasioned by any cause
before its completion and final acceptance by the Owner. In addition, "the Contractor shall remedy any
defects in the work at his own expense and pay for any damage to other work resulting therefrom which
appear within a period of one year from the date of final acceptanc~B.
Contractor's warranty and guarantee hereunder excludes improper maintenance and operation by Owner's
employees and normal wear and tear under normal usage for any portion of the Work, which has been
partially accepted by the Owner for operation prior to final acceptance by the Owner. Contractor's obligation
to perform and complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents shall be absolute. None of
the following will constitute an acceptance of Work that is not in accordance with the Contract Documents
or a release of Contractor's obligation to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents: (i)
observations by Engineer, (ii) recommendation of any progress or final payment by Engineer, (Hi) the
issuance of a certificate of Substantial Completion or any payment by Owner to contractor under. the
Contract Documents, (iv) use or occupancy of the Work or any part thereof by Owner, (v) any acceptance
by Owner or any failure to do so, (vi) any review and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample submittal or
the issuance of a notice of Acceptance by the Engineer.
6.13 CONTINUING THE WORK
Contractor shall carry on the work and adhere to the progress schedule during all disputes or
disagreements with Owner. No work shall be delayed or postponed pending resolution of any disputes or
disagreements, except as Owner or Contractor may otherwise agree in writing.
6.14 INDEMNIFICATION
Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants and the officers,
directors, employees, agents and other consultants of each and any of them from and against all claims,
costs, losses and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects,
attorneys and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) caused by,
arising out of or resulting from the performance of the Work, provided that any such claim, cost, loss or
damage: (i) is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of
tangible property (other than the work itsel~, including the loss of use resulting therefrom, and (ii) is caused
in whole or in part by any negligent act or omission of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any
person directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform or furnish any of the Work, or anyone for
whose acts any of them may be liable, regardless of whether or not caused in part by any negligence or
omission of a person or entity indemnified hereunder or whether liability is imposed upon such indemnified
party by Laws and Regulations regardless of the negligence of any such person.
If, through acts of neglect on the part of Contractor, any other Contractor or any Subcontractor shall suffer
loss or damage on the work, Contractor shall settle with such other Contractor or Subcontractor by
agreement or arbitration if such other Contractor or Subcontractor will so settle. If such other Contractor or
Subcontractor shall assert any claim against Owner on such account of any damage alleged to have been
sustained, Owner shall notify Contractor, who shall indemnify and save harmless Owner against any such
claim. In any and all claims against Owner or Engineer or any of their respective consultants, agents,
officers, directors, or employees by any employee (or the survivor or personal representative of such
employee) of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section 11/
11I-21
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Contrallmprovements Project
Section III
111-22
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
,I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Supplier, any person directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform or furnish any of the work, or
anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, the indemnification obligation under this paragraph shall
not be limited in any way by any limitation on the amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits
payable by or for Contractor or any such Sub-contractor, Supplier or other person or organization under
workers' compensation acts, disability benefit acts or other employee benefit acts. The indemnification
obligations of Contractor under this paragraph shall not extend to the liability of Engineer and Engineer's
Consultants, officers, directors, employees, or agents caused by the professional negligence, errors or
omissions of any of them.
7 OTHER WORK
7.1 RELATED WORK AT SITE
Owner may perform other work related to the Project at the site by Owner's own forces, or let other direct
contracts therefore which shall contain General Conditions similar to these, or have other work performed
by utility owners. If the fact that such other work is to be performed was not noted in the Contract
Documents, then: (i) written notice thereof will be given to Contractor prior to starting.any such other work,
and (ii) Contractor may make a claim therefore if Contractor believes that such performance will involve
additional expense to Contractor or requires additional time and the parties are unable to agree as to the
amount or extent thereof.
Contractor shall afford each other contractor who is a party to such a direct contract and each utility owner
(and Owner, if Owner is performing the additional work with Owner's employees) proper and safe access to
the site and a reasonable opportunity for the introduction and storage of materials and equipment and the
execution of such other work and shall properly connect and coordinate the work with theirs. Unless
otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, Contractor shall do all cutting, fitting and patching of the
work that may be required to make its several parts come together properly and integrate with such other
work. Contractor shall not endanger any work of others by cutting, excavating, or otherwise altering their
work and will only cut or alter their work with the written consent of Engineer and the others whose work will
be affected. The duties and responsibilities of Contractor under this paragraph are forthe benefit of such
utility owners and other contractors to the extent that there are comparable provisions for the benefit of
Contractor in said direct contracts between Owner and such utility owners and other contractors. Should
the Contractor cause damage to any other contractor on the Project, the contractor agrees, upon due
notice, to settle with such contractor by agreement or arbitration, if he will so settle. If such other contractor
sues the Owner on account of any damage alleged to have been so sustained, the Owner shall notify the
Contractor, who shall defend such proceedings at his own expense, and if any judgment against the Owner
arises therefrom the Contractor shall payor satisfy the judgment and pay all costs incurred by the Owner.
If the proper execution or results of any part of Contractor's work depends upon work performed by others
under this Article. C()~tr~ctor shall inspect such other work and promptly report to Engineer in writing any
delays, defects or deficiencies in such other work that render it unavailable or unsuitable for the proper
execution and results of Contractor's work. Contractor's failure to so report will constitute an acceptance of
such other work as fit and proper for integration with Contractor's work except. for latent or nonapparent
defects and deficiencies in such other work.
7 .2 COORDINATION
If Owner contracts with others for the performance of other work on the Project at the site, the following will
be set forth in the Scope of Work: (i) the person who will have authority and responsibility for coordination
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
of the activities among the various prime contractors will be identified; (ii) the specific matters to be covered
by such authority and responsibility will be itemized; and (iii) the extent of such authority and responsibilities
will be provided. Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, Owner shall have sole
authority and responsibility in respect of such coordination.
8 OWNERS RESPONSIBILITY
Except as otherwise provided in these General Conditions, Owner shall issue all communications to
Contractor through Engineer.
Owner shall furnish the data required of Owner under the Contract Documents promptly and shall make
payments to Contractor promptly when they are due as provided in these General Conditions.
Owner is obligated to execute Change Orders as indicated in the Article on Changes In The Work.
Owner's responsibility in respect of certain inspections, tests, and approvals is set forth in the Article on
Tests and Inspections.
In connection with Owner's right to stop work or suspend work, see the Article on Engineer may Stop the
Work. The Article on Suspension of Work and Termination deals with Owner's right to terminate services of
Contractor under certain circumstances.
The Owner shall not supervise, direct or have control or authority over, nor be responsible for, Contractor's
means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction or the safety precautions and
programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable
to the furnishing or performance of the Work. Owner will not be responsible for Contractor's failure to
perform or furnish the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
9 ENGINEER'S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION
9.1 OWNERS REPRESENTATNE
Engineer will be Owner's representative during the construction period. The duties and the responsibilities
and the limitations of authority of Engineer as Owner's representative during construction are set forth. in
the Contract Documents and shall not be extended without written consent of Owner and Engineer.
9.2 CLARIFICATIONS AND INTERPRETATIONS
Engineer will issue with reasonable promptness such written clarifications or interpretations of the
requirements of the Contract Documents (in the form of Drawings or otherwise) as Engineer may determine
necessary, which shall be consistent with the intent of and reasonably inferable from Contract Documents.
Such written clarifications and interpretations will be binding on Owner and Contractor. If Contractor
believes that a written clarification or interpretation justifies an adjustment in the Contract Price or the
Contract Time and the parties are unable to agree to the amount or extent thereof, if any, Contractor may
make a written claim therefore as provided in the Articles for Change of Work and Change of Contract
Time.
9.3 REJECTING OF DEFECTIVE WORK
Engineer will have authority to disapprove or reject Work which Engineer believes to be defective, or that
Engineer believes will not produce a completed Project that conforms to the Contract Documents or that
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section III
111-23
will prejudice the integrity of the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as
indicated by the Contract Documents. Engineer will also have authoiity to require special inspection or
testing of the Work whether or not the Work is fabricated, installed or completed.
9.4 SHOP DRAWINGS, CHANGE ORDERS,AND PAYMENTS
In connection with Enginee~s authority as to Shop Drawings and Samples, see articles on Shop Drawings
and Samples. In connection with Enginee~s authority as to Change Orders, see the articles on Changes of
Work, Contract Price and Contract Time. In connection with Enginee~s authority as to Applications for .
Payment, see the articles on Payments to Contractor and Completion.
9.5 DECISIONS ON DISPUTES
Engineer will be the initial interpreter of the requirements of the Contract Documents and judge of the
acceptability of the work thereunder. Claims, disputes and other matters relating to the acceptability of the
work or the interpretation of the requirements of the Contract Documents pertaining to th_e performance and
furnishing of the work and Claims under the Articles for Changes of Work, Changes of Contract Time and
Changes of Contract Price will be referred initially to Engineer in writing with a request for a formal decision
in accordance with this paragraph. Written notice of each such claim, di~pute or other matter will be
delivered by the claimant to Engineer and the other party to the Agreement promptly (but in no event later
than thirty days) after the start of the occurrence or event giving rise thereto, and written supporting data
will be submitted to Engineer and the other party within sixty days after the start of such occurrence or
event unless Engineer allows an additional period of time for the submission of additional or more accurate
data in support of such claim, dispute or other matter. The opposing party shall submit any response to
Engineer and the claimant within thirty days after receipt of the claimant's last submittal (unless Engineer
allows additional time). Engineer will render a formal decision in writing within thirty days after receipt of the
opposing party's submittal, if any, in accordance with this paragraph. Engineer's written decision on such
claim, dispute or other matter will be final and binding upon Owner and Contractor unless (i) an appeal from
Engineer's decision is taken within thirty days of the Engineers decision, or the appeal time which may be
stated in a Dispute Resolution Agreement between the Owner and Contractor for the settlement of disputes
or (ii) if no such Dispute Resolution Agreement has been entered into, a written notice of intention to appeal
from Engineer's written decision is delivered by Owner or Contractor to the other and to Engineer within
thirty days after the date of such decision and a formal proceeding is instituted by the appealing party in a
forum of competent jurisdiction to exercise such rights pr remedies as the appealing party may have with
respect to such claim, dispute or other matter in accordance with applicable Laws and Regulations within
sixty days of the date of such decision, unless otherwise agreed in writing by Owner and Contractor. .
When functioning as interpreter and judge, Engineer will not show partiality to Owner or Contractor and will
not be liable in connection with any interpretation or decision rendered in good faith in such capacity. The
rendering of a decision by Engineer with respect to any such claim, dispute or other matter will be a
condition precedent to any exercise hy Owner or Contractor of such rights or remedies as either may
otherwise have under the Contract Documents or by Laws or Regulations in respect,of any. such claim,
dispute or other matter pursuant the Article on Dispute Resolution.
9.6 LIMITATIONS ON ENGINEER'S RESPONSIBILITIES ..
Neither Engineer's authority or responsibility under this paragraph-or .under any other provision of the
Contract Documents nor any decision made by Engineer in good faith ~ither .to exer~!se. or _not exercise.
such authority or responsibility or the undertaking, exercise or performance of any authority or responsibility
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section III
111-24
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I'
I
I
I
I
I
I
by Engineer shall create, impose or give rise to any duty owed by Engineer to Contractor, any
Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other person or organization or to any surety for or employee or agent of
any of them.
Engineer will not supervise, direct, control or have authority over or be responsible for Contractor's means,
methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs
incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to.comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the
furnishing or performance of the work. Engineer will not be responsible for Contractor's failure to perform or
furnish the work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
Engineer will not be responsible for the acts or omissions of Contractor or of any Subcontractor, any
Supplier, or of any other person or organization performing or furnishing any of the work.
Engineer's review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation and all
maintenance and operating instructions, schedules, guarantees, bonds and certificates of inspection, tests
and approvals and other documentation required to be delivered by the Contractor will only be to determine
generally that their content complies with the requirements of the Contract Documents and, in the case of
certificates of inspections, tests and approvals that the results certified indicate compliance with the
Contract Documents.
The limitations upon authority and responsibility set forth in this paragraph shall also apply to Engineer's
Consultants and assistants.
10 CHANGES IN THE WORK
Without invalidating the Agreement and without notice to any surety, Owner may, at any time or from time
to time, order additions, deletions or revisions in the Work. Such additions, deletions or revisions will be
authorized by a Written Amendment, a Change Order, or a Work Change Directive. Upon receipt of any
such document, Contractor shall promptly proceed with the Work involved which will be performed under
the applicable conditions of the Contract Documents (except as may otherwise be specifically provided).
If Owner and Contractor are unable to agree as to the extent, if any, of an adjustment in the Contract Price
or an adjustment of the Contract Time that should be allowed as a result of a Work Change Directive, a
claim may be made therefore as provided in these General Conditions.
Contractor shall not be entitled to an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Time
with respect to any Work performed that is not required by the Contract Documents as amended, modified
and supplemented as provided in these General Conditions except in the case of an emergency as
provided or in the case of uncovering work as provided in article for Uncovering Work.
Owner and Contractor shall execute appropriate Change Orders or Written Amendments recommended by
Engineer covering:
changes in the work which are (i) ordered by Owner (ii) required because of acceptance of defective
work under the article for Acceptance of Defective Work or correcting defective Work under the article
for Owner May Correct Defective Work or (iii) agreed to by the parties;
changes in the Contract Price or Contract Time which are agreed to by the parties; and
changes in the Contract Price or Contract Time which embody the substance of any written decision
rendered by Engineer pursuant to the article for Decisions on Disputes;
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Contrallmprovements Project
Section III
11I.25
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section III
11I-26
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
'I
I
I
I
I
provided that, in lieu of executing any such Change Order, an appeal may be taken from any such
decision in accordance with the provisions of the Contract Documents and applicable Laws and
Regulations, but during any such appeal, Contractor shall carry on the Work and adhere to the
progress schedule as provided in the article for Continuing the Work.
If notice of any change affecting the general scope of the work or the provisions of the Contract Documents
(including, but not limited to, Contract Price or Contract Time) is required by the provisions of any Bond to
be given to a surety, the giving of any such notice will be Contractor's responsibility, and the amount of
each applicable Bond will be adjusted accordingly.
11 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE
11.1 . CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE
The Contract Price constitutes the total compensation (subject to authorized adjustments) payable to
Contractor for performing the Work. All duties, responsibilities and obligations assigned to or undertaken by
Contractor shall be at Contractor's expense without change in the Contract Price. The Contract Price may
only be adjusted by a Change Order or by a Written Amendment. Any claim for an adjustment in the
Contract Price shall be based on a written notice of claim stating the general nature of the claim, to be
delivered by the party making the claim to the other party and to Engineer promptly (but in no event later
than thirty days) after the start of the occurrence or event giving rise to the claim. Notice of the amount of
the claim with supporting data shall be delivered within sixty days after the start of such occurrence or
event (unless Engineer allows additional time for claimant to submit additional or more accurate data in
support of the claim) and shall be accompanied by claimant's written statement that the claimed adjustment
covers all known amounts to which the claimant is entitled as a result of said occurrence or event. No claim
for an adjustment in the Contract Price will be valid if not submitted in accordance with this paragraph. The
value of any Work covered by a Change Order or of any claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price will
be determined as follows: (i) where the Work involved is covered by unit prices contained in the Contract
Documents, by application of such unit prices to the quantities of the items involved (ii) where the Work
involved is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents, by a mutually agreed lump sum
(which may include an allowance for overhead and profit),(iii) where the Work is not covered by unit prices
contained in the Contract Documents and agreement is reached to establish unit prices for the Work.
11.2 ALLOWANCES AND FINAL CONTRACT PRICE ADJUSTMENT
It is understood that Contractor has included in the Contract Price all allowances so named in the Contract
Documents and shall cause the Work so covered to be furnished and performed for such sums as may be
acceptable to Owner and Engineer. Contractor agrees that: (i) the allowances include the cost to Contractor
(less any applicable trade discounts) of materials and equipment required by the allowances to be delivered
atth~ Site, and all applicable taxes; and(ii) Contracto~s costs for unloading and handlingon the site, labor,
installation costs, overhead, profit and other expenses contemplated for the allowances have been included
in the Contract Price and not in the allowances and no demand for additional payment on account of any of
the foregoing will be valid.
Prior to final payment, an appropriate Change Order will be issued as recommended by Engineer to reflect
actual amounts due Contractor on account of Work covered by allowances and all the Work actually
performed by the Contractor, and the Contract Price shall be correspondingly adjusted.
I
I
'I
il
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
:1
I
I
I
I
11.3 UNIT PRICE WORK
Where the Contract Documents provide that all or part of the Work is to be Unit Price Work, initially the
Contract Price will be deemed to include for all Unit Price Work an amount equal to the sum of the
established unit price for each separately identified item of unit price work times the estimated quantity of
each item as indicated in the Agreement. The estimated quantities of items of Unit Price Work are not
guaranteed and are solely for the purpose of comparison of Bids and determining an initial Contract Price.
Determinations of the actual quantities and classifications of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor will
be made by Engineer. Each unit price will be deemed to include an amount considered by Contractor to be
adequate to cover Contractor's overhead and profit for each separately identified item. Owner or Contractor
may make a claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price if: (i) the quantity of any item of Unit Price Work
performed by Contractor differs materially and significan~y from the estimated quantity of such item
indicated in the Contract Documents; and (ii) there is no corresponding adjustment with respect to any
other item of Work; and (iii) if Contractor believes that Contractor is enti~ed to an increase in Contract Price
as a result of having incurred additional expense or Owner believes that Owner is entitled to a decrease in
Contract Price and the parties are unable to agree as to the amount of any such increase or decrease. On
unit price contracts, the Owner endeavors to provide adequate unit quantities to satisfactorily complete the
construction of the project. It is expected that in the normal course of project construction and completion
that not all unit quantities will be used in their entirety and that a finalizing change order which adjusts
contract unit quantities to those unit quantities actually used in the construction of the project will result in a
net decrease from the original Contract Price. Such reasonable deduction of final Contract Price should be
anticipated by the Contractor in his original bid.
12 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT TIME
The Contract Time (or Milestones) may only be changed by a Change Order or a Written Amendment. Any
claim for an adjustment of the Contract Time (or Milestones) shall be based on written notice delivered by
the party making the claim to the other party and to Engineer promptly (but in no event later than thirty
days) after the occurrence of the event giving rise to the claim and stating the general nature of the claim.
Notice of the extent of the claim with supporting data shall be delivered within sixty days after such
occurrence (unless Engineer allows an additional period of time to ascertain more accurate data in support
of the claim) and shall be accompanied by the claimant's written statement that the adjustment claimed is
the entire adjustment to which the claimant has reason to believe it is entitled as a result of the occurrence
of said event. All claims for adjustment in the Contract Time (or Milestones) shall be determined by
Engineer. No claim for an adjustment in the Contract Time (or Milestones) will be valid if not submitted in
accordance with the requirements of this paragraph.
All time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Agreement.
Where Contractor is prevented from completing any part of the work within the Contract Time (or
Milestones) due to delay beyond the control of Contractor, the Contract Time (or Milestones) may be
extended in an amount equal to the time lost due to such delay if a claim is made therefore as provided in
the article for Changes in the
Work. Delays beyond the control of Contractor shall include, but not be limited to, acts by Owner, acts of
utility owners or other contractors performing other work as contemplated by the article for Other Work,
fires, floods, epidemics, abnormal weather conditions or acts of God. Delays attributable to and within the
control of a Subcontractor or Supplier shall be deemed to be delays within the control of Contractor.
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section III
111-27
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section III
111-28
-,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Where Contractor is prevented from completing any part of the Work within the Contract Times (or
Milestones) due to delay beyond the control of both Owner and Contractor, an extension of the Contract
Time (or Milestones) in an amount equal to the time lost due to such delay shall be Contractor's sole and
exclusive remedy for such delay. In no event shall Owner be liable to Contractor, any Subcontractor, any
Supplier, any other person, or to any surety for or employee or agent of any of them, for damages arising
out of or resulting from (i) delays caused by or within the control of Contractor, or (ii) delays beyond the
control of both parties including but not limited to fires, floods, epidemics, abnormal weather conditions,
acts of God or acts by utility owners or other contractors performing other work as contemplated by
paragraph for Other Work.
13 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS, CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR ACCEPTANCE
OF DEFECTIVE WORK
13.1 TESTS AND INSPECTION
Contractor shall give Engineer timely notice of readiness of the Work for all required inspections, tests or
approvals, and shall cooperate with inspection and testing personnel to facilitate required inspections or
tests.
Contractor shall employ and pay for the services of an independent testing laboratory to perform all
inspections, tests, or approvals required by the Contract Documents. The costs for these inspections, tests
or approvals shall be borne by the Contractor except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents.
If Laws or Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction require any Work (or part thereofj specifically
to be inspected, tested or approved by an employee or other representative of such public body including
all City Building Departments and City Utility Departments, Contractor shall assume full responsibility for
arranging and obtaining such inspections, tests or approvals, pay all costs in connection therewith, and
furnish Engineer the required certificates of inspection or approval. Unless otherwise stated in the Contract
Documents, City permit and impact fees will be waived. Contractor shall also be responsible for arranging
and obtaining and shall pay all costs in connection with any inspections, tests or approvals required for
Owner's and Engineer's acceptance of materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work, or of
materials, mix designs, or equipment submitted for approval prior to Contractor's purchase thereof for
incorporation of the Work.
If any Work (or the work of others) that is to be inspected tested or approved is covered by Contractor
without written concurrence of Engineer, it must, if requested by Engineer, be uncovered for observation.
Uncovering Work as provided in this paragraph shall be at Contractor's expense unless Contractor has
given Engineer timely notice of Contractor's intention to cover the same and Engineer has not acted with
reasonable promptness in response to such notice.
13.2 UNCOVERING THE WORK
If any Work is covered contrary to the written request of Engineer, it must, if requested by Engineer, be
uncovered for Engineer's observation and replaced at Contractor's expense.
If Engineer considers it necessary or advisable that covered Work be observed by Engineer or inspected or
tested by others, Contractor, at Engineer's request, shall uncover, expose or otherwise make available for
observation, inspection or testing as Engineer may require, that portion of the Work in question, furnishing
all necessary labor, material and equipment. If it is found that such Work is defective, Contractor shall pay
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by, arising out of or resulting from such uncovering,
exposure, observation, inspection and testing and of satisfactory replacement or reconstruction (including
but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others); and Owner shall be entitled to an
appropriate decrease in the Contract Price for the costs of the investigation, and, if the parties are unable to
agree as to the amount thereof, may make a claim therefore as provided in the article for Change in
Contract Price. If, however, such Work is not found to be defective, Contractor shall be allowed an increase
in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Time (or Milestones), or both, directly attributable to
such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection, testing, replacement and reconstruction; and, if the
parties are unable to agree as to the amount or extent thereof, Contractor may make a claim therefore as
provided the article for Change in Contract Price and Change of Contract Time.
13.3 ENGINEER MAY STOP THE WORK
If the Work is defective, or Contractor fails to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or
equipment, or fails to fumish or perform the Work in such a way that the completed Work will conform to the
Contract Documents, Engineer may order Contractor to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the
cause for such order has been eliminated; however, this right of Engineer to stop the Work shall not give
rise to any duty on the part of Engineer or Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of Contractor or any
surety or other party. If the Engineer stops Work under this paragraph, Contractor shall be entitled to no
extension of Contract Time or increase in Contract Price.
13.4 CORRECTION OR REMOVAL OF DEFECTIVE WORK
If required by Engineer, Contractor shall promptly, as directed, either correct all defective Work, whether or
not fabricated, installed or completed, or, if the Work has been rejected by Engineer, remove it from the site
and replace it with Work that is not defective. Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses and damages
caused by or resulting from such correction or removal (including but not limited to all costs of repair or
replacement of work of others).
13.5 WARRANTY/CORRECTION PERIOD
If within one year after the date of Substantial Completion or such longer period of time as may be
prescribed by Laws or Regulations or by the terms of any applicable special guarantee required by the
Contract Documents or by any specific provision of the Contract Documents, any Work is found to be
defective, Contractor shall promptly, without cost to Owner and in accordance with Owner's written
instructions; (i) correct such defective Work, or, if it has been rejected by Owner, remove it from the site
and replace it with Work that is not defective and (ii) satisfactorily correct or remove and replace any
damage to other Work or the work of others resulting therefrom. If Contractor does not promptly comply
with the terms of such instructions, or in an emergency where delay would cause serious risk of loss or
damage, Owner may have the defective Work corrected or the rejected. Work removed and replaced, and
all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by or resulting from such removal and replacement
(including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others) will be paid by Contractor.
In special circumstances where a particular item of equipment is placed in continuous service before Final
Completion of all the Work, the correction period for that item may start to run from an earlier date if
specifically and expressly so provided in the Specifications or by Written Amendment.
Where defective Work (and damage to other Work resulting therefrom) has been corrected, removed or
replaced under this paragraph the correction period hereunder with respect to such Work will be extended
Marshall Street and No1fheast WPC Facilities
Odor Contrallmprovements Project
Section III
111-29
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section III
111.30
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
for an additional period of one year after such correction or removal and replacement has been
satisfactorily completed.
13.6 ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK
If, instead of requiring correction or removal and replacement of defective Work, Owner prefers to accept it,
Owner may do so.
Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses and damages attributable to Owner's evaluation of and
determination to accept such defective Work (such costs to be approved by Engineer as to
reasonableness). If any such acceptance occurs prior to Engineer's recommendation of final payment, a
Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions in the Contract Documents with respect
to the Work; and Owner shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price, and, if the
parties are unable to agree as to the amount thereof, Owner may make a claim therefore as provided in
article for Change of Contract Price. Ifthe acceptance occurs after the Engineer's recommendation for final
payment an appropriate amount will be paid by Contractor to Owner.
13.7 OWNER MAY CORRECT DEFECTIVE WORK
If Contractor fails within a reasonable time after written notice from Engineer to correct defective Work or to
remove and replace rejected Work as required by Engineer in accordance with the article for Correction
and Removal of Defective Work or if Contractor fails to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract
Documents, or if Contractor fails to comply with any other provision of the Contract Documents, Owner
may, after seven days' written notice to Contractor, correct and remedy any such deficiency. In exercising
the rights and remedies under this paragraph Owner shall proceed expeditiously. In connection with such
corrective and remedial action, Owner may exclude Contractor from all or part of the site, take possession
of all or part of the Work, and suspend Contractor's services related thereto, take possession of
Contractor's tools, appliances, construction equipment and machinery at the site, and incorporate in the
Work all materials and equipment stored at the site or for which Owner has paid Contractor but which are
stored elsewhere. Contractor shall allow Owner, Owner's representatives, agents and employees, Owner's
other contractors, and Engineer and Engineer's Consultants access to the site to enable Owner to exercise
the rights and remedies under this paragraph. All claims, costs, losses and damages incurred or sustained
by Owner in exercising such rights and remedies will be charged against Contractor and a Change Order
will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work;
and Owner shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price, and, if the parties are unable
to agree as to the amount thereof, Owner may make a claim therefore as provided in the article for Change
of Contract Price. Such claims, costs, losses and damages will include but not be .limited to all costs of
repair or replacement of work of others destroyed or damaged by correction, removal or replacement of
Contractor's defective Work. Contractor shall not be allowed an extension of the Contract Time (or
Milestones) because of any delay in the performance of the Work attributable to the exercise by Owner of
Owner's rights and remedies hereunder.
14 PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION
Progress payments on account of Unit Price Work will be based on the number of units completed.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
14.1 APPLICATION FOR PROGRESS PAYMENT
Contractor shall submit (not more often than once a month) to Engineer for review an Application for
Payment filled out and'signed by Contractor covering the Work completed as of the 25th of each month and
accompanied by such supporting documentation as is required by the Engineer and the Contract
Documents. Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, payment will not be made for materials
and equipment not incorporated in the Work. Payment will only be made for that portion of the Work, which
is fully installed including all materials, labor and equipment. A retainage of not less than five (5%) of the
amount of each Application for Payment for the total of all Work completed to date will be held until final
completion arid acceptance of the Work covered in the Contract Documents. No progress payment shall be
construed to be acceptance of any portion of the Work under contract. ,
In addition to all other payment provisions set out in this contract, the Engineer may require the Contractor
to produce for the Owner, within fifteen days of the approval of any progress payment, evidence and/or
payment affidavit that all subcontractors and suppliers have been paid any sum or sums then due. A failure
on the part of the contractor to provide the report as required herein shall result in further progress or partial
payments being withheld until the report is provided:
14.2 CONTRACTOR'S WARRANTY OF TITLE
Contractor warrants and guarantees that title to all Work, materials and equipment covered by any
Application for Payment, whether incorporated in the Project or not, will pass to Owner no later than the
time of payment, free and clear of liens. No materials or supplies for the Work shall be purchased by
Contractor or Subcontractor subject to any chattel mortgage or under a conditional sale contact or other
agreement by which an interest is retained by the seller. Contractor warrants that he has good title to all
materials and supplies used by him in the Work, free from all liens, claims or encumbrances. Contractor
shall indemnify and save Owner harmless from all claims growing out of the lawful demands of
Subcontractors, laborers, workmen, mechanics, materialmen, and furnisher's of machinery and parts
thereof, equipment, power tools, and all supplies incurred in the furtherance of the performance of this
Contract. Contractor shall at Owner's request, furnish satisfactory evidence that all obligations of the nature
hereinabove designated have been paid, discharged, or waived. If Contractor fails to do so, then Owner
may, after having served written notice on said Contractor either pay unpaid bills, of which Owner has
written notice, or withhold from the Contractor's unpaid compensation a sum of money deemed reasonably
sufficient to pay any and all such lawful claims until satisfactory evidence is furnished that all liabilities have
been fully discharged, whereupon payment to Contractor shall be resumed in accordance with the terms of
this Contract, but in no event shall the provisions of this sentence be construed to impose any obHgations
upon Owner to the Contractor or the Surety. In paying any unpaid bills of the Contractor, Owner shall be
deemed the agent of Contractor and any payment so made by Owner shall be considered as payment
made under the Contract by Owner to Contractor, and Owner shall not be liable to Contractor for any such
payment made in good faith.
14.3 REVIEW OF APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENTS
Engineer will within twenty days after receipt of each Application for payment, either indicate a
recommendation of payment and present Application to Owner, or return the Application to Contractor
indicating Engineer's reasons for refusing to recommend payment. In the latter case, Contractor may make
the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application. Engineer may refuse to recommend the whole or
any part of any paymentto the Owner. Engineer may also refuse to recommend any such payment, or,
because of subsequently discovered evidence or the results of subsequent inspections or test, nullify any
Marshall Street and Norlheast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section 11/
111-31
such payment previously recommended, to such extent as may be necessary in Enginee~s opinion to
protect Owner from loss because: (i) the Work is defective, or completed Work has been damaged
requiring correction or replacement, (ii) the Contract Price has been reduced by amendment or Change
Order, (iii) Owner has been required to correct defective Work or complete Work, or (iv) Engineer has
actual knowledge of the occurrence of any of the events enumerated in the article on Suspension of Work
and Termination.
Owner may refuse to make payment of the full amount recommended by the Engineer because: (i) claims
have been made against Owner on account of Contracto~s performance or fumishing of the Work, (ii) Liens
have ,been filed in connection with the Work, except where Contractor has delivered a specific Bond
satisfactory to Owner to secure the satisfaction and discharge of such Liens, (iii) there are other items
entitling Owner to a set-off against the amount recommended, or (iv) Owner has actual knowledge of any of
the events described in this paragraph. The Owner shall give Contractor immediate notice of refusal to pay
with a copy to the Engineer, stating the reasons for such actions, and the Owner shall promptly pay
Contractor the amount so withheld, or any adjustment thereto agreed to by Owner and Contractor, when
Contractor corrects to Owne~s satisfaction the reasons for such action.
14.4 PARTIAL UTILIZATION
Use by Owner at Owner's option of any substantially completed part of the Work which (i) has specifically
been identified in the Contract Documents, or (ii) Owner, Engineer and Contractor agree constitutes a
separately functioning and usable part of the Work that can be used by Owner for its intended purpose
without significant interference with Contractor's performance of the remainder of the Work, may be
accomplished prior to Final Completion of all the Work subject to the following:
Owner at any time may request Contractor in writing to permit Owner to use any such part of the Work
which Owner believes to be ready for its intended use and substantially complete. If Contractor agrees that
such part of the Work is substantially complete, Contractor will certify to Owner and Engineer that such part
of the Work is substantially complete and request Engineer to issue a certificate ,of Substantial Completion
for that part of the Work. Contractor at any time may notify Owner and Engineer in writing that Contractor
considers any such part of the Work ready for its intended use and substantially complete and request
Engineer to issue a certificate of Substantial Completion for that part of the Work. Within a reasonable time
after either such request, Owner, Contractor, and Engineer shall make an inspection of that part of the
Work to determine its status of completion. If Engineer does not consider that part of the Work to be
substantially complete, Engineer will notify Owner and Contractor in writing giving the reasons therefore. If
Engineer considers that part of the Work to be substantially complete, the provisions of the articles for
Substantial Completion and Partial Utilization will apply with respect to certification of Substantial
Completion of that part of the Work and the division of responsibility in respect thereof and access thereto.
14.5 FINAL INSPECTION
Upon written notice from Contractor that the entire Work or an agreed portion thereof is complete, Engineer
will make a final inspection with' Owner and Contractor and will notify Contractor in writing of all particulars
in'wliich this inspection reveals that the Work is incomplete or defective. Contractor shall, immediately take
such measures as are necessary to complete such Work or remedy such deficiencies.
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section III
111-32
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I'
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
14.6 FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT
After Contractor has completed all such corrections to the satisfaction of Engineer and has delivered in
accordance with the Contract Documents all maintenance and operating instructions, schedules,
guarantees, Bonds, certificates or other evidence of insurance required by the paragraph for Bonds and
Insurance, certificates of inspection, marked-up record documents as may be required in the Contract
Documents and other documents, Contractor may make application for final payment following the
procedure for progress payments. The final Application for Payment shall be accompanied (except as
previously delivered) by: (I) all documentation called for in the Contract Documents, including but not
limited to the evidence of insurance required by paragraph for Bonds and Insurance, (ii) consent of the
surety, if any or if necessary, to final payment, and (iii) complete and legally effective releases or waivers
(satisfactory to Owner) of all Liens arising out of or filed in connection with the Work. In lieu of such
releases or waiverS of Liens and as approved by Owner, Contractor may furnish receipts or releases in full
and an affidavit of Contractor that: (i) the releases and receipts include all labor, services, material and
equipment for which a Lien could be filed, and (ii) all payrolls, material and equipment bills and other
indebtedness connected with the Work for which Owner or Owner's property might in any way be
responsible have been paid or otherwise satisfied. If any Subcontractor or Supplier fails to furnish such a
release or receipt in full, Contractor may furnish a Bond or other collateral satisfactory to Owner to
indemnify Owner against any Lien.
Prior to application for final payment, Contractor shall clean and remove from the premises all surplus and
discarded materials, rubbish, and temporary structures, and shall restore in an acceptable manner all
property, both public and private, which has been damaged during the prosecution of the Work, and shall
leave the Work in a neat and presentable condition.
14.7 FINAL PAYMENT AND ACCEPTANCE
If through no fault of Contractor, final completion of the Work is significantly delayed and if Engineer so
confirms, Owner shall, upon receipt of Contractor's final Application for payment and recommendation of
Engineer, and without terminating the Agreement, make payment of the balance due for that portion of the
Work fully completed and accepted. If the remaining balance to be held by Owner for Work not fully
completed or corrected is less than the retain age stipulated in the Agreement, and if Bonds have been
furnished as required in paragraph for Bonds and Insurance, the written consent of the surety to the
payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted shall be submitted by
Contractor to Engineer with the Application for such payment. Such payment shall be made under the
terms and conditions goveming final payment, except that such payment shall not constitute a waiver of
claims.
If on the basis of Engineer's observation of the Work during construction and final inspection, and
Engineer's review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation, all as required by
the Contract Documents, Engineer is satisfied that the Work has been completed and Contractor's other
obligations under the Contract Documents have been fulfilled, Engineer will indicate in writing his
recommendation of payment and present the Application to Owner for payment. Thereupon Engineer will
give written notice to Owner and Contractor that the Work is acceptable subject to the provisions of this
article. Otherwise, Engineer will return the Application to Contractor, indicating in writing the reasons for
refusing to recommend final payment, in which case Contractor shall make the necessary corrections and
resubmit the Application. If the Application and accompanying documentation are appropriate as to form
and substance, Owner shall, within sixty-five days after receipt thereof pay contractor the amount
recommended by Engineer.
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Contrallmprovements Project
Section III
111-33
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section III
111-34
I
I
,I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
14.8 WAIVER OF CLAIMS
The making and acceptance of final payment will constitute: a waiver of all claims by Owner against
Contractor, except claims arising from unsettled Liens, from defective Work appearing after final inspection,
from failure to comply with the Contract Documents or the terms of any special guarantees specified
therein, or from Contractor's continuing obligations under the Contract Documents; and a waiver of all
claims by Contractor against Owner other than those previously made in writing and still unsettled.
15 SUSPENSION OF WORK AND lERMINA liON
15.1 OWNER MAY SUSPEND THE WORK
At any time and without cause, Engineer may suspend the Work or any portion thereof for a period of not
more than ninety days by notice in writing to Contractor, which will fix the date on which Work will be
resumed. Contractor shall resume the Work on the date so fixed. Contractor shall be allowed an adjustment
in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times, or both, directly attributable to any such
suspension if Contractor makes an approved claim therefore as provided in the articles for Change of
Contract Price and Change of Contract Time.
15.2 OWNER MAY TERMINATE
Upon the occurrence of anyone or more of the following events; if Contractor persistently fails to perform
the work in accordance with the Contract Documents (including, but not limited to, failure to supply
sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment or failure to adhere to the progress schedule as
adjusted from time to time);
if Contractor disregards Laws and Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction;
if Contractor disregards the authority of Engineer;
if Contractor otherwise violates in any substantial way any provisions of the Contract Documents;
or if the Work to be done under this Contract is abandoned, or if this Contract or any part thereof
is sublet, without the previous written consent of Owner, or if the Contract or any claim
thereunder is assigned by Contractor otherwise than as herein specified, or at any time Engineer
certifies in writing to Owner that the rate of progress of the Work or any part thereof is
unsatisfactory or that the work or any part thereof is unnecessarily or unreasonably delayed.
Owner may, after giving Contractor (and the surety, if any), seven days' written notice and, to the extent
permitted by Laws and Regulations, terminate the services of Contractor, exclude Contractor from the site
and take possession of the Work and of all Contractor's tools, appliances, construction equipment and
machinery at the site and use the same to the full extent they could be used by Contractor (without liability
to Contractor for trespass or conversion), incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the
site or for which OWherhas paid Contractor bufWhich are stored elsewhere, and finish the Work as Owner
may deem expedient. In such case Contractor shall not be entitled to receive any further payment until the
Work is finished. If the unpaid balance of the Contract Price exceeds all claims, costs, losses and damages
sustained by Owner arising out of or resulting from completing the Work such excess will be paid to
Contractor.
If such claims, costs, losses and damages exceed such unpaid balance, Contractor shall pay the difference
to Owner. Such claims, costs, losses and damages incurred by Owner will be reviewed by Engineer as to
their reasonableness and when so approved by Engineer incorporated in a Change Order, provided that
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
'I
when exercising any rights or remedies under this paragraph Owner shall not be required to obtain the
lowest price for the Work performed.
Where Contractor's services have been so terminated by Owner, the termination will not affect any rights or
remedies of Owner against Contractor then existing or which may thereafter accrue. Any retention or
payment of moneys due Contractor by Owner will not release Contractor from liability.
Upon seven days' written notice to Contractor and Engineer, Owner may, without cause and without
prejudice to any other right or remedy of Owner, elect to terminate the Agreement. In such case, Contractor
shall be paid (without duplication of any items):
for completed and acceptable Work executed in accordance with the Contract Documents prior
to the effective date of termination, including fair and reasonable sums for overhead and profit on
such Work;
for expenses sustained prior to the effective date of termination in performing services and
fumishing labor, materials or equipment as required by the Contract Documents in connection
with uncompleted Work, plus fair and reasonable sums for overhead and profit on such
expenses;
for all claims, costs, losses and damages incurred in settlement of terminated contracts with
Subcontractors, Suppliers and others; and for reasonable expenses directly attributable to
termination.
Contractor shall not be paid on account of loss of anticipated profits or revenue or other economic loss
arising out of or resulting from such termination.
15.3 CONTRACTOR MAY STOP WORK OR TERMINATE
If, through, no act or fault of Contractor, the Work is suspended for a period of more than ninety days by
Owner or under an order of court or other public authority, or Engineer fails to act on any Application for
Payment within sixty days after it is submitted or Owner fails for sixty days to pay Contractor any sum finally
determined to be due, then Contractor may, upon seven days' written notice to Owner and Engineer, and
provided Owner or Engineer do not remedy such suspension or failure within that time, terminate the
Agreement and recover from Owner payment on the same terms as provided in the article for Owner May
Terminate. However, if the Work is suspended under an order of court through no fault of the Owner, the
Contractor shall not be entitled to payment except as the Court may direct. In lieu of terminating the
Agreement and without prejudice to any other right or remedy, if Engineer has failed to act on an.
Application for Payment within thirty days after it is submitted, or Owner has failed for thirty days to pay
Contractor any sum finally determined to be due, Contractor may upon seven day's written notice to Owner
and Engineer stop the Work until payment of all such amounts due Contractor. The provisions of this article
are not intended to preclude Contractor from making claim under paragraphs for Change of Contract Price
or Change of Contract Time or otherwise for expenses or damage directly attributable to Contractor's
stopping Work as permitted by this article.
16 DISPUTE RESOLUTION
If and to the extent that Owner and Contractor have agreed on the method and procedure for resolving
disputes between them that may arise under this Agreement, such dispute resolution method and
procedure will proceed. If no such agreement on the method and procedure for resolving such dispute& has
been reached, subject to the provisions of the article for Decisions on Disputes, Owner and Contractor may
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Contrallmprovements Project
Section III
111-35
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Faci/ities
Odor Contro/lmprovements Project
Section 11/
11/-36
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
exercise such rights or remedies as either may otherwise haVe under the Contract Documents or by Laws
or Regulations in respect of any dispute provided, however,_ that nothing herein shall require a dispute to be
submitted to binding arbitration.
17 MISCELLANEOUS
17.1 SUBMITTAL AND DOCUMENT FORMS
The form of all submittals, notices, change orders and other documents permitted or required to be used or
transmitted under the Contract Documents shall be determined by the Engineer subject to the approval of
the Owner.
17.2 GIVING NOTICE
Whenever any provision of the Contract Documents requires the giving of written notice, notice will be
deemed to have been validly given if delivered in person to the individual or to a member of the firm or to
an officer of the corporation for whom it is intended, or if delivered or sent by registered or certified mail,
postage prepaid, to the last business address known to the giver of the notice.
17.3 NOTICE OF CLAIM
Should Owner or Contractor suffer injury or damage to person or property because of any error, omission
or any act of the other party or of any of the other party's officers, employees or agents or others for whose
acts the other party is legally liable, claim will be made in writing to the other party within a reasonable time
of the first observance of such injury or damage. The provisions of this paragraph shall not be construed as
a substitute for or a waiver of the provisions of any applicable statute of limitations or repose.
17.4 PROFESSIONAL FEES AND COURT COSTS INCLUDED
Whenever reference is made to "claims, costs, losses and damages," the phrase shall include in each
case, but not be limited to, all fees and charges of engineers, architectsj attorneys and other professionals
and all court or other dispute resolution costs.
17.5 ASSIGNMENT OF CONTRACT
The Contractor shall not assign this contract or any part thereof or any rights thereunder without the
approval of the Owner, nor without the consent of surety unless the surety has waived its rights to notice of
assignment.
17.6 RENEWAL OPTION
Annual Contracts issued through Public Works Administration may be renewed for up to two (2) years,
upon mutual consent of both the City and the ContractorNendor. All terms, conditions and unit prices shall
remain constant unless otherwise specified in the contract specifications or in the Invitation to bid.
Renewals shall be made at the sole discretion of the City, and mustbe agreed to in writing by both parties.
All renewals are contingent upon the availability of funds, and the satisfactory performance of the
Contractor as determined by Public Works Administration.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I.
I
I
I
I
SECTION IV
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Table of Contents
SCOPE OF WORK.. . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . .. ... ... ... . .. ... ... ... .. . ... . .. . .. ... .., ... ... ... ... ... .. . .... .... IV-1'
SCOPE DESCRiPTION............ ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .-.. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...... ... ... ... ... .., .., ... ... ..IV-1
SCOPE OF WORK CHECKLIST... ... ... ... ... . .. ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . ... .. . .. . ... ... ... ... . .. ... ... .. . . . . ... .. .IV-1
LINE, GRADE AND RECORD DRAWiNGS............... ..................... ........................... ......IV-4
LINE AND GRADE SHALL BE PERFORMED BY THE CONTRACTOR......... ......... ...... ......IV-4
LINE AND GRADE SHALL BE PERFORMED BY THE CiTY............... ........ ....... ....... ..... ...IV-4
DEFINITION OF TERMS..................... ..................................................................... ...IV-4
ORDER AND LOCATION OF THE WORK... ... ............ ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ..IV-5
EXCAVATION FOR UNDERGROUND WORK............................................................... ...IV-5
CONCRETE...... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...... ... ... ... ... ...... ... ...... ... .., ... ... ... ... ... ... ..IV-6
EXCAVATION AND FORMS FOR CONCRETE WORK......... .......................................... ...IV-7
EXCAVATION...........................................................................;............................ .IV-7
FORMS.. . ... .. . .. . ... .. . ... ... . . . . .. .. . ... .. . . .. .. . .. . ... ... ... .. . ... .. . ... ... . . . .. . . . . .. . ... ... .. . .. . .. . ... .. . ... ... ..IV-7
REINFORCEMENT. .. .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . ... ... ... . . . . .. . .. ... .. . . .. ... . .. .. . . .. .. . .. . .. . ... ... .. . .. . .. . . . . . .. ... .. . ... ... .IV-7
BASIS OF PAyMENT........................... ................................................................... ../V-7
OBSTRUCTIONS...................................................................................................... .IV-7
RESTORATION OR REPLACEMENT OF DRIVEWAYS, CURBS, SIDEWALKS AND STREET
PAVEMENT... ... ... ... ... ... .., ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... , .. ... ... ... ... ... .. .IV-7
11 WORK IN EASEMENTS OR PARKWAyS.............................,................................. ...... ...IV-B
. 12 DEWA TERI NG... ... .. . .. . ... ... ... ... .. . ...... ... .. . ... ... ... ... .. . .. . .. . ... ... ... .. . .. . ... ... .. . ... .. . .. .. .. .. . ... .. . ..IV-B
13 SANITARY MANHOLES...... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .IV-9
13.1 BU IL T UP TYPE... ... ... ... ... .. . ... . .. ,.. ... ... . .. ... ... . .. ... ... ... ... ... . , . . .. ... ... ... . .. ... ... .. . , .. . .. '" . .. . . ./V-9
13.2 PRECAST TYPE........,......................................................................................,... ..IV-9
13.2.1 MANHOLE ADJUSTMENT RINGS (GRADE RINGS)............... ............................. ..IV-10
13.3 DROP MANHOLES...... .................................... ...............................................,...... ..IV-1 0
13.4 FRAMES AND COVERS...... ... ... '" ... ... ... ." ... ...... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ......... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .IV-1 0
13.5 MANHOLE COATINGS.......................................................................................... ...IV-1 0
13.6 CONNECTIONS TO MANHOLES............................................................................. IV-11
14 BACKFILL............................................................................................................ ...IV-11
15 STREET CROSSINGS, ETC.................................................................................... ...IV-11
16 RAISING OR LOWERING OF SANITARY SEWER, STORM DRAINAGE STRUCTURES.......IV-11
16.1 BASIS OF PAyMENT............................................................................................. IV-11
17 UNSUITABLE MATERIAL REMOVAL........................................................................... IV-11
1.1
1.2
2
2.1
2.2
3
4
5
6
7
7.1
7.2
B
8.1
9
10
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
TOC- 1
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
TOC- 2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
17.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT................................................................................. ...IV-12
17.2 BASIS OF PAyMENT............................................. ............ .,............................... ...IV-12
18 UNDERDRAINS............................................................... ....................................... .IV-12
18.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT................................................................................. ....IV-12
18.2 BASIS OF PAyMENT.......................................................................................... ....IV-12
19 STORM SEWERS._....................................................................... ........................... .IV-12
19.1 AS BUILT INFORMATION.................................................................................... ...IV-13
19.2 TESTING.........................................................................................:.................. .IV-13
19.3 BASIS OF PAyMENT................................................ .......................................... ...IV-13
20 SANITARY SEWERS AND FORCE MAINS............................................................... ... ..IV-13
20.1 MATERIALS..;........................................................................ ...-........................ ...IV-13
20.1.1 GRAVITY SEWER PIPE................................................................................ .IV-13
20. 1.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE...................................................................................... .IV-14
20.2 INSTALLATION................................................................................................... ..IV-14
20.2.1 GRA VITY SEWER PIPE................................................................................ .IV-14
20.2.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE...................................................................................... .IV-14
20.3 AS BUILT DRAWiNGS.......................................................................................... ..IV-14
20.4 TESTI NG. .. ... ... ... .. . .. . ... . .. ... . .. ... . .. ... ... ... .. . .. . .. . ... . .. . .. ... ... ... ... ... ... . .. ... . .. ... ... ... ... ... . .. .IV-15
20.4.1 TESTING OF GRAVITY SEWERS................................................................. ..../V-15
20.4.2 TESTING OF FORCE MAINS.................................... .................................. ....IV-15
20.5 BASIS OF PAyMENT........................... ............................................................... ...IV-15
20.5.1 GRAVITY SEWER PIPE............................................................................... ..IV-15
20.5.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE......... d.......... ............................ ................. ............ ...... ...IV-15
21 DRAINAGE... ... ... ... ... ... ...... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...... ...... ... ... ... ... ... ...... ... .....: ... ... ... ...... ... ... .IV-15
22 ROADWAY BASE AND SUBGRADE................................................... ............,........... .IV-16
22 .1 BASE. .. . .. ... ... .. . .. . . .. ... . .. ... ... . .. ... ... ... ... . .. . .. ... ... . . . ... ... . .. ... ... ... ... ... .. . .. . ... .. . . .. . .. ... ... .. .IV-16
22.1.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT FOR BASE AND REWORKED BASE......................... IV-17
22.1.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT FOR BASE AND REWORKED BASE...................................IV-17
22.2 SU BGRADE... ... .. . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . ... .. . . .. ... ... . . . . . . .. . .... ... . . . . .. ... . . . .. . ... .. . . .. . . . . . . ... . .. .. . .. .IV-17
22.2.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT............................................. ........................... .. ..IV-18
22.2.2 BASIS OF PAyMENT................................................................................. ....IV-18
23 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE MATERIALS... ... ... ... ... ...... ... ... ... ... ......... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...... ... ... .IV-18
23.1 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE... ... ... ... ... ... ... '" ...... ...... ... ... ... ... '" ... ... ... ...... ... ... ... ...... ... ... .IV-18
23.1.1 AGGREGATE................. ..... ........ ........... ....... .......... ......... .................. ...........IV-18
23.1.2 BITUMINOUS MATERIALS........... .-................................................................. IV-18
23.2 HOT BITUMINOUS MIXTURES - PLANT, METHODS, EQUIPMENT & QUALITY'
ASSURANCE......... ...... ...... ... ... ... ...... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...... ... ...... ... ... ... ... ......... ... ...... . ..IV-18
23.3 ASPHALT MIX DESIGNS AND TYPES... ... ......... ......... .: '_'" ......... ...... ... ...... ... ............. . IV-19
23.4 ASPHALT PAVEMENT DESIGNS AND LAYER THiCKNESS...... ...... ......... ......... ......... ...IV-19
23.5 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION REQUiREMENTS.................................... ..................... .IV-20
23.6 CRACKS AND POTHOLE PREPARATION.....,..........,.............................................. ...IV-20
23.6.1 CRACKS... ...... .............................. ... ... ....... ........;.. ......... ... ...... ...... ...... ..... ...IV-20
23.6.2 POTHOLES... ... ... .......... ........... ............ ......... ...... ......... .... ..... ............ ....... ...IV-20
23.7 ADJUSTMENT OF MANHOLES........................................................................... .....IV-20
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
23.8 ADDITIONAL ASP HAL T REQUIREMENTS... ............................................................ ..IV-21
23.9 SUPERPAVE ASPHALTIC CONCRETE..................................................................... IV-22
23.10 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT........................................................................... .......... IV-22
23.11 BASIS OF PAyMENT........................................................................... ......................IV-22
24 ADJUSTMENT TO THE UNIT BID PRICE FOR ASPHALT............ ............... .........................IV-22
25 GENERAL PLANTING SPECiFiCATIONS........................... ..................................................IV-23
25.1 IRRIGATION... .. . ... ... ... ... ... . .. ... ... . .. ... .. . .. . ... .. . ... ... ... ... . .. ... . .. ... ... .................~................ .IV-23
25.1.1 DESCRiPTION............................................................................................ .IV-23
25.1.2 PRODUCTS............................................................................................... ..IV-24
25.1.3 EXECUTION................ ................. ......... ................................................. .....IV-28
25.2 LANDSCAPE... ... ... ... ... ... ... .., '" ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . ... .................................: IV-31
25.2.1 GENERAL...................... ........... ............. ................... ............ ........ ......... ......IV-31
25.2.2 PRODUCTS................................................................................................ .IV-36
25.2.3 EXECUTION............... ............................................. .................................. ..IV-39
26 HDPE DEFORMED - REFORMED PIPE L1NING..................................................................IV-45
26.1 INTENT... ... ... . .. . .. ... . .. ... ... ... ... .. . .. . ... .. . ... ... ... ... ... ... . .. . .. .. . .. . ......................................... ..IV-45
26.2 PRODUCT AND CONTRACTOR/INSTALLER ACCEPTABILITY.................................... ..IV-45
26.3 MATERIALS....................................................................................... ......................IV-45
26.4 CLEANING/SURFACE PREPARATION..................................................................... .IV-46
26.5 TELEVISION INSPECTION.................................................................................... .IV-46
26.6 LINER INSTALLATION......................................................;........ ............................ IV-46
26.7 LATERAL RECONNECTION......... ............ ............................................................ ...IV-47
26.8 TIME OF CONSTRUCTION................................................................................... ..IV-47
26.9 PAYMENT... ... . .. ... ... ... ... . .. .. . ... '" .. . . .. . . . ... ... ... .. . . .. ... .. . ... ...... .. . ... ... ... ... ... .................... ..IV-4 7
27 PLANT MIX DRiVEWAyS...... ... ... ... ... ... ... .., ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ....... ... .. .IV-4 7
27.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT... ... ... ...... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .... ..IV-4 7 .
27.2 BASIS OF PAyMENT........................................................................... ......................IV-48
28 REPORTING OF TONNAGE OF RECYCLED MATERIALS... .................. ......... ......... ...... ..IV-48
29 CONCRETE CURBS.............................................................................. ......................IV-48
29.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT........................... ... ... ... ... ...... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . ..IV-48
29.2 BASIS .OF PAyMENT........................................................................... ......................IV-48
30 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS AND DRiVEWAyS..................... .................... ...................... .IV-48
30.1 CONCRETE SiDEWALKS...... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .., ... ... ... ... ... ... ..... .IV-48
30.2 CONCRETE DRiVEWAyS.......................................... ............................................ .IV-49
30.3 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ......... ... ... ... ...... .., ... ... ... ... ... ... ...... '" ...IV-49
30.4 BASIS OF PAyMENT...................................................... ..................... ......................IV-49
31 SODDING... ... ... ... ... ... .. . .. . ... . .. ... ... . .. ... ... ... ... ... .. . . .. ... ... ... ... . . . ... ... . .. . .. ... ... .. . . . . ... ... . .. .. .IV-49
32 SEEDING............................................................................................................. ..IV-50
33 STORM MANHOLES, INLETS, CATCH BASINS OR OTHER STORM STRUCTURES...........IV-50
33.1 BUILT UP TYPE STRUCTURES.............................................................................. . IV-50
33.2 PRECAST TYPE..................................................... ............................................ ...IV-50
33.3 BASIS OF PAyMENT........................................................................... ......................IV-51
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Contrallmprovements Project
Section IV
TOC- 3
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
TOC-4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
34 MATERIAL USED............ ............................................................... ........................ ...IV-51
35 CONFLICT BETWEEN PLANS AND SPECiFiCATIONS......... ......... ...... ...... .................. ...IV-51
36 STREET SiGNS......... ... ... ... .. . . .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . ... . .. ... ... ... '" ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . .. . .. . IV-51
37 AUDIONIDEO TApE OF WORK AREAS...................................................................... . IV-51
37.1 AUDIONIDEO TAPE OF WORK AREA SHALL BE PREPARED BY THE CiTY...... ... ... ... ... .IV-51
37.2 AUDIONIDEO TAPE OF ALL WORK AREAS SHALL BE PREPARED
BY THE CONTRACTOR IV-51
37.2. 1 CONTRA CTOR TO PREPARE AUDIONIDEO TAPE............................................ .IV-51
37.2.2 SCHEDULING OF AUDIONIDEO TAPE............... ......... ...... ....... ............ ......... ...IV-51
37.2.3 PROFESSIONAL VIDEOGRAPHERS............................................................... IV-52
37.2.4 EQUIPMENT............................................................................................... .IV-52
37.2.5 RECORDED INFORMATION, AUDIO.............................................................. ..IV-52
37.2.6 RECORDED INFORMATION VIDEO.............................................................. ...IV-52
37.2.7 VIEWER ORIENTATION. ................................................... .............. .......... .... . IV-52
37.2.8 LIGHTING...... ........... ....... ...... ..................... ......... ...... ........ ...................... ...IV-53
37.2.9 SPEED OF TRAVEL......................... ........................ .................... .... ........... ...IV-53
37.2.10 VIDEO LOG/INDEX....... ........ .. ....... .. .... .. . ... . . . . .. ... ... . ... . .. .... .. . . ... ... ... .. . ... . . . .. . . ..IV-53
37.2.11 AREA OF COVERAGE.................................................................................. . IV-53
37.2.12 COSTS OF VIDEO SERVICES...................................................................... ..IV-53
38 EROSION AND SILTATION CONTROL...................................................................... ...IV-53
38.1 STABILIZATION OF DENUDED AREAS...................................................... .............. . IV-53
38.2 PROTECTION AND STABILIZATION OF SOIL STOCKPiLES...... ......... ...... ........... .........IV-53
38.3 PROTECTION OF EXISTING STORM SEWER SYSTEMS..................................;.........IV-54
38.4 SEDIMENT TRAPPING MEASURES....................................................................... ..IV-54
38.5 SEDIMENTATION BASiNS..................................................................................... . IV-54
38.6 WORKING IN OR CROSSING WATERWAYS OR WATERBODIES.................................IV-54
38.7 SWALES, DITCHES AND CHANNELS......................................................... ........... ...IV-54
38.8 UNDERGROUND UTILITY CONSTRUCTION............................................................ . IV-55
38.9 MAINTENANCE... . .. ... ... ... ... .. . ... ... . .. ... .. . .. . ... ... .. . .. . . .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...................... .IV-55
38.10 COM PLIANCE. . . ... .. . ... ... ... . . . . .. . .. . . . .. . . .. .. . .. . .. . ... . . . . .. . .. . . . ... . . . . . . .. . ... ... ... ... ..................... IV-55
39 UTILITY TIE IN LOCATION MARKING................................................ .;..................... ...IV-58
40 AWARD OF CONTRACT, WORK SCHEDULE AND GUARANTEE.....................................IV-58
41 WATER MAINS AND APPURTENANCES.................................................. ................... . IV-59
41.1 SCOPE. .. . . . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . .. . .. ... ... ... .. . ... ... ... ... ... ... .................... ..IV-59
41.2 MATERIALS....................................................................................... ......................IV-59
41.2.1 GENERAL...... ............. ........... ... ...... ......... ............ ...... ...... ...... .........................IV-59
41.2.2 PIPE MATERIALS AND FITTINGS................................................................... . IV-59
41.2.3 GATE VALVES.......................................................................... .......................IV-60
41.2.4 VALVE BOXES......................................................................... ........................IV-61
41.2.5 HyDRANTS...... ......... ......... .............. ........ ........ ....... ........... .... .........................IV-61
41.2.6 SERVICE SADDLES..................................................................................... .IV-62
41.2.7 TESTS, INSPECTION AND REPAIRS. ................. ........................... ................. .IV-62
41.2.8 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS.............. ................ ...... ............................... ... ..... .IV-63
41.2.9 TAPPING SLEEVES........... ... ............. ............ .......... ..... ... ......... ....... ...... ..... ...IV-63
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
41.2.10 BLOW OFF HyDRANTS............ ....... ..... ......... ......... ......... ............................. ./V-64
41.3 CONSTRUCTION............................................................................... ......................IV-64
41.3.1 MATERIAL HANDLING......... ...... ...... ....... ...... .... ......... ................... ................ .IV-64
41.3.2 PIPE LAyiNG.......................................................................... ....................... IV-64
41.3.3 SETTING OF VALVES, HYDRANTS AND FITTINGS.......................................... IV-65
41.3.4 CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING LINES............................. ................................. .IV-66
41.4 TESTS... ... .. . ... ... ... ... ... ..: .. . ... ... ... ... ... . .. ... ... ... ... . .. ... ... ... . . . ... ... ... .... ... ... ..................... .IV-66
41.4.1 HYDROSTATIC TESTS................................................................................. .IV-66
41.4.2 NOTICE OF TEST.......................................................................... ................. IV-66
41.5 STERI LIZA TION... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . .. ... ... ... ... ... . .. .................... ..IV-66
41.5.1 STERILIZING AGENT.......;........................................................................... .IV-67
41.5.2 FLUSHING SySTEM.................................................................................... .IV-67
41.5.3 STERILIZATION PROCEDURE....................................................................... .IV-67
41.5.4 RESIDUAL CHLORINE TESTS...........................................................;........... .IV-67
41.5.5 BACTERIAL TESTS.........;.............................. .............................................. .IV-67
41.6 MEASUREMENT AND PAyMENT............................................................... ........... ...IV-67
41.6.1 GENERAL............................................................................... ........................IV-67
41.6.2 FURNISH AND INSTALL WATER MAINS.......................................................... .IV-68
41.6.3 FURNISH AND INSTALL FITTINGS.................................................... ............. .IV-68
41.6.4 FURNISH AND INSTALL GATE VALVES COMPLETE WITH BOXES AND COVERS...IV-68
41.6.5 FURNISH AND INSTALL FIRE HYDRANTS... .......... ........ ...... ... ......... ..... ...... ..... .IV-69
42 GAS SYSTEM SPECiFiCATIONS.............................................................................. ..IV-69
43 TENNIS COURTS................................................;.......................... ....... ..................;...IV-69
43.1 PAVEDTENN/S COURTS............... ..................................................................... ...IV-69
43.1.1 SOIL TREATMENTS........ .......... ........ ............................... ............................. .IV-69
43. 1.2 BASE COURSE........................................................................... ................. JV-69
43.1.3 PRIME COAT............................................................................. .......................IV-69
43.1.4 LEVELING COURSE... ..................................................... .....................;...... ..IV-69
43.1.5 SURFACE COURSE................................................................ ..... ....... ........ ..IV-70
43.1.6 COLOR COAT................ .......................................................... ....................... IV-70
43.2 CLAY TENNIS COURTS........................................................................... .................IV-71
43.2.1 GENERAL........................................................................ ................................IV-71
43.2.2 SITE PREPARATION. .................................................... .................. ......... .....IV-72
43.2.3 SLOPE.......................................................................... ...................................IV-73
43.2.4 BASE CONSTRUCTION... ............. .............. ... ............ ............ ...... ...... .......... ..IV-73
43.2.5 PERIMETER CURBING................................................................................ ..IV-73
43.2.6 SURFACE COURSE...................................................................................... .IV-73
43.2.7 ROOT BARRIER......................................................................... .....................IV-74
43.2.8 FENCiNG................................................................................. .......................IV-74
43.2.9 WiNDSCREENS.......................................................................... ....................IV-7 4
43.2.10 COURT EQUlPMENT....... ......... ..... ......... ........................... ........................ ....IV-74
43.2.11 SHADE STRUCTURE... ......... ...... ...... ... .................. ...... ... ... ...... ... ...........~..... .IV-76
43.2.12 WATER SOURCE (Potable) ........................... ............................................... ..IV-76
43.2.13 CONCRETE.............................................................................. .;.....................IV-76
43.2.14 EXISTING SPORT TENNIS COURT LIGHTING... ......... ............ ............ ...............IV-76
43.2.15 WATER COOLER.......................................................................... .................. IV-77
43.2.16 DEMONSTRATION......................................................................... ................./V-77
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
TOC-5
43.2.17 WARRANTY............................................................................. ......... ...... ........IV-77
44 WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL........................................................................... ...IV-78
44.1 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBLE FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL........................IV-78
44.2 WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN............................................................... ...IV-78
44.2.1 WORK ZONE SAFETY................ ................. .................. .............................. ..IV-78
44.3 ROADWAY CLOSURE GUiDELINES.............................................. .......................... IV-78
44.3.1 ALL ROADWAyS.......................................................................... ....................IV-79
44.3.2 MAJOR ARTERIALS, MINOR ARTERIALS, LOCAL COLLECTORS........................IV-79
44.3.3 MAJOR ARTERIALS, MINOR ARTERIALS....................................................... ..IV-79
44.3.4 MAJOR ARTERIALS..................................................................................... .IV-79
44.4 APPROVAL OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN......... ..................... ..............IV-79
44.5 INSPECTION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL OPERATION... ... ... ... ........ ...... ...... IV-79
44.6 PAYMENT FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL...... ... ...... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...... ... ... ... ..IV-80
44. 7 CERTIFICATION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL SUPERVISOR... ... ......... ... ... ... ..IV-80
45 CURED-iN-PLACE PIPE LINING.............................................................................. ...IV-80
45 .1 INTENT... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . .. . . . . . . . .. . .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ......................................... ..IV-80
45.2 PRODUCT AND CONTRACTOR/INSTALLER ACCEPTABILITY......... ............... ..... .........IV-80
45.3 MATERIALS.................................... .'...............,.................................. ......................IV-81
45.4 CLEANING/SURFACE PREPARATION................................................................... ...IV-81
45.5 TELEVISION INSPECTION.................................................................................... .IV-81
45.6 LINER INSTALLATION............................................. n............................ ...................IV-81
45.7 LATERAL RECONNECTION.................................................................................. ../V-82
45.8 TIME OF CONSTRUCTION.................................................................................... .IV-82
45.9 PAYMENT... ... ... ... . .. ... ... . .. .. . ... . . . ... ... .. . ... ... ... . . . .. . . .. ... ... ... ... ...... ... ... ... . .. .................... JV-82
46 SPECIFICATIONS FOR POLYETHYLENE SLlPLlNING...... ......... ......... ............... ......... ...IV-82
46.1 MATERIALS....................................................................................... ......................IV-82
46.1.1 PIPE AND FITTINGS............. ......................... ............... .:......... .:. .............. .....IV-82
46.1.2 QUALITY CONTROL...... .............................. .................. ............ .................. ..IV-82
46.1.3 SAMPLES......... ................................ ...................... ................. .......................IV-83
46.1.4 REJECTION...... ......... ............................. ................................. .......................IV-83
46.2 PIPE DIMENSiONS.................. ........................................................... ......................IV-83
46.3 CONSTRUCTION PRACTiCES..................................................................... ......... IV-83
46.3.1 HANDLING OF PIPE..................... ................ ............................................ ....IV-83
46.3.2 REPAIR OF DAMAGED SECTIONS....... .......................................................... .IV-83
46.3.3 PIPE JOIN/NG......................................................................... ........................IV-83
46.3.4 HANDLING OF FUSED PIPE...... ............ .... ..... ......... ......... ................. .... .........IV-83
46.4 SLlPLlNING PROCEDURE.........................,....................................................... .....IV-84
46.4.1 PIPE REQUIREMENTS AND DIMENSIONS........................................... .......... ..IV-84
46.4.2 CLEANING AND INSPECTION...................................................................... ...IV-84.46.4.3 INSERTION SHAFT AND EXCAVATIONS... ...... .................... ....... ... ...... ..... .........IV-84
46.4.4 INSERTION OF THE LlNER.......................................................................... ..IV-84
46.4.5 CONFIRMATION OF PIPE SiZES................................................................... ..IV-85
46.4.6 UNDERDRAIN CONNECTIONS IF REQUIRED...... ...... ............ ............. ..............IV-85
46.4.7 BACKFILLING.......................................................................... ........................IV-85
46.4.8 POINT REPAIR....................................................................... ..........................IV-85
46.4.9 CLEAN UP OPERATIONS............................................................................ ..IV-85
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section N
roC-6
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
-'
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
47 SPECIFICATIONS FOR POLYVINYL CHLORIDE RIBBED PiPE......... ... ......... ......... ....... ...IV-86
47.1 SCOPE........................................................................... ...........................................IV-86
47.2 MATERIALS....................................................................................;.. ......................IV-86
47.3 PIPE... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ............;......... .IV-86
47.4 JOINING SySTEM.............................................................................. ....................... IV-86
47.5 FITTINGS... ... ... ... . .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . ... ... ... .................... ..IV-86
48 GUNITE SPECiFiCATIONS.................. .......................................... ........................... .IV-86
48.1 PRESSURE INJECTED GROUT... ... ... ... ... .., ... ...... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...... ..: ... ... ... ... ... ... .... ..IV-86
48.2 REHABILITATION OF CORRUGATED METAL PIPE WITH GUNITE................................IV-87
48.3 COMPOSiTION.................................... ....................................... .............................. IV-87
48.4 STRENGTH REQUiREMENTS.............................................................................. ...IV-87
48.5 MATERIALS... ... ... ... .,. ... ... ... ... ... . .. ... ... ... ... ... . .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ..................... .IV-87
48.6 WATER........................................................................... ...........................................IV-87
48.7 REINFORCEMENT........;......................................................... ........... ...................... IV-88
48.8 STORAGE OF MATERIALS.................................................................. ......................IV-88
48.9 SURFACE PREPARATION........................................................... ......... ......................IV-88
48.10 PROPORTIONING.............................................................................. ......;...............IV-88
48.11 MIXING... ... ... ... . . . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . .. ... . .. ... . .. ... '" ... ... ... '" ... . . . . . . ... . .. ... ..................... .IV-88
48.12 APPLICATION... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . ... . . . ... . .. . .. ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . ... ... ... . .. .................... ..IV-89
48.13 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS.............................. ..................................... .......................IV-89
48.14 SURFACE FINiSH.............................................................................. .......................IV-89
48.15 CU RI NG... ... ... ... . .. ... .. . .. . .. . .. . ... ... ... . .. ... ... ... ... ... . . . ... . . . ... ... .. . ........................................ ..IV-89
48.16 ADJACENT SURFACE PROTECTION... ... ...... ... ... ... ... ... ...... ... ... ... ....... ... ......................IV-90
48.17 INSPECTION... ... ... . .. ... .. . ... ... ... ... .. . .. . ... ... ... ... ;.. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . ................................ ..IV-90
48.18 EQU I PMENT... . .. ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . ... ... ... ... ... ... . .. ... . .. ... ... ... ... ... ... . .. .... . .. ... ...................... .IV-90
49 SANITARY AND STORM MANHOLE LINER RESTORATION... ............ .......................... ...IV-91
49.1 SCOPE AND INTENT........................................................................... .....................IV-91
49;2 PAyMENT....................................................................................... .........................IV-91
49.3 FIBERGLASS LINER PRODUCTS......................................................... ......................IV-91
49.3.1 MATERIALS................................................ ............................ .........................IV-91
49.3.2 INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION................................................................. .../V-92
49.4 STRONG SEAL MS-2 LINER PRODUCT SySTEM..................................................... .IV-92
49.4.1 MATERIALS............................................................................. ........................IV-93
49.5 INFILTRATION CONTROL........................................................................... .............IV-93
49.6 GROUTING MiX................................................................................. ......................IV-93
49.7 LINER MiX........................................................................... ..................................... .IV-93
49.8 . WATER............................................................................................. ......................IV-94
49.9 OTHER MATERIALS.............................. ............................................. ......................IV-94
49.10 . EQUIPMENT... ... ... ...... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ......... ... ... ......... ... ... ... ... ................. ...... ..... ..... ..IV-94
49.11 INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION........................ ... ... ... ... ...... ... ... ......... ..................... .IV-94
49.11.1 .PREPARATION.......................................................................... ....................../V-94
49.11.2 MIXiNG.......................................................................... ...................................IV-95
49.11.3 SPRAyING.......................................................................... ............................./V-95
49.11 A PRODUCT TESTING................................................................ ........................./V-95
49.11.5 CURING......................................;...........................~...... ..................................IV-95
49.11.6 MANHOLE TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE....... ..... ..................... ........................ .IV-95
. .
49.12. INNERLlNE ENVIRONMENTAL SERVICES LINER PRODUCT SySTEM...... ... ...... ... ... ... .IV-96
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
TOC.7
49.12.1 SCOPE.......................................................................... .................................. IV-96
49.12.2 MATERIALS.......................................................................... ...........................IV-96
49.12.3 INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION.................................................................. ..IV-9B
50 PROJECT INFORMATION SiGNS........................................................... ......................IV-1 00
50.1 SCOPE AND PURPOSE......................................................... .................. .........:.....IV-100
50.2 TYPE OF PROJECT SIGN, FIXED OR PORTABLE...... ...... .................. ................. ......IV-100
50.3 FIXED SIGN... ... ... '" ... ;. . ... ... ... ... ... ... .;. ... ... ... .. . ... ... ... ... ... ... '" ... ................................ ..IV-1 00
50.4 PORTABLE SiGNS....................:...................................................... .......................IV-100
50.5 SIGN COLORING......... ......... .......................................................... .........................IV-1 01
50.6 SIGN PLACEMENT........................................................................... ......................IV-101 .
50.7 SIGN MAINTENANCE.......................................................................... ...................IV-1 01
50.8 TYPICAL PROJECT SiGN..............................................................:............ ............IV-1 01
51 IN-LINE SKATING SURFACING SySTEM............................................................... ....IV-1 01
51.1 SCOPE.. . ... ... ... ... ... . .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . ... ... ... ... ... ... ..................... ~.................... ..IV-1 01
51.2 SURFACE PREPARATIONS............................................................... ...................... IV-102
51.2.1 ASPHALT.......................................................................... .............................IV-102
51.2.2 t;;ONCRETE................ ........................................................... .........................IV-102
51.2.3 COURT PATCH BINDER MIX.................................................... ........................IV-102
51.3 APPLICATION OF ACRYLIC FILLER COAT.........;....................................... _.. ....... ...IV-1 02
51.4 APPLICATION OF FORTIFIED PLEXIPAVE.......................................... .............:...... IV-102
51.5 PLEXIFLORAPPLlCATION..................................;............................ ......:.................IV-103
51.6 PLAYING LINES...... ..................................................................... ............................IV-1 03
51.7 GENERAL... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . ... . . . ... ... ... ... ... .. . ... ... . .. .. . ... . .. ... .................................... .IV-1 03
51.8 LI M ITA TIONS... ... . .. '" .. . ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . '" ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . ... . .. ... .............................. ..IV-1 03
52 RESIDENT NOTIFICATION OF START OF CONSTRUCTION.........................................IV-104
52.1 RESIDENT NOTIFICATION PERFORMED BY CITY... .................... ...................... ......IV-104
52.2 RESIDENT NOTIFICATION PERFORMED BY CONTRACTOR....................................IV-104
53 GABIONS AND MATTRESSES....................................... .............................,... ...........IV-105
53.1 MATERIAL. .. ... ... ... ... .. . . ..... ... . . . ... . ;. ... .. . . . . . . . .. . ;.. . .. . .. . .. ... ... ... ... ................................. ...IV-1 05
53.1.1 GABION AND RENO MATTRESS MATERIAL...... ............................................ .IV-105
53.1.2 GABJON AND MATTRESS FILLER MATERIAL: ...... ........... ........... ............ ....... ..IV-10B
53.1.3 MATTRESS WIRE....................................................... ............ ........ ............... IV-10B
53.1.4 GEOTEXTlLE FABRIC........................................................... .......................... IV-10B
53.2 PERFORMANCE.............................................................................. ...................... IV-108
54 LAWN MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS... ... ... ... ...... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...... ... ...... ... ... .........IV-109
. .
54.1 SCOPE... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... '" ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ......................................... IV-109
54.2 SCHEDULING OF WORK.................................................................. ... .,.... ............IV-110
54.3 WORK METHODS........................................................................... ........................IV-110
54.3.1 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULING..................................................................... IV-110
54.3.2 DUTIES PER SERVICE VISIT.. ....... .....;.....;...................... ................. .... ..;.....IV-110
54.4 LITTER... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... '" ... .. . .. . ... . . . . .. ... . .. ... ... ... .. . . .. . .. . .. . .. ...... ................................... ..IV-11 0
54.5 VISUAL CHECK... ... ... ... ... ... .. . ... ... .. . ... ... ... . .. ... .. . ... ... .. . .. . . .. .. . .. . ... ... .......................... ..IV-11 0
54.6 PLANT TRIMMING AND PALM PRUNING.................................:.....;........................ IV-11 0
54.7 PHOENIX SPECIES (CANARY DATE, INDIA DATE,PYGMY DATE, ETC~) ...............:.....IV-111
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
TOC- 8
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
54.8 DEBRIS REMOVAL........................................................................... ...................... IV-111
54.9 TRAFFIC CONTROL........................................................................... .....................IV-111
54.10 PEDESTRIAN SAFETY........................................................................... ................ IV-111
54.11 PLANT FERTILIZATION................................................... ........................ ................IV-111
54.12 WEED REMOVAL IN LANDSCAPED AREA............................................................ ...IV-111
54.13 MULCH CONDITION........................................................................... .................... IV-111
54.14 IRRIGATION SERVICE AND REPAIR..................................................................... ..IV-111
54.15 LAWN AND ORNAMENTAL PEST CONTROL...... .. .... ...... .. . ... ...... ... ...... ... ...... ...... .. . IV-112
54.16 PALM FERTILIZATION........................................................................... ..................IV-112
54.17 FREEZE PROTECTION........................................................................... ................IV-112
54.18 LEVEL OF SERViCE........................................................................... .....................IV-112
54.19 COMPLETION OF WORK........................ ................................................... ............IV-112
54.20 INSPECTION AND APPROVAL............................................................ ......................IV-112
54.21 SPECIAL CONDITIONS........................................................................... ................IV-113
55 MILLING OPERATIONS......... ...... ............................................................ ...................IV-113
55.1 EQUIPMENT, CONSTRUCTION & MILLED SURFACE............ ......... ...... .................. IV-113
55.2 ADDITIONAL MILLING REQUiREMENTS......... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...... ... ........ .. .IV-113
55.3 SALVAGEABLE MATERIALS............................................................ .........................IV-114
55.4 DISPOSABLE MATERIALS........................................................... ...... .......................IV-114
55.5 ADJUSTMENT AND LOCATION OF UNDERGROUND UTILlTIES.................................IV-114
55.6 ADJUSTMENT OF UTILITY MANHOLES.... ............................................................. .IV-114
55.7 TYPES OF MILLING........................................................................... ............,........IV-114
55.8 MILLING OF INTERSECTIONS.............................................................................. IV-115
55.9 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT......................................................................... ..... .... .IV~115
55.10 BASIS OF PAyMENT........................................................................... ................ ....IV-115
56 CLEARING AND GRUBBING.......... ....................................................... .......................IV-115
56.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT..................... .......................................... ...................... IV-115
56.2 BASIS OF PAyMENT.................. ......................................................... ....................IV-115
57 RI PRAP... .. . ... ... ... .. . . .. ... . .. . . . ... ... . . . . .. .. . . . . ... .. . ... ... . . . ... ... ... . . . ............................................ IV-115
57.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT........................................................... ......... ...................IV-115
57.2 BASIS OF PAyMENT........................................................................... ....................IV-116
58 TREATMENT PLANT SAFETY............................................................... ...................... IV-116
58.1 HAZARD POTENTIAL........................................................................... ...................IV-116
58.2 REQUIRED CONTRACTOR TRAINING.......................................... ...... ...................... IV-116
59 TRAFFIC SIGNAL EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS..... ................................................. ..IV-116
59.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAyMENT.......... .................................................. .IV-117
60 . SIGNING AND MARKING........................................................................... .................IV-117
60.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAyMENT.................................................... ........ .IV-117
61 ROADWAY LIGHTING........................................................................... ......................IV-117
61.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAyMENT............................................................ .IV-117
62 TREE PROTECTION........................................................................... .......................IV-117
62.1 TREE BARRiCADES........................... ... ... ... .. . ... . .. . .. ... ... . .. . .. ... . .. ... ... . .. ................... .IV-117
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
TOC- 9
62.2 ROOT PRUNING......................................................................... ...... ......................IV-118
62.3 PROPER TREE PRUNING.................................................................................. ...IV-119
63 PROJECT WEB PAGES......................................................... ......... ........................ .IV-120
63.1 WEB PAGES DESIGN... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...... ... ... ... ...... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...... ... ... ... ... ...IV-120
63.2 WEB ACCESSIBILITY GUiDELINES................................................................... ..IV-120
63.3 THE SUN AND WAVES LOGO AND ITS USE........................................................... .IV-120
63.4 MAPS AND GRAPHiCS...................................................................................... ..IV-120
63.5 INTERACTIVE FORMS................................. ...... ... ... ... ... ...... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...... ..IV-120
63.6 POSTING...... ................................................................................................... ..IV-120
63.7 WEB PAGES UPDATES....................................... ... ............................................ ..IV-120
SUPPLEMENTAL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
DIVISION 01
01340 SUBM ITT ALS. .. ... ... .. . .. . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... '" ... ... ... ... ... ........................ .IV-123
01600 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING............... ............... ........................IV-135
01640 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS............................................................ ........................ IV-137
01710 CLEAN ING... . .. ... ... . .. ... ... ... ... ... . .. . .. ... ... ... ... .. . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...................... ...IV-139
01800 OPENINGS AND PENETRATIONS IN CONSTRUCTION......... ............... ......... ...... ........IV-141
DIVISION 02
02110 SITE CLEARING................................................................................................. .IV-147
02200 EARTHWORK.................................................................................................... IV-149
02221 TRENCHING, BACKFILLING, AND COMPACTING FOR UTILlTIES..................................IV-157
02260 TOPSOILlNG AND FINISHED GRADING................................................................. .IV-163
DIVISION 06
06610 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC FABRICATIONS... ......... ...... ............... ...... ......IV-165
DIVISION 09
09850 SPRAYED CORROSION RESISTANT LINING (CRL) (POLYURETHANE).......................IV-169
09905 PAINTING AND PROTECTIVE COATINGS.................. ....... ............................ ......... ....IV-173
DIVISION 13
13221 ALUMINUM COVERS... ............................................................... ..................... ....IV-181
DIVISION 15
15060 PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS: BASIC REQUiREMENTS............ ...... ............ ........;... .......IV-185
15090 PIPE SUPPORT SySTEMS......................................................... ...............................IV-193
15100 VALVES - BASIC REQUiREMENTS...................................................................... ...IV-197
15104 BALL VALVES...................................................... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ........................... IV-201
15885M BIOLOGICAL ODOR CONTROL SySTEM...... ......... ... ... ..................... ... ... ...............IV-203
15885N BIOLOGICAL ODOR CONTROL SySTEM...... ... ... ... ... ...... .,.... ... ... ... ... ..................... IV-211
15890 HVAC: DUCTWORK...........................................;............................ .........................IV-217
15990 HVAC SYSTEMS: BALANCING AND TESTING......... ........ .... ......... ............;..... ...... ...IV-223
DIVISION 16
16010 ELECTRICAL: BASIC REQUiREMENTS............................................................... ....IV-225
16060 GROUNDING......................... ......................................................... .........................IV-229
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Contrallmprovements Project
Section IV
TOC- 10
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
16120 WIRE AND CABLE: 600 VOLT AND BELOW.................................... ..............................IV-233
16130 RACEWAYS AND BOXES.......n... n. n................... n.................n.......n................ ....IV-239
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
TOC- 11
THIS PAGE INTENTIONAllY lEFT BLANK
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
TOC- 12
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I-
I
I
1 SCOPE OF WORK
1.1 SCOPE DESCRIPTION
Project Name:
Project Number:
Scope of Work:
The scope of work consists of modifications to and extension of the existing odor control systems at the
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities.
Marshall Street
The odor control unit (Zabocs™ 8020, manufactured by U.S. Filter) will be supplied by the Owner. The
Contractor will be responsible for the construction of the concrete foundation that will support the unit,
improvements to the existing odor control ductwork, the installation of new odor control ductwork and
fittings, the installation of new influent channel covers, installation of a system drain and process water
lines, connection of the unit to the existing utilities, and also the installation of the necessary power
connections.
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities Odor Control Improvements Proiect
05-0062-UT
Northeast
The odor control unit (Zabocs™ 5000, manufactured by U.S. Filter) will be supplied by the Owner. The
Contractor will be responsible for the construction of the concrete foundation that will support the unit, the
installation of new odor control ductwork and fittings, the installation of new influent channel covers, the
installation of a system drain and process water lines, connection of the unit to the existing utilities, and
also the installation of the necessary power connections.
The add-alternate will include the coating of the influent channels under the new influent channel covers
and the installation of aluminum covers over the two primary clarifier weirs.
1.2 SCOPE OF WORK CHECKLIST
Project Name: Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Odor Contro/lmprovement Proiect
Project Number: 05-0062-UT
The following Articles of the Technical Specifications will apply to this contract if marked "X" as shown
below:
1 ~ Scope Of Work
2.1 ~ Line, Grade And Record Drawings - by Contractor
2.2 ~ Line, Grade And Record Drawings - by City
3 ~ Definition Of Terms
4 0 Order And Location Of The Work
5 ~ Excavation For Underground Work
6 ~ Concrete
7 ~ Excavation And Forms For Concrete Work
8 ~ Reinforcement
9 ~ Obstructions
10 ~ Restoration Or Replacement Of Driveways, Curbs, Sidewalks And Street Pavement
11 0 Work In Easements Or Parkways
12 ~ Dewatering
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
1V.1
13 D Sanitary Manholes
14 [g] Backfill
15 D Street Crossings, Etc.
16 D Raising Or Lowering Of Sanitary Sewer, Storm Drainage Structures
17 [g] Unsuitable Material Removal
18 D Underdrains
19 D Storm Sewers
20 [g] Sanitary Sewers And Force Mains
21 D DrainaQe
22 D Roadway Base And Subgrade
23 D Asphaltic Concrete Materials
24 D Adiustment To The Unit Bid Price For Asohalt
25 D General Planting Specifications .
26 D Hdpe Deformed - Reformed Pioe LininQ
27 D Plant Mix Driveways
28 D ReportinQ Of Tonnage Of Recycled Materials
29 D Concrete Curbs
30 ~ Concrete Sidewalks And Driveways
31 [g] Sodding
32 D Seeding
33 D Storm Manholes, Inlets, Catch Basins Or Other Storm Structures
34 [g] Material Used
35 [g] Conflict Between Plans And Specifications
36 D Street SiQns
37.1 D AudioNideo Tape Of Work Areas - by City
37.2 D AudioNideo Tape Of Work Areas - by Contractor
38 D Erosion And Siltation Control
39 D Utility Tie In Location Marking
40 ~ Award Of Contract, Work Schedule And Guarantee
41 [g] Water Mains and Appurtenances
42 D Gas System Specifications
43 D Tennis Courts
44 D Work Zone T rafflc Control
45 D Cured-In-Place Pipe LininQ
46 D Specifications for Polyethylene Sliplinina
47 D Soecifications for Polyvinyl Chloride Ribbed Pipe
48 D Gunite Specifications
49 D Sanitary and Storm Manhole Liner Restoration
50 D Proiect Information Signs
51 D In-Line Skating SurfacinQ System
52.1 D Resident Notification of Start of Construction - by City
52.2 D Resident Notification of Start of Construction - by Contractor
53 D Gabions and Mattresses
54 D Lawn Maintenance Specifications
55 D MillinQ Operations
56 [8J ClearinQ and Grubbing
57 D Riorao
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Contrallmprovements Project
Section IV
1V-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
58 ~
59 D
60 D
61 D
62 D
63 D
TIME: 200 DAYS
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
1V.3
2 LINE. GRADE AND RECORD D'RAWINGS
2.1 LINE AND GRADE SHALL BE PERFORMED BY THE CONTRACTOR
, .
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
IV-4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Benchmarks to be used shall be those as shown on the plans. Control points (for alignment only) shall be
established by the Engineer. Contractor shall submit cut sheets for all underground work 24 hours in
advance of commencement of the work for checking. Checking of. cut-sheets does not relieve the
Contractor of any responsibilities for any errors or conflicts whatsoever. Cut sheets shall be submitted in
triplicate. The Contractor shall provide three complete sets of Record construction drawings prior to final
payment being made.
"
2.2 LINE AND GRADE SHALL BE PERFORMED BY THE CITY
At the completion of all work the contractor shall be responsible to have furnished to the project inspector a
replacement of the wooden lath and stakes used in the construction of this project. Excessive stake
replacement caused by negligence of Contractor's forces, after initial line and grade have been set, as
determined by the City Engineer, will be charged to the Contractor at the rate of $100.00 per hour. Time
shall be computed for actual time on the project. All time shall be computed in one-hour increments.
Minimum charge is $100.00. The City will generate the project Record construction drawings.
3 DEFINITION OF TERMS
For the purpose of these Technical Specifications the following definition of terms shall apply:
City
City of Clearwater, Pinellas County, FL.
Engineer
The City Engineer of the City of Clearwater, Pinellas County, Florida, or his authorized
representative.
Contractor
The person, firm or corporation with whom this contract or agreement has been made by the City
of Clearwater or its duly authorized representative.
Inspector
An authorized representative of the City Engineer of Clearwater, assigned to make official
inspections of the material furnished and the work performed by the Contractor.
fD.O. I
The Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction as
Specifications
issued by the Florida Department of Transportation (latest English edition).
AAS.H. IO.
American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials.
AWS.
American Welding Society
AS. IM.
American Society for Testing Materials
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
A S.A
American Standards Association
AN.S.I.
American National Standards Institute
A w: WA
American Water Works AssOCiation
O.S.H.A
Occupational Safety & Health Administration
AG.I.
American Concrete Institute
Representative of Contractor
The Contractor shall assign a responsible person or persons, one of whom shall beat the
construction site at all times that work is progressing. The names and positions of these persons
shall be submitted to the City Engineer at the time of the pre-construction conference. This person
or persons shall not be changed without written approval of City Engineer.
Estimated Quantities
The Contractor's attention is called to the fact that the estimate of quantities as shown on the
Proposal Sheet is approximate and is given only as a basis of calculation upon which the award of
the contract is to be made. The City does not assume any responsibility that the final quantities will
remain in strict accordance with estimated quantities nor shall the contractor plead
misunderstandings or deception becaus~ of such estimate of quantities or of the character or
location of the work or of other conditions or situations pertaining thereto.
4 ORDER AND LOCATION OF THE WORK
The City reserves the right to accept and use any portion of the work whenever it is considered to the public
interest to do so. The Engineer shall have the power to direct on what line or street the Contractor shall
work and order thereof.
5 EXCAVATION FOR UNDERGROUND WORK
The contractor is responsible to take all necessary steps to conduct all excavation in a manner which
provides for the successful completion of the proposed work while at all times maintaining the safety of the
workmen, the general public and both public and private property. The contractor's methods of work will be
consistent with the standard practices and requirements of all appropriate Safety Regulatory Agencies,
particularly the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) requirements for excavation. Unless
otherwise specifically stated in these plans and specifications, the methods of safety control and
compliance with regulatory agency safety requirements are the full and complete responsibility of the
contractor.
For the purposes of the Contractor's safety planning in the bidding process, the contractor is to consider all
excavation to be done in the performance. of this contract to be in soil classified as OSHA "Type C". The
Contractor's attention is called to specific requirements of OSHA for excavation shoring, employee entry,
location of excavated material adjacent to excavation, the removal of water from the excavation, surface
encumbrances and in particular the requirement of a "Competent Person" to control safety operations. The
Contractor will identify his Competent Person to City staffat the start of construction.
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Contrallmprovements Project
Section IV
IV-5
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
1V-6
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
City staff are required from time to time to perform inspections, tests, survey location work, or other similar
activity in an excavation prepared by the contractor. City staff in conformance with the OSHA Excavation
Safety Requirements are to only enter an excavation in compliance with these OSHA standards. The City's
staff reserve the option to refuse entry into the Contractor's excavation if, in. the opinion of the City's staff,
the entry into the Contractor's excavation is unsafe or does not conform OSHA requirements. If this
circumstance occurs, the contractor must either provide the necessary safety requirements or provide
alternate means for the accomplishment of the City's work at the Contractor's expense.
The restoration quantities, if any, contained in the bid proposal for this contract to not contain sufficient
quantities to allow the contractor to perform excavation work using strictly the "open cut" method whereby
no shoring systems are used and trench side slopes are cut to conform to OSHA safety requirements
without a shoring system. In addition to safety reasons, the Contractor is required to use excavation and
trench-shoring methods in compliance with all safety requirements which allow the Contractor to control the
amount of restoration work necessary to complete the project.
Not more than one hundred (100) feet of trench shall be opened at one time in advance of the completed
work unless written permission is received from the Engineer for the distance specified. For pipe installation
projects, the trench shall be six (6) inches wider on each side than the greatest external horizontal width of
the pipe or conduit, including hubs, intended to be laid in them. The bottom of the trench under each pipe
joint shall be slightly hollowed, to allow the body of the pipe to rest throughout its length. In case a trench is
excavated at any place, excepting at joints, below the grade of its bottom as given, or directed by the
Engineer, the filling and compaction to grade shall be done in such manner as the Engineer shall direct,
without compensation.
6 CONCRETE
Unless otherwise directed, all concrete work shall be performed in accordance with the latest editions of the
Design and Control of Concrete Mixtures by the Portland Cement Association, the American Concrete
Institute, and FOOT's Standard Specifications. All appropriate testing shall be performed according to the
American Society of Testing Materials.
Unless otherwise specified, all concrete shall have fiber mesh reinforcing (1.5#/cy) and have a minimum
compressive strength of 3000 p.s.i. at 28 days. The cement type shall be Type II or 1/11 and shall conform to
AASHTO M-85. The aggregate shall conform to ASTM C-33 size 67. All ready mix concrete shall conform
to ASTM C-94. The slump for all concrete shall be in the range of 3" to 5", except when admixtures or
special placement considerations are required.
The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of all concrete
placement.
All concrete shall be tested in the following manner:
Placement of less than 5 cubic yards (cy) shall be tested at the Engineer's discretion. Otherwise, for each
class, for each day, for every 50 cy or part thereof exceeding 5 cy, one set of 3 compressive strength
cylinders will be required (1 at 7 days and 2 at 28 days). At the discretion of the Engineer, unacceptable test
results may require the Contractor to provide further tests, as determined by the Engineer, to determine
product acceptability, or need for removal, and compensation or denial thereof.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
7 EXCAVATION AND FORMS FORCONCRETE WORK
7.1 EXCAVATION
Excavating for concrete work shall be made to the required depth of the subgrade or base upon which the
concrete is to be placed. The base or subgrade shall be thoroughly compacted to a point 6" outside said
concrete work before the forms are placed. Concrete shall be poured "in the dry".
7.2 FORMS
Forms for concrete work shall be either wood or metal (except curbs, metal only, unless by written
permission from Engineer). They shall be free from warps or bends, shall have a depth equal to the
dimensions required for the depth of the concrete deposited against them and shall be of sufficient strength
when staked to resist the pressure of concrete without moving or springing.
8 REINFORCEMENT
When required, reinforcement shall be placed in the concrete work. Bar reinforcement shall be deformed:
ASTMA-A 615, steel shall be billet Intermediate or Hard Grade: Rail Steel A.A.S.H.T.O. M42. Twisted Bars
shall not be used, Fabric Reinforcement shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M55 (ASTM A185).
Welded deformed steel wire fabric for Concrete reinforcement shall meet the requirements of AASHTO M
221 (ASTM A497). Epoxy coated reinforcing Steel Bars shall meet ASTM 775/A77 M-86 requirements.
8.1 BASIS OF PAYMENT
Reinforcement shall not be paid for separately. The cost of such work shall be included in the contract unit
price for the item of work specified.
9 OBSTRUCTIONS
Any pipes, conduits, wires, mains, footings, driveways, or other structures encountered shall be carefully
protected from injury or displacement. Any damage thereto shall be fully, promptly, and properly repaired by
the Contractor to the satisfaction of the Engineer and the owner thereof. Should it become necessary to
change the position of water or gas or other pipes, sewer drains, or poles, the Engineer shall be at once
notified of the locality and circumstances, and no claims for damages arising from the delay in adjusting the
pipe, sewer drains or poles shall be made. Failure of the plans to show the location, nature or extent of any
existing structures or obstructions shall not be the basis of a claim for extra work. Any survey monument or
benchmark which must be disturbed shall be carefully referenced before removal, and unless otherwise
provided for, shall be replaced upon completion of the work by a registered land surveyor. Any concrete
removed due to construction requirements shall be removed to the nearest expansion joint or by saw cut.
Contractor shall consult Inspector for the approved means.
10 RESTORATION OR REPLACEMENT OF DRIVEWAYS, CURBS,
SIDEWALKS AND STREET PAVEMENT
Driveways, sidewalks, and curbs destroyed or damaged during construction shall be replaced and shall be
the same type of material as destroyed or damaged, or to existing City Standards, whichever provides the
stronger repair. All street pavement destroyed or damaged shall be replaced with the same type of material,
to existing City Standards, unless the existing base is unsuitable as determined by the Engineer, then the
base shall be replaced with City approved material. All replaced base shall be a minimum 8" compacted
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Contrallmprovements Project
Section IV
IV-l
Marshall Street and Norlheast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
1V-8
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
thickness, or same thickness as base destroyed plus 2", if over 6", and compacted to 98% of maximum
density per MSHTO T-180.
Unless called for in the proposal as separate bid items, cost of the above work including labor, materials
and equipment required shall be included in the bid price per lineal foot of main or square yard of base.
The bid price for street pavement, restoration or replacement when called for in the proposals, shall include
all materials, labor and equipment required to complete the work, and shall be paid for on a square yard
basis. When replacement is over a trench for utilities, the area of replacement shall be limited to twice the
depth of the cut plus twice the inside diameter of the pipe. All over this will be at the Contractor's expense.
The bid price for restoration or placement of driveways, curbs and sidewalks, when called for in the
proposals, shall include all materials, labor and equipment required to complete the work and shall be paid
for on the basis of the following units: Driveways, plant mix - per square yard: concrete - per square foot;
curbs - per lineal foot; sidewalk 4h or 6" thick - per square foot. Concrete walks at drives shall be a
minimum of 6h thick and be reinforced with 6/6 X 10/10 welded wire mesh (also see Articles 8 and 30).
The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of all driveway, curb,
sidewalk and street restoration and replacement work.
11 WORK IN EASEMENTS OR PARKWAYS
Restoration is an important phase of construction, particularly to residents affected by the construction
progress.
The Contractor will be expected to complete restoration Activities within a reasonable time following primary
construction activity. Failure by the Contractor to accomplish restoration within a reasonable time shall be
justification for a temporary stop on primary construction activity or a delay in approval of partial payment
requests.
Reasonable care shall be taken for existing shrubbery. Contractor shall replace all shrubbery removed or
disturbed during construction. No separate payment shall be made for this work.
The contractor shall make provision and be responsible for the supply of all water, if needed, on any and all
phases of the contract work. The contractor shall not obtain water from local residents or businesses
except as the contractor shall obtain written permission.
Reuse water is available for the Contractor's use without charge from the City's wastewater treatment
plants, provided the water is used on City of Clearwater contractual work. Details for Contractor to obtain
and reuse water from the treatment plants will be coordinated at the pre-construction conference. The
Contractor's use of reuse water must conform to all regulatory requirements.
12 DEWATERING
Unless specifically authorized by the Engineer, all pipe, except subdrains, shall be laid hin the dry". The
contractor shall dewater trench excavation as required for the proper execution of the work, using one or
more of the following approved methods: well point system, trenched gravity underdrain system, or sumps
with pumps.
Well point systems must be efficient enough to lower the water level in advance of the excavation and
maintain it continuously in order that the trench bottom and sides shall remain firm and reasonably dry. The
well points shall be designed especially for this type of service, and the pumping unit used shall be capable
of maintaining a high vacuum, and at the same time, of handling large volumes of air as well as of water.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
The Contractor shall be responsible for disposing of all water resulting from trench dewatering operations,
and shall dispose of the water without damage or undue inconvenience to the work, the surrounding area,
or the general public. He shall not dam, divert, or cause water to flow in excess in existing gutters,
pavements or other structures: and to do this he may be required to conduct the water to a suitable place of
discharge may be determined by the Engineer.
The cost of dewatering shall be included in the unit price bid per lineal foot of pipe, or, in the case of other
underground structures, in the cost of such structures.
13 SANITARY MANHOLES
13.1 BUILT UP TYPE
Manholes shall be constructed of brick with cast iron frames and covers as shown on the drawings. Invert
channels shall be constructed smooth and semicircular in shape conforming to inside of adjacent sewer
section. Changes in direction of flow shall be made in a smooth curve of as large a radius as possible.
. Changes in size and grade of channels shall be made gradually and evenly. Invert channels shall be
formed by one of the following methods: form directly into concrete manhole base, build up with brick and
. mortar, lay half tile in concrete, or lay full section of sewer pipe through manhole and break out top half of
pipe.
The manhole floor outside of channels shall be made smooth and sloped toward channels.
Free drop in manholes from inlet pipe invert to top of floor outside the channels shall not exceed twenty four
inches~
Standard Drop Manholes shall be constructed wherever free drop exceeds twenty four inches.
Manhole steps shall not be provided. Joints shall be completely filled and the mortar shall be smoothed
from inside of manholes.
The entire exterior of brick manholes shall be plastered with one half inch of mortar.
Brick used may be solid only. Brick shall be laid radially with every sixth course being a stretcher course.
13.2 PRECAST TYPE
Precast Sanitary Manholes shall conform to this specification unless otherwise approved by the City
Engineer.
AASHTO M 85 Type II cement shall be used throughout with a minimum wall thickness of 5 inches. The
precast sections shall conform to ASTM C 478 latest revision. Section joints shall be a tongue and groove
with "ram neck" gasket or "a" ring to provide a watertight joint. Minimum concrete strength shall be 4000
psi at 28 days.
Three sets of shop drawings and location inventory shall be submitted to the City Engineer for approval.
Approval of shop drawings does not relieve contractor of responsibility for compliance to these
specifications unless letter from contractor requesting specific variance is approved by the City Engineer.
Location inventory submitted with shop drawing shall detail parts of manhole per manhole as numbered on
the construction plans. All manhole parts shall be numbered or lettered before being sent to the job site to
permit proper construction placement. A plan or list of the numbering system shall be present on the job site
when manhole components are delivered.
Precast manhole dimensions, drop entry, grout flow of channel, etc., shall be as shown on City of
Clearwater Engineering Detail #302 Sheet 2 of 3.
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section N
IV-9
MANHOLE ADJUSTMENT RINGS (GRADE RINGS)
All grade adjustments of manhole frame and cover assemblies shall be completed utilizing the
following: High Density Polyethylene Grade Adjustment Rings - Comply with ASTM Standard D-
1248 for recycled plastic.
a. Material properties shall be tested and certified for usage by the following ASTM methods:
b. Property Test Method Acceptable Value
c. Melt Flow Index ASTM D1238 0.3 to 30 g /10 min.
d. Density ASTM D792 0.94 to 0.98 g / cm3
e. Tensile Strength ASTM D638 2.00 to 5 x 1031b / in 2
f. Polyethylene adjusting rings shall not be used when they are exposed to heated hot mix
asphalt pavement.
g. Tapered configuration: When used in a single configuration tapered adjusting ring
thickness will range from 0.5 inch to 3.0 inch.
h. Grade adjustment rings are to be installed on clean flat surfaces according to the
manufacturer's recommendations with the proper Butyl Rubber sealanUadhesives.
2. The inside diameter of the adjustment ring shall not be less than the inside diameter of the
manhole frame.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Manhole sections shall be rejected if abused during shipping or placement and if pipe openings are not
properly aligned. The "break in" to precast manholes for pipe entry will not be allowed.
The manhole base shall be set on a pad of A 1 or A 2 Classification soil approximately five (5) inches thick
to secure proper seating and bearing.
Between the top of the manhole cone and the manhole cover frame, a manhole adjustment ring shall be
installed. The intent of the manhole adjustment ring is to accommodate future grade changes without
disturbing the manhole.
13.2.1
1.
3. Manholes shall be constructed with at least two adjustment rings.
4. Maximum height of adjustment ring stack: 12 inches max. for new manholes and 16 inches max.
on existing manholes.
13.3 DROP MANHOLES
Standard drop inlets to manholes shall be constructed of commercial pipe, fittings and specials as detailed
on the drawings.
13.4 FRAMES AND COVERS
Manhole frames and covers shall be set in a full bed of mortar with the top of the cover flush with or higher
than finished grade as directed. Refer to Detail 301.
13.5 MANHOLE COATINGS
The exterior and interior of all built up manholes shall- be coated with two coats of bitumastic black solution
300 M as- manufactured by Koppers Company, Inc. or approved equal. Interior of built up manholes which
Section IV
/V-10
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Faci/ities
Odor Contra/Improvements Project
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
have sewers entering with a free drop or which receive discharge from a force main shall have the inside
plastered with 1/2 inch of grout and coated as precast manholes below.
The exterior and interior of all . precast manholes shall be coated with at least 15 mils dry thickness of
PROCO EP 214 351 Epoxi Mastic as manufactured by Protective Coatings Inc.
13.6 CONNECTIONS TO MANHOLES
Connections to existing sanitary manholes using approved PVC sewer main shall be made with a manhole
adapter coupling by Flo Control, Inc., or approved water stop coupling.
14 BACKFILL
Material for backfill shall be carefully selected from the excavated material or from other sources as may be
required by the Engineer. Such material shall be granular, free from organic matter or debris, contain no
rocks or other hard fragments greater than 3" in the largest dimension and all fill shall be similar material.
Backfill placed around pipes shall be carefully placed around the sides and top of pipe by hand shovels and
thoroughly compacted to 12" above the pipe by tamping or other suitable means.
Backfill under all types of paving shall be compacted in layers not to exceed 12" in thickness unless
altemate method is approved by the Engineer. Backfill shall be a minimum of 98% compaction as
determined by the modified Proctor Density Test to the bottom of pavement.
Backfill outside of pavement areas shall be compacted the full depth to the ground surface to a minimum of
95% compaction of AASHTO T 180 Standard Density Test.
The cost of backfill shall be included in the unit price bid per lineal foot of the pipe, or, in the case of other
underground structures, in the cost of such structure.
15 STREET CROSSINGS. ETC.
At such crossings, and other points as may be directed by the Engineer, the trenches shall be bridged in an
open and secure manner, so as to prevent any serious interruption of travel upon the roadway or sidewalk,
and also to afford necessary access to public or private premises. The material used, and the mode of
constructing said bridges, and the approaches, thereto, must be satisfactory to the Engineer.
The cost of all such work must be included in the cost of the trench excavation.
16 RAISING OR LOWERING OF SANITARY SEWER, STORM DRAINAGE
STRUCTURES
Sanitary Sewer or Storm Drainage Structures shall be raised or lowered as indicated on the plans or as
indicated by the Engineer.
16.1 BASIS, OF PAYMENT
. Payment, unless covered by a bid item, shall be included in the cost of the work.
17 UNSUITABLE MATERIAL REMOVAL
All unsuitable material, such as muck, clay, rock, etc., shall be excavated and removed from the site. All
material removed is property of the Contractor, who shall dispose of said material off-site at his expense.
The limits of the excavation shall either be shown on the. plans, or determined in the field by the Engineer in
conjunction with the City's Materials Tester.
MarshaH Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
1V-11
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
1V-12
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
17.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
The basis of measurement shall be the amount of cubic yards of unsuitable material excavated and
replaced with suitable material as determined by either cross sections of the excavation, truck measure, or
lump sum as specified in the Scope of Work and Contract Proposal.
17.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT
The unit price for the removal of unsuitable material shall include: all materials, equipment, tools, labor,
disposal, hauling, excavating, dredging, placing, compaction, dressing surface and incidentals necessary to
complete the work. If no pay item is given, the removal of unsuitable material shall be included in the most
appropriate bid item.
18 UNDERDRAINS
The Contractor shall construct sub-surface drainage pipe as directed in the Contract Scope of Work and
detail drawings contained in the Project construction plans. In general, underdrain pipe shall be embedded
in a bed of #6 FOOT crushed aggregate, located behind the. back of curb and aggregate surface covered
with a non-degradable fibrous type filter material. A #57 aggregate maybe used in lieu of #6 if it is washed
and screened to remove fines. The aggregate may be stone, slag or crushed gravel. Unless otherwise
noted on.the plans, underdrain pipe shall be 8" diameter, polyvinyl chloride pipe, in conformance with ASTM
F-758 "Standard Specification For Smooth Wall PVC Underdrain Systems for Highways" latest revision,
minimum stiffness of 46 in conformance with ASTM 02412, perforations in conformance with AASHTO M-
189 described in FOOT Section 948-4.5 or latest revision and in conformance with ASTM 03034 - SOR 35.
Alternate acceptable underdrain pipe material is Contech A-2000 which is a rigid PVC pipe exceeds ASTM
Specifications 01784, minimum cell classificatkm of 124548 or 12454C, manufactured per ASTM F949-
93a, minimum pipe stiffness of 50 psi, with no evidence of splitting, cracking or breaking when pipe is
tested in accordance with ASTM 02412 at 60% flatting and with a double gasket joint.
Underdrain pipe placed beneath existing driveways and roadways shall be non-perforated pipe with
compacted backfill. All poly-chloride pipe which has become deteriorated due to exposure to ultra violet
radiation shall be rejected. Where ductile iron pipe is specified, pipe material shall be the same as specified
for potable water pipe in these technical specifications. All underdrain aggregate shall be fully encased in a
polyester filter fabric "sock" (Mirafi 140-N or approved equal) perthe construction detail drawings.
18.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
Measurement shall be the number of lineal feet of 8" Sub-drain in place and accepted.
18.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT
Payment shall be based upon the unit price per lineal fooUor underdrain as measured above, which shall
be full compensation for all work described in this section of the specifications and shall include all
materials, equipment, and labor necessary to construct the underdrain (specifically underdrain pipe,
aggregate and filter fabric). Underdrain clean-outs, sod, driveway, road and sidewalk restoration shall be
paid by a separate bid item.
19 STORM SEWERS
All storm drain pipe installed within the City. of Clearwater shall be reinfqrced concrete unJess otherwise
specified or approved by the City Engineer. Said pipe Shall comply with Section 941 of the current FOOT
Specifications.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
All reinforced concrete pipe joints shall be wrapped with Mirafi 140N filter fabric or equivalent (as approved
by the City Engineer). The cost for all pipe joint wraps shall be included in the unit price for the pipe.
All pipe, just before being lowered into a trench, is to be inspected and cleaned. If any difficulty is found in
the fitting the pieces together, this fitting is to be done on the surface. of the street before laying the pipe,
and the tops plainly marked in the order in which they are to be laid. No pipe is to be trimmed or chipped to
fit. Each piece of pipe is to be solidly and evenly bedded, and not simply wedged up. Before finishing each
joint, some suitable device is to be used to find that the inverts coincide and pipe is clear throughout.
19.1 AS BUILT INFORMATION
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer the stations and left or right offsets of all manholes, inlet
structures and terminals ends of subdrains, as measured from the nearest downstream manhole along the
centerline of the sewer along with the elevations of the north edge of manhole cover, inverts of all pipe in
structures, and the flow line of inlets. (Gutter)
19.2 TESTING
The Contractor shall take all precautions to secure a perfectly watertight sewer under all conditions. At the
discretion of the City Engineer or his designee, the watertightness of a sewer which has a crown lying
below groundwater level may be tested by measuring the infiltration. The watertightness of sewers having
crowns lying above groundwater level may be tested by filling the pipe with water so as to produce a
hydrostatic head of two feet or more above the crown of the sewer at the upper end of the test section of
the water table outside of the sewer, whichever is higher, and then measuring the exfiltration. In no case
shall the infiltration or exfiltration exceed 150 gallon per inch of diameter per mile per day. The Contractor
shall furnish all labor, materials and equipment to test the amount of infiltration or exfiltration under the
Engineer's direction. Where the infiltration or exfiltration is excessive the Contractor at his own expense
shall take the necessary steps to remedy such conditions by uncovering the sewer, remaking the joints or
by replacing the entire length of sewer as required by the Engineer. No trench made joints may be
backfilled until after they have been tested and found to be acceptable. Care shall be taken to avoid
flotation.
The above tests shall be performed at the discretion of the Engineer on any or all sections of the line.
19.3 BASIS OF PAYMENT
Payment shall be the unit price per lineal foot for storm sewer pipe in place and accepted, measured along
the centerline of the storm sewer pipe to the inside face of exterior walls of storm manholes or drainage
structures and to the outside face of endwalls. Said unit price includes all work required to install the pipe
(i.e. all materials, equipment, filter fabric wrap, labor and incidentals, etc.).
20 SANITARY SEWERS AND FORCE MAINS
20.1 MATERIALS
20.1.1 GRAVITY SEWER PIPE
GRAVITY SEWER PIPE SHALL BE POLYVINYL CHLORIDE OR DUCTILE IRON. Polyvinyl chloride pipe
and fittings shall conform with ASTM specification 03034 for S.D.R. 35. The pipe shall be plainly marked
with the above ASTM designation. The bell end of joints and fittings shall have a rubber sealing ring to
provide a tight flexible seal in conformance with ASTM 0 3212 76. The laying length of pipe joints shall be a
maximum of 12.5 feet.
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
IV-13
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
1V-14
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Unless otherwise noted in these specifications or construction plans, Ductile Iron pipe and fittings for gravity
sewer shall conform to Section 41 of these Technical Specifications for DIP water main except pipe shall be
interior "polylined" in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Where sanitary sewer main is to
be placed between building lots in a sideline easement, the sewer main shall, insofar as possible, be
constructed without manholes or lateral connections within the side easement. The pipe material in the side
easement between streets shall be C 900, SDR 18 polyvinyl chloride water main pipe as described in
Technical Section 41.
20.1.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE
FORCE MAIN PIPE SHALL BE POLYVINYL CHLORIDE OR DUCTILE IRON. Unless otherwise noted in
the specifications or construction plans, both polyvinyl chloride and ductile iron force main pipe and fittings
shall conform to Section 41 of these Technical Specifications for water main pipe except that DIP shall be
"polylined" in accordance with manufactures recommendations.
All polyvinyl chloride pipe which has become deteriorated due to exposure to ultra violet radiation shall be
rejected.
20.2 INSTAllATION
20.2.1 GRAVITY SEWER PIPE
Installation of gravity sewer pipe shall be in conformance with recommended practices contained in ASTM
D 2321 and Unibell UNI B 5.
The bottom trench width in an unsupported trench shall be limited to the minimum practicable width
allowing working space to place and compact the haunching material. The use of trench boxes and
movable sheeting shall be performed in such a manner that removal, backfill and compaction will not
disturb compacted haunching material or pipe alignment.
Dewatering of the trench bottom shall be accomplished using adequate means to allow preparation of
bedding, placement of the haunching material and pipe in the trench without standing water. Dewatering
shall continue until sufficient backfill is placed above the pipe to prevent flotation or misalignment.
Where pipe bedding is insufficient to adequately support pipe, the contractor will be required to remove
unsuitable material and bed pipe in Class I material (1/2" Dia. aggregate) to provide firm support of pipe.
Connections to manholes with sanitary pipe shall use a joint 2 feet in length and shall use an approved
water stop around pipe joint entry.
The laterals shown on the plans do not necessarily reflect exact locations. The contractor is required to
locate all existing laterals for reconnection and to coordinate with the construction inspector the location of
all new laterals.
20.2.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE
Installation of force main pipe shall be in conformance with Section 41 of these Technical Specifications for
water main pipe.
20.3 AS BUllT~DRAWINGS
The contractor shall submit to the Engineer a marked set of "As Built" construction drawings describing
both the stations and left or right offset of all lateral terminal ends as measured from the nearest
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
downstream manhole along the center line of the sewer main. The as built drawings will also describe
elevations of the north edge of the manhole cover rings and inverts of all main pipes in manholes.
20.4 TESTING
20.4.1 TESTING OF GRAVITY SEWERS
The Contractor shall take all precautions to secure a perfectly water tight sewer under all conditions. The
water tightness of a sewer which has a crown lying below groundwater level may be tested by measuring
infiltration. The water tightness of sewers having crowns lying above groundwater level may be tested by
filling the pipe with water so as to produce a hydrostatic head of two feet or more above the crown of the
sewer at the upper end of the test section or the water table outside of the sewer, whichever is higher, and
then measuring the exfiltra- tion. In no case shall the infiltration or exfiltration exceed 50 gallon per inch of
diameter per mile per day. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials and equipment to test the
amount of infiltration or exfiltration under the Engineer's direction. Where the infiltration or exfiltration is
excessive, the Contractor at his own expense shall take the necessary steps to remedy such conditions by
uncovering the sewer, remaking the joints or by replacing the entire length of sewer as required by the
Engineer. No such repaired joints may be backfilled until after they have been tested and found to be
acceptable. Care shall be taken to avoid flotation.
The above tests shall be performed at the discretion of the Engineer on any or all sections of the line.
20.4.2 TESTING OF FORCE MAINS
Force mains shall be tested under a hydrostatic pressure of 150 P.S.1. for one hour, as described in Section
41.04 of these Technical Specifications for the testing of water mains.
20.5 BASIS OF PAYMENT
20.5.1 GRAVITY SEWER PIPE
Payment for in place sanitary sewer gravity main pipe shall be the unit price per lineal foot per appropriate
range of depth of cut as contained in the contract proposal. Measurement for payment shall be along the
centerline of the sewer main from center to center of manholes.
Payment for laterals shall be the unit price per lineal foot of pipe as measured from the centerline of the
sewer main pipe to the terminal end of the lateral pipe.
Payment for sewer pipe shall include all labor, equipment and materials necessary to complete the
installation. This shall include clearing and grubbing, excavation, shoring and dewatering, backfill and
grading.
20.5.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE
Payment and measurement of force main pipe shall be the same as described in Section 41 of these
Technical Specifications for water main pipe.
21 DRAINAGE
The Contractor shall provide proper outlet for all water courses and drains interrupted during the progress
of the work and replace them in as good condition as he found them.
Marshall Street and Holtheast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
N-15
22 ROADWAY BASE AND SUBGRADE
22.1 BASE
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
This specification describes the construction of roadway base and subgrade. The Contractor shall refer to
Section IV, Article 1 "Scope of Work" of the city's Contract Specifications for additional roadway base and
subgrade items.
Roadway base shall be 8" compacted minimum thickness unless otherwise noted on the plans or directed
by the Engineer. The subgrade shall be 12" compacted minimum thickness with a minimum Limerock
Bearing Ratio (LBR) of 40 unless otherwise noted on the plans or directed by the Engineer. The Contractor
shall obtain from an independent testing laboratory a Proctor and an LBR for each type material. The
Contractor shall also have an independent testing laboratory perform all required density testing. Where
unsuitable material is found within the limits of the base, Section IV, Article 17 (Unsuitable Material
Removal) of the city's Contract Specifications will apply.
Once the roadway base is completed, it shall be primed that same day (unless otherwise directed by the
Engineer) per Section 300 of FOOTs Standard Specifications (latest edition). Repairs required to the base
that result from a failure to place the prime in a timely manner shall be done to the City's satisfaction, and at
the Contractor's expense. No paving of the exposed base can commence until the City approves the
repaired base. The cost for placement of prime material shall be included in the bid item for base.
The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of all base and
subgrade placement or reworking.
The following base materials are acceptable:
1. SHELL BASE: Shell base shall be constructed in accordance with Sections 200 and 913 of
FOOTs Standard Specifications (latest edition), and shall have a minimum compacted thickness as
shown on the plans. The shell shall be FOOT approved. The cost of the prime coat shall be
included in the bid item price for base.
.2. L1MEROCK BASE: Limerock base shall be constructed in accordance with Sections 200 and 911
of FOOTs Standard Specifications (Iatestedition), and shall have a minimum compacted thickness
as shown on the plans. The Iimerock shall be from a FOOT approved certified pit. The cost of the
prime coat shall be included in the bid item price for base.
3. CRUSHED CONCRETE BASE: Crushed concrete base shall be constructed in accordance with
Sections 204 and 901 of FOOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition), and shall have a
minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. The crushed concrete material shall be
FOOT approved. The Contractor shall provide certified laboratory tests on gradation to confirm that
the crushed concrete base material conforms to the above specifications. The LBR shall be a
minimum of 185. LBR and gradation tests shall be provided to the city by the Contractor once a
week for continuous operations, or every 1000 tons. of material, unless requested more frequently
by the City Engineer or designee. The cost of the prime coat shall be included in the bid item price
for base.
4. SOIL CEMENT BASE: Unless otherwise noted, soil cement base shall be constructed in
accordance with Section 270 of FOOTs 2000 Standard Specifications, and shall have a minimum
compacted thickness as shown on the plans. An Asphalt Rubber Membrane Interlayer (ARMI) shall
be included in the pavement design per Section 341 of FOOTs Standard Specifications (latest
edition) to minimize reflective cracking unless otherwise noted in the project plans and
specifications. The ARMllayer shall be overlaid with asphalt on the same day it is placed for the
Contractor to receive full compensation for the work.
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities Section IV
Odor Control Improvements Project 1V-16
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
The soil cement base design shall be by a certified lot under the direction of a Registered Florida
Professional Engineer, and must be approved by the City Engineer. Said design shall provide for a
minimum of 300 P.S.I. in seven days. All plant mixed soil cement shall be certified ,by a registered
laboratory that has been approved by the Engineer.
The only approved method for spreading the cement is the use of a spreader box. The use of a
spreader bar for spreading cement will not be allowed. The applying of the cement shall not be
allowed when the wind velocity is sufficient to jeopardize material interests (Le. vehicles, etc.) from
airborne cement particles. The density testing frequency shall be at the discretion of the registered
Florida Professional Engineer responsible for the soil cement design.
5. ASPHALT BASE: Full depth asphalt base shall be constructed in aCcordance with Section 280 of
FOOT's 2000 Standard Specifications, and shall have a minimum compacted thickness as shown
on the plans. The cost for preparation, placement and compaction shall be included in the per ton
unit cost for asphalt unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans. The cost of the tack
coat shall be included in the bid item price for asphalt or base.
6. REWORKED BASE: When the plans call for the working of the existing base, the finished
reworked base shall have a minimum compacted thickness of 8" unless otherwise shown on the
plans or directed by the Engineer, and be constructed in accordance with the applicable FOOT
requirements for the type of material used. The density requirements (except for asphalt and soil
cement base) shall be per Section 200 6 of FOOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). For
asphalt, the density requirements are per Section 330-11, and for soil cement per Section 270-5 of
FOOT's 2000 Standard Specifications.
22.1.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT FOR BASE AND REWORKED BASE
The basis of measurement shall be the number of square yards of base in place and accepted as called for
on the plans. The maximum allowable deficiency shall be a half-inch (1/2"). Areas deficient in thickness shall
either be fixed by the Contractor to within acceptable tolerance, or if so approved in writing by the City
Engineer, may be left in place. No payment, however, will be made for such deficient areas that are left in
place.
22.1.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT FOR BASE AND REWORKED BASE
The unit price for base shall include: all materials, roadbed preparation, placement, spreading, compaction,
finishing, prime, base, subgrade (unless the plans specify a separate pay item), stabilization, mixing,
testing, equipment, tools, hauling, labor, and all incidentals necessary to complete the work. Payment for
asphalt base shall be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt unless otherwise noted in the project
'scope and plans.
22.2 SUBGRADE
All subgrade shall be stabilized and constructed in accordance with Sections 160 and 914 of FOOT's
Standard Specifications (latest edition) unless otherwise noted herein. All subgrade shall have a minimum
compacted thickness of 12" unless otherwise shown on the plans or directed by the Engineer. If limerock is
used, it shall also meet the requirements of Section 911 of FOOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition).
Where unsuitable material is found within the limits of the subgrade, Section IV, Article 17 (Unsuitable
Material Removal) of the city's Contract Specifications will apply. The extent of said removal shall be
determiried by the Engineer in accordance with accepted construction practices. The Contractor is
responsible for clearing, grading, filling, and- removing any trees or vegetation in the roadbed below the
subgrade to prepare it per the plans. The cost of this work shall be included in the unit price- for base or
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Contrallmprovements Project
Section IV
1V-17
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
IV.18
I
I
I
II
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
subgrade. The Contractor shall obtain from an independent testing laboratory the bearing value after the
mixing of materials for the stabilized subgrade.
22.2.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
The basis of measurement shall be the number of square yards of stabilized subgrade in place and
accepted as called for on the plans. The maximum allowable deficiency for mixing depth shall be per
Section 161-6.4 of FOOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. Acceptable bearing values shall be per FOOT
Section 160-7.2. Areas deficient in thickness or bearing values shall either be corrected by the Contractor
to within acceptable tolerance, or if so approved in writing by the City Engineer, may be left in place. No
payment, however, will be made for such deficient areas that are left in place (latest edition).
22.2.2
BASIS OF PAYMENT
The unit price for subgrade shall include: roadbed preparation, placement, spreading, compaction,
finishing, testing, stabilizing, mixing, materials, hauling, labor, equipment and all incidentals necessary to
complete the work. If no pay item is given, subgrade shall be included in the bid item for base.
23 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE MATERIALS
This specification is for the preparation and application of all S-Type Marshall Mix Design asphaltic
concrete materials on roadway surfaces unless otherwise noted.
23.1 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE
23.1.1 AGGREGATE
All aggregates shall be obtained from an approved FOOT source and shall conform to Sections 901
through 919 of FOOT's 2000 Standard Specifications.
23.1.2 BITUMINOUS MATERIALS
All bituminous materials shall conform to Section 916 of FOOT's 2000 Standard Specifications.
23.2 HOT BITUMINOUS MIXTURES - PLANT, METHODS, EQUIPMENT & QUALITY
ASSURANCE
The plant and methods of operation used to prepare all asphaltic concrete and bituminous materials shall
conform to the requirements of Section 320 of FOOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). Unless
otherwise noted, all acceptance procedures and quality control/assurance procedures shall conform to the
requirements of Section 330 of FOOT's 2000 Standard Specifications.
The Contractor shall note that the City shall have the right to have an independent testing laboratory select
test, and analyze, at the expense of the City, test specimens of any or all materials to be used. Tests to be
performed by the independent testing laboratory every 1000 tons include, but are not limited to, Marshall
stability and flow, extraction/gradation and cores to determine density and thickness. The results of such
tests and analyses shall be considered, along with the tests or analyses made by the Contractor, to
determine compliance with the applicable specifications for the materials so tested or analyzed. The
Contractor hereby understands and accepts that wherever any portion of the work is discovered, as a result
of such independent testing or investigation by the City, which fails to meet .the requirements of the
Contract documents, all costs of such independent inspection and investigation as weUas all costs of
removal, correction, reconstruction, or repair of any such work shall be borne solely by the Contractor.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Payment reductions for asphalt related items shall be determined bv the followino:
1. Density per Section 330-11 of FOOT's 2000 Standard Specifications.
2. Final surface or friction course tolerances per Section 330-13 of FOOT's 2000 Standard
Specifications.
3. Thickness will be determined from core borings. Deficiencies of %" or greater shall be corrected by
the Contractor, without compensation, by either replacing the full thickness for a length extending
at least 25' from each end of the deficient area, or when the Engineer allows for an overlay per
Section 330-15.2.3 of FOOT's Standard Specifications (2000 edition). In addition, for excesses of
W or greater, the Engineer will determine if the excess area shall be removed and replaced at no
compensation, or if the pavement in question can remain with payment to be made based on the
thickness specified in the contract.
The Contractor shall notify the Proiect Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of the placement of all
asphalt.
23.3 ASPHALT MIX DESIGNS AND TYPES
All asphalt mix designs shall conform to the requirements of Sections 331 and 337 of FOOT's 2000
Standard Specifications. All asphalt mix designs shall be approved by the Engineer PRIOR to the
commencement of the paving operation. NO RECLAIMED ASPHALT PAVEMENT (RAP) MATERIAL
SHALL BE ALLOWED IN THE ASPHALTIC CONCRETE MIXES.
23.4 ASPHALT PAVEMENT DESIGNS AND LAYER THICKNESS
All asphalt pavement designs shall conform to the following requirements:
Table 1: Layer Thickness for Asphalt (Layers Are Listed in Sequence of Construction)
COURSE LAYER THICKNESS (Inches)
THICKNESS
(Inches) Type S-I Type S-I with Type S-1I1 FC-3 Type S-III with Type S-I with
Type S-III Top FC-3 Top FC-3 Top
Layer Layer Layer
1st 2nd 1st 2nd 1st 2nd 1 st 2nd 1st 2nd 1 st 2nd
1 1 1
1% 1%
2 1% % * 1 1
2% 1% 1% 1% 1 1% 1
3 1% 1% 2 1 2 1
* At the Engineer's discretion, 2" of S-1I1 is acceptable for use on residential streets
Additional Notes:
1. Type S-III shall be limited to the final (top) structural layer (one layer only).
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Contra/Improvements Project
Section IV
IV.19
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control ImprovementS Project
Section IV
1V-20
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2. All asphalt pavement designs shall conform to the requirements of sections 331 and 337 of FOOT's
2000 Standard Specifications.
3. All pavement designs shall include a minimum of two inches of asphalt.
4. The Contractor shall be responsible to review the project plans for complete pavement design
detail.
5. Unless otherwise specified on the plans, Type S-1I1 per Section 331 of FOOT's 2000 Standard
Specifications shall be used as final riding surface on streets with the speed limit of less than 35
mph, streets with an average daily traffic (AOT) of less than 3000, and all residential streets.
6. An FC-3 friction course per section 337 of FOOT's 2000 Standard Specifications shall be used on
streets with a speed limit of 35 mph or greater, and streets with an AOT of 3000 or greater.
23.5 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS
The general construction requirements for all hot bituminous pavements (including limitations of operations,
preparation of mixture, preparation of surface, placement and compaction of mixture, surface requirements,
correction of unacceptable pavement, etc.) shall be in accordance with Section 330 of FOOT's 2000
Standard Specifications.
23.6 CRACKS AND POTHOLE PREPARATION
23.6.1 CRACKS
Cracks in roadway pavement shall be repaired prior to the application of asphaltic concrete by the following
steps:
1. All debris to be removed from cracks by compressed air or other suitable method.
2. Apply a multiple layered application of bituminous binder and fine aggregate, as appropriate to the
depth of the crack until the void of the crack is completely filled to the level of the surrounding
roadway surface.
3. If application of asphaltic concrete is not to begin immediately after crack repair, cracks are to be
sanded to prevent vehicular tracking.
4. Payment for crack filling shall be included in the unit price for asphaltic concrete.
23.6.2 POTHOLES
Potholes shall berepaired prior to the application of asphaltic concrete by the following steps:
1. All debris is to be removed from potholes by hand, sweeping, or other suitable method.
2. A tack coat is to be applied to the interior surface of the pothole.
3. The pothole is to be completely filled with asphaltic concrete, and thoroughly compacted.
4. Payment for pothole preparation shall be included in the unit price for asphaltic concrete.
23.7 ADJUSTMENT OF MANHOLES
The necessary adjustments of sanitary sewer and storm drain manholes and appurtenances shall be
accomplished by the Contractor. The Contractor shall be paid on a per unit basis for each item.
The use of manhole adjustment risers is acceptable under the following conditions:
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
The riser shall meet or exceed all FOOT material, weld, and construction requirements. The riser
shall consist of an A-36 hot rolled steel meeting or exceeding the minimum requirements of
A.S.T.M. A-36. The riser shall be a single piece with a stainless steel adjustment stud and shall
have a rust resistant finish. The use of cast iron, plastic, or fiberglass risers is not permitted. In
addition, the installation of each riser shall be per manufacturers specifications. Each manhole
shall be individually measured, and each riser shall be physically marked to ensure that the proper
riser is used. Also, the ring section shall be cleaned, and a bead of chemically resistant epoxy
applied to the original casting, prior to installation of the riser. It is the Contractors responsibility to
ensure that the manholes are measured, the risers are physically marked, the ring sections are
thoroughly cleaned, and that the epoxy is properly applied prior to installation of each riser.
If risers are not used, the adjustment of manholes shall be accomplished by the removal of pavement
around manhole, grade adjustment of ring and cover, and acceptable replacement and compaction of
roadway materials prior to paving. A full depth backfill using asphalt is acceptable. The use of Portland
cement for backfill is not acceptable.
All manhole and valve adjustments shall be accomplished prior to the application of final asphaltic concrete
surface. Unless otherwise noted in the specs or on the plans, the paving operation shall occur within seven
(7) calendar days from the completion of the adjustment. On arterial roadways, the rims manholes are to be
ramped with asphalt during the time period between initial adjustment and final resurfacing. Water and gas
valves, sewer c1eanouts, valve boxes, tree aeration vents, etc. will be adjusted by the Contractor with the
cost for this work to be included in the unit cost of the asphalt. Care must be taken around said
appurtenances to ensure that they are not paved over, It is the Contractor's responsibility to inform the
owners of all utilities of impending work and coordinate their adjustments so they are completed prior to the
scheduled paving.
23.8
1.
ADDITIONAL ASPHALT REQUIREMENTS
All impacted radius returns within project limits shall be paved unless otherwise directed by the
Engineer or Project Inspector, with payment to be included in the per ton bid item for asphalt.
2. All pavement markings impacted by placement of asphalt shall be replaced prior to the road being
open to traffic unless otherwise noted in the contract scope and plans.
3. All project related debris shall be hauled off the job site by the Contractor in a timely manner and at
their own expense in conformance with all regulatory requirements.
4. The Contractor shall pay particular attention to sweeping when paving. The. Broom Tractor way of
sweeping will not be permitted. Prior to paving, all construction areas shall be swept with a
Municipal type sweeper (either vacuum or mechanical type) that picks up and hauls off, dust and
dirt. The sweeper must be equipped with its own water supply for pre-wetting to minimize dust.
Moreover, the Contractor shall sweep debris off of sidewalks, driveways, curbs and roadways each
day before leaving the job site.
5. The application of tack and prime coats (either required or placed at the Engineer's discretion) shall
be placed per Section 300 of FOOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). Tack shall also be
applied to the face of all curbs and driveways. Tne cost (including heating, hauling and applying)
shall be included in the per ton bid item for asphalt, unless otherwise noted in the project scope
and plans.
6. Leveling course and spot patching shall be applied to sections of the road as .noted on the plans, or
as directed by the Engineer, per Section 330 of FOOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. The cost
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor ContTollmprovements Project
Section IV
1V.2f
shall be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt, unless otherwise noted in the project scope
and plans.
7. If an asphalt rubber binder is required, it shall conform to the requirements of Section 336 of
FOOT's 2000 Standard Specifications.
8. On all streets with curb and gutter, the final compacted asphalt shall be W above the lip or face of
said curb per City Index 101.
23.9
1.
SUPERPAVE ASPHALTIC CONCRETE
Unless otherwise noted in this section, all of the asphaltic concrete specifications in Sections A
through H above shall apply to superpave asphaltic concrete. All asphaltic concrete pavement shall
be designed and placed in accordance with the FOOT Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge
Construction (latest edition).
2. All aggregate shall be obtained from an approved FOOT source and shall conform to Sections 901
and 902 of FOOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition).
3. All bituminous materials shall conform to Section 916 of FOOT's Standard Specifications (latest
edition). Asphaltic binder shall be Grade PG 67-22 unless otherwise specified in the Scope of
Work.
4. All superpave mix designs shall conform to Sections 320 and 334 of FOOT's Standard
Specifications (latest edition).
5. All general construction requirements shall conform to Section 330 of FOOT's Standard
Specifications (latest edition).
23.10 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
Basis of measurement will be the number of tons of asphaltic concrete completed, in place and accepted.
Truck scale weights will be required for all asphaltic concrete used.
23.11 BASIS OF PAYMENT
Payment shall be made at the contract unit price for asphaltic concrete surface as specified and measured
above. This price shall include all materials, preparation, hauling, placement, tack and/or prime coat either
required or placed at Engineer's discretion, leveling, spot patching, filling of cracks, pothole repair,
sweeping, debris removal, labor, equipment, tools, and incidentals necessary to complete the asphalt work
in accordance with the plans and specifications.
24 ADJUSTMENT TO THE UNIT BID PRICE FOR ASPHALT
When this Article applies to the contract, the unit bid price for asphalt will be adjusted in accordance with
the following provisions:
1. Price adjustment for asphalt shall only be made when the current FOOT Asphalt Price Index varies
more than 10% from the bid price at the time of the bid opening.
2. The Bituminous Material Payment Adjustment Index published monthly by the FOOT shall be used
for the adjustment of unit prices. This report is available on FOOT's internet site. The address is:
http://www11.myflorida.com. It is under the section "Ooing Business with FOOT" in the "Contracts
Administration" section under "Asphalt Index". For additional information, call FOOT @ 850-414-
4000.
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Contrallmprovements Project
Section IV
1V-22
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3. The FDOT Payment Adjustment Index in effect at .the time of the bid opening will be used for the
initial determination of the asphalt price.
4. The FDOT Payment Adjustment Index in effect at the time of placement of the asphalt will be used
for payment calculation.
5. The monthly billing period for contract payment will be the same as the monthly period for the
FDOT Payment Adjustment Index.
6. No adjustment in bid prices will be made for either tack coat or prime coat.
7. No price adjustment reflecting any further increases in the cost of asphalt will be made for any
month after the expiration of the allowable contract time.
8. The City reserves the right to make adjustments for decreases in the cost of asphalt.
25 GENERAL PLANTING SPECIFICATIONS
25.1 IRRIGATION
DESCRIPTION
25.1.1
A.
The work specified in this Section consists of the installation of an automatic underground irrigation
system as shown or noted in the plans. Provide all labor, materials, equipment, services and
facilities required to perform all work in connection with the underground sprinkler irrigation system,
complete, as indicated on the drawings and/or specified. Work noted as "NIC., "existing", or "by
others" is not included in this pay item.
B. The irrigation plans are schematic in nature. Valves and pipes shall be located in the turf/landscape
areas except at road/paving crossings. All piping under paving shall be sleeved. Changes in the
irrigation system layout shall be modified with the approval of the Engineer.
25.1.1.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The irrigation work shall be installed by qualified personnel or a qualified irrigation subcontracting
company that has experience in irrigation systems of similar size, scope, mainline, system
pressure, controls, etc.
B. All applicable ANSI, ASTM, FED. SPEC. Standards and Specifications, and all applicable building
codes and other public agencies having jurisdiction upon the work shall apply.
C. Workmanship: All work shall be installed in a neat, orderly and responsible manner with the
recognized standards of workmanship. The Engineer reserves the right to reject material or work
which does not conform to the contract documents. Rejected work shall be removed or corrected at
the earliest possible time at the contractor's expense.
D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: The contractor shall prepare and deliver to the Engineer
within ten (10) calendar days prior to completion of construction a minimum of three (3) hard cover
binders with three rings containing the following information:
1. Index sheet stating the contractor's address and business telephone number, 24 hour
emergency phone number, person to contact, list of equipment with name(s) and address(es)
of local manufacturer's representative(s) and local supplier where replacement equipment can
be purchased.
2. Catalog and part sheet on every material and equipment installed under this contract.
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section tv
tv-23
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Contrallmprovements Project
Section IV
1V-24
Ii
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3. Complete operating and maintenance instructions on all major equipment.
4. Provide the Engineer and the City of Clearwater maintenance staff with written and "hands on"
instructions for major equipment and show evidence in writing to the Engineer at the
conclusion of the project that this service has been rendered.
a. Four-hour instruction (minimum) for the Orip Emitter equipment operation and
maintenance. .
b. Two-hour instruction (minimum) for automatic control valve operation and maintenance.
25.1.1.2
A.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
The Irrigation Contractor shall coordinate the work with all other trades, all underground
improvements, the location and planting of trees and all other planting. Verify planting requiring
excavation 24 in. diameter and larger with the Engineer prior to installation of main lines.
B. Provide temporary irrigation at all times to maintain plant materials.
C. The Irrigation Contractor is responsible to maintain the work area and equipment until final
acceptance by the Engineer. Repairs and replacement of equipment broken, stolen, or missing as
well as regular maintenance operations shall be the obligation of the contractor.
O. The Irrigation Contractor shall submit a traffic control plan (per FOOT specifications) to the
Engineer prior to initiating construction on the site. The Contractor shall be responsible for the
maintenance of traffic signs, barriers, and any additional equipment to comply with the FOOT
standards and to ensure the safety of its employees and the public.
25.1.1.3
A.
WARRANTY
The Manufacturer(s) shall warrant the irrigation system components to give satisfactory service for
one (1) year period from the date of acceptance by the Engineer and the City of Clearwater. Should
any problems develop within the warranty period due to inferior or faulty materials, they shall be
corrected at no expense to the City of Clearwater or FOOT.
25.1.2
PRODUCTS
25.1.2.1
GENERAL
A. All materials throughout the system shall be new and in perfect condition. No deviations from the
specifications shall be allowed except as noted.
25.1.2.2
A.
PIPING
The irrigation system pipe shall be as stated herein and sha11 be furnished, installed and tested in
accordance with these specifications.
B. All pipe is herein specified to be Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe, 1120, Schedule 40, conforming to
ASTM 02665 and 01785.
C. All nipples, pipe connections, bushings, swing joints, connecting equipment to the mainline is
required to be threaded Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe, Schedule 80.
25.1.2.3 PIPE FITTINGS
A. All pipe fittings for Schedule 40 PVC pipe shall be. as follows: Fittings shall conform to the
requirements of ASTM 02466, Standard Specification for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I.
I
I
I
Fittings, Schedule 80. All fittings shall bear the manufacturer's name or trademark, material
designation, size, applicable IPS schedule and NSF seal of approval. The connection of mainline
pipe to the automatic control valve shall be assembled with threaded Schedule 80 fittings and
threaded Schedule 80 nipples.
25.1.2.4
A.
PVC PIPE CEMENT AND PRIMER
Provide solvent cement and primer for PVC solvent weld pipe and fittings as recommended by the
manufacturer. Pipe joints for solvent weld pipe to be belled end.
B. Purple primer shall be applied after the pipe and fittings has been cut and cleaned. The Primer
shall be of contrasting color and be easily recognizable against PVC pipe.
25.1.2.5
THREADED CONNECTIONS
A. Threaded PVC connections shall be made using Teflon tape or Teflon pipe sealant.
25.1.2.6
GATE VALVES
25.1.2.6.1 MANUAL GATE VALVES 2 IN. AND SMALLER
A. Provide the following, unless otherwise noted on Drawings:
1. 200-250 psi Ball Valve
2. PVC body - with Teflon Ball Seals
3. Threaded-Dual end Union Connectors
4. Non-Shock Safe-T-Shear Stem
5. Safe-T-Shear True Union Ball Valve as manufactured by Spears Manufacturing Company,
Sylmer, California, or approved equal.
25.1.2.6.2 GATE VALVES 2%" IN. AND LARGER
A. Provide the following, unless otherwise noted on Drawings:
1. AWWA-C-509
2. 200 lb. O.w.G.
3. Cast Iron body - ASTM A 126 Class B
4. Deep socket joints
5. Rising stem
6. Bolted bonnet
7. Double disc
8. Equipped with 2" square operating key with tee handle
B. Provide two (2) operating keys for gate valve 3" and larger. The "street key" shall be 5' long with a
2" square operating nut.
25.1.2.7
SLEEVES
A. Sleeves: (Existing by City of Clearwater)
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
IV-25
25.1.2.8
A.
REMOTE CONTROL VALVES
The remote control valve shall be a solenoid actuated, balance-pressure across-the diaphragm
type capable of having a flow rate of 25-30 gallons per minute (GPM) with a pressure loss not to
exceed 6.1 pounds per square inch (PSI). The valve pressure rating shall not be less than 150 psi.
B. The valve body and bonnent shall be constructed of high impact weather resistant plastic, stainless
steel and other chemical/UV resistant materials. The valve's one-piece diaphragm shall be of
durable santoprene material with a clog resistant metering orifice.
C. The valve body shall have a 1 n inch (FNPT) inlet and outlet or a one inch slip by slip inlet and outlet
for solvent weld pipe connections.
D. The valve construction shall be as such to provide for all internal parts to be removable from the
top of the valve without disturbing the valve installation.
E. The valve shall be as manufactured by Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp., Glendora, California, or
approved equal.
F. Identify all control valves using metall.D. tags numbered to match drawings.
25.1.2.9
A.
VALVE BOXES
For remote control drip valve assembly and UNIK control timer use a Brooks #36 concrete value
box with #36- T cast iron traffic bearing cover, or approved equal.
B. For flush valve assembly use an Ametek #181014 (10") circular valve box with #181015 cover
comparable to Brooks, or approved equal.
C. For air relief assembly use an Ametek #182001 (6") economy turf box with #182002 cover
comparable to Brooks, or approved equal.
25.1.2.10
DRIP IRRIGATION
25.1.2.10.1 CONSTRUCTION
A. Techline shall consist of nominal sized one-half inch (1/2") low-density linear polyethylene tubing
with internal pressure compensating, continuously self-cleaning, integral drippers at a specified
spacing, (12", 18", or 24" centers). The tubing shall be brown in color and conform to an outside
diameter (0.0.) of 0.67 inches and an inside diameter (I. D.) of 0.57 inches. Individual pressure
compensating drippers shall be welded to the inside wall of the tubing as an integral part of the
tubing assembly. These drippers shall be constructed of plastic with a hard plastic diaphragm
retainer and a self-flushing/cleaning elastomer diaphragm extending the full length of the dripper.
25.1.2.10.2 OPERATION
A. The drippers shall have the ability to independently regulate discharge rates. with an inlet pressure
of seven to seventy (7-70) pounds per square inch (PSI), at a constant flow and with a
manufacturer's coefficient of variability (Cv) of 0.03. Recommended operating pressure shall be
between 15-45 PSI. The dripper discharge rate shall be 0.4,-0.6. or 0.9 gallons per hour (GPH)
utilizing a combination turbulent flow/reduced pressure compensation cell mechanism and a
diaphragm to maintain uniform discharge rates. The drippers shall continuously clean themselves
while in operation. The dripperline shall be available in 12", 18" and 24" spacing between drippers .
unless otherwise specified. Techline pipe depth shall b~ under mulch unless otherwise specified on
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section /V
/v.26
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Plans. Maximum system pressure shall be 45 PSC. Filtration shall be 120 mesh or finer. Bending
radius shall be 7".
B. For on-surface or under mulch installations, 6" metal wire staples (TLS6) shall be installed 3'-5' on
center, and two staples installed at every change of direction.
25.1.2.10.3L1NE FLUSHING VALVES
A. The sub~surface system shall utilize Automatic Line Flush Valves at the end of each independent
zone area. This valve shall be capable of flushing one gallon at the beginning of each irrigation
cycle. The valves shall match the dripline manufacturer and connect directly to the dripline.
25.1.2.10.4AIRNACUUM RELIEF VALVE
A. Each independent irrigation zone shall utilize an AirNacuum Relief Valve at its high point(s). The air
. and vacuum relief valve shall seal effectively from 2 to 110 psi. .
25.1.2.10.5PRESSURE REGULATORS
A. The pressure regulator shall be designed to handle steady inlet pressures over 150 pounds per
square inch (psi) and maintain a constant outlet pressures of 25 psi. Regulating accuracy shall be
within =/-6%. The pressure regulator shall be manufactured from high-impact engineering grade
thermoplastics. Regulation shall be accomplished by a fixed stainless steel compression spring
which shall be enclosed in a chamber separate from the water passage.
25.1.2.1 0.6 FILTERS
A. The filter shall be a multiple disc type filter with notation indicating the minimum partial size to travel
through or the mesh size of the element being used. The discs shall be constructed of chemical
resistant thermoplastic for corrosion resistance.
25.1.2.10.7 FITTINGS
A. All connections shall be made with barb or compression type fitting connections. Fittings and
dripline shall be as manufactured by the manufacturer of the dripline to ensure the integrity of the
subsurface irrigation system.
25.1.2.11 AUTOMATIC CONTROL TIMER
A. The irrigation controller (control module) shall be programmable by a separate transmitter device
only. The program shall be communicated to the Control Module from the Field Transmitter via an
infrared connection. The controller shall be of a module type which may be installed in a valve box
underground. The controller shall function normally if submerged in water and the communication
from the transmitter shall function if submerged in water.
B. The control module shall be housed in an ABS plastic cabinet and shall be potted to insure
waterproof operation. The control module shall have two mounting slots for screws allowing the
module to be securely mounted inside a valve box.
C. The controller shall operate on one nine volt alkaline battery for one full year regardless of the
number of stations utilized. The controller shall operate 1, 2, or 4 stations either sequentially or
independently.
D. The controller shall have three independent programs with eight start times each, station run time
capability from one minute to twelve hours in one minute increments, and a seven day calendar.
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Contrallmprovements Project
Section IV
IV-27
The controller shall tum on stations via latching solenoids installed on the valves. Manual
operations shall be initiated by attaching the Field Transmitter to the Control Module and
programming a manual start. The controller shall be capable of manual single station or manual
program operation.
E. The controller shall be as manufactured by Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp., Glendora, California
USA.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
25.1.2.12 FIELD TRANSMITTER
A. The irrigation controller shall be programmable by a separate transmitter device (Field Transmitter)
only. The Field Transmitter shall communicate to the Control Module via an infrared connection.
The Field Transmitter shall be water resistant and housed in ABS plastic and have a removable,
reversible protective sheath. The Field Transmitter shall operate on one 9V alkaline battery.
B. The Field Transmitter shall have a large LCD screen and a seven-key programming pad. A beep
sound shall confirm every key stroke. The screen shall automatically turn off after one minute when
not in use:
C. The Field Transmitter shall be capable of programming an unlimited number of UNIK Control
Modules.
D. The Field Transmitter shall be as manufactured by Rain. Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp.,Glendora,
California USA.
25.1.2.13 LATCHING SOLENOID
A. The Latching Solenoid shall be supplied with an installed, filtered adapter allowing installation of
the solenoid onto any Rain Bird DV, PGA, PEB, PES-B, GB, of EFBseries valve.
B. The Latching Solenoid shall be as manufactured by Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp., Glendora,
California USA.
25.1.3 EXECUTION
25.1.3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Before work is commenced, hold a conference with the Engineer to discuss general details of the
work.
S. Verify dimensions and grades at job site before work is commenced.
C, During the progress of the work, a competent superintendent and any assistants necessary shall
be on site, all satisfactory to the Engineer. This superintendent shall not be changed, except with
the consent of the Engineer. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor in his absence and
all directions given to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to the Contractor.
D. Obtain and pay for all irrigation and plumbing permits and all inspections required by outside
authorities.
E. All work indicated or notes on the Drawings shall be provided whether or not specifically mentioned
in these Technical Special Provisions.
F. If there are ambiguities between the Drawings and Specifications, and specific interpretation or
clarification is not issued prior to bidding, the interpretation or clarification will be made only by the
Engineer, .and the Contractor shall comply with the decisions. In event the installation contradicts
the directions given, the installation shall be corrected by the Contractor at no additional cost.
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities Section IV
Odor Control Improvements Project /v.28
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
G. Layout of sprinkler lines shown on the Drawing is diagrammatic only. Location of sprinkler
equipment is contingent upon and subject to integration with all other underground utilities.
Contractor shall employ all data contained in the contract Documents and shall verify this
information at the construction site to confirm the manner by which it relates to the installation.
H. Do not proceed with the installation of the sprinkler system when it is apparent that obstructions or
grade differences exist or if conflicts in construction details, legend; or specific notes are
discovered. All such obstructions, conflicts, or discrepancies shall be brought to the attention of the
Engineer.
I. The disturbance of existing paving will not be permitted. Install all. required sleeving prior to
roadway base.
25.1.3.2
EXCAVATING AND BACKFILLING
25.1.3.2.1 TRENCHING. GENERAL
A. Dig sides of trenches straight. Provide continuous support for pipe on bottom of trenches. Lay pipe
to uniform grade. Trenching excavation shall follow layout indicated on Drawings.
B. Maintain 6 in. horizontal and minimum clearance between sprinkler lines and between all lines of
other trades.
C. Do not install sprinkler lines directly above another line of any kind.
D. Maintain 6 in. vertical minimum between sprinkler lines which cross at angles of 45 degrees to 90
degrees.
E. Exercise care when excavating, trenching and working near existing utilities.
25.1.3.2.2 BACKFILLING
A. All pressure supply lines (mainline) shall have 18" of fill placed over the pipe.
S. Initial backfill on all lines shall be of a fine granular material with no foreign matter larger than % in.
C. Compact backfill according to Section 125 of FOOT Specification Book, 1996 Edition.
D. Do not, under any circumstances, use equipment or vehicle wheels for compacting soil.
E. Restore grades and repair damages where settling occurs.
F. Compact each layer of fill with approved equipment to achieve a maximum density per MSHTO T
180 - latest edition. Under landscaped area, compaction shall not exceed 95% of maximum
density.
G. Compaction shall be obtained by the use of mechanical tampers or approved hand tampers. When
hand tampers are used, the materials shall be deposited in layers not more than six (6") inches
thick. The hand tampers shall be suitable for this purpose and shall have a face area of not more
than 100 square inches. Special precautions shall be taken to prevent damage to the irrigation
system piping and adjacent utilities.
25.1.3.2.3 ROUTING OF PIPING:
A. Routing of pressure and non-pressure piping lines are indicated diagrammatically on Drawings.
B. Coordinate specimen trees and shrubs with routing of lines.
1. Planting locations shall take precedence over sprinkler and piping locations.
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
IV.29
25.1.3.3
INSTALLATION
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2. Report to Owner any major deviation from routing indicated.
C. Conform to Drawings layout without offsetting the various assemblies from the pressure supply
line.
D. Layout drip tube and make any minor adjustments required due to differences between site and
Drawings. Any such deviations in layout shall be within the intent of the original Drawings, and
without additional cost.
E. Layout all systems using an approved staking method, and maintain the staking of approved
layout.
25.1.3.3.1 WATER SUPPLY
A. Connections to the water sources shall be at the approximate locations indicated on the Drawings.
. Make minor changes caused by actual site conditions without additional cost to the Owner.
25.1.3.3.2 ASSEMBLIES
A. Routing or pressure supply lines as indicated on Drawings is diagrammatic only. Install lines and
required assemblies in accordance with details on Drawings.
B. Do not install multiple assemblies on plastic lines. Provide each assembly with its own outlet. When
used, the pressure relief valve shall be the last assembly.
C. Install all assemblies in accord with the respective detail Drawings and these Technical Special
Provisions.
D. Plastic pipe and threaded fittings shall be assembled using Teflon tape, applied to the male threads
only.
25.1.3.3.3 SLEEVES: (EXISTING BY CITY OF CLEARWATER)
A. The contractor shall verify the location of all existing sleeves as shown on the roadway, utility
and/or irrigation plans and notify the Engineer of any discrepancies.
25.1.3.3.4 PLASTIC PIPE
A. Install plastic pipe in accord with manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Prepare all welded joints with manufacturer's cleaner prior to applying solvent.
1. Allow welded joints as least 15 minutes setup/curing time before moving or handling.
2. Partially center load pipe in trenches to prevent arching and shifting when water pressure is on.
3. Do not permit water in pipe until a period of at least four hours has elapsed for solvent weld
setting and curing, unless recommended otherwise by solvent manufacturer.
C. Curing
1. When the temperature is above 80 degrees F., allow soluble weld joints at least 24 hours
curing time before water is introduced under pressure.
D. Flushing the system:
1. After all sprinkler pipe lines and risers are in place and connected, open the control valves and
flush out the system with a full head of water.
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities Section IV
Odor Control Improvements Project . 1V-30
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
E. Installing piping under existing pavement:
1. Piping under existing pavement may be installed by jacking & boring.
2. Secure permission from the Engineer before cutting or breaking any existing pavement. All
repairs and replacements shall be approved by Engineer and shall be accomplished at no
additional cost.
25.1.3.3.5 CONTROLLERS
A. Install all automatic controllers as shown in the plans.
1. The location of all controllers shall be approved by the Engineers representative prior to
installation.
25.1.3.3.6 REMOTE CONTROL VALVES
A. Install at sufficient depth to provide not more than 6 in., nor less than 4 in. cover from the top of the
valve to finish grade.
B. Install valves in a plumb position with 24 in. minimum maintenance clearance from other
equipment, 3 feet minimum from edges of sidewalks, buildings, and walls, and no closer than 7 feet
from the back of curb or edge of pavement along roadways.
C. Contractor shall adjust the valve to provide the proper flow rate or operating pressure for each
sprinkler lone.
25.1.3.3.7 GATE VALVES
A. Install where indicated and with sufficient clearance from other materials for proper maintenance.
B. Check and tighten valve bonnet packing before backfill.
25.2 LANDSCAPE
25.2.1 GENERAL
25.2.1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The Contract Documents shall include the Plans, Details, Specifications, Bid Proposal, Contract
Agreement, including Installation Schedule, all Addenda, and Contractual and Special Conditions
when required.
25.2.1.2 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES
A. Comply with Federal, State, Local, and other duly constituted authorities and regulatory agencies,
without additional cost to the Owner in matters pertaining to codes, safety, and environmental
matters.
B. Any permits for the installation or construction of any of the work included under the contract, which
are required by any of the legally constituted authorities having jurisdiction, shall be arranged for by
the Contractor and paid for directly by the Contractor, unless otherwise agreed upon in writing.
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Contrallmprovements Project
Section IV
1V.31
25.2.1.3
A.
SCOPE OF WORK
All provisions of Contract, including General and Special Provisions and Plans, apply to the work
specified in this Section. The Scope of Work includes everything for and incidental to executing and
completing all landscape work shown on the Plans, Schedules, Notes and as specified herein.
B. Furnish and provide all labor, plants and materials tools and equipment necessary to prepare the
soil for plantings, to install and care for all plant materials (including finish grading if necessary); to
remove and/or transplant existing plants if indicated;. to furnish, plant, fertilize, guy and brace,
water, mulch and prune all new plant materials; .and to execute air other Work as described herein
or indicated on the Plans.
C. Work under this Section shall include labor and materials for final grading and raking to prepare the
site for sodding, sprigging, or seeding, so finished lawn or playing field will appear even and
uniform, will drain adequately, and will comply with the intent of the landscape drawings.
D. Initial maintenance of landscape materials as specified in this document.
25.2.1.4
A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Landscape work shall be contracted to a single firm specializing in landscape work, who shall in
turn subcontract no more than 40% of the work specified. All subcontractors under the control of
the Contractor involved in the completion of the landscape work, shall be made known to the .
Owner and the Landscape Architect prior to their commencement of work on the project.
B. All work of this Section shall conform to the highest standard of landscape practices.
C. The Plant Material Schedule included with these Plans is .provided only for the Contractor's
convenience; it shall not be construed as to conflict or predominate over the Plans. If conflict
between the Plans and Specifications exists, the Plan shall predominate and be considered the
controlling document.
D. During this work, the Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining safety among persons in his
employ in accordance with the standards set by The Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970
(and all subsequent amendments). Owner and Landscape Architect shall beheld harmless from
any accident, injury or any other incident resulting from compliance or non-compliance with these
standards.
E. The Contractor shall cooperate with and coordinate with all other trades whose work is built into or
affects the work in this Section.
F. All appropriate utility companies and agencies shall be contacted 72 hours prior to excavation. Call
.One Call" at 1-800-432-4770.
G. The Contractor shall carefully examine the site and all existing conditions affecting the work, such
as: soil, obstructions, existing trees, utilities, etc. Report any conditions in conflict with the work to
the Landscape Architect.
25.2.1.5
A.
SUBMITTALS
The Contractor is required to submit prior to the expiration of the required maintenance period, two
capies of typewritten instructions recommending procedures ta be established by the Owner for
maintenance of landscape work for a period of .one year.
B. Furnish unit pI'ices for all plant materials and inert materials,-including labor for all specified work.
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
.odor Contrallmprovements Project
Section IV
IV-32
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
25.2.1.6 ALTERNATES, ADDITIONS, DELETIONS, SUBSTITUTIONS
A. If there are additions/alternates included in these Plans and Specifications, the Contractor must
propose prices to accomplish the work stated as additions/alternates at the time of bidding.
B. The Owner, through his Project Representative, reserves the right to add or deduct any of the work
stated herein without rendering the Contract void.
C. The Contractor must have written approval by the Project Representative for any substitutions not
previously agreed to in the purchase agreement: installation without approval is entirely at the
Contractor's risk.
D. All material acquired through additions or substitutions shall be subject to all conditions and
warranties stated herein.
25.2.1.7
ABBREVIATIONS/DEFINITIONS
O.A. or HT.:
The over-all height of the plant measured from the ground to the natural, untied state of the
majority of the foliage, not including extreme leaves, branches or fronds.
C. T.:
Clear trunk is measured from the ground to the bottom of the first leaf or frond stem with no foliage
from ground to specified height. For example, on Canary Island Date Palms or similar, the clear
trunk measurement includes the "nut" at the base of the fronds.
C.W:
Clear wood is measured from the ground to the bottom of the base of the lowest leaf sheath or
boot, trimmed in a natural manner. For example, on Canary Island Date Palms or similar, the clear
wood measurement does not include the "nuf at the base of the fronds.
SPR.:
Spread, branches measured in natural untied position to the average crown diameter, not including
extreme leaves, branches or fronds.
ST.TR.:
Straight trunk.
MIN.:
Minimum.
GAL.:
Gallon container size, i.e., 1 gallon, 3 gallon, 7 gallon, etc.
D.C.:
On center, distance between plant centers.
DlA.:
Diameter.
LVS.:
Leaves.
D.B.H.:
Diameter or caliper of main trunk of tree as measured at breast height at 4-1/2 feet above grade.
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
1V-33
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
. Section IV
IV.34
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
CAL.:
Caliper, the outside diameter of up to a four inch tree is measured six inches above grade, larger
trees are measured at 12 inches above grade.
8&8:
Balled and burlapped in accordance with horticultural standards of the American Association of
Nurserymen.
PPP:
Plants per pot.
FG:
Field grown.
STD.:
25.2.1.8
PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
25.2.1.8.1 PLANT MATERIALS
A. Provide container grown or, if appropriate, freshly dug trees and shrubs. Do not prune prior to
delivery. Do not bend or bind trees or shrubs in such a manner as to damage bark, break branches
or destroy natural shape. Provide protective covering during delivery. If plant delivery is made in
open vehicles, the entire load shall be suitably covered.
B. All plants are to be handled at all times so that roots or root balls are adequately protected from
sun, cold, or drying winds. No root balls for trees and container plants that have been cracked or
broken shall be planted except upon special approval. Plants shall not be pulled by the tops or
stems, nor handled in a rough or careless manner at any time.
C. Balled and burlapped plants shall be moved with firm, natural, balls of soil, not less than 1 foot
diameter of ball to every 1 inch caliper of trunk; root ball depth shall not be less than 2/3 of root ball
diameter. B & B plants which cannot be planted upon delivery shall have their root balls covered
with moist soil or mulch.
D. Trees shall be dug with adequate balls, burlapped, and wire bound if needed. Root pruning to be
done a minimum of 4 weeks before removal from the field and planting at the site. Root balls may
not be encased in "grow bags" or other synthetic material, except plastic shrink wrap for transport
only.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
E. Remove all fronds form sabal palms prior to planting, but leave a minimum of 12 inches of new
frond growth above the bud. Do not damage bud. On all other palms, only a minimum of palm
fronds shall be removed from crown to facilitate moving and handling. Clear trunk shall be
determined after minimum fronds have been removed. Boots shall be removed from trunk unless
otherwise specified. Palms shall be planted within 24 hours of delivery.
F. Deliver trees and shrubs after preparations for planting have been completed and plant
immediately. If planting is delayed more than 6 hours after delivery, set trees and shrubs in shade,
protect from weather and mechanical damage, and cover to keep the roots moist.
G. Label at least one tree and one shrub of each variety with a securely attached waterproof tag
bearing legible designation of botanical and common name.
H. Sod: Time delivery so that sod will be placed within twenty-four (24) hours after stripping. Protect
sod against drying and breaking by covering palettes of sod or placing in a shaded area.
25.2.1.9
JOB CONDITIONS
25.2.1.9.1 ACCEPTANCE OF JOB CONDITIONS.
A. The Contractor shall examine the sub-grade, verify elevations, observe the conditions under which
work is to be performed and notify the Landscape Architect or Project Representative in writing of
unsatisfactory conditions prior to beginning work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory
conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Landscape Architect. Start of work
shall indicate acceptance of conditions and full responsibility for the completed work.
B. Proceed with and complete the landscape work as rapidly as portions of the site become available,
working within the seasonal limitations for each kind of landscape work and following the approved
schedule. If seasonal limitations apply, notify the Landscape Architect for adjustments to the
Schedule.
C. Determine locations of all underground utilities and review for conflicts with planting procedures.
D. When adverse conditions to plant growth are encountered, such as rubble fill, drainage conditions
or obstruction, the Contractor shall notify the Landscape Architect in writing prior to planting.
E. Plant trees and shrubs after final grades are established and prior to the planting of lawns,
protecting lawn trees and promptly repairing damages from planting operations.
25.2.1.9.2 SCHEDULING OF WORK
A. The work shall be carried out to completion with the utmost speed. Immediately upon award of
contract, the Contractor shall prepare a construction schedule and furnish a copy to the Owner's
Representative and/or the Landscape Architect for approval. The Contractor shall carry out the
work in accordance with the approved schedule.
B. If the Contractor incurs unforeseen costs, such as overtime hours, holidays, etc. in order to
complete the work within the time stated in the Contract, and/or to maintain the progress schedule,
all said costs shall be borne by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner.
C. The Owner's Representative's may request in writing work stoppage. Upon written request from
the Owner's Representative, the Landscape Contractor shall suspend delivery of material and stop
all work for such a period as deemed necessary by the Owner, the Owner's Representative, or the
General Contractor with respect to any additional costs which may result from work stoppage.
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
JV.35
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
1V.36
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
25.2.1.9.3 UTILITIES
A. The Contractor shall perform work in a manner which will avoid conflicts with utilities. Hand
excavate, as required, to minimize possibility of damage to underground utilities. Maintain grade
stakes set by others until removal is mutually agreed upon by all parties concerned.
25.2.2 PRODUCTS
25.2.2.1 MATERIALS
25.2.2.1.1 PLANT MATERIALS: NOMENCLATURE
A. Plant species, sizes, etc. shall be per Plans and Specifications on Plant Material Scheduled..
Nomenclature is per Manual of Cultivated Plant, Standard Encyclopedia of Horticulture, L.H. Bailey,
or Standardized Plant Names Dictionary, American Joint Committee on Horticultural Nomenclature
(latest editions), or conforms with names accepted in the nursery trade.
25.2.2.1.2 PLANT MATERIALS: QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Provide healthy, vigorous stock grown under climatic conditions similar to conditions in the locality
of the project. Plants shall have a habit of growth that is normal for the species and be sound,
healthy, vigorous and free from insect pests or their eggs, plant diseases, defects and injuries.
Plants shall be well branched and densely foliated when in leaf and shall have healthy, well-
developed root systems.
B. Trees shall be heavily branched or, in the case of palms, be heavily leafed. Some plant materials
may be collected stock with the approval of the Landscape Architect. Provided tree species that
have a single main trunk (central leader), unless otherwise stated. Trees that have the main trunk
forming a "Y" shape or parallel branching are not acceptable.
C. Plant materials shall be specified and shall be Florida #1 or better as to shape and quality for the
species as outlined in Grades and Standards for Nursery Plants Part I and II, Florida Department of
Agriculture and Consumer Services (latest edition).
D. The Owner or Landscape Architect reserves the right to inspect plant materials either at the place
of growth or at the project site prior to planting for compliance with requirements for name variety,
size quality, or designated area.
E. Landscape materials shall be shipped with certificates of inspection as required by governmental
authorities. The Contractor shall comply with all governing regulations that are applicable to
landscape materials.
F. Do not make substitutions. If specified landscape material is not available, submit Landscape
Architect proof of it being non-available. In such event, if the Landscape Architect designates an
available source, such shall be acquired from designated source. When authorized, a written
change order for substitute material will be made by adjustment to Contract amount.
G. Height and/or width of trees shall be measured from ground up; width measurement shall be
normal crown spread of branches with plants in the normal position. This measurement shall not
include immediate terminal growth. All measurements shall be taken after pruning for specified
sizes. All trees and shrubs shall conform to measurements specified in the plant material schedule,
except that plant material larger. than specified may be used with the approval of the Owner or
Landscape Architect; with no increase to the Contract price. Plant materials shall not be pruned
prior to delivery.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
H. Plant Material shall be symmetrical, typical for variety and species. Plants used where symmetry is
required shall be matched as nearly as possible.
I. Balled and burlapped plants shan have firm, natural balls of earth of sufficient diameter and depth
to encompass the feeding root system necessary for full development of the plant and to conform
with the standards of the American Association of Nurserymen. Root balls and tree trunks shall not
be damaged by improper binding and B & B procedures.
J. Container-grown plants may be substituted for balled and burlapped plants or vice-versa provided
the quality is equal or better than specified and the Landscape Architect approves the substitution.
K. Container grown stock shall have been grown in containers for at least four months, but not over
two years. If requested, samples must be shown to prove no root bound condition exists.
25.2.2.1.3 GRASSES: SOD OR SEED
A. Sod or seed (aslif specified) shall be a species as stated on the Plan. Solid sod shall be of even
thickness and with a good root structure, 95% free of noxious week, freshly mowed before cutting,
and in healthy condition when laid. It must not be stacked more than 24 hours before laying and it
must be grown in soil compatible to that in which it will be installed. Sod must be kept moist prior to
and after installation.
S. Seed shall be delivered to the site in unopened bags with certification tags in place. Purity,
germination and weed content shall be as certification requirements.
25.2.2.1.4 MULCH
A. Mulch shall be 100% Grade aB" shredded cypress bark mulch, thoroughly mixed with a pre-
emergence weed killer according to the label directions as specified on the plan.
B. Install mulch to an even depth of 3" before compaction.
25.2.2.1.5 FERTILIZER
A. Granular fertilizer shall be uniform in composition; free flowing and suitable for application with
approved equipment; received at the site in full, labeled, unopened bags bearing the name, trade
name or trademark and warranty of the producer; fully conforming to State of Florida fertilizer laws.
B. All fertilizer shall bear the manufacturer's statement of analysis and shall contain the appropriate
minimum amounts of elements for the type of use specified herein.
C. Agriform 20-10-5 fertilizer tablets or approved equal, shall be placed in planting pit for all plant
materials at time of installation and prior to completion of pit backfilling.
D. Ground cover and annual areas shall receive fertilization with Osmocote Time Release Fertilizer
according to product instructions and rate.
E. For sod and seeded areas, fertilize with a complete granular fertilizer on Bahia andSt. Augustine
grass at the rate of one (1) pound of nitrogen per one thousand (1,000) square feet. Fertilizer shall
be commercial grade, mixed granules, with 30% - 50% of the nitrogen being in slow or controlled
release form. The ratio of nitrogen to potash will be 1:1 or 2:1 for complete fertilizer formulations.
Phosphorus shall be no more than Y-i the nitrogen level. They shall also contain magnesium and
micronutrients (i.e. manganese, iron, zinc, copper, etc.).
Marshall Street and Noltheast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
1V-37
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
1V-38
I
II
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
25.2.2.1.6 STAKES AND GUYS
A. For trees, approved plastic or rubber guys shall be used between the stakes and the tree trunk.
Galvanized steel guy wire shall not be used.
B. Stakes shall be cut from 2" x 4" pressure treated (p.t.) stock for trees over 2" caliper. Stakes shall
be 2" x 2" pressure treated (p.t.) stock for trees 2" caliper and under. A minimum of 2 stakes per
tree or an optional 3 stakes per tree shall be used.
C. For single trunk palms, stakes shall be cut from 2" x 4" pressure treated (p.t.) stock, with a
minimum of 3 stakes per palm. Batten consisting of 5 layers of burlap and 5 - 2" x 4" by 16" wood
connected with two - %" steel bands shall be used around the palm trunk.
D. Other tree staking systems may be acceptable if approved.
25.2.2.1.7 PLANTING SOIL
A. Unless stated on the plans or in the specifications, install plant material in tilled and loosened
native soil backfill. It is the responsibility of the Landscape Contractor to test, prior to planting and
at no additional cost to the Contract, any soils which may be unsuitable for the vigorous growth of
plants. Unsuitable conditions shall be reported to the Landscape Architect immediately in writing.
S. When required, planting soil media shall be provided by the Contractor and shall consist of 1/3 peat
and 2/3 sandy loam, with no lumps over 1".
C. Backfill and clean fill dirt provided by the Contractor shall be in a loose, friable soil. There must be
slight acid reaction to the soil (about 6.0 - 6.5 pH) with no excess of calcium or carbonate, and it
shall be free from excess weeds, clay lumps, stones, stumps, roots and toxic substances or any
other materials that might be harmful to plant growth or a hindrance to grading, planting, and
maintenance procedures and operations. No heavily organic soil, such as muck or peat shall be
used as fill dirt.
D. Bed preparation for annual beds under 1 gallon container size shall consist of 3" of Florida peat or
other approved organic soil amendment spread over full length and width of planting area. Rototil
organic layer 6 inches to 8 inches into native soil.
25.2.2.1.8 SOIL AMENDMENTS
A. Terra-Sorb AG or approved equal, soil amendment shall be mixed with native or planting soil for all
trees, shrubs, ground cover, and annuals according to manufacturer's recommended application
rates and methods, if specified on the Plans.
25.2.2.1.9 TREE PROTECTION
A. Wood fencing shall be 2" x 4" pressure treated (p.t.) stock with flagging on horizontal members.
Space vertical members 6 feet to 8 feet on center. The barricade shall be placed so as to protect
the critical protection zone area, which is the area surrounding a tree within a circle described by a
radius of one foot for each inch of the tree's diameter at breast height DBH at 4 - ~ feet above
grade.
25.2.2.1.10 ROOT BARRIER SYSTEM
A. Root barrier fabric shall be installed when specified in the plans and/or specifications for protection
of adjacent paved surfaces according to specific product name or equal. Install as directed by the
manufacturer.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
25.2.2.1.11 PACKAGED MATERIALS
A. Deliver packaged materials in containers showing weight; analysis and name of manufacturer.
Protect materials from deterioration during delivery and while stored at the site.
25.2.2.1.12 PESTICIDES
A. Pesticides shall be only approved, safe brands applied according to manufacturer's directions.
25.2.3 EXECUTION
25.2.3.1 PREPARATION
25.2.3.1.1 OBSTRUCTIONS BELOW GROUND
A. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to locate and mark all underground utilities, irrigation
lines and wiring prior to commencement of the work.
B. If underground construction, utilities or other obstructions are encountered in excavation of planting
areas or pits, the Landscape Architect shall be immediately notified to select a relocated position
for any materials necessary.
25.2.3.1.2 GRADING AND PREPARATION FOR PLANT MATERIALS
A. All proposed landscape areas containing existing turf grass or weeds shall be treated with
Monsanto's aRound-Up' per manufacturer's specifications. All proposed landscape areas adjacent
to water bodies shall be treated with aRodeo. per the manufacturer's specifications.
B. New plant materials will not be installed until a 98% weed/turf eradication has been achieved. More
than one application may be required to produce an acceptable planting bed.
C. Pre-emergent herbicides are not a substitute for spray treatment of "Round-Up" or "Rodeo", and
may be used only with the written approval of the Landscape Architect.
D. Should any plant material in the same, or adjacent beds be damaged by these chemicals, the
same size, quantity and quality of plants shall be immediately replaced by the Contractor at no cost
to the Owner.
E. Any necessary corrections or repairs to the finish grades shall be accomplished by the Contractor.
All planting areas shall be carefully graded and raked to smooth, even finish grade, free from
depressions, lumps, stones, sticks or other debris and such that they will conform to the required
finish grades and provide uniform and satisfactory surface drainage without puddling.
F. The Contractor shall remove debris (sticks, stones, rubbish) over 1 - % inches in any dimension
form individual tree, shrub and hedge pits and dispose of the excavated material off the site.
25.2.3.1.3 PREPARATION FOR ANNUAL BED PLANTING
A. Prepare native subgrade by rototilling or loosening by hand methods. Spread 3 inches of Florida
peat (1/3), sandy loam (1/3), or other approved organic soil amendment over the full length and
width of planting area for annuals. Rototill organic layer 6 inches to 8 inches into the native soil.
Grade the planting bed by "crowning' to insure that surface drainage, percolation, and aeration
occur at rapid rates. Add Osmocote time release fertilizer according to product instructions and
rate. .
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
IV-39
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
1V-40
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
25.2.3.1.4 PREPARATION FOR SEEDING AND SOD AREAS
A. All proposed sod areas containing existing turf grass or weeds shall be treated with Monsanto's
''Round-Up" per manufacturer's specifications. All proposed sod areas adjacent to water bodies
shall be treated with "Rodeo" per the Manufacturer's Specifications.
B. Limit preparation to areas which will be planted promptly after preparation. Loosen sub-grade of
seed and sod areas to a minimum depth of 4 inches.
C. Immediately prior to any turf work, the Contractor shall finish grade the soil to a smooth, even
surface assuring positive drainage away from buildings and the subsequent turf flush to the tops of
adjacent curbs and sidewalks. The surface shall be sloped to existing yard drains.
D. A complete fertilizer shall be applied to St. Augustine or Bahia grass at a rate of one {1} pound of
nitrogen per 1000 square feet. Fertilizer shall be commercial grade, mixed granules, with 30% -
505 of the nitrogen being in slow or controlled release form. Thoroughly work fertilizer into the top 4
inches of soil.
E. Moisten prepared seed and sod areas before planting if soil is dry. Water thoroughly and allow
surface moisture to dry before planting lawns. Do not create a muddy soil condition.
25.2.3.2
INSTALLATION
25.2.3.2.1 BERM CONSTRUCTION (IF SPECIFIED)
A. Install berms at location and design shown on Plans and at the height and slope indicated. Height
stated is for finished berm with soil at natural compaction.
B. Exact location and configuration of berms may require modification to allow proper drainage; such
changes will be coordinated with the Landscape Architect.
C. If shown on the Plan, construct berms using clean sandy loam fiJl dirt which is well-drained, free of
rocks, roots, or other debris, with a soil pH of an acid Nature {about 6.0 - 6.5}". No heavily organic
soil, such as muck or peat shall be used in berm construction.
25.2.3.2.2 LAYOUT OF PLANT MATERIALS
A. Unless otherwise stipulated, plant materials shall be approximately located per the plans by scale
measurements using established building, columns, curbs, screen walls, etc. as the measuring
reference point. Slight shifting may be required to clear wires; prevent blockage of signage, etc.
B. Shrubs and ground covers shall be located and spaced as noted on the plant material schedule {if
provided}, otherwise plants will be placed in the planting beds at the normally accepted spacing for
each species.
C. Leave an 18 inch (450 millimeters) border of mulched space between outer leaves of installed plant
material and the bed line, curb, or building foundation wall for all plant sizes.
D. Any necessary "minor" adjustments in the layout of planting shall be made by the Contractor with
the approval of the Landscape Architect in order to conform as nearly as possible to the intent of
the plans.
25.2.3.2.3 PLANTING PROCEDURES
A. All shrubs, trees and ground covers or vines shall be planted in pits having vertical sides and being
circular in. outline. . Planting pit shall be 3 to 5 times the width of the root ball.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
B. Plants shall be set straight or plumb, in the locations shown, at such level that after settlement
nonnal or natural relationship of the top of the root ball with the ground surface will be established.
With regards to proper nursery practices, plants under certain conditions (Le. low and wet areas)
will benefit from being planted "high" with the root ball about 1 inch higher than the surrounding
grade.
C. All plant materials shall be fertilized with Agriform 20-10-5 planting tablets, or approved equal, at
time of installation and prior to completion of pit backfilling. Agrifonn planting tablets shall be placed
unifonnly around the root mass at a depth that is between the middle and the bottom of the root
mass.
Application rate:
1 gallon 1 - 21 gram tablet
3 gallon 2 - 21 gram tablet
5 gallon 3 - 21 gram tablet
7 gallon 4 - 21 gram tablet
Trees 3 tablets each W (12 millimeters) caliper
Palms 7- 21 gram tablets
D. Native soil shall be used in back-filling plant pits or as specified. The Contractor shall be
responsible for providing additional soil for building tree saucers.
E. When balled and burlapped plants are set, undisturbed native soil shall be left under the base of
the root ball to prevent voids. Backfill tilled and loosened native soil around the sides of the root
ball. Remove the top 4 inches (100 millimeters) of burlap wire, and all tie-down material from the
root ball. Do not remove these materials from the bottom of the root ball. Thoroughly water-in
before bringing the back-fill up to the proper grade Roots of bare plants shall be properly spread
out, and planting soil carefully worked in among them. Failure to comply is cause for rejection.
F. Containerized plants shall be installed with undisturbed native soil left under the base of the root
ball to prevent voids. Planting pit shall be 3 to 5 times the width of the root ball. Backfill tilled and
loosened native soil around the sides of the root ball. Thoroughly water-in before bringing the
backfill up to the proper grade.
G. Plant spacing shall be "on center" and varies with the different plant species. Space each variety of
plant equally in the planting areas. Shrubs and ground covers adjacent to straight or curved edges
shall be triangular - spaced in rows parallel to those edges. Plant a minimum of 18 inches from the
back of the curb to the outside edge of the plant.
H. All azaleas shall be placed into a prepared bed of amended soil containing 50% weed-free Florida
peat or approved equivalent. Root balls shall be scarified vertically at 120 degree angles in a
triangular pattern.
I. Sabal palms may be planted deeper than nonnal if conditions warrant and if approved.
25.2.3.2.4 SODDING
A. During periods of drought, sod shall be watered sufficiently at its origin to moisten the soil
adequately to the depth to which it is to be cut.
B. An application of 6-6-6, 40% organic, slow or controlled release fertilizer shall be made to all lawn
areas just prior to the laying of the sod at a rate of one (1) pound of nitrogen per 1,000 square feet.
The ground shall be wet down before the sod is laid in place.
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Contrallmprovements Project
Section IV
IV.41
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
1V-42
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
C. Solid sod shall be laid tightly with closely abutting staggered joints with an even surface edge and
sod edge, in a neat and clean manner to the edge of all the paving and shrub areas. Cut down soil
level to 1 inch to 1-1/2 inches below top of walks prior to laying sod.
D. Within 2 hours after installing sod and prior to rolling, irrigate the sod. Sufficient water shall be
applied to wet the sod thoroughly and to wet the sod to a depth of 2 inches (50 millimeters).
Watering shall be done in a manner that will avoid erosion due to the application of excessive
quantities, and the watering equipment shall be a type that will prevent damage to the finished sod
surface. Watering shall be repeated as necessary to keep sod moist until rooted to subgrade.
E. The sod shall be pressed firmly into contact with the sod bed using a turf roller or other approved
equipment so as to eliminate air pockets, provide a true and even surface and insure knitting
without any displacement of the sod or deformation of the surfaces of sodded areas. After the
sodding operation has been completed, the edges of the area shall be smooth and shall conform to
the grades indicated.
F. If, in the opinion of the Landscape Architect, top dressing is necessary after rolling, clean silica
sand shall be used to fill voids. Evenly apply sand over the entire surface to be leveled, filling-in
dips and voids and thoroughly washing into the sod areas.
G. On slopes steeper than 2:1 and as required, the sod shall be fastened in place with suitable
wooden pins or by other approved method.
25.2.3.2.5 SEEDING
A. Seed shall be installed per the specifications of the State of Florida Department of Transportation.
See plan for type of seed.
25.2.3.2.6 TREE GUYING, BRACING AND STAKING
A. Tree guying, staking and bracing shall be the responsibility of the Contractor per sound nursery
practices, and shall be done per details shown on the Plans. For trees, a minimum of 2 stakes per
tree or an optional 3 stakes per tree at 120 degree spacing shall be used. Stakes shall be driven in
at an angle, then tightened to vertical supported by approved plastic or rubber guys. Trees shall be
staked with a minimum of 4 feet height of stake above grade and a minimum of 30 inches of stake
below grade.
B. For single trunk palms, a minimum of 3 stakes per palm at 120 degree spacing shall be used.
Toenail the stakes to batten consisting of 5 layers of burlap and 5- 2 inch x 4 inch x 16 inch wood
connected with two % inch steel bands. Palms shall be staked with a minimum of 5 feet of stake
above grade.
C. Contractor shall remove all tree guying, staking, and bracing from trees six (6) months after the
date of final acceptance of the landscape work.
D. Stake only trees that require support to maintain a plumb position or are in potentially hazardous
areas.
25.2.3.2.7 MULCHING
A. All planting beds shall be weed-free prior to mulching.
B. All curb, roadway, and bed line edges will be "trenched" to help contain the applied mulch.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
C. All plant beds and tree rings shall be mulched evenly with a 3 inch layer (before compaction) of
100% Grade B recycled cypress bark mulch, or other mulch as specified on the Plans or General
Notes.
D. Mulch shall not be placed against the trunks of plant materials or foundations of buildings. Maintain
a minimum 3 inch clearance for trees and shrub trunks and a minimum 6 inch clearance for the
walls of buildings.
E. For beds of annual flowers, a 12 inch wide x 3 inch deep band of mulch shall be installed in front of
the first row of annuals. Maintain a minimum 6 inches of non-mulched clearance from the outside
edge of annuals.
25.2.3.2.8 PRUNING
A. Pruning shall be done by an experienced certified Arborist to maintain the natural shape and form .
of the plant.
B. Upon acceptance by the Owner, prune any broken branches, remove crossed branches, and
branches hanging below the clear trunk of the tree.
25.2.3.2.9 CLEAN-UP
A. During landscape work, store materials and equipment where directed by the Owner.
B. The Contractor shall promptly remove any materials and equipment used on the job, keeping the
area neat at all times. Upon completion of all planting, dispose of all excess soil and debris leaving
pavements and work areas in safe and orderly condition.
C. The clean-up of the site shall include the removal and proper disposal of the tree guying, staking,
and bracing materials as described in specifications.
25.2.3.2.10 PROTECTION
A. The Contractor shall provide safeguards for the protection of workmen and others on, about, or
adjacent to the work, as required under the parameters of the Occupational Safety and Health
Administration (O.S.H.A.) standards.
B. The Contractor shall protect the Owner's and adjacent property from damage.
C. the Contractor shall protect the landscape work and materials from damage due to landscape
operations. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance periods.
D. The Contractor shall provide protection (tree barricades) for all existing trees and palms as
specified.
25.2.3.2.11 REPAIR OF DAMAGES
E. The Contractor shall repair all damage caused by his operations to other materials, property, or
trades to a level equal in quality to the existing condition prior to damage.
F. The Contractor shall be held responsible for all damage done by his work or employees to other
materials or trades' work. Patching and replacement of damaged work may be done by others, at
the Owner's direction, but the cost of same shall be paid by the Contractor who is responsible for
the damage.
Marshall Street and Norlheast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
IV-43
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
N-44
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
25.2.3.3 MAINTENANCE
A. The Contractor shall maintain all plant materials in a first class condition from the beginning of
landscape construction until Final Acceptance.
B. Operations:
. 1. Maintenance shall include, but not be limited to, watering of turf and planting beds, mowing,
fertilizing, cultivation, weeding, pruning, disease and pest control, replacement of dead
materials, straightening, turf or planter settlement corrections, replacement of rejected
materials, staking and guying repair and tightening, wash-out repairs and regrading, and any
other procedures consistent with the good horticultural practice necessary to insure normal,
vigorous and healthy growth of all work under the Contract. Mowing shall be consistent with
the recommended height per the University of Florida Cooperative Extension Service.
2. Within the warranty period, the Contractor shall notify the Owner of any maintenance practices
being followed or omitted which would be detrimental to the healthy, vigorous growth of the
landscape.
3. The Contractor shall be responsible for the final watering of not less than one inch of water for
all planted materials before leaving the site.
25.2.3.4
INSPECTION, REJECTION, AND ACCEPTANCE
25.2.3.4.1 INSPECTION
A. Upon completion of the installation, the Contractor will notify the Owner or the Owner's
Representative that the job is ready for inspection. Within 15 days of notifications, the installation
will be inspected by the Landscape Architect. A Written and/or graphic inspection report will be sent
to the Owner and/or Landscape Contractor.
25.2.3.4.2 REJECTION AND REPLACEMENT
A. The Landscape Architect shall be final judge as to the suitability and acceptability of any part of the
work. Plant material will be rejected if it does not meet the requirements set forth in Plans and
Specifications.
B. Replace any rejected materials immediately or within 15 days and notify the Landscape Architect
that the correction has been made.
25.2.3.4.3 ACCEPTANCE
A. After replacement of rejected plant material (if any) have been made, and completion of all other
correction items, the Owner or Project Representative will accept the project in writing.
B. Upon Final Acceptance, the Owner assumes responsibility for maintenance within the terms of the
Contract. Acceptance will in no way invalidate.the Contractor's warranty period.
C. The Contractor's warranty period will begin after final aCCeptance of the project by the Owner.
1. If evidence exists of any lien or claim arising out of or in connection with default in performance
of this Contract, the Owner shall have the right to retain any payment sufficient to discharge
such claim and all costs in connection with discharging such claim.
2. Where the Specifications call for any stipulated item or an "approved equivalent", or in words to
that effect, the Contractor shall indicate the price of the type and species specified in the
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I.
I
I
I
proposal, giving the price to be added or deducted from his Contract price. The final selection
rests with the Owner or his representative.
3. Where plants installed do not meet specifications, the Owner reserves the right to request plant
replacement or an appropriate deduction from the Contract amount to compensate for the
value not received from the under-specified plant materials. No additional compensation will be
made to the Contractor for plants installed that exceed specifications.
25.2.3.5 WARRANTY
A. The Contractor shall warranty all palms and trees furnished under this contract for a period of one
(1) year and all shrubs for a period of six (6) months. Material which is either dead or in poor health
during this period or at completion will be replaced at no charge to the Owner. Should any of the
plant materials show 50% or more defoliation during the warranty period, due to the Contractor's
use of poor quality or improper materials or workmanship, the Contractor upon notice, shall replace
without delay same with no additional cost to the Owner. Should any plant require replacing, the
new plant shall be given the equal amount of warranty.
26 HOPE DEFORMED - REFORMED PIPE LINING
26.1 INTENT
It is the intention of this specification to provide for the trench/ess restoration of 8" to 12" sanitary sewers by
the installation of a high density polyethylene, jointless, continuous, fold and form pipe liner which is
watertight and chemically resistant to withstand exposure to domestic sewage including all labor, materials
and equipment to provide for a complete, fully restored and functioning installation.
26.2 PRODUCT AND CONTRACTOR/INSTALLER ACCEPTABILITY
The City requires that all contractors be prequalified. See General Conditions regarding contractor
prequalification. In addition, the City requires a proven extensive tract record for the fold and form liner
system to be used in this project. All contractors submitting for prequalification approvalfor this project must
exhibit extensive satisfactory experience in the installation of the proposed liner system and satisfactory
evidence that the proposed liner system has been extensively and successfully installed in the Unites
States and the State of Florida. The installer must be certified by the liner system manufacturer for
installation of the liner system. The City reserves full and complete authority to approve the satisfactory
nature of the both the liner system and the installer.
26.3 MATERIALS
Pipe shall be made from P. E. 3408 polyethylene resins complying with ASTM D 3350, cell classification:
P.E. 345434 D for High Density. It shall be Type 3, Grade 4, Class D, according to ASTM D 1248. The
Contractor shall provide certified test results for review by the Engineer, from the manufacturer, that the
material conforms with the applicable requirements. Material shall have a minimum thickness of SDR 32.5.
Pipe specimens shall comply with the minimum property values shown below with the applicable ASTM
requirements:
Material Property ASTM Method Value
HDPE Tensile Strength D638 3,300 psi
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC FacilitieS
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
1V-45
Elasticity Modulus E=113,OOO psi
Impact Strength D 256 A 3.0 ft-Ib/in
Flexure Modulus E=136,OOO psi
Expansion Coeff. c=0.009 in/in/deg F
At the time of manufacture, each lot of liner shall be reviewed for defects and tested in accordance with
ASTM D 2837 and D 1693. At the time of delivery, the liner shall be homogeneous throughout, uniform in
color, free of cracks, holes, foreign materials, blisters, or deleterious faults. The Contractor shall provide, as
requested, certified test results for review by the Engineer, from the manufacturer, that the material
conforms with the applicable requirements. The Engineer may at any time request the Contractor provide
test results from field samples to the above requirements.
Liner shall be marked at 5-foot intervals or less with a coded number, which identifies the manufacturer,
SDR, size, material, date, and shift on which the liner was extruded.
Lining manufacturer shall submit to the Engineer for approval as requested, complete design calculations
for the liner thickness. The criteria for liner design shall be HS-20 traffic loading, water table to the ground
. surface, minimum expected lifetime of 50 years, and no structural strength retained from the existing pipe.
Liner materials shall meet manufactures specifications of Pipe Liners, Inc. 3421 N. Causeway, Suite 321,
New Orleans, LA 70002, 1-800-344-3744 or approved equal. Any approved equal liner system must be
approved by the Engineer as an equal system prior to receiving bids. Request for contractor
prequalification and/or equal liner system approval must be received by the Engineer no later than 14 days
. prior to the date for receiving bids.
26.4 CLEANING/SURFACE PREPARATION
It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to clean and prepare the existing pipes for rehabilitation. The
Contractor will thoroughly clean the interior of the sewers to produce a clean interior surface free of all
coatings, sand, rock, roots, sludge, or other deleterious materials prior to liner insertion. Bypass pumping
will be provided by the Contractor as part of the unit cost of restoration. Bypass operations are to be so
arranged as to cause minimum disruptions to local traffic, residents and particularly to commercial facilities.
During the cleaning and preparation operations all necessary precautions shall be taken to protect the
public, all property and the sewer from damage.
All material removed from the sewers shall be the Contractor's responsibility for prompt disposal in
accordance with all regulatory agency requirements. The Contractor may be required to control the rate of
sewer cleaning in the sanitary system to avoid heavy pollution loads at the City's treatment plants.
26.5 TELEVISION INSPECTION
After cleaning, and again after the rehabilitation work on each section of the project is completed, all pipe
sections shall be visually inspected by means of closed-circuit color television, and recorded on VHS format
tapes provided to the project engineer. The television system used shall be designed for the purpose and
suitably lighted to provide a clear picture of the entire periphery of the pipe.
26.6 LINER INSTALLATION
Liner shall. be sized to field measurements obtained by the Contractor to provide a tight fit to the full interior
circumference of the existing sanitary sewer and shall be a continuous, jointless liner product from inside of
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
1V-46
II
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
manhole to inside of manhole. Contractor shall use installation methods approved by the liner manufacturer
including liner placement, reforming to fit existing pipe, pressure and heat requirements and reconnection
of laterals. The Contractor shall immediately notify the Engineer of any construction delays taking place
during the insertion operation. Contractor shall maintain a reasonable backup system for bypass pumping
should delays or problems with pumping systems develop. Liner entries at manholes shall be smooth, free
of irregularities, and watertight. No pinholes, tears, cracks, thin spots, or other defects in the liner shall be
permitted. Such defects shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at his expense. OSHA
requirements for installation procedures, in particular, confined spaces are to be met.
26.7 LATERAL RECONNECTION
Sanitary laterals shall be reconnected as soon as possible to renew service. Laterals are to be reconnected
by means of robotics, by intemally cutting out the liner to 100% of the area of the original opening. All
lateral reconnections are to be grouted to prevent leakage. Grouting method and material is to be approved
by the Engineer.
Any reconnections to laterals and connections to manholes which are observed to leak shall be resealed by
the Contractor. All laterals discovered during the lining process are to be reconnected unless specifically
directed otherwise by the City. The Contractor will be requested to reconnect any laterals discovered to not
be reconnected at a later date. Contractor shall notify all local system users when the sanitary system will
not be available for normal usage by the delivery of door hangers with appropriate information regarding
the construction project.
26.8 TIME OF CONSTRUCTION
Construction schedules will be submitted by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer. At no time will
any sanitary sewer service connection remain inoperative for more than a eight hour period without a
service bypass being operated by the Contractor. In the event that sewage backup occurs and enters
buildings, the Contractor shall be responsible for cleanup, repair and property damage costs and claims.
26.9 PAYMENT
Payment for sanitary sewer restoration shall be made per lineal foot including all preparation, bypass
pumping, equipment, labor, materials, operations, restoration, etc, to provide a fully completed and
operational sewer. Payment shall be measured from center of manhole to center of manhole for. the
sanitary systems and from end of pipe to end of pipe for storm systems.
27 PLANT MIX DRIVEWAYS
New driveways or existing black top driveways that must be broken back in widening the pavement
(remove only enough to allow adequate grade for access to the street) shall be constructed or replaced in
accordance with the specifications for paving the street with the exception that the base shall be six (6)
inches. Use Section 23 G Asphaltic Concrete as specified for the street paving.
When finished surface of existing drive is gravel, replace ment shall be of like material. Payment shall be
the same as Plant Mix Driveways.
27.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
Measurement shall be the number of square yard of Plant Mix Driveways in place and accepted.
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section N
IV-47
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Contrallmprovements Project
Section IV
IV-48
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
27.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT
Payment shall be the unit price per square yard for Plant Mix Driveways as measured above, which price
shall be full compensation for all work described in this section of the specifications and shall include all
materials, equipment, tools, labor and incidentals necessary to complete the work.
28 REPORTING OF TONNAGE OF RECYCLED MATERIALS
The State cif Florida has imposed strict requirements on Solid Wastes Handlers to decrease the generation
of solid waste products and in particular to increase the amount of recycle products. In this regard, the City
is required to determine the monthly total tonnage of all construction debris which is recycled in this
contract. A recycled material is any material reused in any manner which diverts its alternative disposal to a
publicly assessable landfill or by incineration. If a material, such as clean earth, is not normally disposed to
a landfill or incineration, then it is not to be considered a recyclable material. The Contractor is required to
include in each request for payment the total tonnage of materials which were recycled by the contractor
during the contract period for which the payment request is made. Any cost to the contractor for the
development and submittal of this information is to be included in the contract items provided in the original
contract proposal.
29 CONCRETE CURBS
Concrete Curbs shall be constructed to the line, grade and dimensions as shown on the plans. Unless
otherwise noted, all concrete curbs shall have fiber mesh reinforcement and have a minimum strength of
3000 p.s.i. at 28 days. Expansion joints shall be placed at intervals not to exceed 100 feet, and scored
joints shall be placed at intervals not to exceed 10 feet. In addition, all the requirements of City Articles 6, 7,
and 8 shall also apply. The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance
of the placement of all concrete curbs.
29.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
The basis of measurement shall be lineal feet of curb in place and accepted.
29.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT
Payment shall be the unit price per lineal foot of curb, which price shall be full compensation for all work
described in this and other applicable parts of the specifications and shall include all materials, equipment,
tools, labor and incidentals necessary to complete the work.
30 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS AND DRIVEWAYS
30.1 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS
Concrete sidewalks shall be constructed to the line, grade and dimensions as shown on the plans or herein
specified, Unless otherwise noted, all concrete sidewalks shall have fiber mesh reinforcement and have a
minimum strength of 3000 p.s.i. at 28 days. Unless otherwise specified, all concrete sidewalks shall have a
minimum width of four feet (4'). Concrete sidewalks shall have a minimum thickness of four inches (4"),
except at driveway crossings where a minimum thickness of six inches (6") is required. Also, 6/6 X 10/10
welded wire mesh reinforcement is required for all sidewalk that crosses driveways. The welded wire mesh
shall be positioned in the middle to upper third of the placement. No compensation shall be given if the
welded wire mesh is not properly placed. Expansion joints shall be placed at intervals of not more than 100
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
hundred feet, and scoring marks shall be made every 5 feet. Concrete shall be poured only on compacted
subgrade. In addition, all the requirements of City Articles 6, 7, and 8 shall also apply.
30.2 CONCRETE DRIVEWAYS
Concrete driveways, whether new construction or replacement, shall be a minimum of six (6) inches in
thickness with 6/6 X 10/10 welded wire mesh reinforcement and a minimum horizontal distance between
expansion joints of no less than four (4) feet measured in any direction. The welded wire mesh shall be
positioned in the middle to upper third of the placement. No compensation shall be given if the welded wire
mesh is not properly placed. Concrete shall be poured only on compacted subgrade. In addition, all the
requirements of City Articles 6, 7, and 8 shall also apply.
The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of the placement of all
concrete sidewalks and driveways.
30.3 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
The basis of measurement shall be the number of square feet of 4' concrete sidewalk, 6" concrete
sidewalk, and 6" concrete driveways in place and accepted.
30.4 BASIS OF PAYMENT
Payment shall be the unit price per square foot for each item as measured above, which price shall be full
compensation for all work described in this section and other applicable parts of the specifications and shall
include all materials, equipment, tools, welded wire mesh where required, labor and incidentals necessary
to complete the work.
31 SODDING
Unless otherwise noted herein, the contractor shall place all sod, either shown on the plans or at the
direction of the Engineer, in conformance with Sections 575, 981, 982 and 983 of FDOT's Standard
Specifications (latest edition). The area for sod application shall be loosened and excavated to a suitable
depth and finished to a grade compatible with existing grass and structures. Sod shall be placed with edges
in close contact and shall be compacted to uniform finished grade with a sod roller immediately after
placement. In sloped areas, the sod shall be graded and placed so as to prohibit erosion and undermining
of the adjacent sidewalk. No sod that has been cut for more than 72 hours can be used unless authorized
by the Engineer in advance. The sod shall be thoroughly watered immediately after placement. The
Contractor shall continue to water sod as needed and/or directed by the Engineer as indicated by sun
exposure, soil, heat and rain conditions, to establish and assure growth, until termination of the contract.
Dead sod, or sod not acceptable to the Engineer, shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at no
additional compensation. Any questions concerning the type of existing sod shall be determined by the
Engineer.
Unless otherwise noted on the plans, payment for,sod (including labor, equipment, materials, placement,
rolling, watering, etc.) shall be included in other bid items. Payment for these associated bid items may be
withheld until the Contractor provides the City a healthy, properly placed stand of grass. When this work is
given as a separate bid item, it shall cover all labor, equipment and materials, (including water) required for
this work and shall be paid for on the basis of each square foot in place and accepted. No payment for sod
shall be made until the Contractor provides the City a healthy, properly placed stand of grass.
Marshall Street and Nottheast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section N
IV-49
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Contrallmprovements Project
Sfjction IV
IV-50
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
32 SEEDING
Seed, or seed and mulch, shall only be used when specified for certain demolition projects. The seed
and/or mulch shall be placed as called for on the plans in the following manner. The area to be seeded
shall be brought to the required line and grade, fertilized and seeded in basic conformance with the latest
edition of FDOT's Standard Specifications Sections 570, 981, 982 and 983. However, no wildflower seed
shall be used, and Argentine Bahia Seed shall be used instead of Pensacola Bahia. No sprigging will be
required. Also, the addition of 20 lb. of Rye Seed (to total 60 lb. of seed per acre) will be required during the
stated periods. It is also required that the Contractor maintain said seed until growth is assured.
When this work is given as a bid item, the item shall cover all labor, material, equipment (including water),
required for this work, and shall be paid for on the basis of each square yard in place and accepted. If
called for on the plans, but not shown as a bid item, then the cost of such work as stated above shall be
included in the cost of other work.
33 STORM MANHOLES. INLETS. CATCH BASINS OR OTHER STORM
STRUCTURES
For details on specific design of a type of storm structure refer to Part B Index Numbers 200 to 235.
When required, inlets, catch basins or other structures shall be constructed according to the plans and
applicable parts of the specifications, Section Numbers 7, 8, & 9, and as approved by the Engineer. Said
structures shall be protected and saved from damage by the elements or other causes until acceptance of
the work.
33.1 BUILT UP TYPE STRUCTURES
Manholes shall be constructed of brick with cast iron frames and covers as shown on the Index Numbers
201 and 202. Invert channels shall be constructed smooth and semi circular in shape conforming to inside
of adjacent sewer section. Changes in direction of flow shall be made in a smooth curve of as large a
radius as possible. Changes in size and grade of channels shall be made gradually and evenly. Invert
channels shall be built up with brick and mortar on top of concrete base. -
The storm structure tioor outside of channels shall be made smooth and sloped toward channels.
Manhole steps shall not be provided. Joints shall be completely filled and the mortar shall be smoothed
from inside of the manholes.
The entire exterior of brick manholes shall be plastered with one half inch of mortar.
Brick shall be laid radially with every sixth course being a stretcher course.
In cases where a storm pipe extends inside a structure, the excess pipe will be cut off with a concrete saw
and shall not be removed with a sledge hammer.
33.2 PRECAST TYPE
The manhole base shall be set on a pad of dry native sand approximately five inches thick to secure proper
seating and bearing.
Precast Manholes and Junction Boxes: The Contractor may substitute precast manholes and junction
boxes in lieu of cast in place units unless otherwise shown on the plans. Precast Inlets will not be
acceptable. When precast units are substituted, the construction of such units must be in accordance with
ASTM C 478, or the standard specifications at the manufacturers option.- -
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Precast structures must also meet the requirement that on the lateral faces, either inside or outside, the
distance between precast openings for pipe or precast opening and top edge of precast structure be no
less than wall thickness. A minimum of four courses of brick will be provided under manhole ring so that
future adjustment of manhole lid can be accommodated. Manhole steps shall not be provided. Manhole
using 0 ring between precast sections will not be acceptable for storm structures.
33.3 BASIS OF PAYMENT
Payment for Junction Boxes, Manholes or other structures shall be on a unit basis.
34 MATERIAL USED
All material incorporated into the final work shall be new material unless otherwise approved by the
Engineer. If requested by the Engineer, the Contractor shall furnish purchase receipts of all materials.
35 CONFLICT BETWEEN PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS
Whenever a conflict appears between the plans and specifications, the more stringent requirement shall
apply. If a conflict is of such a nature as to require a decision, then a written request for clarification must be
made prior to starting that phase of construction.
36 STREET SIGNS
The removal, covering or relocation of street signs by the Contractor is PROHIBITED.
All street signs shall be removed, covered or relocated by the City's Traffic Engineering Division in
accordance with Sections 700,994,995, and 996 of FOOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition).
The Contractor shall notify the City's Traffic Engineering Division a minimum of 24 hours in advance of the
proposed sign relocation, covering or removal.
37 AUDIONIDEO TAPE OF WORK AREAS
37.1 AUDIONIDEO TAPE OF WORK AREA SHALL BE PREPARED BY THE CITY
This project will not require the preparation of an audio/video tape of work areas by the Contractor.
37.2 AUDIONIDEO TAPE OF ALL WORK AREAS SHALL BE PREPARED BY THE
. CONTRACTOR
37.2.1 CONTRACTOR TO PREPARE AUDIONIDEO TAPE
Prior to commencing work, the Contractor shall have a continuous color audio/video tape recording taken
along the entire length of the Project including all affected project areas. Streets, easements, rights-of-way,
lots or construction sites within the Project must be recorded to serve as a record of a pre-construction
conditions.
37.2.2 SCHEDULING OF AUDIONIDEO TAPE
The video recordings shall not be made more than 21 days prior to construction in any area.
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Contrallmprovements Project
Section N
N-51
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
IV-52
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
37.2.3
PROFESSIONAL VIDEOGRAPHERS
The Contractor shall engage the services of a professional videographer. The color audio videotapes shall
be prepared by a responsible commercial firm known to be skilled and regularly engaged in the business of
pre-construction color audio-video tape documentation.
37.2.4
EQUIPMENT
All equipment, accessories, materials and labor to perforrn this service shall be furnished by the Contractor.
The total audio video system shall reproduce bright, sharp, clear pictures with accurate colors and shall be
free from distortion, tearing, rolls or any other form of imperfection. The audio portion of the recording shall
reproduce the commentary of the camera operator with proper volume, clarity and be free from distortion
and interruptions. In some instances, audio videotape coverage may be required in areas not accessible by
conventional wheeled vehicles. Such coverage shall be obtained by walking.
37.2.5
RECORDED INFORMATION, AUDIO
Each tape shall begin with the current date, project name and be followed by the general location, Le.,
viewing side and direction of progress. Accompanying the video recording. of each videotape shaH be a
corresponding and simultaneously recorded audio recording. This audio recording, exclusively containing
the commentary of the camera operator or aide, shall assist in viewer orientation and in any needed
identification, differentiation, clarification, or objective description of the features being shown in the video
portion of the recording. The audio recording shall also be free from any conversations.
37.2.6
RECORDED INFORMATION VIDEO
All video recordings must continuously display transparent digital information to include the date and time of
recording. The date information shall contain the month, day and year. The time information shall contain
the hour, minutes and seconds. Additional information shall be displayed periodically. Such information
shall include, but not be limited to, project name, contract number, direction of travel and the viewing side.
This transparent information shall appear on the extreme upper left hand third of the screen. Camera pan,
tilt, zoom-in and zoom out rates shall be sufficiently controlled such that recorded objects will be clearly
viewed during videotape playback. In addition, all other camera and recording system controls, such as
lensJocus and aperture, video level, pedestal, chrome, white balance, and electrical focus shall be properly
controlled or adjusted to maximize picture quality. The construction documentation shall be recorded in SP
mode.
37.2.7
VIEWER ORIENTATION
The audio and video portions of the recording shall maintain viewer orientation. To this end, overall
establishing views of all visible house and business addresses shall be utilized. In areas where the
proposed construction location will not be readily apparent to the videotape viewer, highly visible yellow
flags shall be placed, by the Contractor, in such a fashion as to clearly indicate. the proposed centerline of
construction. When conventional wheeled vehicles are used as conveyances for the recording system, the
vertical distance between the camera lens and the ground shall not exceed 10 feet. The camera shall be
firmly mounted such that transport of the camera during the recording process will not cause an unsteady
picture.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
37.2.8 LIGHTING
All taping shall be done during time of good visibility. No taping shall be done during precipitation, mist or
fog. The recording shall only be done when sufficient sunlight is present to properly illuminate the subjects
of recording and to produce bright, sharp video recordings of those subjects.
37.2.9 SPEED OF TRAVEL
The average rate of travel during a particular segment of coverage shall be directly proportional to the
number, size and value of the surface features within that construction areas zone of influence. The rate of
speed in the general direction of travel of the vehicle used during taping shall not exceed 44 feet per
minute.
37.2.10 VIDEO LOG/INDEX
All videotapes shall be permanently labeled and shall be properly identified by videotape number and
project title. Each videotape shall have a log of that videotape's contents. The log shall describe the various
segments of coverage contained on the video tape in terms of the names of the streets or location of
easements, coverage beginning and end, directions of coverage, video unit counter numbers, engineering
surveyor coordinate values (if reasonably available) and the date.
37.2.11 AREA OF COVERAGE
Tape coverage shall include all surface features located within the zone of influence of construction
supported by appropriate audio coverage. Such coverage shall include, but not be limited to, existing
driveways, sidewalks, curbs, pavements, drainage system features, mailboxes, landscaping, culverts,
fences, signs, Contractor staging areas, adjacent structures, etc. within the area covered by the project. Of
particular concern shall be the existence of any faults, fractures, or defects: Taped coverage shall be limited
to one side of the Site, street, easement or right of way at anyone time.
37.2.12 COSTS OF VIDEO SERVICES
The cost to complete the requirements under this section shall be included in the contract items provided in
the proposal sheet. There is no separate pay item for this work.
38 EROSION AND SilTATION CONTROL
38.1 STABILIZATION OF DENUDED AREAS
No disturbed area may be denuded for more than thirty (30) calendar days unless otherwise authorized by
the City Engineer. During construction, denuded areas shall be covered by mulches such as straw, hay,
filter fabric, seed and mulch, sod, or some other permanent vegetation. Within sixty (60) calendar days after
final grade is established on any portion of a project site, that portion of the site shall be provided with
established permanent soil stabilization measures per the original site plan, whether by impervious surface
or landscaping.
38.2 PROTECTION AND STABILIZATION OF SOIL STOCKPILES
Fill material stockpiles shall be protected at all times by on-site drainage controls which prevent erosion of
the stockpiled material. Control of dust from such stockpiles may be required, depending upon their location
and the expected length of time the stockpiles will be present. In no case shall an unstabilized stockpile
remain after thirty (30) calendar days.
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
IV.53
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
1V.54
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
38.3 PROTECTION OF EXISTING STORM SEWER SYSTEMS
During construction, all storm sewer inlets in the vicinity of the project shall be protected by sediment traps
such as secured hay bales, sod, stone, etc., which shall be maintained and modified as required by
construction progress, and which must be approved by the City Engineer before installation.
38.4 SEDIMENT TRAPPING MEASURES
Sediment basins and traps, perimeter berms, filter fences, berms, sediment barriers, vegetative buffers and
other measures intended to trap sediment andlor prevent the transport of sediment onto adjacent
properties, or into existing water bodies; must be installed, constructed, or, in the case of vegetative buffers,
protected from disturbance, as a first step in the land alteration process. Such systems shall be fully
operative and inspected by the City before any other disturbance of the site begins. Earthen structures
including but not limited to berms, earth filters, dams or dikes shall be stabilized and protected from
drainage damage or erosion within one week of installation.
38.5 SEDIMENTATION BASINS
Areas of 3 acres or more shall be required to have temporary sedimentation basins as a positive remedy
against downstream siltation and will be shown and detailed on construction plans. During development,
permanent detention areas may be used in place of silt basins, provided they are maintained to the
satisfaction of the City.
The Contractor will be required to prohibit discharge of silt through the outfall structure during construction
of any detention area and will be required to clean out the detention area before installing any permanent
subdrain pipe. In addition, permanent detention areas must be totally cleaned out and operating properly at
final inspection and at the end of the one year warranty period. When temporary sedimentation basins are
used, they shall be capable at all times of contain-ing at least one (1) cubic foot of sediment for each one
hundred (100) square feet of area tributary to the basin. Such capacity shall be maintained throughout the
project by regular removal of sediment from the basin.
38.6 WORKING IN OR CROSSING WATERWAYS OR WATERBODIES
Land alteration and construction shall be minimized in both permanent and intermittent waterways and the
immediately adjacent buffer of 25 feet from top of bank of the waterways and the buffer area whenever
possible, and barriers shall be used to prevent access. Where in channel work cannot be avoided,
precautions must be taken to stabilize the work area during land alteration, development and/or
construction to minimize erosion. If the channel and buffer area are disturbed during land alteration, they
must be stabilized within three (3) calendar days after the in channel work is completed.
Silt curtains or other filter/siltation reduction devices must be installed on the downstream side of the in
channel alteration activity to eliminate impacts due to increased turbidity. Wherever stream crossings are
required, properly sized temporary culverts shall be provided by the contractor and removed when
construction is completed. The area of the crossing shall be restored to a condition as nearly.as possible
equal to that which existed prior to any construction activity.
38.7 SWALES, DITCHES AND CHANNELS
All swales, ditches and channels leading from the site shall be sodded within three (3) days of excavation..
All other interior swales, etc., including detention areas will be sodded prior to issuance of a Certificate of
Occupancy.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
38.8 UNDERGROUND UTILITY CONSTRUCTION
The construction of underground utility lines and other structures shall be done in accordance with the
following standards:
a. No more than 400 lineal feet of trench shall be open at anyone time;
b. Wherever consistent with safety and space consideration, excavated material shall be cast to the
. uphill side of trenches. Trench material shall not be cast into or onto the slope of any stream,
channel, road ditch or waterway.
38.9 MAINTENANCE
All erosion and siltation control devices shall be checked regularly, especially after each rainfall and will be
cleaned out and/or repaired as required.
38.10 COMPLIANCE
Failure to comply with the aforementioned requirements may result in a fine and/or more stringent
enforcement procedures such as (but not limited to) issuance of a .Stop Work Order".
City of Clearwater Standard Detail Drawings No. 601 607 are examples of accepted methods that may be
used or required to control erosion and siltation.
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Contrallmprovements Project
Section IV
IV-55
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
1V.56
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
City of Clearwater · Erosion Control
This notice is to inform the prime contractor that the City of Clearwater holds them responsible for soil
erosion control on their site.
The City of Clearwater Public Works Department has the responsibility to minimize the amount of soil
erosion into the City's streets, storm sewers and waterways.
The construction of a new residence or commercial site and major remodeling of an existing site creates a
potential for soil erosion. These instances are usually the result of contractors and subcontractors
accessing the property with equipment or construction materials. Then rain storms redistribute the eroded
soil into the adjacent streets, storm systems and waterways.
When erosion takes place, a Planning & Development Services Inspector or a Public Works Inspector will
place a correction notice at the site. The procedure will be as follows:
1 st occurrence Warning
2nd occurrence $32 reinspection fee
3rd occurrence $80 reinspection fee
4th occurrence Stop work order
Dependent on the severity of the erosion, the City's Public Works Administration Department may elect to
rectify the erosion problem and charge the contractor accordingly.
The attached drawings and details are recommendations for the contractor to use as means to support the
site from eroding. The contractor may elect to shovel and sweep the street daily or on an as needed basis.
However, erosion must be held in check.
If the contractor would like to meet with a Public Works inspector on any particular site, please contact
Construction at 462-6126 or Planning & Development Services at 562-4741.
Erosion Control Required - City of Clearwater's Code of Ordinances requires erosion control on all land
development projects.
Erosion control must be in place and maintained throughout the job. Failure to do so may result in
additional costs and time delays to the permit holder.
Contact Public Works Administration with specific questions at 562-4750.
-------------------
CITY OF CLEARWATER
NOTICE OF
EROSION VIOLATION
UNDER SECTION 3-701 (DIVISION 7 - EROSION AND SILTATION CONTROL) OF THE CITY OF CLEARWATER CODE OF ORDINANCES, THIS
SITE HAS BEEN FOUND IN VIOLATION. THIS SITE MUST BE RESTORED TO AN EROSION CONTROLLED SITE PRIOR TO ANY FURTHER
DEVELOPMENT TO CONTINUE.
Warning
$32.00 Reinspection Fee
$80.00 Reinspection Fee
Stop Work Order
CITY OF CLEARWATER
PLANNING & DEVELOPMENT SERVICES 727 562-4741
&
PUBLIC SERVICES/CONSTRUCTION 727462-6126
DATE POSTED:
Inspector's Name:
Received by:
(Signature indicates only a copy of this notice has been received
and does not in any way indicate admission of guilt or concurrence
with findings of the inspector.)
. Inspector's Signature:
IT IS A VIOLATION TO REMOVE THIS NOTICE
ANY UNAUTHORIZED PERSON REMOVING THIS SIGN WILL BE PROSECUTED
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Contrallmprovements Project
Section IV
IV-57
39 UTILITY TIE IN LOCATION MARKING
The tie in locations for utility laterals of water, sanitary sewer, and gas shall be plainly marked on the back
of the curb. Marking placed on the curb shall be perpendicular with respect to the curb of the tie in location
on the utility lateral. Marks shall not be placed on the curb where laterals cross diagonally under the curb.
The tie in location shall be the end of the utility lateral prior to service connection.
Markings shall be uniform in size and shape and colors in conformance with the code adopted by the
American Public Works Association as follows:
SAFETY RED Electric power, distribution & transmission
Municipal Electric Systems
.
HIGH VISIBILITY SAFETY YELLOW Gas Distribution and Transmission
Oil Distribution and Transmission
Dangerous Materials, Produce Lines, Steam Lines
SAFETY ALERT ORANGE Telephone and Telegraph Systems
Police and Fire Communications
Cable Television
SAFETY PRECAUTION BLUE Water Systems Slurry Pipe Lines
SAFETY GREEN Sewer Systems
Marks placed on curbs shall be rectangular in shape and placed with the long dimension perpendicular to
the flow line of the curb. Marks placed on valley gutter and modified curb shall be 6" x 3" and placed at the
back of the curb. Marks placed on State Road and vertical curb shall be 4" X 2" and be placed on the curb
fuce. '
40 AWARD OF CONTRACT. WORK SCHEDULE AND GUARANTEE
It will be required that the work will commence not later than five (5) calendar days after the Engineer gives
written notice to proceed, which notice shall be given as outlined in Article 2 - General Conditions.
It is further required that all work within this contract be completed within 200 consecutive calendar days.
Contract date to commence at issuance of notice to proceed. If the Contractor fails to complete the work
within the stipulated time, the City will retain the amount stated in the Contract, per calendar day, for each
day that the contract remains incomplete. The work shall be discontinued on Saturdays, Sundays, and
approved Holidays. If it becomes necessary for the Contractor to perform work on Saturdays, Sundays, and
approved City of Clearwater Employee Holidays, that in the' opinion of the Assistant Public Services
Director, will require the presence of Inspectors, the Contractor shall pay the City of Clearwater, Florida, the
amount of Three Hundred Twenty Dollars ($320.00) per eight-hour day for each Inspector given such
assignment.
. The Contractor shall remedy any defects in the work at his own expense and pay for any damage to other
work resulting therefrom which appear within a period of one year from the date of final acceptance.
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
IV-58
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
41 WATER MAINS AND APPURTENANCES
41.1 SCOPE
The Contractor shall furnish all plant, labor, materials and equipment to perform all operations in connection
with the construction of water mains and appurtenances including clearing, excavation, trenching,
backfilling and clean up.
41.2 MATERIALS
41.2.1 GENERAL
Materials, equipment and supplies furnished and permanently incorporated into the project shall be of first
quality in every respect and shall be constructed and finished to high standards of workmanship. Materials
shall be suitable for service intended, shall reflect modem design and engineering and shall be fabricated in
a first class workmanlike manner. All materials, equipment and supplies shall be new and shall have not
been in service at any time previous to installation, except as required in tests or incident to installation.
Machined metal surfaces, exposed bearings and glands shall be protected against grit, dirt,chemical
corrosion and other damaging effects during shipment and construction.
41.2.2 PIPE MATERIALS AND FITTINGS
41.2.2.1 DUCTILE IRON PIPE
Ductile Iron Pipe shall be in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C151/A21.51 81 or latest revision. Pipe
thickness class, wall thickness and working pressure shall conform to the following table:
Size Class Thickness Rated Water Working Pressure
(In.) (PSI)
4" 51 0.26 350
6" 50 0.25 350
8" 50 0.27 350
.
12" 50 0.31 350
The trench laying condition shall be Type 2, Flat bottom trench backfill lightly consolidated to centerline of
pipe.
Pipe shall be manufactured in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C151/A21.51 81 or latest revision.
Pipe shall be asphalt coated on the outside and standard cement lined and sealed coated with approved
bituminous seal coat in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C104/A21.4 80 or latest revision.
41.2.2.2 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE
Polyvinyl Chloride (PVe) Pipe 4" through 8" shall be in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C900 81 or latest
revision and the American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM) Standard D 2241 and PVC Resin
Compound conforming to ASTM Specification D 1784.
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
IV-59
Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe shall have the same 0.0. as Cast and Ductile Iron Pipe and be compatible for use
without special adapters with Cast Iron Fittings.
Pipe dimension ratio, working pressure and laying length shall conform to the following table:
Size Dimension Ratio Rated Water Working Pressure ~aying Length
(ODlThick.) (PSI) (Ft)
4 18 150 20
6 18 150 20
8 18 150 20
Pipe larger than 8" shall be ductile iron. The City Engineer reserves the right to require the use of ductile
iron in sizes 4" through 8" when needed due to laying conditions or usage.
The bell of 4" and larger PVC pipe shall consist of an integral wall section with a solid cross section
elastomeric ring which meets the requirements of ASTM 0 1869.
Each length of pipe shall bear identification that will remain legible during normal handling, storage and
installation and so designate the testing agency that verified the suitability of the pipe material for potable
water service.
All polyvinyl chloride pipe shall be laid with an insulated 12 gauge A.W.G. solid strand copper wire wound
around the pipe forming one complete spiral per joint of pipe. This wire is to be continuous with splices
made only by methods approved by the Engineer. This wire is to be secured to all valves, tees and elbows.
41.2.2.3
FITTINGS AND JOINTS
Fitting from 4" through 16" in size will be compact ductile iron cast in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C153/A
. 21.53 with mechanical joint bells. Bolts, nuts and gaskets shall be in accordance with requirements of
ANSIIAWWA C153/A 21.53. The working pressure rating shall be 350 P.S.I. Ductile iron fittings shall be
coated and lined in accordance with require requirements of ANSIIAWWA C104/A21.4. Mechanical joint
glands shall be ductile iron in accordance with ANSIIAWWA C111/A 21.11. When reference is made to
ANSIIAWWA Standards, the latest revisions apply. Only those fittings and accessories that are of domestic
(USA) manufacture will be acceptable.
41.2.2.4
RESTRAINT
Restraint of plugs, caps, tees, bends, etc., shall be accomplished by the use of approved mechanical
restraining rings or glands installed per manufacturers recommendations. Hydrants shall be restrained by
the use of swivel connecting joints. Restraining mechanical joint glands on hydrants shall be used only
where hydrant runout length precludes the use of swivel joint connectors.
41.2.2.5
PIPE WITHIN CASING
All pipe placed within casings shall be slip joint ductile iron restrained by the use of restraining gaskets
designed for use with the particular joint being installed.
41.2.3 GATE VALVES
Discs of valves shall be operated by methods which will allow operation in any position with respect to the
vertical. Valves for interior piping or exposed above grade outside structures, shall be handwheel operated.
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section N
IV-60
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Valves three inches and larger, buried in earth shall be equipped with 2 inch square operating nuts, valve
boxes and covers. Valves shall be fitted with joints suitable for the pipe with which they are to be used. The
direction of opening for all valves shall be to the left (counter clockwise).
Pressure Rating: Unless otherwise shown or specified, valves for high pressure service shall be rated at
not less than 150 psi cold water, nonshock.
The manufacturer's name and pressure rating shall be cast in raised letters on the valve body.
Installation: Installation shall be in accordance with good standard practice. Exposed pipelines shall be so
supported that their weight is not carried through valves.
Smaller than two inch: Gate valves less than two inches in diameter shall be of brass and shall conform to
Federal Specification WW V 54, Type 1 or 11 with screwed joints. Valves for interior piping shall be Type 11,
wedge disc, rising stem, inside screw type. .
Valves for buried service shall be Type 1, wedge disc, non rising stem.
Four Inch to Sixteen Inch Diameter: Gate Valves, 4 to 16 inch diameter, inclusive, shall be resilient seated
gate valves in conformance with ANSI/A.W.WA Standard Specification C509 80 or latest revision. These
valves shall include the following features consistent with C509-80, full opening unobstructed waterway,
zero leakage at 200 p.s.i. differential pressure, all internal parts removable from bonnet without removing
body from pressure main, corrosion resistent bronze non rising stem with 0 ring bonnet seal and internal
cast iron parts coated with corrosion resistent coating.
Larger than sixteen inch: Gate valves larger than 16" shall be suitable for the service intended and shall be
iron body, bronze mounted, double disc type with 0 ring seals. All valves shall be equipped with steel cut
bevel gears, extended type gear case and rollers, bronze or babbitt tracks and scrapers and valved by
pass.
41.2.4
VALVE BOXES
Valve boxes shall be of standard extension design and manufacture and shall be made of cast iron.
Suitable sizes of valve boxes and extension pieces shall be provided where shown. The valve box cover
shall be of cast iron. Valve boxes and their installation shall be included in the bid price for valves.
41.2.5
HYDRANTS
Fire hydrants used in extension to or replacement of the City of Clearwater water system shall be the
following hydrants:
. Kennedy Guardian #K 810 Fire Hydrant,
. Mueller Centurion Fire Hydrant Catalog Number A 423
. U.S. Pipe Metropolitan
No substitutions shall be allowed without the approval of the City of Clearwater.
Above fire hydrants shall be in accordance with the latest revision of the AWWA Specification C 502 and
include the following modifications:
1. Basic design will be the dry barrel type which prevents the operating threads from coming in
contact with the service water. It will be of the compression type, opening against the pressure and
closing with the pressure.
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Contrallmprovements Project
Section IVa1V-61
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
1V-62
11
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2. The operating threads will be contained in an operating chamber sealed at the top and bottom with
an "0" ring seal. The chamber will contain a lubricating grease or oil.
3. Hydrant barrel will be of the "Breakable Type- made in two sections with the flange or break feature
located approximately2" above the ground line.
4. Main valve opening of the hydrant will be not less than 5 1/4-.
5. Hydrant nozzles will consist of two 2 1/2" hose nozzles and one 4 1/2" pump nozzle. Threads shall
be in accordance with the National Standard Hose Coupling Thread Specifications.
6. The hydrant will be so designed to permit the removal of all working parts from the hydrant up
through the barrel without disturbing the earth around the hydrant or disassembling the barrel.
7. Main valve seat will be made of bronze and threaded into a bronze retaining ring. Or it may be
threaded into a heavy bronze bushing in the hydrant base.
8. Hydrant will be designed with an anti friction bearing so located that it will reduce the torque
required to operate the hydrant.
9. There will be a minimum of two bronze or brass drain outlets.
10. Hydrants shall be painted with one coat of primer and one coat of yellow paint at the factory and
one finish coat of yellow paint after installation. All paints shall comply with AWWA Standard C502-
85 or its latest revision.
11. The main valve stem will be made in two sections with a breakable coupling.
12. Hydrants shall be left open (counter clockwise) and shall have a National Standard 11/2. pentagon
operating nut.
13. Hydrant base outlet will be 6. and will be mechanical joint with fittings.
All hydrants will be shop tested in accordance with the latest AWWA Specification C 502.
Constrained joint assemblies shall be used which have bolted mechanical and swivel joints from the
hydrant tee through to the hydrant. Constrained joints shall absorb all thrust and prevent movement of the
hydrant.
All fire hydrants shall be provided with an auxiliary gate valve so that the water to the hydrant may be shut
off without the necessity of closing any other valve in the distribution system.
41.2.6
SERVICE SADDLES
Service saddles shall be used on all service taps to 4. P.V.C. water main. The largest service connection
allowable on 4" main shall be 1 1/2". Service saddles shall be used on all 2" service connections to 6" and
larger mains. Service saddles shall be wide bodied ductile iron with epoxy or nylon coating and shall have
stainless steel straps.
41.2.7 TESTS, INSPECTION AND REPAIRS
1. All materials shall be tested in accordance with the applicable Federal, ASTM or AWWA
Specification and basis of rejection shall be as specified therein. Certified copies of the tests shall
be submitted with each shipment of materials.
2. All materials will be subject to inspection and approved by the Engineer after delivery; and no
broken, cracked, misshapen, imperfectly coated or otherwise damaged or unsatisfactory material
shall be used.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3. All material found during the progress of the work to have cracks, flaws, or other defects shall be
rejected and promptly removed from the site.
4. If damage occurs to any pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants or water main accessories in handling, the
damage shall be immediately brought to the Engineer's attention. The Engineer shall prescribe
corrective repairs or rejection of the damaged items.
41.2.8
BACKFLOW PREVENTERS
Backflow prevention devices installed on customer's service lines at the point of delivery (service
connection) shall be of a type in accordance with AWWA specification C506 78 or its latest revision.
Two (2) different types of backflow prevention devices are allowed. Type of device, when required, is
determined by the degree of hazard presented to the municipal water system from possible backflow of
water within the customers private system. The types of devices allowed are:
1. Double Check Valve Assembly a device composed of two single, independently acting, approved
check valves, including tightly closing shutoff valves located at each end of the assembly and
suitable connections for testing the watertightness of each check valve.
2. Reduced pressure principle backflow prevention device a device containing a minimum of two
independenlly acting, approved check valves, together with an automatically operated pressure
differential relief valve located between the two check valves. The unit must include tightly closing
shutoff valves located at each end of the device, and each device shall be fitted with properly
located test cocks.
Since installed devices must be tested annually and may be maintained by the City of Clearwater, following
are the approved models of devices allowed for installation by customers of the City of Clearwater Water
Distribution system:
DOUBLE CHECK VALVE
2" and Smaller lamer than 2"
Conbraco 40100 Conbraco 40100
Hersey Beeco Model FOC Hersey Beeco No.2
Watts Model 709 or 007 Watts Model 709 or 007
FEBCO Model 805Y
Ames 2000 SS
REDUCED PRESSURE TYPE
2" and Smaller lamer than 2"
Ames 5000 SS
Conbraco 40200 Conbraco 40200
Hersey Beeco Model FRP II Hersey Beeco Model 6eM
FEBCO Model 825Y
Watts Model 909 or 009 Watts Model 909 or 009
41.2.9
TAPPING SLEEVES
Steel body tapping sleeves shall be JCM Industries Inc., JCM 412; Clow Corporation 3460; or equal. All
steel body tapping sleeves shall have heavy welded ASTM A 285, Grade C steel body, stainless steel bolts,
manufacturer's epoxy coated body, and 3/4" bronze test plug.
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
1V-63
Marshall Street and Norlheast WPC Facilities
Odor ContTOllmprovements Project
Section IV
N.64
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
41.2.10 BLOW OFF HYDRANTS
Blow ofts shall be box hydrants having a 2" main valve, closing with the water pressure. These flush
mounted hydrants shall have a 2" FIP inlet, with the outlet being a 2 1/2" bronze male nozzle. With all
working parts also of bronze, these hydrants will open to the left and have a removable bronze seat, which
seals against a seat rubber of no less durometer than 85. All hydrants shall be as manufactured by Kupferle
Foundry, Sf. Louis, Mo., Model #35B or approved equal.
41.3 CONSTRUCTION
41.3.1
1.
MATERIAL HANDLING
Pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants and accessories shall be loaded and unloaded by lifting with hoists
or skidding so as to avoid shock or damage. Under no circumstances shall such materials be
dropped. Pipe handled on skidways shall not be skidded rolled against pipe already on the ground.
2. Pipe shall be so handled that the coating and lining will not be damaged. If, however, any part of
the coating or lining is damaged, the repair shall be made by the Contractor at his expense in a
manner satisfactory to the Engineer.
3. In distributing the material at the site of the work, each piece shall be unloaded opposite or near
the place where it is to be laid in the trench.
41.3.2 PIPE LAYING
41.3.2.1 ALIGNMENT AND GRADE
The pipe shall be laid and maintained to the required lines and grades with fittings, valves and hydrants at
the required locations, spigots centered in bells; and all valves and hydrant stems plumb.
The depth of cover over the water main shall be a minimum of 3D" and a maximum of 42" below finished
grade, except where approved by the Engineer to avoid conflicts and obstructions.
Whenever obstructions not shown on the plans are encountered during the progress of the work and
interfere to such an extent that an alteration of the plans is required, the Engineer shall have the authority
to change the plans and order a deviation from the line and grade or arrange with the Owners of the
structures for the removal, relocation, or reconstruction of the obstructions.
41.3.2.2
INSTALLATION
Proper implements, tools, and facilities satisfactory to the Engineer shall be provided and used by the
Contractor for the safe and convenient performance of the work. All pipe, fittings, valves and hydrants shall
be carefully lowered into the trench piece by piece by means of a derrick, ropes, or other suitable tools or
equipment in such a manner as to prevent damage to materials and protective coatings and linings. Under
no circumstances shall materials be dropped or dumped in the trench.
If damage occurs to any pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants or accessories in handling, the damage shall be
immediately brought to the Engineer's attention. The Engineer shall prescribe corrective repairs or rejection
of the damaged items.
All pipe and fittings shall be carefully examined for cracks and other defects while suspended above the
trench immediately before installation in. final position. Spigot ends shall be examined with particular care
as this area is the most vulnerable to damage from handling. Defective pipe or fittings shall be laid aside for
inspection by the Engineer who will prescribe corrective repairs or rejection.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
All lumps, blisters, and excess coating shall be removed from the bell and spigot end of each pipe, and the
outside of the spigot and the inside of the bell shall be wire brushed and wiped clean and dry and free from
oil and grease before the pipe is laid. Pipe joints shall be made up in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.
Every precaution shall be taken to prevent foreign material from entering the pipe while it is being placed in
the line. If the pipelaying crew cannot put the pipe into the trench and in place without getting earth into it,
the Engineer may require that, before lowering the pipe into the trench, a heavy, woven canvas bag of
suitable size shall be placed over each end and left there until the connection is to be made to the adjacent
pipe. During laying operation, no debris, tools, clothing or other materials shall be placed in the pipe.
As each length of pipe is placed in the trench, the spigot end shall be centered in the bell and the pipe
forced home and brought to correct line and grade. The pipe shall be secured in place with approved
backfill material tamped under it except at the bells. Precautions shall be taken to prevent dirt from entering
the joint space.
At times when pipe laying is not in progress, the open ends of pipe shall be closed by a watertight plug or
other means approved by the Engineer.
The cutting of pipe for inserting valves, fittings, or closure pieces shall be done in a neat and workmanlike
manner without damage to the pipe or cement lining and so as to leave a smooth end at right angles to the
axis of the pipe.
Pipe shall be laid with bell ends facing in the direction of laying unless directed otherwise by the Engineer.
Where pipe is laid on the grade of 10 per cent or greater, the laying shall start at bottom and shall proceed
upward with the bell ends of the pipe upgrade.
Wherever it is necessary to deflect pipe from a straight line, either in the vertical or horizontal plane to avoid
obstructions or to plumb stems; or where long radius curves are permitted, the amount of deflection allowed
shall not exceed that allowed under the latest edition of ANSI/AWWA C600-82 and C900 81 or latest
revisions.
No pipe shall be laid when, in the opinion of the Engineer, trench conditions are unsuitable.
41.3.3 SETTING OF VALVES, HYDRANTS AND FITTINGS
41.3.3.1 GENERAL
Valves, hydrants, fittings, plugs and caps shall be set and joined to pipe in the manner specified above for
installation of pipe.
41.3.3.2
VALVES
Valves in water mains shall, where possible, be located on the street property lines extended unless shown
otherwise on the plans.
The valve box shall not transmit shock or stress to the valve and shall be centered and plumb over the
wrench nut of the valve, with the box cover flush with the surface of the finished pavement or such other
level as may be directed.
41.3.3.3
HYDRANTS
Hydrants shall be located as shown or as directed so as to provide complete accessibility and minimize the
possibility of damage from vehicles or injury to pedestrians.
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
IV-6S
Marshall Street and Norlheast WPC Faci/ities
Odor Contra/Improvements Project
Section IV
1V.66
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
All hydrants shall stand plumb and shall have their nozzles parallel with, or at right angles to, the curb, with
the pumper nozzle facing the curb. Hydrants shall be set to the established grade, with nozzles as shown
or as directed by the Engineer.
Each hydrant shall be connected to the main with a 6 inch ductile iron branch controlled by an independent
6 inch gate valve.
41.3.3.4
ANCHORAGE
Movement of all plugs, caps, tees, bends, etc., unless otherwise specified shall be prevented by attaching
approved mechanical restraining rings or glands and installed per manufacturers recommendations.
Hydrants shall be held in place with restrained swivel joints. Restraining mechanical joint glands on
hydrants may be used where hydrant runout length precludes the use of hydrant connecting swivel joints.
Where special anchorage is required, such anchorage shall be in accordance with details shown on the
plans or specified in the field by the Engineer.
41.3.4 CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING LINES
Where shown on the plans or directed by the Engineer, the water lines constructed under this contract shall
be connected to the existing lines now in place. No such connection shall be made until all requirements of
the specifications as to tests, flushing, and sterilization have been met and the plan of the cut in to the
existing line has been approved by the Engineer.
Where connections are made between new work and existing work, the connections shall be made in a
thorough and workmanlike manner using proper materials and fittings to suit the actual conditions. All
connections to existing facilities will be completed under the supervision of the City of Clearwater Water
.
Division.
41.4 TESTS
41.4.1 HYDROSTATIC TESTS
After installation of water mains, complete with all associated appurtenances including service taps, all
sections of newly laid main shall be subject to a hydrostatic pressure test of 150 pounds per square inch for
a period of one hour.
The pressure test shall be applied by means of a pump connecte~ to the pipe in a manner satisfactory to
the Engineer. The pump, pipe connection and all necessary apparatus, together with operating personnel,
shall be furnished by the Contractor at his expense.
The Contractor shall make all necessary taps into the pipe line. The Owner will furnish the water for the
test. Before applying the test pressure, all air shall be expelled from the pipe.line.
41.4.2 NOTICE OF TEST
The Contractor shall give the City of Clearwater Water Division 48 hours advance notice of the time when
the installation is ready for hydrostatic testing.
41.5 STERILIZATION
Before the system is put into operation, all water mains and appurtenances and any item of new
construction with which the water comes in contact, shall be thoroughly sterilized.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
41.5.1 STERILIZING AGENT
The sterilizing agent shall be liquid chlorine, sodium hypochlorite solution conforming to Federal
Specification 0 S 602B, Grade D, or dry hypochlorite, commonly known as "HTH" or "Perchloron".
41.5.2 FLUSHING SYSTEM
Prior to the application of the sterilization agent, all mains shall be thoroughly flushed. Flushing shall
continue until a clean, clear water flows from the hydrants. Where hydrants are not available for flushing,
such flushing shall be accomplished at the closest point available to the ends of the lines.
41.5.3 STERILIZATION PROCEDURE
All piping, valves, fittings and all other appurtenances shall be sterilized with water containing a minimum
chlorine concentration of 75 ppm at any point in the system. This solution shall then remain in the
distribution system for a minimum contact period of eight hours before it is flushed out. All valves in the
lines being sterilized shall be opened and closed several times during the contact period.
41.5.4 RESIDUAL CHLORINE TESTS
After the sterilization outlined above has been accomplished, flushing shall continue until free residual
chlorine tests not less than 0.2 ppm nor more than 3.0 ppm. Residual chlorine test shall be in accordance
with standard methods using a standard DPD test set.
41.5.5 BACTERIAL TESTS
After the water system has been sterilized and thoroughly flushed as specified herein, City of Clearwater
Water Division personnel shall take samples of water from remote points of the distribution system in
suitable sterilized containers. The City shall forward the samples to the Florida State Board of Health for
bacterial examination. If tests of such samples indicate the presence of coliform organisms, the sterilization
as outlined above shall be repeated until tests indicate the absence of such pollution. The bacterial tests
shall be satisfactorily completed before the system is placed in operation and it shall be the Contractor's
responsibility to perform the sterilization as outlined above.
If methods of sterilization differ materially from those outlined above, such methods shall be in accordance
with directives of the Florida State Board of Health and all methods employed shall have the approval of
that agency. Definite instructions as to the collection and shipment of samples shall be secured from the
Florida State Hoard of Health prior to sterilization and shall be followed in all respects. The City of
Clearwater shall secure final approval of the bacterial samples from the Florida State Board of Health
before the water distribution system is put into operation.
41.6 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
41.6.1
1.
2.
GENERAL
Bids must include all sections and items as specified herein and as listed on the Bid Form.
Payment for the work of constructing the project will be made at the unit price or lump sum
payment for the items of work as set forth in the Bid, which payment will constitute full
compensation for all labor, equipment, and materials required to complete the work.
3. No separate payment will be made for the following items and the cost of such work shall be
included in the applicable pay items of work:
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
IV-67
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
1V.68
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
a) Clearing and grubbing
b) Excavation, including necessary pavement removal
c) Shoring and/or dewatering
d) Structural fill
e) Backfill
n Grading
g) Tracer wire
h) Refill materials
i) Joints materials
j) Tests and sterilization
k) Appurtenant work as required for a complete and operable system.
41.6.2 FURNISH AND INSTALL WATER MAINS
41.6.2.1 MEASUREMENT
The quantity for payment shall be the actual number of feet of pipe of each size and type satisfactorily
furnished and laid, as measured along the centerline of the completed pipe line, including the length of
valves and fittings.
41.6.2.2
PAYMENT
Payment of the applicable unit price shall be full compensation for furnishing all plant, labor, materials and
equipment, and constructing the water mains complete and ready for operation.
41.6.3 FURNISH AND INSTALL FITTINGS
41.6.3.1 MEASUREMENT
The quantity for payment will be the number of tons, or decimal part thereof, of ductile iron fittings
satisfactorily furnished and installed. Fitting weights shall be based on weights stamped on the body of the
fitting, provided such weights do not exceed the theoretical weights by more than the tolerances permitted
in ANSI/AWWA C110/A 21.10 82, latest revision, in which case, the weight will be based upon the
theoretical weight plus the maximum tolerance.
41.6.3.2
PAYMENT
Payment of the applicable unit price shall be full compensation for furnishing all plant, labor, materials, and
equipment required to furnish and install ductile iron fittings.
41.6.4 FURNISH AND INSTALL GATE VALVES COMPLETE WITH BOXES AND COVERS
41.6.4.1 MEASUREMENT
The quantity for payment shall be the number of gate valves of each size satisfactorily furnished and
installed.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
41.6.4.2 PAYMENT
Payment of the applicable unit price for each size shall be full compensation for furnishing all plant, labor,
material and equipment and installing the valve complete with box and cover.
41.6.5 FURNISH AND INSTALL FIRE HYDRANTS
41.6.5.1 MEASUREMENT
The quantity for payment shall be the number of fire hydrants satisfactorily furnished and installed.
41.6.5.2
PAYMENT
Payment of the applicable unit price shall be full compensation for furnishing all plant, labor, material and
equipment and installing the fire hydrant complete including necessary thrust anchorage, 6 inch pipe
between the main and the hydrant and gate valve and valve box on the hydrant lead.
42 GAS SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS
This article not applicable.
43 TENNIS COURTS
43.1 PAVED TENNIS COURTS
43.1.1 SOIL TREATMENTS
All soil under courts shall be treated with DSMA 184 at the rate of 2 pounds active ingredient per 1,000
square foot.
Materials shall be brought to the job site in tagged containers. Tags shall be retained and turned into the
Engineer's Office.
43.1.2 BASE COURSE
Base Course shall be Limerock 6" thick after compaction. Specifications for the base shall be the same as
those for Limerock in Section IV - Article 22 of the City of Clearwater Technical Specifications. Subgrade
stabilizing will not be required.
Surface shall be cut to within 1/2" of true grade in preparation of 1" leveling course. Prior to applying prime
coat, surface shall be approved by the Engineer.
43.1.3 PRIME COAT
The material used for prime coat shall be cut-back Asphalt Grade RC-70 or RC-250 and shall conform to
Section 300 of the Florida State Department of Transportation's "Standard Specifications for Road and
Bridge Construction".
43.1.4 LEVELING COURSE
A.Leveling Course shall be a minimum of 1" of Type S-III Asphaltic Concrete as specified in Section 331 of
FOOT's Standard Specification (latest edition). The Leveling Course shall be constructed running East and
West.
Marshall Street and Norlheast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
IV-69
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
1V.70
i
i
I'
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Finish surface of leveling course shall not vary more than 1/4" when checked with a 10 foot straight edge. If
a deficiency of more than X" exists, the Engineer will determine if the surface should be leveled or removed
and replaced. Such remedial work shall be without compensation.
43.1.5
SURFACE COURSE
Surface course shall be a minimum of 1" of Type S-III Asphaltic Concrete as specified in Section 331 of
FOOT's Standard Specification (latest edition). The Surface Course shall be constructed running North and
South.
Finish surfaces shall not vary more than 1/4" in 10 feet. Prior to application of color coat, surface shall be
checked for low areas by flooding the surface with water. Low areas shall be patched as approved by the
Engineer prior to application of the color coat. No areas which retain water will be approved. If a deficiency
of more than W exists, the Engineer will determine if the surface should be leveled or removed and
replaced. Such remedial work shall be without compensation.
43.1.6 COLOR COAT
43.1.6.1 MATERIALS
Materials used in the patching and color coating of Tennis Courts shall be manufactured specifically for
Tennis Court Application.
All materials must be approved by the Engineer prior to the start of construction. Request for approval of
coating materials may be submitted prior to the opening of bids. In requests for approval, the Contractor
shall present manufacturer's literature along with the name, address, and date of three previous Tennis
Court applications of the proposed material.
43.1.6.2
CONSTRUCTION
43.1.6.2.1 SURFACE PREPARATION
The surface to be coated must be sound, smooth, and free from loose dirt or oily materials.
Prior to the application of surfacing materials, the entire surface should be checked for minor depressions
or irregularities. If it is determined that minor corrections are necessary, the Contractor shall make repairs
using approved tack coat and/or patching mix in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for use.
After patching the surface shall not vary more than 1/8" in ten feet in any direction. If a deficiency of more
than 1/8" exists, the Engineer will determine if the surface should be leveled or removed and replaced.
Such remedial work shall be without compensation.
In order to provide a smooth, dense underlayment of the finish course, one or more applications of
resurfacer or patch mix shall be applied to the underlaying surface as deemed necessary by the Engineer.
Asphaltic concrete Surface Course with a smooth tight mix and no ponding, will not require the resurfacing
or patching mix. Asphaltic Concrete Surface Course which is course and rough or is ponding water will
require the use of the resurfacer or patch mix.
No applications shall be covered by a succeeding application until thoroughly cured.
43.1.6.2.2 FINISH COLOR COURSE
The finish course shall be applied to a clean, dry surface in accordance with the manufacturer's directions.
A minimum of two applications of color coat will be required.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Texture of cured color coat is to be regulated in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations to
provide a medium speed surface for tennis play.
The color of application shall be dark green for the regulation double's playing area and red for all other
others.
The finished surface shall have a uniform appearance and be free from ridges and tool marks.
43.1.6.3
PLAYING LINES
Forty-eight (48) hours minimum after completion of the resurfacing, 2 inch wide playing lines shall be
accurately located, marked and painted with approved marking paint.
43.1.6.4
WEATHER LIMITATIONS
No parts of the construction involving Tennis Court surfacing or patching products shall be conducted
during rainfall, or when rainfall is imminent or unless the air temperature is at least 50 Degree's F and
rising.
NOTE: The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum or 24 hours in advance of all base and
asphalt related work.
43.2 CLAY TENNIS COURTS
43.2.1 GENERAL
43.2.1.1 SCOPE
The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials and equipment necessary for the installation of clay tennis
court(s) as set forth in these specifications and lor the construction drawings. The scope of work is
indicated on drawings and specified herein. Basis of design for clay courts with sub-surface irrigation
system is Hydrogrid Tennis, Inc. or prior approved equal.
43.2.1.2
CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS
The Owner may make such investigation as he deems necessary to determine the ability of the Bidder to
perform the work and the Bidder shall furnish to the Owner all such information and data for this purpose as
the Owner may request. The Owner reserves the right to reject any Bid if the evidence submitted by, or
investigations of such Bidders fail to satisfy the owner that such Bidder is properly qualified to carry out the
obligations of the Contract and to complete the work contemplated herein within the time limit agreed upon.
Factors to be considered in awarding the Bid shall include the successful completion of similar sub-surface
irrigation clay tennis court installations of like value, scope, size and quality as this project, with in the last
five (5) years. The Owner desires to award this contract to firms that have been in business for a minimum
of five (5) years. The qualifications and experience of the personnel assigned to the project will be a
determining factor in the award of the Bid.
43.2.1.3
STANDARDS
The Contractor shall perform all work in a thorough, workmanlike manner and conform to standards for
tennis court construction as prescribed or approved by the United States (Lawn) Tennis Association and the
United States Tennis Court and Tract Builders Association. The Contractor shall construct the tennis courts
with laser guided equipment.
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
IV-71
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
JV.72
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
43.2.1.4
BUILDING PERMITS AND TAXES
The Contractor shall secure all construction permits required by law, the City of Clearwater will waive all
permit fees.
43.2.1.5
COURT LAYOUT
The Owner shall establish two horizontal control points and a construction bench mark. The Contractor
shall locate the four corners of each battery and shall layout the courts in conformance with the
specifications and drawings.
43.2.1.6
BUILDING REQUIREMENTS
The Owner shall provide and maintain reasonable access to the construction site, as well as an area
adjacent to the site for storage and preparation of materials. Adequate water outlets within fifty (50) feet of
the site shall be provided.
43.2.1.7
SCHEDULE
The Owner desires to award the contract to firms who will complete this project in a reasonable time
schedule. Consideration in awarding this bid will be given to firms who may commence and complete the
project within a reasonable period of time after award of the bid. The Owner, in its sole discretion, will
determine the reasonable schedule standard as it relates to the "Notice to Proceed."
43.2.2 SITE PREPARATION
43.2.2.1 SUITABILITY
The Contractor shall examine the site to determine its suitability for installation of the courts.
43.2.2.2
DEMOLITION
The contractor shall demo the existing tennis courts, remove the existing ten (10) foot high fence
surrounding the tennis courts and all underground utilities within. the limits of the cdnstruction area. Utilities
extending outside the construction limits shall be capped and terminated. The existing tennis courts shall
be ground into millings suitable to be mixed into the sub-grade at the proposed location of the new clay
tennis courts. Any sub-grade material beneath the existing tennis courts not suitable for planting beds shall
be removed and also utilized as sub-grade material beneath the new courts. All demolition materials not
utilized in construction of the new courts shall be removed and disposed from the project site. The
Contractor shall provide documentation of any recycled materials.
43.2.2.3
SUB-GRADE
The sub-grade shall be graded to a tolerance of plus or minus one (1) inch of the final sub-grade elevation.
The sub-grade shall be graded level. A compaction to a density not less than 95% of the maximum
standard density as determined by AASHTO T-180 is required. The Contractor shall provide documentation
of testing to the Owner.
43.2.2.4
FINAL GRADE
The final grades outside the tennis court areas" and within the construction limits shall be graded to a
tolerance of plus or minus one (1) inch of the final grade elevations with positive drainage away from tennis
courts and towards drainage swales or outfall structures. A compaction toa density not less th"an 95% of
I
I
I
I.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
the maximum standard density as determined by AASHTO T-180 is required. The contractor shall provide
documentation of testing to the Owner.
43.2.3 SLOPE
43.2.3.1 SLOPE RI:QUIREMENTS
Rate and direction of slope of the finished surfaces shall be one (1) inch in forty (40) feet, all in one plane,
as indicated on the drawings.
43.2.4 BASE CONSTRUCTION
43.2.4.1 LINER
Two layers of 6 mil construction plastic shall be installed over the sub-grade surface with a minimum
overlap of five (5) feet where pieces are joined. Use only materials that are resistant to deterioration when
tested in accordance with ASTM E 154, as follows:
a. Polyethylene sheet, Construction Grade.
43.2.4.2
BASE COURSE
The base course shall consist of six (6) inches of porous base material as supplied by Quality Aggregate of
Sarasota Florida. The surface of the base course shall be smooth and even, and it shall be within one-
quarter (1/4) inch of the established grade.
43.2.4.3
IRRIGATION SYSTEM
Perforated pipe shall be installed in trenches in the base course. These trenches shall be in on four (4) foot
centers and shall be run perpendicular to the slope of the court. The pipe shall be two and one-quarter (2-
1/4) inch diameter with a nylon needle punched sock surrounding the pipe. Six (6) water control canisters
shall be installed per court with each canister controlling five (5) grid pipe trenches. Provide all required
controls systems time clocks; float switches, control wiring and solenoids, etc. for a complete sub-surface
irrigation system.
43.2.5 PERIMETER CURBING
43.2.5.1 CURB
Brick curb shall be installed around the entire perimeter of the court area with an elevation of one-:quarter
(1/4) to one-half (1/2) inch above the finished screening course elevation.
43.2.6 SURFACE COURSE
43.2.6.1 COURT SURFACE
A surface course of ISP Type II Aquablend or Lee Hyroblend tennis court material shall be installed over the
screening course to a compacted depth of one (1) inch. The AquaIHydroblend material shall be watered to
its full depth immediately after leveling and then compacted by rolling with a tandem roller weighing 600 to
1000 pounds. The finished surface shall not vary from specified grade by more than one-eighth (1/8) inch.
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Contrallmprovements Project
Section IV
IV.73
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
1V-74
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
43.2.7 ROOT BARRIER
Root barrier (geo-tech fabric) eighteen (18) inches height shall be placed in a trench on the outside edge of
the perimeter curbing eighteen (18) inches in depth with herbicide coating buttons to prevent plant root
systems in entering the sub-surface base course of the clay tennis courts.
43.2.8 FENCING
43.2.8.1 DESIGN
The contractor shall provide a total color coated fencing system as indicated on drawings and described
herein. All components: frames, fabric and fittings shall be black. Basis of Design Ameristar HT-25 or prior
approved equal subject to strict compliance with Ameristar published specification.
43.2.8.2
POSTS
All posts shall be a minimum 2-1/2" Ameristar HT-25 pipe; top rails 1-5/8" Ameristar HT-25 pipe with
manufacturers standard "Permacoar color system.
43.2.8.3
FENCE FABRIC
Fence Fabric shall be 1-314" #6 gauge mesh throughout, manufactures standard galvanized wire with pve
coating. All fabric to be knuckled on both selvages.
43.2.8.4
GATES
Provide gates at locations indicated. At service gates, provide a keeper that automatically engages gate life
and holds it in the open position until manually released. Provide gate stops for double gates consisting of a
mushroom-type flush plate with anchors, set in concrete, and designed to engage a center drop rod or
plunger-bar. Include a locking device and padlock eyes as an integral part of the latch, permitting both gate
leaves to be locked with a single padlock. Provide latch, fork type or plunger-bar type to permit operation
from either side of gate, with padlock eye as an integral part of the latch. Gate Hinges - Size and material
to suit gate size, non-lift-off type, and offset to permit 180-degree gate opening. P"rovide one and one-half
(1-1/2) pair of hinges for each leaf over six (6) foot nominal height.
43.2.9 WINDSCREENS
The contractor shall provide nine (9) foot high windscreens at all ten (10) foot high fencing. Basis of design
is Durashade plus by Ball Products, Inc. or equal by Putterman. Black high-density polyethylene, eight (8)
oz. per sqiJare yard edges hemmed with grommets at twelve (12) inch on center. Attach to chain link
fencing at the top and bottom with 50 LBS plastic ties.
43.2.10 COURT EQUIPMENT
43.2.10.1 POST FOUNDATIONS
Post foundations shall be not less than thirty-six (36) inches in length, eighteen (18) inches in width and
thirty (30) inches in depth. Foundations shall be placed to provide an exact distance between posts of forty-
two (42) feet on a doubles court and thirty-three (33) feet on a singles court.
43.2.10.2
NET POSTS & SLEEVES
Net posts shall be galvanized steel having an outside diameter of not less than two and seven-eighths (2
7/8) inches with electrostatically applied enamel finish and shall be. equipped with a reel type net tightening
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
device. Post sleeves and posts shall be set plumb and true so as to support the net a height of forty-two
(42) inches above the court surface at the posts. Post sleeves shall be Schedule 40 PVC to be set in
concrete per net post manufactures recommendation.
43.2.10.3
CENTER STRAP ANCHOR
A center strap anchor shall be firmly set in accordance with the rules of the USTA.
43.2.10.4 NET
A tennis net conforming to the USTA regulations shall be installed on each court. The net shall have black
synthetic netting, a headband of white synthetic material in double thickness with the exterior treated for
resistance to mildew and sunlight, and bottom and end tapes of back synthetic material treated to prevent
deterioration from the sunlight. A vinyl coated, impregnated steel cable, having a diameter of one quarter
(1I4) inch and a length five (5) feet greater than length between the net post shall hold the net in
suspension. The net shall have tie strings of a synthetic material at each comer. Basis of Design - Duranet
DTS by Ball Products, Inc.
43.2.10.5
CENTER STRAP
Provide a center strap of white heavy duty polyester webbing with black oxide coated brass slide buckles
and nickel plated double end snap. Center strap shall be placed on the net and attached to the center strap
anchor.
43.2.10.6
LINE TAPES
Line tapes shall be 100% nylon and shall be two (2) inches in width. The tapes shall be firmly secured by
aluminum nails with aluminum length of two and one-half (2 - 1/2) inches. Positioning shall be in
accordance with regulations of the USTA.
43.2.10.7
MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT
Deliver the following equipment to the owner:
1. Ride-on Tandem Roller - Brutus AR-I Roller, automatic forward-neutral-reverse transmission; 24
inch wide drum; 3-horse power Briggs and Stratton engine.
2. Hand drag brooms (4 each) - 7' wide aluminum frame with 4-1/2" synthetic bristles; Proline.
3. Tow drag brooms (1 each) - 7' wide aluminum frame 4-1/2" synthetic bristles; Proline.
4. Deluxe Proline Line Sweeper (4 each) - friction-driven rubber sleeves; synthetic bristle brush; with
fence hook cast aluminum.
5. Scarifier/Lutes (2 each) - 30. wide all aluminum; Proline.
6. Tennis Shoe Cleaners (2 each) - steel frame construction" Scrusher" exact installation location by
Owner.
7. Tennis Two Step (2 each) - polyethylene construction with two rubber panels.
8. Court Rake (1 each) - six-foot length aluminum.
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
1V-75
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Contrallmprovements Project
Section IV
1V-76
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
43.2.11 SHADE STRUCTURE
Provide shade structures as indicted on drawings. Basis.of design: Suntrends, Inc. "Cabana Bench 8" -
8'long x 6' wide gable design with standard canvas canopy, direct burial installation. Provide concrete
footing, size and reinforcement as required by shade structure manufacture.
43.2.12 WATER SOURCE (Potable)
The owner shall supply water line to within fifty (50) feet of the courts with 50 pounds per square inch
running pressure at its terminus. This .Iine shall have the capacity to supply 30 gallons of water per minute
for each court.
43.2.13 CONCRETE
Provide concrete consisting of portland cement per ASTM C 150, aggregates per ASTM C 33, and potable
water. Mix materials to obtain concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3,500 psi. Use at
least four sacks of cement per cu. yd., 1-inch maximum size aggregate, 3-inch maximum slump.
43.2.14 EXISTING SPORT TENNIS COURT LIGHTING
43.2.14.1 SHOP DRAWINGS
The Contractor shall provide signed and sealed electrical shop drawings by a professional electrical
engineer for approval of the relocation and re-aiming of the existing tennis court sport lighting fixtures and
electrical service to water coolers. The shop drawings shall include all necessary information according to
local electrical codes in providing a complete operating system from the existing electrical panel. The shop
drawings shall provide data showing the maximum foot candles the existing fixtures will provide at its new
locations for tournament play. Shop drawings shall be submitted to the Parks and Recreation Department
for approval.
43.2.14.2
RE-LAMP
The Contractor shall re-Iamp and clean lens of all existing lighting fixtures after relocating the light pole and
fixtures to its new location. The City will provide the new lamps.
43.2.14.3
ELECTRICAL PERMIT
The Contractor shall submit electrical drawings to City of Clearwater Planning and Development Services
to obtain permits for installation of the electrical works.
43.2.14.4
POLES & FIXTURES
The Contractor shall install three (3) new sixty foot (60') poles and fourteen (14) new fixtures. The City will
purchase and provide the new poles and fixtures for the Co.ntractor to install, any other miscellaneous items
required to provide a complete operable system shall be provided by the Contractor.
Attached with this specification are the photometric lumination charts for the eight-(8) tennis courts. This
information is provided by Musco Sport Lighting, 1838 East Chester Drive, Suite #104, High Point, NC
27265, phone (336) 887-0770 fax (336) 887-0771. Contact Douglas A. Stewart.
Contractor shall install the poles and fixtures based on the following information:
Pole T1 existing 5 fixture pole, remove one fixture and place on pole T5
Pole T2 existing 12 fixture pole, remove six fixtures and place on pole T5
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Pole T3 existing 5 fixture pole, remove one fixture and place on pole T5
Pole T 4 new pole with new seven fixtures and two circuits
Pole T5 new pole w/existing sixteen fixtures (8 on one side and 8 on the other) and 2 circuits
Pole T6 new pole with new seven fixtures and two circuits
Pole T7 existing 5 fixture pole, remove two fixtures and place on pole T5
Pole T8 existing 12 fixture pole, remove four fixtures and place on pole T5
Pole T9 existing 5 fixture pole, remove two fixtures and place on pole T5
Light levels ended up at 58+ footcandles.
Existing poles have concrete footing approximately one foot wide on all sides Contractor shall plan
relocation light poles accordingly.
43.2.14.5
ELECTRICAL CONDUITS
Existing electrical conduits are installed individually to the existing light pole, it is suggested the Contractor
place electrical junction boxes at existing pole locations and utilize existing conduits. New conduits will be
required for the three (3) new light poles and the Contractor shall include the cost for these electrical
conduits in the relocating of the new light poles.
43.2.15 WATER COOLER
43.2.15.1 SHOP DRAWINGS
The Contractor shall provide shop drawings for the installation of water cooler in the cabana area of the
tennis courts, electrical, water and drainage submitted to the Parks and Recreation Department for
approval.
43.2.15.2 WATER FOUNTAIN
Basis for design: Halsey Taylor HOF Series - water cooler with sealed back panels, or equal.
43.2.16 DEMONSTRATION
Instruct the Owner's personnel on proper operation and maintenance of court and equipment.
43.2.17 WARRANTY
43.2.17.1 EQUIPMENT
The Contractor shall supply warranty cards and operation and maintenance manuals for all equipment to
the Owner upon completion of construction of the project.
43.2.17.2 WARRANTY
The Contractor shall warranty the courts, fencing, sidewalks and court accessories against defective
materials and lor workmanship for a period of one (1) year from the date of completion.
43.2.17.3 WARRANTY SUB-SURFACE IRRIGATION SYSTEM
The Contractor shall warranty the sub-surface irrigation of the clay tennis courts for a period of two years
from the day of completion.
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Contrallmprovements Project
Section IV
N-77
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section N
N-78
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
44 WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL
44.1 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBLE FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL
The Contractor shall be responsible to furnish, operate, maintain and remove all work zone traffic control
associated with the Project, including detours, advance warnings, channelization, hazard warnings and any
other necessary features, both at the immediate work site and as may be necessary at outlying points.
44.2 WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN
The Contractor shall prepare a detailed traffic control plan designed to accomplish the level of performance
outlined in the Scope of the Work and/or as may be required by construction permits issued by Pinellas
County and/or the Florida Department of Transportation for the Project, incorporating the methods and
criteria contained in Part VI, Standards and Guides for Traffic Controls for Street and Highway
Construction, Maintenance, Utility and Incident Management Operations in the Manual on Uniform Traffic
Control Devices published by the U.S. Department of Transportation and adopted as amended by the Florida
Department of Transportation, or most recent addition.
44.2.1 WORK ZONE SAFETY
The general objectives of a program of work zone safety is to protect workers, pedestrians, bicyclists and
motorists during construction and maintenance operations. This general objective may be achieved by
meeting the following specific objectives:
· Provide adequate advance warning and information regarding upcoming work zones.
· Provide the driver clear directions to understanding the situation he will be facing as he proceeds
through or around the work zone.
· Reduce the consequences of an out of control vehicle.
· Provide safe access and storage for equipment and material.
· Promote speedy completion of projects (including thorough cleanup of the site).
· Promote use of the appropriate traffic control and protection devices.
· Provide safe passageways for pedestrians through, in, and/or around construction or maintenance
work zones.
The 2004 Design Standards (OS), Index 600
"When an existing pedestrian way or bicycle way is located within a traffic control work zone,
accommodation must be maintained and provision for the disabled must be provided. Only approved
temporary traffic control devices may be used to delineate a temporary traffic control zone pedestrian
walkway. Advanced notification of sidewalk closures and detours marked shall be provided by appropriate
signs. .
2004 Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction
102-5 Traffic Control: 102-5.1 Standards: FDOT Design Standards (DS) are the minimum standards for
the use in the development of all traffic control plans
44.3 ROADWAY CLOSURE GUIDELINES
Roadway types: Major Arterials, Minor Arterials, Local Collectors, and Local
Following are typical requirements to be accomplished prior to closure. The number of requirements
increase with traffic volume and the importance of access. Road closures affecting business or sole access
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
routes will increase in process requirements as appropriate. For all but local streets, no road or lane
closures are allowed during the Christmas holiday season and the designated "Spring Break" season with
prior approval by the City Engineer.
44.3.1 ALL ROADWAYS
Obtain permits for Pinellas County and Florida Department of Transportation roadways.
Traffic control devises conform to national and state standards.
44.3.1.1
PUBLIC NOTIFICATION
Standard property owner notification prior to start of construction for properties directly affected by the
construction process.
44.3.2 MAJOR ARTERIALS, MINOR ARTERIALS, LOCAL COLLECTORS
Consult with City Traffic staff for preliminary traffic control options.
Develop Formal Traffic Control Plan for Permit Submittal to Regulatory Agency as necessary.
44.3.2.1
PUBLIC NOTIFICATION
Message Board Display, Minimum of 7 -day notice period prior to road closure and maybe longer for larger
highway. The message board is to be provided by the Contractor.
44.3.3 MAJOR ARTERIALS, MINOR ARTERIALS
44.3.3.1 PUBLIC NOTIFICATION
C-View Release
44.3.4 MAJOR ARTERIALS
44.3.4.1 PUBLIC NOTIFICATION
News Release
The Message Board may need to be displayed for a period longer than 7 days.
44.4 APPROVAL OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN
The Contractor is invited and encouraged to confer in advance of bidding, and is required, as a
specification of the work, to confer in advance of beginning any work on the Project, with the Office of the
Traffic Engineer, Municipal Services Building, 100 South Myrtle Avenue, telephone 562-4772, for the
purpose of approval of the Contractor's proposed detailed traffic control plan.
44.5 INSPECTION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL OPERATION
The Office of the Traffic Engineer may inspect and monitor the traffic control plan and traffic control devices
of the Contractor. The City's Construction Inspector assigned to the project, may make known requirements
for any alterations or adjustments to the traffic control devices. The Contractor shall take direction from the
Project Engineer or Project Inspector.
Marshall Street and Norlheast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section N
IV-79
44.6 PAYMENT FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL
Payment for work zone traffic control is a non-specific pay item to be included in the construction costs
associated with other specific pay items unless specifically stated otherwise in the Scope of Work in these
Technical Specifications and a bid item(s) is included for Work Zone Traffic Control in the proposal form.
44.7 CERTIFICATION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL SUPERVISOR
The City may require that the Supervisor or Foreman controlling the work for the Contractor on the Project
have a current International Municipal Signal Association, Work Zone Traffic Control Safety Certification or
Worksite Traffic Supervisor Certification from the American Traffic Safety Association with additional current
Certification from the Florida Department of Transportation. This requirement for Certification will be noted
in the Scope of Work and/or sections of these Technical Specifications. When the certified supervisor is
required for the Project, the supervisor will be on the Project site at all times while work is being conducted.
The Worksite Traffic Supervisor shall be available on a 24-hour per day basis and shall review the project
on a day-to-day basis as well as being involved in all changes to traffic control. The Worksite Traffic _
Supervisor shall have access to all equipment and materials needed to maintain traffic control and handle
traffic related situations. The Worksite Traffic Supervisor shall ensure that routine deficiencies are corrected
within a 24-hour period.
The Worksite Traffic Supervisor shall be available on the site within 45 minutes after notification of an
emergency situation, prepared to positively respond to repair the work zone traffic control or to provide
alternate traffic arrangements.
Failure of the Worksite Traffic Supervisor to comply with the provisions of this Subarticle may be grounds
for decertification or removal from the project or both. Failure to maintain a designated Worksite Traffic
Supervisor or failure to comply with these provisions will result in temporary suspension of all activities
except traffic and erosion control and such other activities deemed to be necessary for project maintenance
and safety.
45 CURED-IN-PLACE PIPE LINING
45.1 INTENT
It is the intention of this specification to provide for the trench less restoration of sanitary sewer and storm
pipes by the installation if a cured in place jointless, continuous, thermosetting resin impregnated polyester
flexible felt liner which is watertight and chemically resistant to withstand exposure to domestic sewage
including all labor, materials and equipment to provide for a complete, fully restored and functioning
installation.
45.2 PRODUCT AND CONTRACTOR/INSTALLER ACCEPTABILITY
The City requires that all contractors be prequalified. See General Conditions regarding contractor
prequalification. In addition, the City requires a proven extensive tract record for the liner system to be used
in this project. All contractors submitting for prequalification approval for this project must exhibit extensive
satisfactory experience in the installation of the proposed liner system(s) and satisfactory evidence that the
proposed liner system has been extensively and successfully installed in the Unites States and the State of
Florida. The installer must be certified by the liner system manufacturer for installation of the liner system.
The City. reserves full and complete authority to approve the satisfactory nature of the both the liner system
and the installer.
Marshall Street and Norlheast WPC Facilities
Odor Contrallmprovements Project
Section IV
IV-80
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
45.3 MATERIALS
The liner shall be polyester fiber felt tubing saturated with a resin prior to insertion. Resin type and qualities
shall be as specified by the manufacturer to obtain a cured liner with the following properties:
Tensile Strength ASTM 0638 3,000 psi
Flexural Strength ASTM 0790 4,500 psi
Flexural Modulus of Elasticity ASTM 0790 300,000 psi
Long Term Modulus of Elasticity (50 Years) ASTM 02290 150,000 psi
Liner shall meet strengths as shown in ASTM F1216 unless otherwise submitted and approved by the
Engineer. Lining manufacturer shall submit to the Engineer for approval as requested, complete design
calculations for the liner thickness. The criteria for liner design shall be HS-20 traffic loading, water table to
the ground surface, minimum expected lifetime of 50 years, and no structural strength retained from the
existing pipe. Liner materials shall meet manufactures specifications of Insituform of North America, Inc.,
3315 Oemocrat Road, Post Office Box 181071, Memphis, Tennessee 38118; or InLiner USA 1900 N.W.
44th St., Pompano Beach Florida 33064, 305-979-0802, or an approved equal. Any approved equal liner
system must be approved by the Engineer as an equal system prior to receiving bids. Request for
contractor prequalification and/or equal liner system approval must be received by the Engineer no later
than 14 days prior to the date for receiving bids.
45.4 CLEANING/SURFACE PREPARATION
It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to clean and prepare the existing pipes for rehabilitation. The
Contractor will thoroughly clean the interior of the sewers to produce a clean interior surface free of all
coatings, sand, rock, roots, sludge, or other deleterious materials prior to liner insertion. Bypass pumping
will be provided by the Contractor as part of the unit cost of restoration. Bypass operations are to be so
arranged as to cause minimum disruptions to local traffic, residents and particularly to commercial facilities.
Ouring the cleaning and preparation operations all necessary precautions shall be taken to protect the
public, all property and the sewer from damage. All material removed from the sewers shall be the
Contracto~s responsibility for prompt disposal in accordance with all regulatory agency requirements. The
Contractor may be required to control the rate of sewer cleaning in the sanitary system to avoid heavy
pollution loads at the City's. treatment plants.
45.5 TELEVISION INSPECTION
After cleaning, and again after the rehabilitation work on each section of the project is completed, all pipe
sections shall be visually inspected by means of c1osed-circuit color television, and recorded on VHS format
tapes provided to the project engineer. The television system used shall be designed for the purpose and
suitably lighted to provide a clear picture of the entire periphery of the pipe.
45.6 LINER INSTALLATION
Liner shall be sized to field measurements obtained by the Contractor to provide for a tight fit on the interior
of the existing pipe to be lined. Contractor shall use installation methods approved by the liner
manufacturer including operations for inversion, heat curing and reconnection of laterals.
The Contractor shall immediately notify the Engineer of any construction delays taking place during the
insertion operation. Contractor shall maintain a reasonable backup system for bypass pumping should
delays or problems with pumping systems develop. Liner entries at manholes shall be smooth, free of
irregularities, and watertight. No pinholes, tears, cracks, thin spots, excessive wrinkling or other defects in
the liner shall be permitted. Such defects shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at his expense.
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Contrallmprovements Project
Section IV
IV-81
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
IV-82
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
45.7 LATERAL RECONNECTION
Sanitary laterals shall be reconnected as soon as possible to renew service. Laterals are to be reconnected
by means of robotics, by internally cutting out the liner to 95% of the area of the original opening. All lateral
reconnections are to be grouted to prevent leakage. Grouting method and material is to be approved by the
Engineer. Any reconnections to laterals and connections to manholes which are observed to leak shall be
resealed by the Contractor. All laterals discovered during the lining process are to be reconnected unless
specifically directed otherwise by the City. The Contractor will be requested to reconnect any laterals
discovered to not be reconnected at a later date. Contractor shall notify all local system users when the
sanitary system will not be available for normal usage by the delivery of door hangers with appropriate
information regarding the construction project.
45.8 TIME OF CONSTRUCTION
Construction schedules will be submitted by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer. At no time will
any sanitary sewer service connection remain inoperative for more than an eight-hour period without a
service bypass being operated by the Contractor. In the event that sewage backup occurs and enters
buildings, the Contractor shall be responsible for cleanup, repair and property damage costs and claims.
45.9 PAYMENT
Payment for sanitary sewer restoration shall be made per lineal foot including all preparation, bypass
pumping, equipment, labor, materials, operations, restoration, lateral reconnection, etc, to provide a fully
completed and operational sewer. Payment shall be measured from center of manhole to center of
manhole for the sanitary systems and from end of pipe to end of pipe for storm systems.
46 SPECIFICATIONS FOR POLYETHYLENE SLlPLlNING
46.1 MATERIALS
46.1.1 PIPE AND FITTINGS
The pipe supplied under this specification shall be high performance, high molecular weight, high density
polyethylene pipe (Driscopipe 1000) as manufactured by Phillips Driscopipe, Inc., Dallas, Texas and shall
conform to ASTM D 1248 (Type III, Class C, Category 5, Grade P34) or approved equal. Minimum cell
classification values shall be 345434C as referenced in ASTM D 3350 latest edition. If fittings are required,
they will be supplied under this specification and shall be molded or manufactured from a polyethylene
compound having a cell classification equal to or exceeding the compound used in the pipe.
To insure compatibility of polyethylene resins, all fittings supplied under this specification shall be of the
same manufacture as the pipe being supplied~
46.1.2 QUALITY CONTROL
The resin used for manufacturer of the pipe shall be manufactured by the pipe manufacturer, thus
maintaining complete control of the pipe quality. The pipe shall contain no recycled compound except that
generated in the manufacturer's own plant from resin of the same specification from the same raw material.
The pipe shall be homogeneous throughout and free of visible cracks, holes, foreign inclusions, or other
deleterious defects, and shall be identical in color, density, rilelt index, and other physical properties.
The polyethylene resin used shall have all ingredients pre compound prior to extrusion of pipe, in plant
blending is not acceptable.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
The Engineer may request, as part of the quality control records submittal, certification that the pipe
produced is represented by the quality assurance testing. Additionally, test results from manufacture~s
testing or random sampling by the Engineer that do not meet appropriate ASTM standards or
manufacture~s representation, may be cause for rejection of pipe represented by the testing. These tests
may include density and flow rate measurements from samples taken at selected locations within the pipe
wall and thermal stability determinations according to ASTM 0 3350, 10.1.9.
46.1.3 SAMPLES
The owner or the specifying engineer may request certified lab data to verify the physical properties of the
materials supplied under this specification or may take random samples and have them tested by an
independent laboratory.
46.1.4 REJECTION
Polyethylene pipe and fittings may be rejected for failure to meet any of the requirements of this
specification.
46.2 PIPE DIMENSIONS
Pipe supplied under this specification shall have a nominal IPS (Iron Pipe Size) 0.0. unless otherwise
specified. The SDR (Standard Dimension Ratio) of the pipe supplied shall be as specified by the Engineer,
on the construction plans and/or the scope of work.
46.3 CONSTRUCTION PRACTICES
46.3.1 HANDLING OF PIPE
Pipe shall be stored on clean, level ground to prevent undue scratching or gouging of the pipe. If the pipe
must be stacked for storage, such stacking should be done in accordance with the pipe manufacturer's
recommendations. The handling of the pipe should be done in such a manner that it is not damaged by
dragging over sharp objects or cut by chokers or lifting equipment.
46.3.2 REPAIR OF DAMAGED SECTIONS
Segments of pipe having cuts or gouges in excess of 10% of the wall thickness of the pipe should be cut
out and removed. The undamaged portions of the pipe shall be rejoined using the butt fusion joining
method.
46.3.3 PIPE JOINING
Sections of polyethylene pipe should be joined into continuous lengths on the job site above ground. The
joining method shall be the butt fusion method and shall be performed by the manufacture~s representative
and in strict accordcmce with the pipe manufacture~s recommendations. The butt fusion equipment used in
the joining procedures should be capable of meeting all conditions recommended by the pipe manufacturer,
including, but not limited to, temperature requirements, alignment, and fusion pressures.
46.3.4 HANDLING OF FUSED PIPE
Fused segments of pipe shall be handled so to avoid damage to the pipe. When lifting fused sections of
pipe, chains or cable type chokers should be avoided. Nylon slings are preferred. Spreader bars should be
used when lifting long fused sections. Care should be exercised to avoid cutting or gouging the pipe.
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Contrallmprovements Project
Section IV
IV.83
46.4 SLlPLlNING PROCEDURE
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
46.4.1 PIPE REQUIREMENTS AND DIMENSIONS
The Iiner(s) to be slip lined into the existing storm sewer shall have the following sizes:
12-inch diameter liner (SDR 26) into 15-inch existing sewer.
16-inch diameter liner (SDR 26) into 18-inch existing sewer.
18-inch diameter liner (SDR 26) into 21-inch existing sewer.
21 %-inch diameter liner (SDR 32.5) into 24-inch existing sewer.
28-inch diameter liner (SDR 32.5) into 3D-inch existing sewer.
34-inch diameter liner (SDR 32.5) into 36-inch existing sewer.
42-inch diameter liner (SDR 32.5) into 48-inch existing sewer.
46.4.3 INSERTION SHAFT AND EXCAVATIONS
All excavations shall conform to OSHA requirements and any additional requirements as set by the
specifying engineer or his representative.
Insertion shaft excavations shall coincide with points requiring removal of obstructions or shall be
determined by the engineer.
An entry slope grade of 2 1/2:1 maximum shall be used to provide a safe bending radius for the
polyethylene. The bottom of the entry pit should provide a straight section for ease of entry of the liner into
the existing pipe. The length of the level excavation should be at least twelve times the diameter of the liner
being inserted. The width of the shaft should be as narrow as possible. The required width will depend on
the location, type of soil, depth of the existing sewer line and the water table.
46.4.4 INSERTION OF THE LINER
After completion of the access shaft, the top half of the existing sewer shall be broken or cut and removed
for the full length of the access shaft.
A fabricated pulling head shall be connected to the leading end of the liner pipe. A cable shall be connected
to the pulling head so that the liner pipe can be pulled into the existing sewer.
Power winches used for pulling in long lengths of polyethylene liner pipe shall be rated equal to the project
requirements.
Once started, the pulling operation should continue to completion.
Insertion is normally done at about a slow walking speed. After insertion, a minimum of 12 hours shall be
allowed for the liner pipe to reach equilibrium with. the .sewer temperature and to allow the liner pipe to
stress relieve itself.
The polyethylene liner pipe should protrude at least 6 inches into the manhole where it terminates.
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities Section IV
Odor Control Improvements Project 1V.84
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
After the 12-hour equilibrium period, the annular space between the original pipe and the liner shall be
pressure grouted. Said grouting must be from the bottom up to prevent air pockets from forming. Also the
grout must be recommended for underwater application and have elastomeric properties. Products used
shall be approved by the engineer.
The liner shall not be displaced when the annular space is being filled. Spacers, inflatable plugs or other
methods approved by the Engineer must be used to prevent displacement.
The length of fused pipe that can be pulled will vary depending on field conditions, the ease of access to
the area, and the working space available.
46.4.5 CONFIRMATION OF PIPE SIZES
The Contractor shall be solely responsible to confirm all pipe sizes prior to ordering, fusing and installation
of the liner.
46.4.6 UNDERDRAIN CONNECTIONS IF REQUIRED
After the liner has been pulled into place, allowed to recover and sealed at the manholes, pipe connections
okayed by the engineer shall be reconnected to the liner pipe.
Pipe connections shall be connected by the use of a pre-fabricated polyethylene saddle. A neoprene gasket
shall be installed between the saddle and the liner pipe so that a complete water seal is accomplished
when the saddle is placed on the liner pipe and secured with stainless steel bands.
46.4.7 BACKFILLING
All excavations shall be backfilled using on site materials or as specified by the engineer. Cost for
backfilling of access shafts and underdrain connections shall be including in the unit price bid for sliplining
and reconnection of service laterals. Before any excavation is done for any purpose, it will be the
responsibility of the contractor to contact the various utility companies and to determine the locations of
their facilities. It will be the responsibility of the contractor to provide adequate protection for utility facilities.
Any temporary construction right of way and/or storage areas will be arranged for by the contractor.
46.4.8 POINT REPAIR
The engineer or his representative will determine it a point repair is necessary only after it has been
demonstrated that a liner pipe cannot be pulled through the existing pipe. Payment ~ill be made for each
repair.
The contractor will be expected to remove the obstruction and clear the pipe. It removing the top ot the
existing pipe will accomplish the removal ot the obstruction, the bottom of the existing pipe should remain in
place to form a cradle for the liner.
46.4.9 CLEAN UP OPERATIONS
All materials not used in the backfilling operation shall be disposed of off site by the contractor. Finish
grading shall be required. In locations other than street right-ot-ways, the surface shall be graded smooth
and sodded with the same kind of grass as the existing lawn. Excavation points in street right-of-ways shall
be repaired as specified by the engineer.
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
/V-SS
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Contrallmprovements Project
Section IV
1V-86
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
47 SPECIFICATIONS FOR POLYVINYL CHLORIDE RIBBED PIPE
47.1 SCOPE
This specification designates general requirements for unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (PVe) plastic (spiral
wound) pipe with integral wall bell and spigot joints for the conveyance of storm water.
47.2 MATERIALS
All pipe and fittings shall be manufactured and tested in accordance with specification for "Poly (Vinyl
Chloride) (PVe) Large Diameter Ribbed Gravity Storm Sewer Pipe and Fittings Based on Controlled Inside
Diameter" .
The pipe and fittings shall be made of PVC plastic.
47.3 PIPE
The bell shall consist of an integral wall section. The solid cross section fiber ring shall be factory
assembled on the spigot. Sizes and dimensions shall be as shown in this specification. Standard laying
lengths shall be 13 ft. + 1 inch. At manufacturer's option, random lengths of not more than 15% of total
footage may be shipped in lieu of standard lengths.
47.4 JOINING SYSTEM
Joints shall be either an integral bell gasketed joint. When the joint is assembled according to manufactures
recommendation it will prevent misalignment of adjacent pipes and form a silt tight joint.
47.5 FITTINGS
All fittings and accessories shall be as manufactured and furnished by the pipe supplier or approved equal
and have bell and/or spigot configurations compatible with that of the pipe.
48 GUNITE SPECIFICATIONS
48.1 PRESSURE INJECTED GROUT
Pressure injected grout shall be of cement and water and shall be proportioned generally in the ratio of 1.5
(one and one half) cubic foot (one and one half bags) of cement to 1 (one) cubic foot (7.50 gal.) of water.
This mix shall be varied as the grouting proceeds as is necessary to provide penetration in the operator's
. judgment.
Cement shall be Portland Cement conforming to all of the requirements of the American Society for Testing
Materials Standard Specifications, latest edition serial designation C150 for Portland Cement, Type I.
Portland Cement shall weigh not less than 94 pounds per cubic foot.
Water used in the grout shall be fresh, clean and free from injurious amounts of oil, alkali, vegetable,
sewage and/or organic matter. Water shall be considered as weighing 8.33 pounds per gallon.
Grout pump shall be of the positive displacement type and shall be capable of producing adequate
pressure to penetrate the area.
All pressure grouting will be at the direction of the Engineer.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
48.2 REHABILITATION OF CORRUGATED METAL PIPE WITH GUNITE
Guniting shall conform to all requirements of "Specifications for Materials, Proportioning, and Application of
Shotcrete (ACI 506.2 77)" published by the American Concrete Institute, Detroit, Michigan, except as
modified by those specifications.
Steel reinforcement shall be incorporated in the Gunite as required and shall be furnished, bent, set and
placed in accordance with the provisions of these specifications.
The purpose of this specification is to obtain a dense and durable concrete having the specified strength.
48.3 COMPOSITION
Gunite shall be composed of Portland Cement, aggregate and water so proportioned as to produce a
concrete suitable for pneumatic application.
48.4 STRENGTH REQUIREMENTS
Concrete ingredients shall be selected, proportioned in such a manner as will produce concrete which will
be extremely strong, dense and resistant to weathering, and abrasion. Concrete shall have a minimum 28-
day strength of 4,000 psi.
48.5 MATERIALS
Portland Cement: Cement shall be Portland cement conforming to all of the requirements of the American
Society for Testing Materials Standard Specifications, Latest Serial Designation C150 for Portland Cement,
Type I. A bag of cement shall be deemed to weigh not less than 94 pounds per cubic foot.
Fine Aggregate: Fine aggregate shall be natural siliceous sand consisting of hard, clean, strong, durable
and uncoated particles, conforming to the requirements of American Society for Testing Materials Standard
Specifications, Latest Serial Designation C33 for Concrete Aggregates.
Fine aggregate shall not contain less than 3% nor more than 6% of moisture.
Fine aggregate shall be evenly graded from fine to coarse and shall be within the following limits:
Passing No. 3/8 Sieve 100%
Passing NO.4 Sieve 95% to 100%
Passing NO.8 Sieve 80% to 100%
Passing No. 16 Sieve 50% to 85%
Passing No. 30 Sieve 25% to 60%
Passing No. 50 Sieve 10% to 30%
Passing No. 100 Sieve 2% to 10%
48.6 WATER
Water used in mixing, at the nozzle shall be fresh, clean, and free from injurious amounts of oil, acid, alkali,
vegetable, sewage, and/or organic matter. Water shall be considered as weighing 8.33 pounds per gallon.
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section tv
IV-87
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
1V-88
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
48.7 REINFORCEMENT
Steel mesh reinforcement shall be electrically welded, cold drawn, mild steel fabric conforming to the latest
requirements of ASTM Standard Specifications, Serial Designation A 185 for Welded Steel Wire Fabric for
Concrete Reinforcement. Mesh can be fabricated from cold drawn steel wire conforming to the
requirements of the latest ASTM Standard Specifications, Serial Designation A 82 and sized as shown on
Plans Page 7 of 7.
48.8 STORAGE OF MATERIALS
f
Cement shall be stored with adequate provisions for the prevention of absorption of moisture. It shall be
stored in a manner that will permit easy access for inspection and identification of each shipment.
Aggregate shall be stockpiled at points selected to provide maximum drainage and to prevent the inclusion
of any foreign material during rehandling.
48.9 SURFACE PREPARATION
Unsound materials of construction and all coated, scaly, or unsound concrete in manholes and inlets, shall
be removed by chipping with pneumatic hammers and chisels to sound surface, all cracks and cavities
shall be chipped to such formation that their sides form approximately a 45 degree angle to the exposed
surface for at least one (1) inch in depth. All areas to receive pneumatic concrete shall be cleaned by
flushing or scouring with water and compressed air jets to assure removal of all loose particles. All areas of
existing surfaces that do not require chipping shall be given a wet sandblasting with the gunite equipment
and the air pressure at the cement gun shall not be less than 50 psi.
Surface preparation of existing metal surface of a corrugated pipe shall be lightly sandblasted to remove
loose material. All sandblasted areas shall then be cleaned by a air/water blast to remove all particles from
the cleaning operation.
To insure perfect bond, the newly sandblasted surface shall be thoroughly moistened with water prior to
application of gunite. In no instance shall gunite be applied in an area where free running water exists.
48.10 PROPORTIONING
Prior to start of guniting the Contractor shall submit to the Owner the recommended mix as a ratio of
cement to aggregate. Recommended mix shall be on the basis of test data from prior experience. Provided
data submitted is adequate no further testing of recommended mix will be required.
If required, the Contractor shall provide all equipment necessary to control the actual amounts of all
materials entering into the concrete. The types of equipment and methods used for measuring materials
shall be subject to approval.
48.11 MIXING
Gunite shall be thoroughly mixed by machine and then passed through a sieve to remove all large particles
before placing in hopper of the cement gun. The mixture shall not be permitted to become damp. Each
batch should be entirely discharged before recharging is begun. The mixer should be cleaned thoroughly
enough to remove all adherent materials from the mixing vanes and from the drum at regular intervals.
Water in any amount shall not be added to the mix before it enters the cement gun. Quantities of water
shall be controlled by a valve at the nozzle of the gun. Water content shall be adjusted as required for
proper placement, but shall in no case exceed four gallons of water per sack of cement, including the water
contained in the aggregate.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Remixing or tempering shall not be permitted. Mixed material that has stood 45 minutes without being used
shall be discarded. Rebound materials shall not be reused.
48.12 APPLICATION
Gunite shall not be placed on a frozen surface nor during freezing weather. Gunite shall not be placed
when it is anticipated that the temperature during the following 24 hours will drop below 32 degrees,
Fahrenheit.
Sequence of application may be from bottom to top or vice versa if rebound is properly removed. Corners
shall be filled first. "Shooting" shall be from an angle as near perpendicular to the surface as practicable,
with the nozzle held approximately 3 feet from the work (except in confined control). If the flow of material
at the nozzle is not uniform and slugs, sand spots, or wet sloughs result, the nozzleman shall direct the
nozzle away from the. work until the faulty conditions are corrected. Such defects shall be replaced as the
work progresses.
Guniting shall be suspended if:
1. Air velocity separates the cement from the sand at the nozzle.
2. Temperature approaches freezing and the newly placed gunite cannot be protected.
Gunite shall be applied in one or more layers to such. total thickness as required to restore the area as
detailed over the original lines of the adjoining surface, unless other wise specified. All cavities,
depressions, washouts and similar failures shall be rebuilt to original lines by use of gunite reinforced with
wire mesh. Where the cavity exceeds 4 inches in depth a layer of mesh shall be used for each 3 inches of
depth of gunite. In no case shall wire mesh be placed behind existing reinforcement.
The time interval between successive layers in sloping vertical or overhanging work must be sufficient to
allow initial but not final set to develop. At the time the initial set is developing, the surface shall be cleaned
to remove the thin film of laitance in order to provide a perfect bond with succeeding applications.
48.13 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS
Construction joints or day's work joints shall be sloped off to a thin, clean, regular edge, preferably at a 45-
degree slope. Before placing the adjoining work, the slope portion and adjacent gunite shall be thoroughly
cleaned as necessary, then moistened and scoured with an air jet.
48.14 SURFACE FINISH
Nozzleman shall bring the gunite to an even plane and to well formed corners by working up to ground
wires or other guides, using lower placing velocity than normal.
After the body coat has been placed, the surface shall be trued with a thin edge screed to remove high
areas and expose low areas. Low areas shall be properly filled with concrete to insure a true, flat surface.
After the concrete surface has been trued, the entire surface shall be given a flashcoat finish except where
a special type finish is specified on the drawings.
48.15 CURING
Curing shall be in accordance with either paragraph 3.7.1 (d) or paragraph 3.7.5. of ACI 506.2 77 depending
upon atmospheric condition.
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC FacilitiestOdor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
IV.89
48.16 ADJACENT SURFACE PROTECTION
During progress of the work, where appearance is important, adjacent areas or grounds which may be
permanently discolored, stained, or otherwise damaged by dust and rebound, shall be adequately
protected sensitive areas, when contacted, shall be cleaned by early scraping, brushing or washing, as the
surroundings permit.
48.17 INSPECTION
Because of the importance of workmanship affecting the quality of the gunite, continual inspection during
placing shall be maintained. Any imperfections discovered shall be cut out and replaced with sound
material.
48.18 EQUIPMENT
Cement Gun: The mixing and delivering equipment shall be either the vertical double chamber type or
rotary type. The upper chamber of the double chamber type shall receive and pressurize the dry mix and
deliver it to the lower chamber. The lower chamber shall force the pressurized mix into the delivery hose by
means of a feed wheel. The type of feeder utilized should be of sufficient capacity that the lower chamber
may continuously furnish all required material to the delivery hose while the upper chamber receives the
recharge. The rotary type cement gun shall have an enlarged hopper to feed material into a rotating
multiported cylinder. Material shall fall by gravity into a port which shall then be rotated to a position in
which the material is expelled by air into a moving stream of air. All equipment must be kept in good repair.
The interior of drums, feed gearing and valves shall be cleaned as often as necessary (at least once every
8 hour shift) to prevent material from caking on critical parts.
Nozzle: Nozzle shall be the premixing type with perforated water feed ring inside the nozzle. The maximum
length of material hose for the application of gunite shall be approximately 150 feet although it shall be
permissible to use as much as 800 feet of material hose if the supply air pressure measured at the cement
gun is increased to maintain proper velocity. The following table gives requirements for compressor size,
hose size and air pressure using 150 feet of material hose:
Camp. Cap Max. Hose Dia. Max. Size Nozzle Min. Air Press.
(cfm) (In.) (In.) (psi)
365 15/8 1 5/8 60
600 2 2 80
750 21/2 21/2 90
For each 25 feet of material hose used in excess of 150 feet, the required air pressure shall be increased
by 5 psi.
Air Compressor: Any standard type of compressor shall be satisfactory if it is of sufficient capacity to
provide, without interruption, the pressures and volume of air necessarY for the longest hose delivery. The
air compressor capacity determinations shall include allowances made for the air consumed in blowing
rebound, cleaning, reinforcing and for incidental uses. Compressor equipment shall be of such capacity so
as to insure air pressures at the special mixer capable of producing the required material velocities.
Water Supply: The water pressure at the discharge nozzle should be sufficiently greater than the operating ,
air pressure to assure the water is intimately mixed with the other materials. If the line water pressure is
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Contrallmprovements Project
Section IV
N-90
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
inadequate, a water pump or pressurized tank shall be introduced into the line. The water pressure shall be
uniformly steady (nonpulsating).
49 SANITARY AND STORM MANHOLE LINER RESTORATION
49.1 SCOPE AND INTENT
It is the intent of this portion of the specification to provide for the structural rehabilitation of manhole walls
and bases with solid preformed liners and made-in-place liner systems used in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations and these specifications. In addition to these specifications, the
Contractor shall comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for work. Purpose of work is
to eliminate infiltration, provide corrosion protection, repair voids and to restore the structural integrity of the
manhole. For any particular system the Contractor will submit manufacturer's technical data and application
instructions. All OSHA regulations shall be met.
49.2 PAYMENT
Payment for liners shall be per vertical foot of liner installed from the base to the top of the installed liner.
Liners will generally be installed to the top of existing or new corbels. No separate payment will be made for
the following items and the cost of such work shall be included in the pay item per linear foot of liner:
Bypass pumping; Traffic Control; Debris Disposal; Excavation, including necessary pavement removal;
Shoring and/or dewatering; Structural fill; Backfill and compaction; Grout and mortar; Brick; Resetting of the
manhole ring and cover; Pipe extensions and connectors necessary to the installation; Replacement of
unpaved roadway and grass or shrubbery plot; Replacement of roadway base and asphalt surface; and
Appurtenant work as required for a complete and operable system.
49.3 FIBERGLASS LINER PRODUCTS
49.3.1 MATERIALS
49.3.1.1 LINERS
Liners shall be fiberglass engineered to meet or exceed MSHTO H 20 loading of 16,000 pound vertical
wheel load. Manhole liners are to be of the integral corbel design unless otherwise stipulated. Manhole
liners are to be as large in diameter as will fit into the existing manhole. The contractor shall measure the
existing manhole immediately prior to ordering materials and is solely responsible for the fitting of the liner.
Contractor will be required to submit factory certification for fiberglass liners. The manhole liner shall meet
all requirements of ASTM D 3753.
49.3.1.2
MORTAR
Mortar shall be composed of one part Portland Cement Type I and between two and three parts clean, well
graded sand, 100% of which shall pass a No.8 sieve.
49.3.1.3
GROUTING
Grouting shall be a concrete slurry of four bags of Portland Cement Type II per cubic yard of clean, well
graded sand.
Marshall Street and Norlheast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements .Project
Section IV
IV-91
49.3.2
INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION
Excavate an area around the top of the existing manhole sufficiently wide and deep for the removal of the
manhole ring and corbel section.
Remove the frame and cover and corbel section without damaging the existing manhole walls. Care is to
be taken not to allow brick or soil to fall into the existing manhole.
Remove or reinsert loose brick which protrude more than one inch from the interior wall of the manhole and
which could interfere with the insertion of the fiberglass liner.
If the shelf of the manhole invert is not level around the perimeter, form a flat shelf with mortar.
Cut the liner to the proper length. Cutouts in the manhole shall be made to accommodate existing inlet and
outlet pipes, drops and cleanouts.
Lower the liner into the. existing manhole and set the bottom of the liner into quick setting grout. Obtain a .
good bottom seal to prevent the loss of grout from the annular space between the outside of the liner and
the inside wall of the existing manhole. Set the liner as nearly vertically as possible. Pour six inches of
quick setting grout above the initial bottom seal in the annular void to insure an adequate bottom seal.
Bridge the gap from drops, laterals, force mains, cleanouts and all existing piping between the existing
manhole wall and the new manhole liner with P.V.C. pipe. Use quick setting mortar to seal the areaaround
the manhole liner and piping.
Fill the annular space between the manhole liner and the existing manhole interior walls with grout. Care
must be taken not to deflect the manhole liner due to head pressure.
Set the existing manhole ring and cover using brick to make elevation adjustments as needed.
Observe watertightness and repair any visible leakage.
Backfill around the new liner and compact the backfill. Sod the disturbed area. Match existing sod.
Where manholes fall in paved areas, disturbed b.ase shall!>e replaced twice the original thickness and
compacted in 8" layers. Asphalt shall be replaced with 11/2" of Pinellas County Type II surface.
49.4 STRONG SEAL MS-2 LINER PRODUCT SYSTEM
This specification shall govern all work to spray apply a monolithic fiber reinforced cementitious liner to the
wall and bench surfaces of brick, concrete or any other construction material; Strong Seal MS 2 product.
Described are procedures for manhole preparation, cleaning, application and testing. The applicator must
be approved, trained and certified as having successfully completed factory training. The
applicator/contractor shall furnish all labor, equipment and materials for applying the Strong Seal MS 2
product directly to the contour of the manhole to form a structural cementitious liner of a minimum 1/2"
thickness using a machine specially designed for the application. All aspects of the installation shall be in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and with the following specifications which includes:
1. The elimination of active infiltration prior to making the application.
2. The removal of any loose and unsound material.
3. The spray application of a pre blended cementitious mix to form a monolithic liner in a 2 coat
application.
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
1V.92
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
49.4.1 MATERIALS
49.4.1.1 PATCHING MIX
Strong Seal shall be used as a patching mix according to the manufacturers recommendations and shall
have the following minimum requirements:
1. Compressive Strength (ASTM C-109)
2. Shrinkage (ASTM C-596)
3. Bond (ASTM C-952)
4. Cement
5. Density, when applied
15 min., 200 psi
28 days, 150 psi
28 days, 150 psi
Sulfate resistant
6 hrs., 1,400 psi
105 +1- 5 pcf
49.5 INFILTRATION CONTROL
Strong Plug shall be used to stop minor water infiltration according to the manufacture's recommendations
and shall have the following minimum requirements:
1. Compressive strength (ASTM C-109) - 600 psi, 1 hr.; 1000 psi 24 hrs.
2. Bond (ASTM C-952) - 30 psi, 1 hr.; 80 psi, 24 hrs.
49.6 GROUTING MIX
Strong-Seal Grout shall be used for stopping very active infiltration and filling voids according to the
manufacture's recommendations. The grout shall be volume stable, and have a minimum 28 day
compressive strength of 250 psi and a 1 day strength of 50 psi.
49.7 LINER MIX
Strong Seal MS 2 shall be used to form the monolithic liner covering all interior manhole surfaces and shall
have the following minimum requirements at 28 days:
1. Compressive strength (ASTM C 109) 3,000 psi
2. Tensile strength (ASTM C 496) 300 psi
3. Flexural strength (ASTM C 78) 600 psi
4. Shrinkage (ASTM C 596) 0% at 90% R.H.
5. Bond (ASTM C 952) 130 psi
6. Density, when applied 105 + pet
Product must be factory blended requiring only the addition of water at the Job site. Bag weight shall be 50
51 pounds and contents shall have dry bulk density of 54 to 56 pounds per cubic foot. Fiberglass rods
which are contained in the product shall be alkaline resistant and shall be 1/2" to 5/8" long with a diameter
of 635 to 640 microns. Products shall, in the un mixed state, have a lead content not greater than two
percent (2%) by weight.
Strong Seal MS 2C shall be made with Calcium Aluminate Cement and shall be used according to the
manufacturers recommendations in applications where there is evidence of severe sulfide conditions.
Product must be factory blended requiring only the addition of water at job site.
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
IV-93
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Contrallmprovements Project
Section IV
1V.96
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
initial test, necessary repairs shall be made. Retesting shall proceed until a satisfactory test is obtained.
Tests shall be performed by the Contractor under the direction of the Project Engineer.
49.12 INNERLlNE ENVIRONMENTAL SERVICES LINER PRODUCT SYSTEM
49.12.1 SCOPE
Materials and application procedures for manhole rehabilitation for the purpose of restoring structural
integrity, providing corrosion resistance, and stopping infiltration by means of:
1. Hydraulic grouting, where required, as a preliminary measure" to stop high volume infiltration
2. Hydrophilic grouting (positive side waterproofing), where required, as follows:
a. Hydrophilic foam-injected through wall of manhole to fill voids and/or
b. Hydrophilic gel.injected through wall of manhole to stop active leaks
3. Cementitious waterproofing with crystallization (negative side waterproofing)
4. Calcium aluminate cement lining, minimum of /2 inch
5. Epoxy coating, minimum of 30 dry mils
49.12.2 MATERIALS
49.12.2.1 REPAIRING CEMENT
A quick setting hydraulic cement compound shall be used to plug all visible minor leaks and to instantly
stop major leaks, so that further waterproofing processes may proceed unhindered. The repairing cement
shall be nonshrinking, nonmetallic, and noncorrosive. The compound shall have the following properties:
Set Time 1-3 minutes
Tensile Strength 1 day 510 psi
ASTM C 307 3 days 745 psi
28 days 855 psi
1 day 3,125 psi
7 days 7,808 psi
28 days 9,543 psi
1 day 410 psi
3 days 855 psi
28 days 1,245 psi
Compressive Strength
ASTM -C 109
Flexural Strength ASTM C 78
49.12.2.2
HYDROPHILIC GROUTING
Based on conditions found in and around the manhole, the applicator shall pressure inject either one or
both of the following materials:
1. An expansive foam grout shall be used to stop major intrusion of water and fill cracks in and voids
behind the structure's surface. Physical properties are as follows:
Tensile Strength 380 psi ASTM 03574-86
Elongation 400% ASTM 0 3574-86
Bonding Strength 250-300 psi
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I.
I
I
I
I
2. A hydrophilic gel grout shall be used for soil stabilization behind the manhole-to prevent seepage,
to provide a damming effect, and to place a hydrostatic barrier around exterior of manhole.
Physical properties are as follows:
Density
Tensile Strength
Elongation
Shrinkage
Toxicity
8.75-9.17 Ibs/gal
150 psi
250%
Less than 4%
Non Toxic
ASTM D-3574
ASTM D- 412
ASTM D-3574
ASTM D-1042
49.12.2.3
WATERPROOFING
A waterproofing component based on the crystallization process shall be applied. The system combines
cementitious and silicate based materials that are applied to negative side surfaces to seal and stop
leakage caused by hydrostatic pressure. A combination of five coats (using three components-two powders
and a special liquid) react with moisture and the constituents of the substrate to form the crystalline
structure. It becomes an integral part of the structure and blocks the passage of water. With moisture
present, the crystallization process will continue for approximately six months. Upon completion the color
will be light grey. Physical properties are as follows:
Slant/Shear bond Strength to Calcium Aluminate Cement
ASTM (to be given) 1,2001,800 psi
Tensile Strength 380 psi (2.62 MPa)
(7 day cure) 325 psi (2.24 MPa)
ASTM C 190
at 100% RH
at 50% RH
Permeability
(3 day cure)
CRD 48 55
8.1x10 IIcm/sec to
7.6x10 em/see
49.12.2.4
CEMENT LINING
A self bonding calcium aluminate cement shall be applied to restore structural integrity and provide
corrosion resistance qualities. The cement (before adding fibers) shall have the following properties:
Calcium Aluminate Cement 12 Hrs 24 Hrs 7 Days 28 Days
Aslrn C 495 Compressive Strength, Psi 7000 11000 12000 13000
Astm C 293 Rexural Strength, Psi 1000 1500 1800 2000
Aslrn C 596 Shrinkage At 90% Humidity - <0.04 <0.06 <0.08
Aslrn C 666 Freeze-Thaw Aft 300 Cycle No Damage
Aslrn C 990 Pull - Out strength 200 - 230 Psi Tensile
Aslrn C 457 Air Void Content (7 Days) 3%
Aslrn C 497 Porosity/Adsorption Test 4-5%
Modules of Elasticity: 7.10 X 10 PSI after 24 Hrs moist curing at 68 F.
The calcium aluminate cement shall be reinforced with inert fibers which comply with ASTM C 1116 and
ASTM C 1018, added at the rate of one pound per cubic yard of concrete. The mixture shall be applied to a
thickness of at least one half inch, but no greater than two inches. It will have a dark greycolor.
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
IV-Sl
49.12.2.5
EPOXY COATING
A high build, flexible waterproofing epoxy shall be applied to a minimum of 30 dry mils. This epoxy will seal
structure from moisture and provide protective qualities to the surface, including excellent resistance to
chemical attack and abrasion. The epoxy shall be 100% solids, can be applied to damp surfaces, cures to a
tile like finish, is easy to clean, and has no toxic fumes. Its uses include sewage treatment plants and other
sewer structures. The epoxy shall have the following properties at 75 degrees F:
Mixing Ratio (Parts A:B), by volume 1: 1
Color (other colors available on request) Light Gray
Pot Life, hrs1
Tensile Strength, psi, min 2,000
Tensile Elongation, % 10 -20
Water Extractable Substc;mces, mg.lsq. in., max 5
Bond Strength to Cement (ASTM 882) psi 1,800
CHEMICAL RESISTANCE
49.12.2.6
Alcohols, Trichloroethylene, Nitric Acid (3%), Jet Fuels, Water, Sulfuric Acid (3% 10%), MEK, Wine; Butyl
Acetate, Beer, Lactic Acid (3%), Gasoline, Corn Oil, Aluminum Sulfate, Paraffin Oil, Vegetable Juice,
Sodium Chloride, Motor Oil, Hydrochloric Acid (3%), and many others.
49.12.3 INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION
49.12.3.1 PROCEDURAL OVERVIEW
Work shall proceed as follows:
1. Remove rungs (steps), if desired by client.
2. Clean manhole and remove debris.
a. Plug lines and/or screen out displaced debris.
b. Apply acid wash, if necessary, to clean and degrease.
c. Hydroblast and/or sand blast structure.
d. Remove debris from work area.
3. Repair minor defects in walls, benches, and inverts, as required, with repairing cement. (Note:
Major structural repairs, such as rebuilding of benches, will also be made as required by client.
4. Inject hydrophilic grout through all surfaces, as needed, to eliminate infiltration.
5. Apply cementitious/crystallization waterproofing agents to all surfaces, repeating steps as needed.
6. Spray and/or hand apply calcium aluminate cement lining to all surfaces.
7. Spray apply epoxy coating to all surfaces.
NOTE: Steps 1-5 shall.be executed consecutively with minimal delays; calcium aluminate (Step 6) shall
require a cure time of at least twenty-four hours for needed adhesion of epoxy (Step 7) to cement lining.
49.12.3.2
PREPARATION
An acid wash shall be used (if needed) to clean and degrease. Then, if the client desires, the rungs shall be
removed. Next, the entire structure is thoroughly water and/or sand blasted to remove any loose or
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Contrallmprovements Project
Section IV
1V-98
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
'I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
l-
I
I
I
I
I
deteriorated material. Care shall be taken to prevent any loose material from entering lines and other areas
by either plugging the lines (where feasible) or inserting protective screens.
49.12.3.3
STRUCTURAL REPAIR
Hand place or spray apply hydraulic cement material as necessary to prepared surface to fill cracks and
voids in structure. Allow twenty (20) minutes before applying waterproofing/crystallization.
49.12.3.4
INFILTRATION CONTROL
Pressure injection of hydrophilic gel and hydrophilic foam.
1. Drill 5/8" holes through active leaking surface.
2. Install all zert fittings, as recommended by manufacturer.
3. Inject material until water flow stops.
4. Remove fittings (if necessary).
49.12.3.5 WATERPROOFING/CRYSTALLIZATION PROCESS
1. Apply a slurry coat of powder #1 to moist wall using a stiffbrush, forming an undercoat.
2. Apply dry powder #2 to slurry coat by hand.
3. Brush or spray on sealing liquid during the application to penetrate and initiate the crystal forming
process.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3, until there are no visible leaks.
5. Apply powder #I as an overcoat.
6. Allow one (1) hour to cure before applying cement lining.
49.12.3.6 CEMENT LINING
1. Dampen surface.
2. Mix material in mixer as recommended for spray or hand trowel application.
3. Apply cement until required build up of at least one half inch (and no more than 2 inches) has been
achieved.
4. Trowel to smooth finish, restoring contours of manhole.
5. Texture brush surface to prepare for epoxy finish.
6. Allow for a 24-hour cure time prior to epoxy coating.
NOTE: If conditions of heavy humidity prevail, a dry air blower shall be used to facilitate curing times.
49.12.3.7
EPOXY COATING
Spray apply epoxy coating using airless spraying equipment until surface is visibly covered and a thickness
of at least 30 mils has been achieved. Manhole may be safely entered after six (6) hours, as epoxy will be
hardened. Full cure strength will be achieved at forty eight (48) hours.
49.12.3.8
CLEAN UP
The work crew shall remove all debris and clean work area.
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Contrallmprovements Project
Section IV
IV-99
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
1V-100
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
49.12.3.9
MANHOLE TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE
Manhole may be vacuum tested from the top of manhole frame to the manhole base. All pipes entering the
manhole shall be plugged, taking care to securely place the plug from being drawn into the manhole. The
test head shall be placed and the seal inflated in accordance with the manufacturers' recommendations. A
vacuum pump of ten (10) inches of mercury shall be drawn and the vacuum pump shut off. With the valves
closed, the time shall be measured for the vacuum to drop to nine (9) inches. The manhole shall pass if the
time is greater than sixty (60) seconds for forty eight (48) inch diameter, seventy five (75) seconds for sixty
(60) inches, and ninety (90) seconds for seventy two (72) inch diameter manholes. If the manhole fails the
initial test, necessary repairs shall be made. Retesting shall proceed until a satisfactory test is obtained.
Tests shall be performed by the Contractor under the direction of the Project Engineer.
49.12.3.10 WARRANTY
All materials and workmanship shall be warranted to the Owner for a period of five (5) years, provided that
all the above mentioned repair steps are used.
50 PROJECT INFORMATION SIGNS
50.1 SCOPE AND PURPOSE
The City desires to inform the general public on the City's use and expenditure of public funding for general
capital improvement and maintenance projects. To help accomplish this purpose, the Contractor is required
to prepare and display public project information signs during the full course of the contract period. These
signs will be displayed at all location(s) of active work.
50.2 TYPE OF PROJECT SIGN, FIXED OR PORTABLE
Sign type shall be "fixed" on stationary projects and "portable" on projects which have extended locations
or various locations. Payment to Contractor for the preparation, installation and management of project
sign(s) shall be lump sum for the entire project. The number of and type of signs will be stated in the Scope
of the Work section of the contract documents. Lump sum item will be included in the bid proposal for
signs. The particular wording to be used on the signs will be determined after contract award has been
approved. Contractor will be provided the wording to be used on sign at the preconstruction conference.
50.3 FIXED SIGN
Fixed sign shall be 4' by 8' in size and painted on a sheet of exterior grade plywood of the same size and a
minimum thickness of 1/2". Sign shall be attached to a minimum of three pressure treated 4" by 4" below
grade pressure treated wooden posts and braced as necessary for high winds. Posts shall be long enough
to provide secure anchoring in the ground. Bottom of sign must be a minimum of 24" above the ground.
Alternate mounting system or attachment to fencing or other fixed structure can be considered for approval.
Sign shall be painted white on both sides with exterior rated paint.
50.4 PORTABLE SIGNS
Portable sign shall be a minimum of 24" by 30" in size and will be attached to a standard sized portable
traffic barricade. Sign material shall be aluminum, 0.080" or thicker, background of white reflective sheeting,
and shall be silkscreen or vinyl lettering. Portable sign shall be two signs located and attached to each side
of the traffic barricade.
I
I
I
I
I
;1
I
I
I
I
I
I
r
r
r
r
r
r
50.5 SIGN COLORING
Background shall be white. Project Descriptive Name shall be in blue lettering. All other lettering shall be
black. Basic lettering on sign shall be in all capital letters, of size proportional to the sign itself.
50.6 SIGN PLACEMENT
Signs shall be. placed where they are readily visible by the general public which pass by the project site.
Signs are not to be placed where they may become a hazard or impediment to either pedestrian or
vehicular traffic. For construction projects outside of the City's right-of-way, the signs will be placed on the
project site. For projects constructed inside of the City's right-of-way, the signs will ba placed in the right-of-
way. Portable signs are to be moved to the locations of active work on the project. Multiple portable signs
will be necessary where work is ongoing in several locations at the same time. Fixed signs are to be placed
at the start of construction and will remain in place until the request for final payment.
50.7 SIGN MAINTENANCE
The Contractor is responsible for preparation, installation, movement, maintenance, replacement, removal
and disposal of all project signs during the full course of the contract period. The Contractor will place and
secure portable signs from dislocation by wind or other actions. Signs are to be cleaned as necessary to
maintain legibility and immediately replaced if defaced.
50.8 TYPICAL PROJECT SIGN
PROJECT NAME
A CITY OF CLEARWATER ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT PROJECT
FUNDING:
CONTRACTOR:
CONSTRUCTION COMPLETION:
CITY PROJECT MANAGER:
PHONE
51 IN-LINE SKATING SURFACING SYSTEM
51.1 SCOPE
1. These specifications pertain to the application of the Plexiflor Color Finish System over recreational
areas intended for In-Line Skating activities. The materials specified in the site plans shall be of
colors indicated and for application over the Plexipave Acrylic Latex System.
2. The work shall consist of suitable cleaning and preparation of the surface to assure a satisfactory
bond of the system to the existing surface.
3. All coverage rates are calculated prior to dilution.
4. Plexiflor In-line Skating Surfacing System
. 1 Coat of Acrylic Resurfacer
. 2 Coats of Fortified Plexipave
. 2 Coats of Plexiflor
Marshall !treel anJIJoriJ,easl W~~ 'acJlJCes
Odor Control Improvements Project
!ecdon N
IV.101
r
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
1V-102
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
. Plexicolor Line Paint
51.2 SURFACE PREPARATIONS
51.2.1 ASPHALT
Allow new asphalt to cure a minimum of 6 months. The surface must be checked for birdbaths, cracks and
other irregularities and repaired with Court Patch Binder according to California Specification Section 10.14.
(Surfacing prior to six months may make the asphalt subject to indentation).
51.2.2 CONCRETE
Concrete shall have a wood float or broom finish. DO NOT PROVIDE STEEL TROWEL FINISH. DO NOT
USE CURING AGENTS OR CONCRETE HARDENERS. Allow the concrete to cure a minimum of 30 days.
Acid Etch the entire surface with Concrete Preparer according to California Specification Section 10.13.
Check surface for birdbaths, cracks and other irregularities and repair with Court Patch Binder according to
California Specification Section 10.14.
51.2.3 COURT PATCH BINDER MIX
Court Patch Binder Mix: 100 Lbs. #80-100 Mesh Silica Sand (dry) 3 gallons Couth Patch Binder 1 to 2
gallons Portland Cement.
51.3 APPLICATION OF ACRYLIC FILLER COAT
1. Application of the Acrylic Resurfacer Mix shall be applied to the clean, dry, level surfaces to receive
the Plexiflor Surfacing System. The mix shall be applied according to California Specification
Section 10.8 using the following mix:
Acrylic Resurfacer 55 gallons
Water (Clean and Potable) 20-40 gallons
Sand (60-80 mesh) 600-900 pounds
Liquid Yield 112-138 gallons
2. Over asphalt surfaces, apply the Acrylic Resurfacer Mix in one or two coats (depending on surface
porosity) at a rate of .05 -.07 gallons per square yard per coat.
3. Non-coated concrete surfaces must be neutralized with concrete preparer and primed with
California Ti-Coat according to Specification Section 10.17. The Acrylic Resurfacer Mix must be
applied within 3 hours of the TiCoat application while the primer is dry but still tacky to the touch.
Apply the Acrylic Resurfacer Mix in one or two applications at a rate of .05-.07 gallons per square
yard per coat.
51.4 APPLICATION OF FORTIFIED PLEXIPAVE
After the filler coat application has dried, apply two coats of Fortified Plexipave at an undiluted rate of
.05-.07 gallons per square yard per coat using the following mix:
Plexipave Color Base 30 gallons
Plexichrome 20 gallons
Water 20 gallons
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
51.5
1.
PLEXIFLOR APPLICATION
Plexiflor is factory premixed and ready to use from the container. The material may be diluted with
one (1 ) part water to six (6) parts Plexiflor to improve f10wability and provide uniform application.
2. Apply two coats of Plexiflor at a rate of .04-.05 gallons per square yard per coat.
3. Plexiflor is applied (in a similar manner to Plexipave) in windrows on the surface with sufficient
quantity to cover as the squeegee is pulled over the surface. Apply only light pressure to the
squeegee. Do. not allow ridges to form between passes of the squeegee. Ridges existing after
material dries should require corrective action.
4. Plexiflor and its preliminary coatings should be allowed to thoroughly dry prior to application of
subsequent coats.
51.6 PLAYING LINES
Four hours minimum after completion of the color resurfacing, playing lines shall be accurately located,
marked and painted with Plexicolor Line Paint as specified by The National In-Line Hockey Association.
51.7
1.
GENERAL
The contractor shall remove all containers, surplus materials and debris upon completion of work
leaving the site in a clean, orderly condition that is acceptable to the owner. Gates shall be secured
and all containers shall be disposed of in accordance with Local, State and Federal regulations.
2. Materials specified for the Plexiflor System shall tee delivered to the site in sealed, property labeled
arums with California Products Corporation labels that are stenciled with the proper batch code
numbers. Products packaged or labeled in any other manner will not be accepted. Mixing with
clear, fresh water shall only be done at the job site. Coverage rates are based upon material prior
to mixing with water as specified.
51.8 LIMITATIONS
1. Do not apply if surface temperature is less than 500F or more than 1 400F.
2. Do not apply when rain or high humidity is imminent.
3. Do not apply when surface is damp or has standing water.
4. Plexiflor will not hide surface imperfections of previous coatings.
5. Keep from freezing. Do not store in the hot sun.
6. Keep containers tightly closed when not in use.
7. Plexiflor will not prevent substrate cracks from occurring.
8. Plexiflor will mark slightly from normal use of some In-line Skates.
9. Coefficient of friction = 0.78
10. Coating Application Drying Time: 30 minutes to 1 hour at 700F with 60% relative humidity.
11. Keep court clean. Excess dirt or foreign material can cause the surface to be slippery.
In-Line hockey is a physical sport. Always wear NIHA recommended protective gear.
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
IV.103
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
1V.104
I
I
I'
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
52 RESIDENT NOTIFICATION OF START OF CONSTRUCTION
52.1 RESIDENT NOTIFICATION PERFORMED BY CITY
See below for Resident Notification performed by the Contractor.
52.2 RESIDENT NOTIFICATION PERFORMED BY CONTRACTOR
The Contractor shall notify all residents along the construction route with a printed door hanger notice
indicating the following information about the proposed construction work and the Contractor performing the
work: City seal or logo; the scheduled date for the start of construction; the type of construction; general
sequence and scheduling of construction events; possibility of water service disruption and/or colored water
due to construction efforts; Contractor's name, the Superintendent's name, Contractor address and
telephone number; Contractor's company logo (optional); requirement for residents to remove landscaping
and/or other private appurtenances which are in conflict with the proposed construction; and other
language as appropriate to the scope of Contract work. Sample door hanger including proposed language
shall be approved by the City prior to the start of construction. Notification shall be printed on brightly
colored and durable card stock and shall be a minimum of 4 % by 11 inches in size. Notification (door
hanger) shall be posted to residences and businesses directly affected by the Contractor's activities no
later than 7 days prior to the start of construction activity. Directly affected by the Contractor's activities
shall mean all Contractor operations including staging areas, equipment and material storage, principal
access routes across private property, etc. Contractor cannot start without proper 7 day notice period to
residents. Contractor is required to maintain sufficient staff to answer citizen inquiries during normal
business hours and to maintain appropriate message recording equipment to receive citizen inquires after
business hours.
Resident notification by the Contractor is a non-specific pay item to be included in the bid items provided in
the contract proposal.
I
I
I
I
I
'I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
EXAMPLE
CITY SEAL
Of
CITY OF CLEARWATER
NOTICE OF CONSTRUCTION
TODAY'S DATE: _/---.1_
PLEASE EXCUSE US FOR ANY INCONVENIENCE
We are the construction contractor perfonning (state type of contract) for the City of Clearwater in your
area. The work will be perfonned in the public right-of-way adjacent to your property. This notice is placed a
minimum of 7 days in advance of construction to notify property owners of the pending start of construction.
(Brief description of the construction process to be expected by the property owners)
The construction process may necessitate the removal of certain items from the right-of-way. Typical items
such as sprinklers, grass, and postal approved mailboxes will be replaced by the contractor within a
reasonably short period of time. The replacement of driveways and sidewalks will be made using standard
asphalt or concrete materials. The property owner is responsible for the expense and coordination to
replace driveways and sidewalks which have customized colors, textures and/or materials. Small trees,
shrubs, landscaping materials, unauthorized mailboxes or structures within the right-of-way which must be
removed due to the construction process will not be replaced. The property owner is responsible to relocate
any such items which the property owner wishes to save prior to the start of construction. Vehicles parked
on the streets or within the right-of-way may be required to be placed elsewhere.
We are available to answer any questions you may have regarding the construction process or any
particular item that must be relocated. Please contact our Construction Superintendent at
(727) . We will be more than happy to assist you.
Construction is anticipated to begin on:
Company Name
Company Address
Contractor Phone Number
53 GAB IONS AND MATTRESSES
53.1 MATERIAL
53.1.1 GABION AND RENO MATTRESS MATERIAL
53.1.1.1 PVC COATED WIRE MESH GABIONS & MATIRESSES
Gabion & mattress basket units shall be of non-raveling construction and fabricated from a double twist by
twisting each pair of. wires through three half turns developing the appearance of a triple twist. The
galvanized wire core shall have a diameter of 0.1063 inches (approx. US gauge 12). All wire used in the
fabrication of the gabion shall comply with or exceed Federal Specifications QQ-W-461 H, possess a
maximum tensile strength of 70,000 p.s.i. with a Finish 5, Class 3 zinc coating in accordance with the
current ASTM A-641. The weight of zinc coating shall be detennined by ASTM A-90. The grade of zinc used
for coating shall be High Grade or Special High Grade, as prescribed in ASTM 8-6, Table 1. Unifonnity of
coating shall equal or exceed four 1-minute dips by the Preece test, as detennined by ASTM A-239.
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
IV-105
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
1V.106
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
The PVC coating shall be extruded and adhere to the wire core prior to weaving. The PVC coated wire
shall be woven into a double twisted hexagonal mesh having uniform openings of 3 1/4 inches by 4 %
inches. The overall diameter of the mesh wire (galvanized wire core plus PVC coating) shall be 0.146
inches. Selvedge and reinforcing wire shall be of heavily galvanized wire core, 0.1338 inches in diameter
(approx. US gauge 10), coated with PVC and having an overall diameter (galvanized wire core plus PVC
coating) of 0.173 inches. Lacing and connecting wire shall be of soft tensile strength (75,000 PSI max),
heavily galvanized wire core, 0.087 inches in diameter (approx. US gauge 13 Y2), coated with PVC and
having an overall diameter (galvanized wire core plus PVC coating) of 0.127 inches. The use of alternate
wire fasteners shall be permitted in lieu of tie wire providing the alternate fastener produces a four (4) wire
selvedge joint with a strength of 1200 Ibs. per linear foot while remaining in a locked and closed condition.
Properly formed interlocking fasteners shall be spaced from 4 to 6 inches and have a minimum 3/4 square
inch inside area to properly confine the required selvedge wires. Tiger-Tite Interlocking Fasteners are an
approved alternate joint material. The Interlocking Wire Fastener shall meet stainless steel material
specification ASTM A-313, Type 302, Class 1, or equal.
All of the above wire diameters are subject to tolerance limit of 0.004 inches in accordance with ASTM A-
641.
53.1.1.2 PVC (POLYVINYL CHLORIDE) COATING
The coating shall be gray in color and shall have a nominal thickness of 0.0216 inches but not less than
0.015 inches in thickness. The protective PVC plastic shall be suitable to resist deleterious effects from
exposure to light, immersion in salt or polluted water and shall not show any material difference in its initial
compound properties. The PVC compound is also resistant to attack from acids and resistant to abrasion.
1. Specific Gravity:
a. According to ASTM 0-2287 and ASTM 0- 792; in the range of 1.30 to 1.34.
2. Tensile Strength:
a. According to ASTM 0-142; not less than 2980 psi.
3. Modulus of Elasticity:
a. According to ASTM 0-412; not less than 2700 psi at 100% strain.
4. Resistance to Abrasion:
a. According to ASTM 1242; weight loss <12% (Method B).
5. Brittleness Temperature:
a. According to ASTM 0-746, Procedure A; shall be at least 8.3 degrees centigrade below the
minimum temperature at which the gabions will be handled or placed but not lower than -9.4
degrees centigrade.
6. Hardness:
a. According to ASTM 0-2240; shall be between 50 and 60 Shore 0 when tested.
7. Creeping Corrosion:
a. Maximum corrosion penetration to the wire core from a square cut end section shall not be
more than 25mm when the specimen has been immersed for 2000 hours in a 50% SOLUTION
HC1(hydrochloric acid 12 Be).
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
53.1.1.3
ACCELERATED AGING TESTS
Variation of the initial properties will be allowed, as specified below, when the specimen is submitted to the
following Accelerated Aging Tests:
1. Salt Spray Test:
a. According to ASTM B-117
b. Period of test = 3000 hours.
2. Exposure to ultraviolet rays:
a. According to ASTM 0-1499 and ASTM G-23 (Apparatus Type E). Period of test = 3000 hours
at 63 degrees centigrade.
3. Exposure to high temperature:
a. Testing period: 240 hours at 105 degrees centigrade, when tested in accordance with ASTM 0-
1203 and ASTM 0-2287.
53.1.1.4
PROPERTIES AFTER AGING TESTS
After the above Accelerated Aging Tests have been perfonned, the PVC compound shall exhibit the
following properties:
1. Appearance:
a. The vinyl coating shall not crack, blister or split and shall not show any remarkable change in
color.
2. Specific Gravity:
a. Shall not show change higher than 6% of its initial value.
3. Ourometer Hardness:
a. Shall not show change higher than 10% of its initial value.
4. Tensile Strength:
a. Shall not show change higher than 25% of its initial value.
5. Elongation:
a. Shall not show change higher than 25% of its initial value.
6. Modulus of Elasticity:
a. Shall not show change higher than 25% of its initial value.
7. Resistance to Abrasion:
a. Shall not show change higher than 10% of its initial value.
8. Brittleness Temperature:
a. Cold Bend Temperature - Shall not be lower than -20 degrees centigrade.
b. Cold Flex Temperature - Shall not be higher than +18 degrees centigrade.
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
IV-f07
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
1V-10B
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
a
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
53.1.2 GABION AND MATTRESS FILLER MATERIAL:
The filler stone shall be limestone from a source approved by the Engineer before delivery is started.
Representative preliminary samples of the stone shall be submitted by the contractor or supplier for
examination and testing by the Engineer. The stone shall have a minimum specific gravity of 2.3 and be of
a quality and durability sufficient to insure permanency in the structure. The individual stones shall be free
of cracks, seams, and other defects that would tend to promote deterioration from natural causes, or which
might reduce the stones to sizes that could not be retained in the gabion or mattress baskets.
The stone shall meet the following physical requirements:
. Absorption, maximum 5%
. Los Angeles Abrasion (FM 10T096), maximum loss 45%
. Soundness (Sodium Sulphate), (FM 1-T104), maximum loss 12%
. Flat and elongated pieces, materials with least dimension less than one third of greatest dimension
shall not exceed 5% by weight.
All filler material shall be uniformly graded between 4 inch and 8 inch (equivalent spherical diameter) and
shall be angular in form. Rounded stones shall not exceed '0% of the stone, by weight and 70% of the
stone, by weight, shall exceed the largest dimension of the mesh opening.
53.1.3 MATTRESS WIRE
Mattress wire shall conform to the same specifications as gabions except as follows:
1. The nominal diameter of the wire used in the fabrication of the netting shall be 0.0866 inches
minimum, subject to diameter tolerance in accordance with the current ASTM A 641, Table 3.
2. All wire shall be galvanized according to ASTM A 641, Table 1. The minimum weight of the zinc
coating shall be 0.70 ozs.lsq. ft. for the 0.0866 inch wire used for mesh and lacing and 0.80
ozs.lsq. ft. for the 0.106 wire used for selvedge.
3. Adhesion of the zinc coating to the wire shall be capable of being wrapped in a close helix at a rate
not exceeding 15 turns per minute around a cylindrical steel mandrel having a diameter 3 times the
nominal wire diameter being tested. After the wrap test is completed, the wire shall not exhibit any
cracking or flaking of the zinc coating to such an extent that any zinc can be removed by rubbing
with bare fingers.
53.1.4 GEOTEXTILE FABRIC
Fabric shall conform to FOOT Standard Index 199, Type 0-2, and FOOT Standard Specifications, 1996
edition, Section 985.
53.2 PERFORMANCE
Gabions and Reno Mattresses shall be installed according to the manufacturer's recommendations and as
shown on the Drawings. Fabrication of gabion baskets shall be in such a manner that the sides, ends, lid
and diaphragms can be assembled at the construction site into rectangular baskets of the sizes specified
and shown on the Drawings. Gabions and mattresses shall be of single unit construction; the base, lid ends
and sides shall be either woven into a single unit or one edge of these members connected to the base
section of the gabion. in such a manner that the strength and flexibility at the. connecting point is at least
equal to that of the mesh. Where the length of the gabion and mattress exceeds one and one-half its
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
horizontal width, they shall be equally divided by diaphragms of the same mesh and gauge as the
mattresses shall be furnished with the necessary diaphragms secured in proper position on the base so
that no additional tying is required at this juncture. The wire mesh is to be fabricated so that it will not ravel.
This is defined as the ability to resist pulling apart at any of the twists or connections forming the mesh
when a single wire strand in a section of mesh is cut.
Each gabion or mattress shall be assembled by tying all untied edges with binding wire. The binding wire
shall be tightly looped around every other mesh opening. along seams so that single and double loops are
alternated.
A line of empty gabions shall be placed into position according to the contract drawings and binding wire
shall be used to securely tie each unit to the adjoining one along the vertical reinforced edges and the top
selvedges. The base of the empty gabions placed on top of a filled line of gabions shall be tightly wire to
the latter at front and back.
To achieve better alignment and finish in retaining walls, gabion stretching is recommended.
Connecting wires shall be inserted during the filling operation in the following manner: Gabions shall be
filled to one third full and one connecting wire in each direction shall be tightly tied to opposite faces of each
cell at one third height. The gabion shall then be filled to two thirds full and one connecting wire in each
direction shall be tightly tied to opposite face of each cell at one two third height. The cell shall then be filled
to the top.
Filler stone shall not be dropped more than 12" into the gabions and mattresses.
Geotextile fabric shall be installed at locations shown in the Drawings. The surface to receive the cloth shall
be prepared to a relatively smooth condition free of obstructions which may tear or cut the cloth. The panel
shall be overlapped a minimum of 30 inches and secured against movement. Cloth damaged or displaced
during installation, gabion work, or backfill shall be replaced or repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer
at the contractor's expense. The work shall be scheduled so that the fabric is not exposed to ultraviolet light
more than the manufacturer's recommendations or five days, whichever is less.
54 LAWN MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS
54.1 SCOPE
To remove trash and debris from landscape and paved area; maintenance and fertilization of plant beds
and landscape materials; maintenance, repair, and operation of irrigation systems; omamental pest control;
palm pruning; maintenance of traffic; and the cleaning of hard surfaces at designated areas. The Contractor
is to work with the City in coordinating maintenance activities and reporting irregularities in the work zone.
The Contractor(s) will provide the labor and materials required to maintain the landscaped street medians
including:
. Traffic safety and Maintenance of Traffic;
. Trash and debris removal from the job site;
. Removal of weeds in landscaped areas and hard surfaces;
· Proper trimming and pruning of landscape plants and palms;
· Proper fertilization and pest control of landscape and palms (may be subcontracted);
. Irrigation service and repair;
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Contra/Improvements Project
Section N
IV-109
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
IV-11O
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I,
I
I
I
I
I
I
. Mulch replacement;
. Cleaning of hard surfaces; and the
. Reporting of irregularities at the job site.
54.2 SCHEDULING OF WORK
The Contractor(s) shall accomplish all landscape maintenance required under the contract between the
hours of 6:30 a.m. and 7:00 p.m. Monday through Saturday, excluding observed holidays. The City may
grant, on an individual basis, permission to perform contract maintenance at other hours.
All work shall be completed in a continuous manner, that is the cleanup, weeding, trimming, etc., be
completed before leaving the job site.
54.3 WORK METHODS
54.3.1 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULING
The Contractor(s) will adhere to a work schedule provided by the City (see Level of Service). Any variations
to that schedule, requested by either party, must be approved, either verbally or in writing by an authorized
representative of the other party.
54.3.2 DUTIES PER SERVICE VISIT
The contractor(s) shall provide the following service at each scheduled visit to the designated location:
54.4 LITTER
Remove trash and debris from the area to be maintained. Proper disposal of collected trash and debris is a
requirement of the contractor. Extraordinary amounts of debris caused by hurricanes, tornadoes,
vandalism, etc., would be the responsibility of the City to clean up. The contracto~ should report such
accumulations of debris when they are encountered. Bids for the extraordinary cleanup from the contractor
would be considered.
54.5 VISUAL CHECK
The site should be checked for irregularities, such as irrigation leaks, vehicle damage, dead or damaged
plant material, vandalism, etc., which should be reported to the City within 24 hours after providing the
service.
54.6 PLANT TRIMMING AND PALM PRUNING
All plant material should be trimmed in a manner that promotes the natural shape and mature size of the
particular specie. Trimming should be performed at intervals that will maintain plants ina neat appearance.
Trimming should be performed to promote fullness of the plants, while maintaining height restrictions in
Clear Signt Zones as established on the landscape plans. Plants shall be kept trimmed to the back of curb.
Brown foliage shall be removed from Liriope.
Palm pruning to be performed at least once per year, preferably in late June or July following flower
formation, according to the following specifications:
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
:1
I:
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
54.7 PHOENIX SPECIES (CANARY DATE, INDIA DATE, PYGMY DATE, ETC.)
Remove all descending fronds, to the base of the frond; all parallel and ascending fronds are to remain in
order to leave a full, rounded head; seed heads may remain, but remove old faded heads that are
encountered in the pruning process; remove loose frond boots; remove vegetation; such as strangler figs,
Brazilian Pepper, Asparagus fern, etc., growing in the frond boots or on the trunk. Provide the rounded,
classic cut on all Medjool palm boots. No climbing spikes allowed on palms.
54.8 DEBRIS REMOVAL
All debris from pruning process is to be removed from the job site and disposed of by the contractor. Work
sites should be left in a clean and neat appearance upon completion.
54.9 TRAFFIC CONTROL
Proper and safe work zones in vehicular traffic areas are to be set up and maintained by the contractor,
according to the attached Maintenance of Traffic specifications.
54.10 PEDESTRIAN SAFETY
Contractor is responsible for maintaining safe work zones in areas where pedestrian and park users are
present. The City reserves the right to limit the hours of operation in certain high pedestrian use areas.
54.11 PLANT FERTILIZATION
All tree and plant material should be fertilized with the appropriate amount of 20-6-12 sulfur coated, slow
release, ornamental fertilizer, three times per year. Applications should be made in mid-February, early
June, and mid-September, for the first two years. Fertilizer types and amounts will change with
requirements of maturing landscape materials.
54.12 WEED REMOVAL IN LANDSCAPED AREA
Weeds should be removed on a regular basis in order to keep them from being visibly noticeable. Weed
control with the use of appropriate herbicides is allowable, given they are properly applied by a certified
applicator. Herbicide damage to landscape material will be remedied by contractor at his/her expense.
54.13 MULCH CONDITION
Should be maintained at a thickness that will discourage weed growth as well as help retain soil moisture,
usually 3 inches.
54.14 IRRIGATION SERVICE AND REPAIR
Should be performed at each visit to assure the systems proper operation and timing. Drip tubing should be
kept covered with mulch. Timer should be checked for proper time of day and operating schedule. Leaks or
breaks in the system should be repaired before the next scheduled system running time. All repairs which
will be charged at $20.00 or more must be approved in advance by the city. Minor repairs, less than $20.00,
should be billed to the City in addition to the monthly maintenance fee.
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
IV-111
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
1V.112
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
54.15 LAWN AND ORNAMENTAL PEST CONTROL
Should be performed by a properly licensed and certified applicator to keep pest populations at a less than
damaging level. Landscape materials lost to or extensively damaged by pests will be replaced by the
contractor at the contractor's expense. Diazinon products are not to be used on City properties.
54.16 PALM FERTILIZATION
Apply three pounds of Magnesium sulfate and one pound of Potassium evenly, per tree, across the root
zone (typically within the dripline), annually in early February.
54.17 FREEZE PROTECTION
The City will provide a freeze/frost protection fabric for the Contractor to install over freeze/frost sensitive
plants (Lantana and Pentas). The covering material will be stored at a City facility (yet to be determined).
Contractor will remove the covering material from storage and install over the sensitive plants, securely
fastening edges of the material to the ground per manufacturer's directions. The City will furnish metal pins
needed for securing fabric to the ground. The City will notify the Contractor one (1) day or twenty-four (24)
hours minimum prior to the need to protect plant material. After uses, the Contractor will prepare the fabric
for storage and return it to the designated City facility. Protective covering shall be removed the following
afternoon or remain in placed as directed by the City. The City shall notify the Contractor by 11 :00 a.m.
about removing the cover or keeping it in place due to continued freezing temperatures. The City may
cancel the freeze protection event at any time prior to the end of the scheduled installation day (5:00 p.m.)
The Contractor will be compensated for the number of hours mobilization or on-site work at the contracted
rate per man-hour unit price. The Contractor shall provide a unit price for the installation and removal of the
covering fabric on a per event basis, as well as an hourly rate per employee required. The City and
contractor will coordinate appropriate irrigation operations with weather conditions. Should freeze/frost
damage occur, the Contractor shall perform remedial work as per unit basis, as directed by the City.
54.18 LEVEL OF SERVICE
This location is to be serviced weekly. Repairs to damage or vandalism to be made within 7 working days of
reported irregularity. Weekly visits should occur no closer than six and no further than ten calendar days
apart.
54.19 COMPLETION OF WORK
Within 24 hours of completing work the contractor shall notify the supervisor assigned to monitor the
contract either in person or by phone of said completion. It is acceptable to leave a phone message.
However, to make certain the message is received, it is advisable to call between 6:30 a.m. - 7:30 a.m. or
2:30 p.m. - 3:00 p.m.
54.20 INSPECTION AND APPROVAL
Upon receiving notification from the Contractor, the City shall inspect the serviced location the following
business day. If, upon inspection, the work specified has not been completed, the City shall contact the
Contractor to indicate the necessary corrective measures. The Contractor will be given 48 hours from this
notification to make appropriate corrections. If the work has been completed successfully then the City will
pay for services billed.
I
I
I
I
,I
'I
J
I
I
~I
I
'I
I;
I
I
I
I
I
I
54.21
1.
SPECIAL CONDITIONS
This location will be newly installed and under warranty by the installer for a six month period on
plants and 12 month warranty on palms. Landscape installer will coordinate irrigation operation
with the Maintenance contractor to assure adequate irrigation to the landscape materials. Installer
will also be responsible for the untying of palm heads/fronds as he feels appropriate.
2. All listed acreage or square footage figures are estimates.
3. All maintenance shall be performed in a good and workmanlike manner, consistent with trade
practices and standards which prevail in the industry.
4. The Contractor shall be responsible for damage to any plant material or site feature caused by the
Contractor or hislher employees. The Contractor shall be notified in writing of the specific nature of
the damage and cost of repair. The City shall. at its option, invoice the Contractor for the payment,
or reduce by the amount of the repairs the next regular payment to the Contractor.
5. Occasionally circumstances (standing water, prolonged inclement weather. parked vehicles, etc.)
may make all or portions of a location unserviceable during the regular schedule. The Contractor
shall notify the City Supervisor of such occurrences, and shall schedule to perform the required
maintenance to the location as soon as the pertaining circumstances are relieved.
55 MilLING OPERATIONS
55.1 EQUIPMENT, CONSTRUCTION & MILLED SURFACE
Unless otherwise noted in the specs, plans or this Article. the milling operation shall be performed in
accordance with Section 327 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). The Contractor shall notify
the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of all milling.
55.2
1.
ADDITIONAL MILLING REQUIREMENTS
If the milling machine is equipped with preheating devices, the contractor is responsible to secure
any necessary permits, and for complying with all local, state and federal environmental regulations
governing operation of this type of equipment.
2. All milled surfaces must be repaved within seven days from the time it was milled, unless otherwise
noted in the contract documents.
3. Prior to paving, all milled areas shall be swept with a Municipal type sweeper either of the vacuum
or the mechanical type, that picks up and hauls off, dust and dirt (the Broom Tractor way of
sweeping is not be permitted). The sweeper must be equipped with its own water supply for pre-
wetting to minimize dust. Moreover, the Contractor shall sweep debris off of sidewalks, driveways
and curbs in addition to the roadways before leaving the job site.
4. In cases where concrete valley swales are present, the adjoining pavement shall be milled to allow
for the new asphalt grade to be flush with the contract surface.
5. The Contractor shall be responsible for removing any asphalt that remains in the curb line and/or
median curbs after the milling operation of a street is complete. The cost of this removal shall be
included in the bid item for milling.
6. All radius returns on streets to be milled shall also be milled unless otherwise directed by the
Engineer, with payment to be included in the bid item for milling.
Marshall Street and Norlheast WPC Facilities
Odor Contrallmprovements Project
Section IV
fV-113
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
IV.114
I
I
I
I
I.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
7. Any leveling or base replacement required after milling shall be applied to sections of the road as
noted on the plans, or directed by the Engineer, per Section 330 of FOOT's 2000 Standard
Specifications for S-Type resurfacing projects or Section 330 (latest edition) for superpave
resurfacing projects. The cost shall be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt, unless
otherwise noted in the project scope and plans.
8. Any roadway base material exposed as a result of the milling operation shall be primed that same
day (unless otherwise directed by the Engineer) per Section 300 of FOOT's Standard
Specifications (latest edition). Repairs required to said base that result from a failure to place the
prime in a timely manner shall be done to the City's satisfaction, and at the Contractor's expense.
No paving Of the exposed base can commence until the City approves the repaired base. The cost
of said prime shall be included in the bid item for milling.
9. Prior to the placement of asphalt, the face of all curbs and driveways shall be tacked after the
milling operation is complete.
55.3 SALVAGEABLE MATERIALS
All surplus existing materials resulting from milling operations shall remain the property of the City. The
transporting and stockpiling of salvageable materials shall be performed by the Contractor. The Contractor
shall contact the Public Services Division at (727) 562-4950 to schedule delivery of material.
55.4 DISPOSABLE MATERIALS
All surplus materials not claimed by the City shall become the property of the Contractor. The Contractor
shall dispose of the material in a timely manner and in accordance with all regulatory requirements in areas
provided by the Contractor at no additional expense to the City.
55.5 ADJUSTMENT AND LOCATION OF UNDERGROUND UTILITIES
All utilities and related structures requiring adjustment shall be located and adjusted by their owners at the
owner's expense. The Contractor shall arrange his schedule to allow utility owners the time required for
such adjustments (minimum 48 hours notice per State Statute). All utility adjustments shall be completed
prior to the commencement of milling and resurfacing operations.
55.6 ADJUSTMENT OF UTILITY MANHOLES
The necessary adjustments of sanitary sewer and stormwater utility manholes and appurtenances shall be
accomplished by the Contractor in accordance with Section IV, Article 23.7 of the City's Technical
Specifications.
55.7 TYPES OF MILLING
There are two.types of milling used by the City:
A. Wedge - This will consist of milling a six foot wide strip along the curb line of the pavement
adjacent to the curb so the new asphalt will align with the original curb height and pavement cross
section,
B. Full Width - This will consist of milling the entire roadway (Le. curb line/edge of pavement to curb
line/edge of pavement). All existing horizontal and vertical geometry shall remain unless otherwise
indicated or approved by the Engineer.
I
I
I
I
I,
I
,I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I-
I
I
I
I
I
55.8 MILLING OF INTERSECTIONS
Intersections, as well as other areas (including radius returns) are to be milled and repaved to restore
and/or improve the original drainage characteristics. Said work should extend approximately 50 to 100 feet
in both directions from the low point of the existing swale.
55.9 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
The quantity to be paid for will be the area milled, in square yards, completed and accepted.
55.10 BASIS OF PAYMENT
The unit price for milling shall include: all materials, preparation, hauling, transporting and stockpiling of
salvageable materials, disposal of all surplus material, any required milling of radius returns and
intersections, prime and/or tack coat either required or placed at Engineer's discretion, removal of asphalt
from curbs, sweeping, labor, equipment, and all incidentals necessary to complete the milling in accordance
with the plans and specifications.
56 CLEARING AND GRUBBING
The work included in this specification includes the removal and disposal of all structures, appurtenances,
asphalt, concrete, curbs, walls, trees, roots, vegetation, boulders, conduits, poles, posts, pipes, inlets,
brush, stumps, debris and other obstructions resting on or protruding through the ground surface necessary
to prepare the area for construction.
Clearing and grubbing shall be performed in accordance with Section 110 of FOOT's Standard
Specifications (latest edition). Unless otherwise specified in the contract documents, the Contractor shall
take ownership of all removed material and dispose of them off-site in accordance with all Local, State and
Federal Requirements.
56.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
The basis of measurement shall be either a lump sum quantity or the number of acres cleared and grubbed
as specified on the plans or directed by the Engineer.
56.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT
The pay item for clearing and grubbing shall include: all removal and disposal of materials and structures
as well as all materials, hauling, equipment, tools, labor, leveling of terrain, landscape trimming and all
incidentals necessary to complete the work.
57 RIPRAP
The work included in this specification includes the construction of either sand-cement or rubble riprap as
shown on the plans. The riprap shall be constructed per Section 530 of FOOT's Standard Specifications
(Iastest edition).
57.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
The basis of measurement for riprap shall be the volume of sand used in cubic yards for sand-cement, or
the dry weight in tons for rubble.
Marshall Street and Norlheast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
IV-115
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
IV-116
I
I
I
I
,I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
57.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT
The pay item for sand-cement riprap shall include: all materials, testing, labor, grout, hauling, equipment,
excavation, backfill, dressing and shaping for placement of sand-cement and all incidentals necessary to
complete the work.
The pay item for rubble riprap shall include: all materials, required bedding stone, dressing and shaping for
placement of bedding stone, filter fabric, testing, hauling, excavating, backfill, dressing and shaping for
placement of rubble, and all incidentals necessary to complete the work. No payment will be granted if
concrete or stone that exists on-site is used as rubble riprap.
58 TREATMENT PLANT SAFETY
This article applies to all City projects located at one of the City's Wastewater Treatment Plants (WWTP) or
Potable Water Reservoirs.
58.1 HAZARD POTENTIAL
The Contractor shall be aware that hazardous materials are used at the WWTP's and the water reservoirs.
These may include sodium hypochlorite, gaseous chlorine, sulfur dioxide and ammonia. Potential safety
hazards associated with these substances include:
. An accidental spill or release can impair respiratory functions and result in severe burns to the skin
and eyes. At the pre-construction conference, the contractor will be provided with a copy of the City
of Clearwater Public Utilities Department Emergency Response Plan, and a copy of the applicable
Material Safety Data Sheets. All employees of the contractor and sub-contractor assigned to this
job shall be familiar with the content of these documents.
58.2 REQUIRED CONTRACTOR TRAINING
Prior to issuance of a notice to proceed, the contractor must submit documentation regarding employee
safety training relating to the items in Section A above. The documentation must include:
. Verification that all employees assigned to this job have received and understood training in the
proper work practices necessary to safely perform the job while working around gaseous chlorine
and sulfur dioxide gas.
. The date of the training, and
. The means used to verify that the employee understood the training.
59 TRAFFIC SIGNAL EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS
All traffic signal work shall be performed per the latest edition of FOOT's Standard Specifications (Sections
603 through 690), unless otherwise specified in the contract documents and plans.
This specification includes, but is not limited to, the following items: all necessary equipment, materials,
guaranties, acceptance procedures, signal timings, field tests, grounding, conduit, signal and interconnect
cable, span wire assemblies, pull and junction boxes, electrical power service assemblies, poles, signal
assemblies, pedestrian assemblies, inductive loop detectors, pedestrian detectors, traffic controller
assemblies, controller cabinets and accessories, and removal of existing traffic signal equipment.
All mast arms signal installations shall meet the requirements of FOOT's Mast Arm Assembly standard, and
shall be signed and sealed by a professional engineer registered in the state of Florida. All mast arm
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
M
I'
I
I
,I
I
I
I
I
I
I
calculations, as well as the geotechnical report, shall also be signed and sealed by a professional engineer
registered in the state of Florida. All mast arm poles shall be chestnut bronze, with the color approved by
the City prior to placement.
All traffic signal indicators shall be LED's, approved by both the City and FOOT.
Contractor changes to the operation of an existing signal is PROHIBITED unless directed by the City's
Traffic Engineering Division.
59.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
The basis of measurement and payment shall be specified in the contract documents and/or plans and
shall include all equipment, preparation, materials, testing and incidentals required to complete the work
per the plans.
60 SIGNING AND MARKING
All signing and marking work shall be performed per the latest edition of FOOT's Standard Specifications,
unless otherwise specified in the contract documents and plans.
This specification includes the following work: RPM's (Section 706), painted traffic stripes and markings
(Section 710), thermoplastic stripes and markings (Section 711) and tubular delineators/flex posts (Sections
705 and 972).
The Contractor is responsible to ensure that striping is correctly placed. Errors in striping or markings shall
be "blacked-out" with paint, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. No payment will be made for these
incorrect or "blacked-out" areas. Omissions in striping or markings shall be corrected to the City's
satisfaction prior to any payment being made.
60.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
The basis of measurement and payment shall be specified in the contract documents and/or plans and
shall include all equipment, preparation, materials and incidentals required to complete the work per the
plans.
61 ROADWAY LIGHTING
All roadway lighting shall be constructed per Sections 715 and 992 of FOOT's Standard Specifications
(latest edition), unless otherwise specified in the contract documents and plans.
61.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
The basis of measurement and payment shall be specified in the contract documents and/or plans and
shall include all equipment, materials, testing and incidentals required to complete the work per the plans.
62 TREE PROTECTION
62.1 TREE BARRICADES
A. A protective barrier shall be placed around all protected trees and palms prior to land preparation or
construction activities within or adjacent to the work zone, including all staging and/or lay down areas.
Protective barriers shall be installed as follows:
1. ,At or greater than the full dripline of all species of Mangroves and Cabbage Palms.
Marshall Street and Norlheast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
1V-117
Marshall Street and Norlheast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
IV-118
I
I
,Ii
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2. At or greater than the full dripline or all protected native pine trees and other conifer species.
3. At or greater than two-thirds of the dripline of all other protected species
4. At or greater than the full dripline of trees within a specimen tree stand.
B. Protective barriers are to be constructed using no less than two-inch lumber for upright posts. Upright
posts are to be at least four feet in length with a minimum of one foot anchored in the ground. Upright
posts are to be placed at a maximum distance of eight feet apart. Horizontal rails are to be constructed
using no less than one inch by four-inch lumber and shall be securely attached to the top of the upright
post. The project City's representative must approve any variation from the above requirements.
C. Whenever a protective barrier is required, it shall be in place until all construction activity is terminated.
The area within the barrier limits shall remain undisturbed by any activity during construction. Native
ground cover and understory vegetation existing within the barriers shall remain throughout
construction. Exotic plant species may only be removed by manual labor utilizing hand 'tools or by other
means if authorized in writing by the City's representative.
D. Prior to the erection of any required protective barrier, all surface foreign material, trash or debris shall
be removed from the area enclosed by the barrier, and after erection of the barrier no such material or
litter shall be permitted to remain within the protected area. No equipment, chemicals, soil deposits or
construction materials shall be placed within such protective barriers.
E. No signs, building permits, wires, or other attachments of any kind shall be attached to any protected
tree or palm.
F. At all times, due care shall be taken to protect the critical root zone of trees protected by this section,
and root pruning requirements shall apply to such trees.
62.2 ROOT PRUNING
A. Where proposed construction improvements involve excavation and/or impacts to the critical root zone
of protected trees, the Contractor shall be required to have an International Society of Arboriculture
(ISA) certified arborist perform, or directly supervise root pruning to reduce the impacts of construction.
The critical rootzone is equivalent to the tree's dripline. Prior to any clearing, grubbing or excavation
activities, the affected roots must be severed by clean pruning cuts at the point where grubbing or
excavation impacts the root system. Roots can be pruned utilizing specified root pruning equipment
designed forthat purpose or by hand digging a trench and pruning roots with a pruning saw, chain saw
or other equipment designed for tree pruning. Root pruning by trenching equipment or excavation
equipment is strictly prohibited. Roots located in the critical root zone that will be impacted by
construction activities shall be pruned to a minimum depth of 18 inches below existing grade or to the
depth of the proposed impact if less than 18 inches from existing grade. Tim Kurtz, Senior Landscape
Architect is the City's Representative on Public Works projects for root Pruning issues and can be
reached at (727) 562-4737, or through the construction inspector assigned to the project.
B. Root pruning shall only be preformed by or under the direct supervision of an International Society of
Arboriculture (ISA) certified arborist.
C. Any proposed root pruning trenches shall be identified on site (i.e. staked or painted) inspected and
approved by the City's representative prior to actual root pruning.
D. Root pruning shall be preformed as far in advance of other construction activities as is feasible, but at a
minimum shall be performed prior to ANY impacts to the soil. Associated tree protection measures
should be implemented upon completion of said root pruning.
I
I
I
I
I
I
,I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
E. If there is a likelihood of excessive wind and/or rain exceptional care shall be taken on any root pruning
activities.
F. Root pruning shall be limited to a minimum of ten inches per one inch of the trunk diameter from the
tree base. Any exception must be approved by the City's representative prior to said root pruning.
G. Roots shall be cut cleanly, as far from the trunk of the tree as possible. Root pruning shall be done to a
minimum depth of 18" from existing grade, or to the depth of the disturbance if less than 18".
H. Root pruning shall be performed using a Doscocil Root Cutting Machine or equivalent. Alternate
equipment or techniques must be approved by the City's representative, prior to any work adjacent to
trees to be preserved.
I. Root pruning shall be completed, inspected and accepted prior to the commencement of any
excavation or other impacts to the critical root zones of trees to be protected.
J. Excavations in an area where root are present shall not cause the tearing or ripping of tree roots. Roots
must first be cleanly severed prior to continuing with the excavation, or tunneled around to prevent
damage to the root.
K. Tree roots shall not be exposed to drying out. Root ends shall be covered with native soil or burlap and
kept moist until final backfill or final grades has been established.
L. When deemed appropriate (e.g., during periods of drought) the City representative may require a
temporary irrigation system be utilized in the remaining critical root zones of root pruned trees.
M. When underground utility lines are to be installed within the critical root zone, the root pruning
requirement may be waived if the lines are installed via tunneling or directional boring as opposed to
open trenching.
62.3 PROPER TREE PRUNING
A. All tree pruning and/or root pruning on existing trees to remain shall only be preformed by or under the
direct supervision of an International Society of Arboriculture (ISA) certified arborist. Furthermore, all
tree work shall conform to the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 2001, American National
Standard for tree care operations - Tree, Shrub and other Woody Plant Maintenance - Standard
practices (pruning) ANSI A-300.
B. Proper pruning techniques for all lateral branches of protected trees are required. Flush cuts (pruning
cuts that remove the branch collar) and stub cuts (cuts that leave a stub on the tree) are improper
techniques. Any protected tree that has been improperly pruned will not be recognized as a tree left on
the project in a healthy growing condition, and will require replacement consistent with the current City
Codes and Ordinances.
C. No protected tree shall have more than 30 percent of its foliage removed.
D. No protected tree shall be topped, hat racked or lion-tailed. Any protected tree that has been improperly
pruned will not be recognized as a tree left on the project in a healthy growing condition, and will
require replacement consistent with the current City Codes and Ordinances.
E. Tree Trunks and limbs shall be protected. The use of tree spikes or other devices that damage trunk
and bark tissue on protected trees shall be prohibited. Any protected tree that has been damaged in
such a manner will not be recognized as a tree left on the project in a healthy growing condition, and
will require replacement consistent with the current City Codes and Ordinances.
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section N
IV-119
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
1V-120
I
I
I
I
I
I
I,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
63 PROJECT WEB PAGES
63.1 WEB PAGES DESIGN
If requested by the City, Engineer shall design the Project Web Site in accordance with the current City
Web Site standards and styles. Project Web Site should include general project information as: Project
Name & Number, Scope description, Location, Schedule, and Project Contacts.
Note: Occasionally City modifies the general design of the City's Web Site, and the Engineer shall consult
the City Webmaster for the current requirements, before designing or updating the Project Web Pages.
63.2 WEB ACCESSIBILITY GUIDELINES
Project Web Pages should conform to the W3C Web Accessibility Guidelines and US Section 508
guidelines whenever possible:
http://www.w3.oralTR/1999/WAI-WEBCONTENT-19990505/
http://www.section508.qov/
In particular, use of variable-width tables, user-adjustable/relative font sizes, ALT text for images, CSS
whenever possible, etc. Accessibility shoulo be a priority over design/aesthetics.
63.3 THE SUN AND WAVES LOGO AND ITS USE
The City's Sun and Waves logo should be used for everyday business, on all print and electronic material.
It should be used on all internal correspondence, brochures, advertising, vehicles, apparel and signage. It
should be used only in the manner presented here, in the proportion shown here, with no alterations. It
should not be condensed, lengthened, or otherwise distorted to fit a space. The logo is approved for use by
city departments, and is not to be used by outside vendors without the permission of the City Manager,
Assistant City Manager or Public Communications office. Electronic versions of the logo should be obtained
from the Public Communications. This is for internal use only.
63.4 MAPS AND GRAPHICS
Use of maps and graphics is recommended to illustrate the project; only approved graphics should be
posted to the Project Web Pages.
63.5 INTERACTIVE FORMS
The site should also include an interactive form or other options to allow Public's input sent back to the City
regarding the Project.
63.6 POSTING
The site should be presented to the City's Webmaster for review and posting to the City's Web Server.
Posting of the Project Web Pages to a different than City's Web server, if approved, should be coordinated
with the City's Webmaster for resolving all accessibility and conformity issues.
63.7 WEB PAGES UPDATES
Unless otherwise specified and agreed Engineer is responsible for keeping the posted Web Pages up-to-
date, by sending revisions and updates through the City Project Manager to the City's Webmaster for
posting.
I
I
I.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SUPPLEMENTAL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
IV-121
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
IV-122
I
I
I
I
,I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 01340
SUBMITTALS
PART 1 . GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Indudes:
1. Mechanics and administration of the submittal process for:
a. Shop Drawings.
b. Samples.
c. Miscellaneous submittals.
d. Operation and Maintenance Manuals.
2. General content requirements for Shop Drawings.
3. Content requirements for Operation and Maintenance Manuals.
B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Section 1/ - Instructions to Bidders.
2. Section 1/1- General Conditions.
3. Section IV - Technical Specifications.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Shop Drawings:
1. See General Conditions.
2. Product data and samples are Shop Drawing information.
B. Operation and Maintenance Manuals (O&M Manuals):
1. Data collected for the Owner's use.
2. Contain information related to the operation and maintenance of equipment and packaged systems.
C. Miscellaneous Submittals:
1. Submittals other than Shop Drawings and O&M Manuals.
2. Representative types of miscellaneous submittal items include but are not limited to:
a. Construction schedule.
b. Concrete, soil compaction, and pressure test reports.
c. Installed equipment and systems performance test reports.
d. Manufacturer's installation certification letters.
e. Instrumentation and control commissioning reports.
f. Warranties.
g. Service agreements.
h. Construction photographs.
i. Survey data.
j. Cost breakdown (Schedule of Values).
k. HV AC test and balance reports.
1.3 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE
A. Schedule of Shop Drawings:
1. Submitted and .approved within 20 days of receipt of Notice to Proceed.
2. Account for multiple transmittals under any specification section where partial submittals will be
transmitted.
B. Shop Drawings: Submittal and approval prior to 50 percent completion.
C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals and Equipment Record Sheets: Initial submittal within 60 days after
date Shop Drawings are approved.
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
IV.123
A. General:
1. All submittals and all pages of all copies of a submittal shall be completely legible.
2. Submittals which, in the Engineer's sole opinion, are illegible will be returned without review.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Scope of any submittal and letter of transmittal:
a. Limited to one specification section.
b. Do not submit under any specification section entitled (in part) "Basic Requirements" unless the
product or material submitted is specified in a "Basic Requirements" section.
2. Numbering letter of transmittal:
a. Include as prefix the specification section number followed by a series number, "-xx", beginning
with "01" and increasing sequentially with each additional transmittal.
b. If more than one submittal under any specification section, assign consecutive series numbers to
subsequent transmittal letters.
3. Describing transmittal contents:
a. Provide listing of each component or item in submittal capable of receiving an independent
review action.
b. Identify for each item:
1) Manufacturer and Manufacturer's drawing or data number.
2) Unique page numbers for each page of each separate item;
c. When submitting "or-equal" items that are not the products of named manufacturers, include the
words "or-equal" in the item description.
4. Contractor stamping:
a. General:
1) Contractor's review and approval stamp shall be applied either to the letter of transmittal or
a separate sheet preceding each independent item in the submittal.
a) Contractor's signature and date shall be original ink signature.
b) Shop Drawing submittal stamp shall read "(Contractor's Name) has satisfied
Contractor's obligations under the Contract Documents with respect to Contractor's
review and approval as stipulated under General Conditions Paragraph 6.11.1."
c) Letters of transmittal may be stamped only when the scope of the submittal is one item.
2) Submittals containing multiple independent items shall be prepared with an index sheet for
each item listing the discrete page numbers for each page of that item, which shall be
stamped with1he Contractor's review and approval stamp.
a) Individual pages or sheets of independent items shall be numbered in a manner that
permits Contractor's review and approval stamp to be associated with the entire
contents of a particular item.
b. Electronic stamps:
1) Contractor may electronically embed Contractor's review and approval stamp to either the
letter of transmittal or a separate index sheet preceding each independent item in the.
submittal.
2) Contractor's signature and date on electronically applied stamps shall be original ink
signature.
5. Resubmittals:
a. Number with original root number and a suffix letter starting with "A" on a (new) duplicate
transmittal form.
b. Do not increase the scope of any prior transmittal.
c. Account for all components of prior transmittal.
1) If items in prior transmittal received "A" or liB" Action code, .Iist them and indicate "A" or "B"
as appropriate.
a) Do not include submittal information for items listed with prior "A" or liB" Action in
resubmittal.
2) Indicate "Outstanding-To Be Resubmitted At a Later Date" for any prior "C" or liD" Action
item not included in resubmittal.
a) Obtain Engineer's approval to exclude items.
I
I
I
1.4 PREPARATION OF SUBMITTALS
I
I
I
I
J
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
1V-124
I
I
I
I
6. For 8-1/2 X 11 IN, 8-1/2 x 141N, and 11 x 17 IN size sheets, provide three (3) copies of each page for
Engineer plus the number required by the Contractor.
a. The number of copies required by the Contractor will be defined at the Preconstruction
Conference, but shall not exceed 5.
b. All other size sheets:
1) Submit one (1) reproducible transparency or high resolution print and one (1) additional print
of each drawing until approval is obtained.
2) Utilize mailing tube; do not fold.
3) The Engineer will mark and return the reproducible to the Contractor for his reproduction
and distribution.
7. Provide clear space (3 IN SQ) for Engineer stamping of each component defined in PREPARATION
OF SUBMITTALS - Contractor Stamping.
8. Contractor shall not use red color for marks on transmittals.
a. Duplicate all marks on all copies transmitted, and ensure marks are photocopy reproducible.
b. Outline Contractor marks on reproducible transparencies with a rectangular box.
9. Transmittal contents:
a. Coordinate and identify Shop Drawing contents so that all items can be easily verified by the
Engineer.
b. Identify equipment or material use, tag number, drawing detail reference, weight, and other
project specific information.
c. Provide sufficient information together with technical cuts and technical data to allow an
evaluation to be made to determine that the item submitted is in compliance with the Contract
Documents.
d. Submit items such as equipment brochures, cuts of fixtures, product data sheets or catalog
sheets on 8-1/2 x 111N pages.
1) Indicate exact item or model and all options proposed.
e. When a Shop Drawing submittal is called for in any specification section, include as appropriate,
scaled details, sizes, dimensions, performance characteristics, capacities, test data, anchoring
details, installation instructions, storage and handling instructions, color charts, layout drawings,
rough-in diagrams, wiring diagrams, controls, weights and other pertinent data in addition to
information specifically stipulated in the specification section.
1) Arrange data and performance information in format similar to that provided in Contract
Documents.
2) Provide, at minimum, the detail specified in the Contract Documents.
f. If proposed equipment or materials deviate from the Contract Drawings or Specifications in any
way, clearly note the deviation and justify the said deviation in detail in a separate letter
immediately following transmittal sheet.
10. Samples:
a. Identification:
1) Identify sample as to transmittal number, manufacturer, item, use, type, project designation,
tag number, standard specification section or drawing detail reference, color, range, texture,
finish and other pertinent data.
2) If identifying information cannot be marked directly on sample without defacing or adversely
altering samples, provide a durable tag with identifying information securely attached to the
sample.
b. Include application specific brochures, and installation instructions.
c. Provide Contractor's stamp of approval on samples or transmittal form as indication of
Contractor's checking and verification of dimensions and coordination with interrelated work.
d. Resubmit samples of rejected items.
C. Miscellaneous Submittals:
1. Prepare in the format and detail specified in specification requiring the miscellaneous submittal.
D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals:
1. Number transmittals for Operation and Maintenance Manual with original root number of the approved
Shop Drawing for the item.
2. SUbmittal format
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section N
N-125
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Contrallmprovements Project
Section IV
IV-126
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
a. Interim submittals:
1) Submit two (2) paper copies until approval is received.
b. Final submittals:
1) Submit approved Operation and Maintenance electronically on Compact Disk (CDROM) in
Portable Document Format (PDF).
2) Each manual shall have a Table of Contents or Index with each listed item linked to its .
corresponding topic.
3) All pages within the PDF document are to be generated at actual size for optimal resolution
quality (i.e., 22 IN x 34 IN drawings rendered as such, etc.).
4) Ensure all pages are rotated properly so that the majority of the text or drawing border is
upright on the screen.
5) Do not password protect and/or lock the PDF document.
6) Submit two (2) additional paper copies.
3. Identify resubmittals with the original number plus a suffix letter starting with "A."
4. Paper copy submittals: . .
a. Submit Operation and Maintenance Manuals printed on 8-1/2 x 11 IN size heavy first quality
paper with standard three-hole punching and bound in stiff metal hinged binder constructed as a
three-ring style.
1) Provide binders with titles on front and on spine of binder.
2) Tab each section of manuals for easy reference with plastic-coated dividers.
3) Provide index for each manual.
4) Provide plastic sheet lifters prior to first page and following last page.
b. Reduce drawings or diagrams bound in manuals to an 8-1/2 x 11 IN or 11 x 17 IN size.
1) However, where reduction is not practical to ensure readability, fold larger drawings
separately and place in vinyl envelopes which are bound into the binder.
2) Identify vinyl envelopes with drawing numbers.
5. Transmittal contents:
a. Submission of Operation and Maintenance Manuals is applicable but not necessarily limited to:
1) Major equipment.
2) Equipment used with electrical motor loads of 1/6 HP nameplate or greater.
3) Specialized equipment including valves and instrumentation and control system
components for HVAC and process systems such as meters, recorders, and transmitters.
4) Valves greater than 121N DIA.
b. Operation and maintenance manuals shall include, but not necessarily be limited to, the following
detailed information, as applicable:
1) Equipment function, normal operating characteristics, limiting operations.
2) Assembly, disassembly, installation, alignment, adjustment, and checking instructions.
3) Operating instructions for start-up, routine and normal operation, regulation and control,
shutdown, and emergency conditions.
4) Lubrication and maintenance instructions.
5) Guide to "troubleshooting."
6) Parts list and predicted life of parts subject to wear.
7) Outline, cross-section, and assembly drawings; engineering data; and electrical diagrams,
including elementary diagrams, wiring diagrams, connection diagrams, word description of
wiring diagrams and interconnection diagrams.
8) Test data and performance curves.
9) As-constructed fabrication or layout drawings and wiring diagrams if different than approved
Shop Drawings.
10) A list of recommended spare parts with a price list and a list of spare parts provided under
these Specifications.
11) Copies of installation instructions, parts lists or other documents packed with equipment
when delivered.
12) Instrumentation or tag numbers relating the equipment back to the Contract Documents.
13) Include a filled-out, type-written copy of the Equipment Record Sheet, Exhibits C1 and C2
as the first page(s) of each Operation and Maintenance Manual.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
"I
I
I
I
I
a) Complete maintenance requirements in detail. Simple reference to the Manual is not
acceptable.
14) For equipment items involving components or subunits, an Equipment Record Sheet for
each operating component or subunit is required.
1.5 TRANSMITTAL OF SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings, Samples and Operation and Maintenance Manuals:
1. Transmit all submittals to:
HDR Engineering, Inc.
2202 N. West Shore Blvd. Ste. 250
Tampa, F133607
Attn: Lenore Horton, PE
2. Utilize two (2) copies of attached Exhibit "An to transmit all Shop Drawings and samples.
3. Utilize two (2) copies of attached Exhibit liB" to transmit all Operation and Maintenance Manuals.
4. All submittals must be from Contractor.
a. Submittals will not be received from or returned to subcontractors.
b. Operation and Maintenance Manual submittal stamp may be Contractor's standard approval
stamp.
5. Provide submittal information defining specific equipment or materials utilized on the project.
a. Generalized product information, not clearly defining specific equipment or materials to be
provided, will be rejected.
B. Miscellaneous Submittals:
1. Transmit under Contractor's standard letter of transmittal or letterhead.
2. Submit in triplicate or as specified in individual specification section.
3. Transmit to:
HDR Engineering, Inc.
2202 N. West Shore Blvd. Ste. 250
Tampa, FI 33607
Attn: Lenore Horton, PE
4. Provide copy of letter of transmittal to Owner's Resident Project Representative.
a. Exception for concrete, soils compaction and pressure test reports.
1) Transmit one copy to Resident Project Engineer.
2) Transmit one copy to location and individual indicated above for other miscellaneous
submittals.
C. Expedited Return Delivery:
1. Include prepaid express envelope or airbill in submittal transmittal package for any submittals
Contractor expects or requires express return mail.
2. Inclusion of prepaid express envelope or airbill does not obligate Engineer to conduct expedited
review of submittal.
D. Electronic submittals will not be accepted.
E. Fax Transmittals:
1. Permitted on a case-by.case basis to expedite review when approved by Engineer.
2. Requires hard copy transmittal to immediately follow.
a. Engineer will proceed with review of fax transmittal.
b. Engineer's approval or rejection comments will be recorded and returned on hard copy
transmittal.
3. Provisions apply to both:
a. Initial transmittal contents.
b. Supplemental information required to make initial transmittal contents complete.
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
1V-127
1.6 ENGINEER'S REVIEW ACTION
I
I
A. Shop Drawings and Samples:
1. Items within transmittals will be reviewed for overall design intent and will receive one of the following
actions:
a. A - FURNISH AS SUBMITTED.
b. B - FURNISH AS NOTED (BY ENGINEER).
c. C - REVISE AND RESUBMIT.
d. 0 - REJECTED.
e. E - ENGINEER'S REVIEW NOT REQUIRED.
2. Submittals received will be initially reviewed to ascertain inclusion of Contractor's approval stamp.
a. Submittals not stamped by the Contractor or stamped with a stamp containing language other
than that specified herein will not be reviewed for technical content and will be returned without
any action.
3. In relying on the representation on the Contractor's review and approval stamp, Owner and Engineer
reserve the right to review and process poorly organized and poorly described submittals as follows:
a. Submittals transmitted with a description identifying a single item and found to contain multiple
independent items:
1} Review and approval will be limited to the single item described on the transmittal letter.
2} Other items identified in the submittal will:
a} Not be logged as received by the Engineer.
b) Be removed from the submittal package and returned without review and comment to
the Contractor for coordination, description and stamping.
c} Be submitted by the Contractor as a new series number, not as a re-submittal number.
b. Engineer, at Engineer's discretion, may revise the transmittal letter item list and descriptions, and
conduct review.
1} Unless Contractor notifies Engineer in writing that the Engineer's revision of the transmittal
letter item list and descriptions was in error, Contractor's review and approval stamp will be
deemed to have applied to the entire contents of the submittal package.
4. Submittals returned with Action" A" or "B" are considered ready for fabrication and installation.
a. If for any reason a submittal that has an "A" or "B" Action is resubmitted, it must be accompanied
by a letter defining the changes that have been made and the reason for the resubmittal.
b. Destroy or conspicuously mark "SUPERSEDED" all documents having previously received "A" or
"S" Action that are superseded by a resubmittal.
5. Submittals with Action "A" or "S"combined with Action "C. (Revise and Resubmit) or "0" (Rejected)
will be individually analyzed giving consideration as follows:
a. The portion of the submittal given "C" or "0" will not be distributed (unless previously agreed to
otherwise at the Preconstruction Conference).
1} One copy or the one transparency of the "C" or "0" drawings will be marked up and returned
to the Contractor.
a) Correct and resubmit items so marked.
b. Items marked "A" or "B" will be fully distributed.
c. If a portion of the items or system proposed are acceptable, however, the major part of the
individual drawings or documents are incomplete or require revision, the entire submittal may be
given "C. or "0" Action.
1} This is at the sole discretion of the Engineer.
2} In this case, some drawings may contain relatively few or no comments or the statement,
"Resubmit to maintain a complete package."
3} Distribution to the Owner and field will not be made (unless previously agreed to otherwise).
6. Failure to include any specific information specified under the submittal paragraphs of the
Specifications will result in the submittal being returned to the Contractor with .C" or "0" Action.
7. Calculations required in individual specification sections will be received for information purposes only,
as evidence calculations have been performed by individuals meeting specified qualifications, and will
be returned stamped "E Engineer's Review Not Required" to acknowledge receipt.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Contra/Improvements Project
Section IV
1V-128
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
8. Transmittals of submittals which the Engineer considers as "Not Required" submittal information,
which is supplemental to but not essential to prior submitted information, or items of information in a
transmittal which have been reviewed and received "A" or "B" Action in a prior submittal, will be
returned with Action "E. Engineer's Review Not Required."
9. Samples may be retained for comparison purposes.
a. Remove samples when directed. Include in bid all costs of furnishing and removing samples.
10. Approved samples submitted or constructed, constitute criteria for judging completed work.
a. Finished work or items not equal to samples will be rejected.
B. Operation and Maintenance Manuals:
1. Engineer will review and indicate one of the following review actions:
a. ACCEPTABLE.
b. FURNISH AS NOTED.
c. REVISE AND RESUBMIT.
d. REJECTED.
2. Acceptable submittals will be retained with the transmittal form returned with a request for five
additional copies.
3. Deficient submittals will be returned along with the transmittal form which will be marked to indicate
deficient areas.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED
PART 3 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED
END OF SECTION
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section N
IV.129
I
fiR
EXHIBIT A
Shop Drawing Transmittal No.
I
.
(Spec Section) (series)1
Project Name: Dale Received:
Project Owner: Checked By: I
Contractor. HDR Engineering, Inc. Log Page:
Address: Address: HDR No.: I
Spec Section:
DrawinglDetail No.: I
Attn: Attn: 1". Sub I ReSub. I
I
Dale T ransmitled: Previous Transmittal Dale:
tIem No. Description Manufacturer MlrNendor Dwg or Data No. Action Taken'
No. Copies I
I
I
Remarks:
. The Action Designated Above is in Accordance with the Following Legend: I
A - Furnish as Submitted
D - Rejected
B -Furnish as Noted
E - EngineeJ's review not required
1. Submittal not required.
2. Supplemental Information. . Submittal retained for informational
purposes only.
3. Infonnation reviewed and approved on prior submittal.
4. See comments.
I
C - Revise and Submit
1. Not enough information for review.
2. No reproducibles submitted.
3. Copies illegible.
4. Not enough copies submitted.
5. Wrong sequence number.
6. Wrong resubmittal number.
7. Wrong spec. section.
8. Wrong form used.
9. See comments.
I
I
Comments:
I
I
I
By
I
Dale
Distribution:
Contractor U
File U
Field U
Owner U
Other U
I
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
N-130
I
I
I
I
@'\
EXHIBIT B
O&M Manual Transmittal No.
(Spec Section) (Series)
I
Project Nane:
ProjeclOwner.
. Da1eRel:eived:
Checked By:
I
Conlraclor.
OWner.
log Page:
Address:
Address:
HDR No.:
I
Alln:
Atln:
1st Sub.
ReSub.
Dale TransmiUed:
Previous Transmittal Date:
I
No. Description of Item
Copies
Manu1ac1urer
Dwg. or Data No.
Action Taken' .
I
I
I
Remarks:
I
To:
From:
HDR Engineering, Inc.
Date:
I
I
The Action designated above is in accordance with the following legend:
A - Acceptable, provide two additional copies and final eleclronic copy
B - Fumish as Noted
I
C - Revise and Resubmit
This Operation and Maintenance Manual Submittal is deficient in the following
area:
1.
2.
3.
Equipment record sheets.
Functional description.
Assembly, disassembly, installation, aligrvnent, adjustment & checkout
instructions. D - Rejecled
Operating instrucIions.
5. Lubrication & maintenance instructions.
6. Troubleshooting guide.
7. Parts list and ordering instructions.
8. Organization (index and tabbing).
9. Wiring diagrams & schematics specific to installation.
10. Outline, cross section & assembly diagrams.
11. Test data & performance curves.
12. Tag or equipment identifICation numbers.
13. Other - see comments.
I
I
4.
Comments:
I
I
I
By
I
Dale
Dislrilulion:
ContacfDr U
File U
FoeJd U
Owner U
OIherU
I
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
1V-131
I
I
Ji)'1
EXHIBIT C1
Equipment Recordl
Page 1 of2
:qulpmen am enance aa ummary
Project Name age of
Equip. Description Date Installed Date Started
Equip. Location ~ Estimated Life
Project Equip. Tag No. ~hop Dwg. Trans. No. Spec. Sec.
-
E
t M . t
D t 5
I
I
EqUIp. Manu!.
I
Manuf. Address
rhone
Local Vendor
I
Vendor Address hone
BREAK-IN MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS (INITIAL OIL CHANGES, ETC.) 0 W M Q S A Hours
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS 0 w M Q S A Hours
"
RECOMMENDED SPARE PARTS ELECTRICAL NAMEPLATE DATA
PartNo. Part Name Quan1ilv Equip.
Make
Iserial No. ONo.
Model No. rame No.
HP \/. ~P. HZ
PH RPM F Duly
::Ode Ins.CI. as. Tvee
erna Amb. ramp. Rise Ratinq
iIflSC.
MECHANICAL NAMEPLATE DATA
:auip.
iAake
>erial No. ONo.
iAodel No. Frame No.
P IRPM ap. Size
roH limp. Sz. as. FM
'81 1Assv. No. ::ase No.
ise.
ubricant information on followino oace
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
IV.132
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
lilt
EXHIBIT C2
Equipment Record
Page 2 of2
Lubrication Summary
Eauioment DescriDtiDn I Pmiect EauiD. T aa No. I Paae of
lubricant Point I
Manufacturer Product AGMA # SAE# ISO
., 1
c.
>-
I- 2
"E
.,
<>
'1: 3
J:>
:> i
--'
4
I
5
Lubricant Point
Manufacturer Product AGMA # SAE# ISO
., 1
c.
>-
I- 2
"E
10
<>
'1: 3
-g
--'
4
5
Lubricant Point
Manufacturer Product AGMA # SAE# ISO
lD 1
c.
>-
I- 2
"E
10
<>
'C 3
J:>
:>
--'
4
5
Lubricant Point
Manufacturer Product AGMA # SAE# ISO
lD 1
c.
>-
I- 2
I:
10
<>
'1: 3
J:>
:>
--'
4
5
Lubricant Point
Manufacturer Product AGMA # SAE# ISO
lD 1
~
I- 2
"E
10
<> 3
:g
--'
4
5
Lubricant Point
Manufacturer Prodld AGMA # SAE# ISO
., 1
c.
>-
I- 2
"E
10
<>
'1: 3
J:>
:>
--'
4
5
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
1V-133
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
1V-134
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 01600
PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
PART 1 . GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A Section Indudes:
1. Scheduling of product delivery.
2. Packaging of products for delivery.
3. Protection of products against damage from:
a. Handling.
b. Exposure to elements or harsh environments.
B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Section II - Instructions to Bidders.
2. Section 111-- General Conditions.
C. Payment
1. No' payment will be made to Contractor for equipment or materials not properly stored and insured or
without approved shop drawings.
a. Previous payments for items will be deducted from subsequent progress estimate(s) if proper
storage procedures are not observed.
1.2 DELIVERY
A. Scheduling:
1. Schedule delivery of products or equipment as required to allow timely installation and to avoid
prolonged storage.
B. Packaging:
1. Deliver products or equipment in manufacturer's original unbroken cartons or other containers
designed and constructed to protect the contents from physical or environmental damage.
C. Identification:
1. Clearly and fully mark and identify as 10 manufacturer, item, and installation location.
D. Protection and Handling:
1. Provide manufacturer's instructions for storage and handling.
PART 2 . PRODUCTS. (NOT APPLICABLE TO THIS SECTION)
PART 3 . EXECUTION
3.1 PROTECTION, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Manufacturer's Instruction:
1. Protect all products or equipment in accordance with manufacturer's written directions.
a. Store products or equipment in location to avoid physical damage to items while in storage.
b. Handle products or equipment in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and
instructions.
2. Protect equipment from exposure to elements and keep thoroughly dry.
3. Store pumps, motors, electrical equipment and other equipment having antifriction or sleeve bearings
in weathertight warehouses which are maintained at a temperature of at least 80 DegF.
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
IV-135
4. When space heaters are provided in equipment, connect and operate heaters during storage until
equipment is placed in service.
3.2 STORAGE FACILITIES
A. Temporary Storage Building:
1. Provide a weatherproof temporary storage building or container specifically for the purpose of
providing for protection of products and equipment. Size building to accommodate anticipated storage
items.
2. Equip building or container with lockable doors and lighting, and provide electrical service for
equipment space heaters and heating or ventilation as necessary to provide storage environments
acceptable to specified manufacturers.
3. Provide methods of storage of products and equipment off the ground.
4. Provide this structure within 60 days after Notice to Proceed. Locate building on-site where shown on
the Drawings or in location approved by Owner. Remove building from site prior to startup and
demonstration period.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect Deliveries:
1. Inspect all products or ~quipment delivered to the site prior to unloading. Reject all products or
equipment that are damaged, used, or in any other way unsatisfactory for use on Project.
B. Monitor Storage Area:
1. Monitor storage area to ensure suitable temperature and moisture conditions are maintained.
END OF SECTION
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section N
N-136
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 01640
PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A Section Includes:
1. The procedure for requesting substitution approval for a product which is specified by descriptive or
performance criteria or defined by reference to one or more of the following:
a. Name of manufacturer.
b. Name of vendor.
c. Trade name.
d. Catalog number.
2. This Section does not address substitutions for major equipment. See "Instructions to Bidders."
B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Section II - Instructions to Bidders.
2. Section 111- General Conditions.
C. Requests for Substitution - General:
1. Base all bids on materials, equipment, and procedures specified.
2. Certain types of equipment and kinds of material are described in specifications by means of
references to names of manufacturers and vendors, trade names, or catalog numbers. When this
method of specifying is used, it is not intended to exclude from consideration other products bearing
other manufacturer's or vendor's names, trade names, or catalog numbers, provided said products are
capable of accomplishing the same tasks as the products specifically indicated.
3. Other types of equipment and kinds of material may be acceptable.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. In making request for substitution or in using an approved product, Contractor represents:
1. He has investigated proposed product, and has determined that it is adequate or superior in all
respects to that specified, and that it will perform function for which it is intended.
2. He will provide same guarantee for substitute item as for product specified.
3. He will coordinate installation of accepted substitution into work, to include building modifications if
necessary, making such changes as may be required for work to be complete in all respects.
4. He waives all claims for additional costs related to substitution which subsequently arise.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Product: Manufactured material or equipment.
1.4 PROCEDURE FOR REQUESTING SUBSTITUTION
A. Considered after award of Contract.
1. Considered only if:
a. Or-equals are unavailable due to strike, discontinued production of products meeting specified
requirements, or other factors beyond control of Contractor; or,
b. Contractor proposes a cost reduction incentive to the Owner.
B. Written requests through Contractor only.
C. Transmittal Mechanics:
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section tv
tv-137
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section N
N-138
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1. Follow the transmittal mechanics prescribed for Shop Drawings in Section 01340. Product substitution
will be treated in a manner similar to "deviations," as described in Paragraph 1.4A.9.f. of Section
01340. Ust the letter describing the deviation and justifications on the transmittal form in the space
provided under the column with the heading "DESCRIPTION." Include in the transmittal letter, either
directly or as a clearly marked attachment the items listed in Paragraph D below.
D. Transmittal Contents:
1. Product identification:
a. Manufacturer's name.
b. Telephone number and representative contact name.
c. Specification section or drawing reference of originally specified product including discrete name
or tag number assigned to original product in the Contract Documents.
2. Manufacturer's literature clearly marked to show compliance of proposed product with Contract
Documents.
3. Itemized comparison of original and proposed product addressing product characteristics including but
not necessarily limited to:
a. Size.
b. Composition or materials of construction.
c. Weight.
d. Electrical or mechanical requirements.
4. Product experience:
a. Location of past projects utilizing product.
b. Name and telephone number of persons associated with referenced projects knowledgeable
concerning proposed product.
c. Available field data and reports associated with proposed product.
5. Data relating tochanges in construction schedule.
6. Data relating to changes in cost.
7. Samples:
a. At request of Engineer.
b. Full size if requested by Engineer.
c. Held until substantial completion.
d. Engineer not responsible for loss or damage to samples.
1.5 APPROVAL OR REJECTION
A. Written approval or rejection of substitution given by the Engineer.
B. Engineer reserves the right to require proposed product to comply with color and pattern of specified
product if necessary to secure design intent.
C. In event substitution results in a change of Contract price or time, provisions in General Conditions will be
applied for adjustment.
D. Substitutions will be rejected if:
1. Submittal is not through the Contractor with his stamp of approval.
2. Requests are not made in accordance with this Section.
3. In the Engineer's opinion, acceptance will requ'ire substantial revision of the original design.
4. In the Engineer's opinion, substitution will not perform adequately the function consistent with the
design intent.
END OF SECTION
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 01710
CLEANING
PART 1 . GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Intermediate and final cleaning of Work not including special cleaning of closed systems specified
elsewhere.
B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Section II - Instructions to Bidders.
2. Section III - General Conditions:
1.2 STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Store cleaning products and cleaning wastes in containers specifically designed for those materials.
1.3 SCHEDULING
A. Schedulecleaning operations so that dust and other contaminants disturbed by cleaning process will not
fall on newly painted surfaces.
PART2. PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Cleaning Agents:
1. Compatible with surface being cleaned.
2. New and uncontaminated.
3. For Manufactured Surfaces: Material recommended by manufacturer.
PART 3 . EXECUTION
3.1 CLEANING - GENERAL
A. Prevent accumulation of wastes that create hazardous conditions.
B. Conduct cleaning and disposal operations to comply with laws and safety orders of governing authorities.
C. Do not dispose of volatile wastes such as mineral spirits, oil, or paint thinner in storm or sanitary drains or
sewers.
D. Dispose of degradable debris at an approved solid waste disposal site.
E. Dispose of nondegradable debris at an approved solid waste disposal site or in an alternate manner
approved by Engineer and regulatory agencies.
F. Handle materials in a controlled manner with as few handlings as possible.
G. Do not drop or throw materials from heights greater than 4 FT or less than 4 FT if conditions warrant
greater care.
H. On completion of work, leave area in a clean, natural looking condition.
1. Remove all signs of temporary construction and activities incidental to construction of required
permanent Work.
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Contrallmprovement Project
Section IV
1V-139
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvement Project
Section IV
1V-140
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I. Do not burn on-site.
3.2 INTERIOR CLEANING
A. Cleaning During Construction:
1. Keep work areas clean so as not to hinder health, safety or convenience of personnel in existing
facility operations.
2. At maximum weekly intervals, dispose of waste materials, debris, and rubbish.
3. Control dust in work areas of existing facilities.
4. Provide protection to existing electrical and mechanical equipment as required to eliminate detrimental
effects due to construction.
5. At maximum monthly intervals, check interior of existing electric panels and vacuum if dust
accumulation has occurred.
6. At maximum weekly intervals, sweep all floors, including basins, tunnels, platforms, walkways, and
pick up and. dispose of all debris.
B. Final Cleaning:
1. Complete immediately prior to Demonstration Period.
2. Remove grease, mastic, adhesives, dust, dirt, stains, fingerprints, labels, and other foreign materials
from sight-exposed surfaces.
3. Wipe all lighting fixture reflectors, lenses, lamps and trims clean.
4. Wash and shine glazing and mirrors.
5. Polish glossy surfaces to a clear shine.
6. Ventilating systems:
a. Clean permanent filters and replace disposable filters if units were operated during construction.
b. Clean ducts, blowers and coils if units were operated without filters during construction.
7. Replace all burned out lamps.
8. Broom clean process area floors.
9. Mop office and control room floors.
3.3 EXTERIOR (SITE) CLEANING
A. Cleaning During Construction:
1. Construction debris:
a. Confine in strategically located container(s):
1) Cover to prevent blowing by wind.
2) Haul from site minimum once a week.
b. Remove from work area to container daily.
2. Vegetation: Keep weeds and other vegetation trimmed to 3 IN maximum height.
3. Soils, sand, and gravel deposited on paved areas and walks:
a. Remove as required to prevent muddy or dusty conditions.
b. Do not flush into storm sewer system.
B. Final Cleaning:
1. Remove trash and debris containers from site.
a. Re-seed areas disturbed by location of trash and debris containers.
2. Clean paved roadways.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Immediately prior to Demonstration Period, conduct an inspection with Engineer to verify condition of all
work areas.
END OF SECTION
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 01800
OPENINGS AND PENETRATIONS IN CONSTRUCTION
PART 1 . GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. All openings and penetrations in construction.
B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Section II - Instructions to Bidders.
2. Section 111- General Conditions.
3. Section IV - Supplemental Technical Specifications, Division 09, Section 09905 - Painting and
Protective Coatings.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Referenced Standards:
1. American Concrete Institute (ACI):
a. 318, Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete.
2. ASTM International (ASTM):
a. A36, Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel.
b. A53, Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated Welded and
Seamless.
3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
a. 70, National Electrical Code (NEe).
b. 90A, Standard for Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.
4. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association (SMACNA).
8. Obtain prior approval from Engineer when any opening larger than 100 sa IN must be made in existing or
newly completed construction.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings:
1. See Section 01340 for requirements for the mechanics and administration of the submittal process.
2. For each structure provide dimensioned or scaled (minimum 1/8 IN = 1 FT) plan view drawings
containing the following information:
a. Vertical and horizontal location of all required openings and penetrations.
b. Size of all openings and penetrations.
c. Opening type.
d. Seal type.
3. Manufacturer's installation instructions for standard manufactured products.
PART 2 . PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Pipe Sleeves: Steet, ASTM A53, Schedule 40, black.
B. Pipe Sleeves Penetrating into Corrosive Areas: Stainless steel, 1/4 IN minimum thickness.
C. Sheet Metal Sleeves: Steel, ASTM A36, 12 GA.
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Contrallmprovements Project
Section IV
N-141
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Contrallmprovements Project
Section IV
IV-142
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PART 3 . EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION AND APPLICATION
A. Perform HVAC penetrations in accordance with NFPA 90A.
B. Perform electrical penetrations in accordance with NFPA 70, Article 501.
C. Install sleeves and castings in accordance with ACI 318, Chapter #6.
D. Hot dip galvanize (or paint in accordance with Section 09905) all steel sleeves installed.
E. When mechanical or electrical work cannot be installed as structure is being erected, provide and arrange
for building-in of boxes, sleeves, insets, fixtures or devices necessary to permit installation later. Layout
chases, holes or other openings which must be provided in masonry, concrete or other work.
F. Where pipes, conduits or ducts pass through floors in washdown areas, install sleeves with top 3 IN above
finish floors. In non-washdown areas, install sleeves with ends flush with finished surfaces.
G. Size sleeves, blockouts and cutouts which will receive sealant seal such that free area to receive sealant is
minimized and seal integrity may be obtained.
H. For insulated piping and ducts, size sleeves, blockouts and cutouts large enough to accommodate full
thickness of insulation.
I. Do not cut into or core drill any beams, joists, or columns.
J. Do not install sleeves in beams, joists, or columns.
K. Do not install recesses in beams, joists, columns, or slabs.
L. Field Cutting and Coring:
1. Saw or core drill with non-impact type equipment.
2. Mark opening and drill small 3/4 IN or less holes through structure following opening outline.
3. Sawcut opening outline on both surfaces. Knock out within sawcuts using impact type equipment. Do
not chip or spall face of surface to remain intact. Do not allow any overcut with saw kerf.
M. Where alterations are necessary or where new and old work join, restore adjacent surfaces to their
condition existing prior to start of work.
N. Provide waterstop plate/anchor flange for piping, ducts, castings and sleeves cast-in-placein concrete.
1. For fabricated units, weld plate to sleeve, pipe, or ductwork.
2. For commercial castings, cast water stop/anchor with wall pipe.
3. Plate is to be same thickness as sleeve, pipe, casting or ductwork.
4. For fabricated units, diameter of plate or flange to be 4 IN larger than outside diameter of sleeve, pipe
or ductwork.
5. For commercial castings, waterstop/anchor size to be manufacturer standard.
6. Provide continuous around entire circumference of sleeve, pipe, or ductwork.
O. For interior wall applications where backer rod and sealant are specified, provide backer rod and sealant at
each side of wall.
P. Use full depth expanding foam sealant for seal applications into hazardous areas and applications where
multiple pipes, conduits, etc. pass through single sleeve. Use full depth compressible sealant for
applications involving single components passing through sleeves and for penetrations into non hazardous
area.
Q. Do not make duct or conduit penetrations below high water levels when entering or leaving tankage, wet
wells, or other water holding structures.
R. Modular Mechanical Seals:
1. Utilize one seal for concrete thickness less than 8 IN and two seals for concrete, 8 IN thick or greater.
2. Utilize two seals for piping 16 IN diameter and larger if concrete thickness permits.
3. Install seals such that bolt heads are located on the most accessible side of the penetration.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
S. Backer Rod and Sealant
1. Provide backer rod and sealant for modular mechanical seal applications. Apply on top side of slab
penetrations and on interior, dry side wall penetrations.
3.2 SCHEDULES
A. General Schedule of Penetrations through Floors, Roofs, Foundation Base Slabs, Foundation Walls,
Foundation Footings, Partitions and Walls for Ductwork, Piping, and Conduit
1. Provide the following opening and penetration types:
a. Type A - Block out 2 IN larger than outside dimensions of duct, pipe, or conduits.
b. Type B - Saw cut or line-drill opening. Place new concrete with integrally cast sheet metal or pipe
sleeve.
c. Type C - Fabricated sheet metal sleeve or pipe sleeve cast-in-place. Provide pipe sleeve with
water ring for wet and/or washdown areas.
d. Type D - Commercial type casting or fabrication.
e. Type E - Saw cut or line-drill opening. Place new concrete with integrally cast pipe, duct or
conduit spools.
f. Type F - Integrally cast pipe, duct or conduit.
g. Type G - Saw cut or line-drill and remove area 1 IN larger than outside dimensions of duct, pipe
or conduit.
h. Type H - Core drill.
i. Type I - Block out area. At later date, place new concrete with integrally cast sheet metal or pipe
sleeve.
2. Provide seals of material and method described as follows.
a. Category 1 - Modular Mechanical Seal.
b. Category 2 - Roof curb and flashing according to SMACNA specifications unless otherwise noted
on Drawings.
c. Category 3 - 12 GA sheet metal drip sleeve set in bed of silicon sealant with backing rod and
sealant used in sleeve annullus.
d. Category 4 - Backer rod and sealant.
e. Category 5 - Full depth compressible sealant with escutcheons on both sides of opening.
f. Category 6 - Full depth compressible sealant and flanges on both sides of opening. Flanges
constructed of same material as duct, fastened to duct and minimum 1/2 IN larger than opening.
g. Category 7 - Full depth compressible sealant and finish sealant or full depth expanding foam
sealant depending on application.
3. Furnish openings and sealing materials through new floors, roofs, partitions and walls in accordance
with Schedule A, Openings and Penetrations for New Construction.
4. Furnish openings and sealing materials through existing floors, roofs, partitions and walls in
accordance with Schedule B, Openings and Penetrations for Existing Construction.
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Contrallmprovements Project
Section IV
IV-143
SCHEDULE A. OPENINGS AND PENETRATIONS SCHEDULE
FOR NEW CONSTRUCTION
DUCTS PIPING CONDUIT
OPENING SEAL OPENING SEAL OPENING SEAL
APPLICATIONS TYPE CATEGORY TYPE CATEGORY TYPE CATEGORY
Through floors on grade C 4 C 7 C 4
above water table F NotReq F Not Req F Not Req
I 4 1<1) 7 1(1) 7
Through floors in C 4 C 4 F NotReq
washdown areas I 4 H(2) 3 H (2) 3
1<1) 4 1(1) 7
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
IV-144
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SCHEDULE B. OPENINGS AND PENETRATIONS SCHEDULE
FOR EXISTING CONSTRUCTION
DUCTS PIPING CONDUIT
OPENING SEAL OPENING SEAL OPENING SEAL
APPUCA nONS TYPE CATEGORY TYPE CATEGORY TYPE CATEGORY
Through floors in G 3 G 3 G 3
washdown areas H(2) 3 H (2) 3
Through exterior wall 8 7 8(1) 7 8 (1)(3) 7
below grade above 8 (3) 1 H(2) 7
water table H(2) 7
Through exterior wall G 6 G (1)(3) 5 G(1)(3) 5
above grade H(2) 5 H (2) 7
Through interior walls G 4 G(1)(3) 4 G (1)(3) 4
and slabs not covered H (2) 4 H (2) 4
by the above
applications
(1) Multiple piping 3 IN and smaller or multiple conduits.
(2) Single pipe 3 IN and smaller or single conduit.
(3) Single pipe or conduit larger than 3 IN.
END OF SECTION
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
1V-145
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
1V-146
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 02110
SITE CLEARING
PART 1 . GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Site clearing, tree protection, stripping topsoil and demolition.
B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Section II - Instructions to Bidders.
2. Section 111 - General Conditions.
3. Section IV - Supplemental Technical Specifications, Division 02, Section 02260 - Topsoiling and
Finished Grading.
PART 2 . PRODUCTS. (NOT APPLICABLE TO THIS SECTION)
PART 3 . EXECUTION
3.1 SITE CLEARING
A. Topsoil Removal:
1. Strip topsoil to depths encountered.
a. Remove heavy growths of grass before stripping.
b. Separate from underlying subsoil or objectionable material.
2. Stockpile topsoil where directed by Owner.
a. Construct storage piles to freely drain surface water.
b. Seed or cover storage piles to prevent erosion.
3. Borrow topsoil: Reasonably free of subsoil, objects over 2 IN DIA, weeds and roots.
B. Clearing and Grubbing:
1. Grub (remove) from within limits of construction all stumps, roots, root mats, logs and debris
encountered.
a. Totally grub under areas to be paved.
b. Grubbing in lawn areas:
1) In cut areas, totally grub.
2) In fill areas, where fill is less than 3 FT totally grub ground.
3) Where fill is 3 FT or more in depth, stumps may be left no higher than 6 IN above existing
ground surface.
C. Disposal of Waste Materials:
1. Do not bum combustible materials on site.
2. Remove all waste materials from site.
3. Do not bury organic matter on site.
3.2 ACCEPTANCE
A. Upon completion of the site clearing, obtain Engineer's acceptance of the extent of clearing, depth of
stripping and rough grade.
END OF SECTION
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Contrallmprovements Project
Section IV
IV-147
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Contrallmprovements Project
Section IV
1V-148
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 02200
EARTHWORK
PART 1 . GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Earthwork.
B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Section II - Instructions to Bidders.
2. Section III - General Conditions.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Referenced Standards:
1. ASTM International (ASTM):
a. C33, Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates.
b. 0698, Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort
(12.400 ft-lbf/ft3).
c. D1557, Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort
(56,000 ft-lbf/ft3(2,700 kN-m/m)).
d. 02487, Standard Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil Classification
System).
e. 04253, Standard Test Methods for Maximum Index Density of Soils Using a Vibratory Table.
f. 04254, Test Methods for Minimum Index Density of Soils and Calculation of Relative Density.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings:
1. See Section 01340 for requirements for the mechanics and administration of the submittal process.
2. Product technical data including:
a. Acknowledgement that products submitted meet requirements of standards referenced.
b. Manufacturer's installation instructions.
3. Certifications.
4. Test reports:
a. Soils inspection and testing results.
B. Samples:
1. Submit samples and source of fill and backfill materials proposed for use.
2. Submit samples and source of borrow materials proposed for use.
PART 2 . PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Fill and Backfill: Selected material approved by Soils Engineer from site excavation or from off site. borrow.
B. Granular Fill Under Building Floor Slabs-On-Grade: Clean, crushed, nonporous rock, crushed or
uncrushed gravel complying with ASTM C33 gradation size No. 67, 314 IN to No.4.
PART 3 . EXECUTION
3.1 PROTECTION
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section N
N-149
A. Protect existing surface and subsurface features on-site and adjacent to site as follows:
1. Provide barricades, coverings, or other types of protection necessary to prevent damage to existing
items indicated to remain in place.
2. Protect and maintain bench marks, monuments or other established reference points and property
comers.
a. If disturbed or destroyed, replace at own expense to full satisfaction of Owner.
3. Verify location of utilities.
a. Omission or inclusion of utility items does not constitute non-existence or definite location.
b. Secure and examine local utility records for location data.
c. Take necessary precautions to protect existing utilities from damage due to any construction
activity.
d. Repair damages to utility items at own expense.
e. In case of damage, notify Engineer at once so required protective measures may be taken.
4. Maintain free of damage, existing sidewalks, structures, and pavement, not indicated to be removed.
a. Any item known or unknown or not properly located that is inadvertently damaged shall be
repaired to original condition.
b. All repairs to be made and paid for by Contractor.
5. Provide full access to public and private premises, fire hydrants, street crossings, sidewalks and other
points as designated by Owner to prevent serious interruption of travel.
6. Maintain stockpiles and excavations in such a manner to prevent inconvenience or damage to
structures on-site or on adjoining property.
7. Avoid surcharge or excavation procedures which can result in heaving, caving, or slides.
B. Salvageable Items: Carefully remove items to be salvaged, and store on Owner's premises unless
otherwise directed.
C. Dispose of waste materials, legally, off site.
1. Burning, as a means of waste disposal, is not permitted.
3.2 SITE EXCAVATION AND GRADING
I
Ii
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
A. The work includes all operations in connection with excavation, borrow, construction of fills and
embankments, rough grading, and disposal of excess materials in connection with the preparation of the
site(s) for construction of the proposed facilities.
B. Excavation and Grading: Perform as required by the Contract Drawings.
1. Contract Drawings may indicate both existing grade and finished grade required for construction of
Project.
a. Stake all units, structures, piping, roads, parking areas and walks and establish their elevations.
b. Perform other layout work required.
c. Replace property corner markers to original location if disturbed or destroyed.
2. Preparation of ground surface for embankments or fills: .
a. Before fill is started, scarify to a minimum depth of 6 IN in all proposed embankment and fill
areas.
b. Where ground surface is steeper than one vertical to four horizontal, plow surface in a manner to
bench and break up surface so that fill material will bind with existing surface.
3. Protection of finish grade:
a. During construction, shape and drain embankment and excavations.
b. Maintain ditches and drains to provide drainage at all times.
c. Protect graded areas against action of elements prior to acceptance of work.
d. Reestablish grade where settlement or erosion' occurs.
C. Borrow:
1. Provide necessary amount of approved .fill compacted to density equal to that indicated in this
Specification.
2. Include cost of all borrow material in original proposal.
3. Fill material to be approved by Soils Engineer prior to placement.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
1V-150
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.4
A Include in bid price the cost of inspection services indicated herein as being performed by the Soils
Engineer.
B. Moisture density relations, to be established by the Soils Engineer required for all materials to be
compacted.
C. Extent of compaction testing will be as necessary to assure compliance with Specifications.
D. Give minimum of 24 HR advance notice to Soils Engineer when ready for compaction or subgrade testing
and inspection.
E. Should any compaction density test or subgrade inspection fail to meet Specification requirements, perform
corrective work as necessary.
F. Pay for all costs associated with corrective work and retesting resulting from failing compaction density
tests.
COMPACTION DENSITY REQUIREMENTS
A. Obtain approval from Soils Engineer with regard to suitability of soils and acceptable subgrade prior to
subsequent operations.
B. Provide dewatering system necessary to successfully complete compaction and construction requirements.
C. Remove frozen, loose, wet, or soft material and replace with approved material as directed by Soils
Engineer.
D. Stabilize subgrade with well graded granular materials as directed by Soils Engineer.
E. Assure by results of testing that compaction densities comply with the following requirements:
1. Sitework:
LOCATION
Under Paved Areas, Sidewalks and Piping:
Cohesive soils
Cohesionless soils
COMPACTION OENSITY
100 percent per ASTM 0698
75 percent relative density per ASTM 04253 and
ASTM 04254
Unpaved Areas:
Cohesive soils
Cohesion less soils
85 percent of ASTM D698
60 percent relative density per ASTM 04253 and
ASTM 04254
2. Structures:
LOCATION
Inside of structures under foundations, under
equipment support pads, under slabs-on-grade and
scarified existing subgrade under fill material
COMPACTION OENSITY
95 percent per ASTM 01557
Outside structures next to walls, piers, columns and
any other structure exterior member
90 percent per ASTM 01557
3. Specific areas:
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
1V-1S1
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Contrallmprovements Project
Section IV
IV-152
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
LOCA liON
Outside structures under equipment support
foundations
COMPACTION DENSITY
95 percent per ASTM 01557
Under void
85 percent per ASTM 01557
Granular fill under base slabs with pressure relief
valves, and under building floor slabs-on-grade
75 percent relative density per ASTM 04253 and
ASTM 04254
3.5 EXCAVATION, FilLING, AND BACKFilLING FOR STRUCTURES
A. General:
1. In general, work includes, but is not necessarily limited to, excavation for structures and retaining
walls, removal of underground obstructions and undesirable material, backfilling, filling, and fill,
backfill, and subgrade cOmpaction. . .
2. Obtain fill and backfill material necessary to produce grades required.
a. Materials and source to be approved by Soils Engineer.
b. Excavated material approved by Soils Engineer may also be used for fill and backfill.
3. In this Section of the Specifications, the word "foundations" includes footings, base slabs, foundation
walls, mat foundations, grade beams, piers and any other support placed directly on soil.
4. In the paragraphs of this Section of the Specifications, the word "soil" also includes any type of rock
subgrade that may be present at or below existing subgrade levels.
B. Excavation Requirements for Structures:
1. General:
a. Do not commence excavation for foundations for structures until Soils Engineer approves:
1) The removal of topsoil and other unsuitable and undesirable material from existing
subgrade.
2) Density and moisture content of site area compacted fill material meets requirements of
specifications.
3) Site surcharge or mass fill material can be removed from entire construction site or portion
thereof.
4) Surcharge or mass fill material has been removed from construction area or portions
thereof.
b. Engineer grants approval to begin excavations.
2. Dimensions:
a. Excavate to elevations and dimensions indicated or specified.
b. Allow additional space as required for construction operations and inspection of foundations.
3. Removal of obstructions and undesirable materials in excavation includes, but is not necessarily
limited to, removal of old foundations, existing construction, unsuitable subgrade soils, expansive type
soils, and any other materials which may be concealed beneath present grade, as required to execute
. work indicated on Contract Drawings.
a. If undesirable material and obstructions are encountered during excavation, remove material and
replace as directed by Soils Engineer.
4. level off bottoms of excavations to receive foundations, floor slabs, equipment support pads, or
compacted fill.
a. Remove loose materials and bring excavations into approved condition to receive concrete or fill
material.
b. Where compacted fill material must be placed to bring subgrade elevation up to underside of
construction, scarify existing subgrade upon which fill material is to be placed to a depth of 6 IN
and then compact to density stated in this Specification Section before fill material can be placed
thereon.
c. Do not carry excavations lower than shown for foundations except as directed by Soils Engineer
or Engineer.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
d. If any part of excavations is carried below required depth without authorization, maintain
excavation and start foundation from excavated level with concrete of same strength as required
for superimposed foundation, and no extra compensation will be made to Contractor therefore.
5. Make excavations large enough for working space, forms, dampproofing, waterproofing, and
inspection.
6. Notify Soils Engineer and Engineer as soon as excavation is completed in order that subgrades may
be inspected.
a. Do not commence further construction until subgrade under compacted fill material, under
foundations, under floor slabs-on-grade, under equipment support pads, and under retaining wall
footings has been inspected and approved by the Soils Engineer as being free of undesirable
material, being of compaction density required by this specification, and being capable of
supporting the allowable foundation design bearing pressures and superimposed foundation, fill,
and building loads to be placed thereon.
b. Soils Engineer shall be given the opportunity to inspect subgrade below fill material both prior to
and after subgrade compaction. .
c. Place fill material, foundations, retaining wall footings, floor slabs-on-grade, and equipment
support pads as soon as weather conditions permit after excavation is completed, inspected, and
approved and after forms and reinforcing are inspected and approved.
d. Before concrete or fill material is placed, protect approved subgrade from becoming loose, wet,
frozen, or soft due to weather, construction operations, or other reasons.
7. Dewatering:
a. Where groundwater is or is expected to be encountered during excavation, install a dewatering
system to prevent softening and disturbance of subgrade below foundations and fill material, to
allow foundations and fill material to be placed in the dry, and to maintain a stable excavation
side slope.
b. Groundwater shall be maintained at least 3 FT below the bottom of any excavation.
c. Review soils investigation before beginning excavation and determine where groundwater is
likely to be encountered during excavation.
d. Employ dewatering specialist for selecting and operating dewatering system.
e. Keep dewatering system in operation until dead load of structure exceeds possible buoyant uplift
force on structure.
1. Dispose of groundwater to an area which will not interfere with construction operations or
damage existing construction.
1) Install groundwater monitoring wells as necessary.
g. Shut off dewatering system at such a rate to prevent a quick upsurge of water that might weaken
the subgrade.
8. Subgrade stabilization:
a. If subgrade under foundations, fill material, floor slabs-on-grade, or equipment support pads is in
a frozen, loose, wet, or soft condition before construction is placed thereon, remove frozen,
loose, wet, or soft material and replace with approved compacted material as directed by Soils
Engineer.
b. Provide compaction density of replacement material as stated in this specification section.
c. Loose, wet, or soft materials, when approved by Soils Engineer, may be stabilized by a
compacted working mat of well graded crushed stone.
d. Compact stone mat thoroughly into subgrade to avoid future migration of fines into the stone
voids.
e. Remove and replace frozen materials as directed by Soils Engineer.
f. Method of stabilization shall be performed as directed by Soils Engineer.
g. Do not place further construction on the repaired subgrades, until the subgrades have been
approved by the Soils Engineer.
9. Do not place floor slabs-on-grade including equipment support pads until subgrade below has been
approved, piping has been tested and approved, reinforcement placement has been approved, and
Contractor receives approval to commence slab construction.
a. Do not place building floor slabs-on-grade including equipment support pads when temperature
of air surrounding the slab and pads is or is expected to be below 40 DegF before structure is
completed and heated to a temperature of at least 50 DegF.
I
I
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
N-153
10. Protection of structures:
a. Prevent new and existing structures from becoming damaged due to construction operations or
other reasons.
b. Prevent subgrade under new and existing foundations from becoming wet and undermined
during construction due to presence of surface or subsurface water or due to construction
operations.
11. Shoring:
a. Shore, sheet pile, slope, or brace excavations as required to prevent them from collapsing.
b. Remove shoring as backfilling progresses but only when banks are stable and safe from caving
or collapse.
12. Drainage:
a. Control grading around structures so that ground is pitched to prevent water from running into
excavated areas or damaging structures.
b. Maintain excavations where foundations, floor slabs, equipment support pads or fill material are
to be placed free of water. . .
c. Provide pumping required to keep excavated spaces clear of water during construction.
d. Should any water be encountered in the excavation, notify Engineer and Soils Engineer.
e. Provide free discharge of water by trenches, pumps, wells, well points, or other means as
necessary and drain to point of disposal that will not damage existing or new construction or
interfere with construction operations. .
C. Fill and Backfill Inside of Structure and Below Foundations, Base Slabs, Floor Slabs, Equipment Support
Pads and Piping:
1. General:
a. Subgrade to receive fill or backfill shall be free of undesirable material as determined by Soils
Engineer and scarified to a depth of 6 IN and compacted to density specified herein.
b. Surface may be stepped by at not more than 12 IN per step or may be sloped at not more than 2
percent.
c. Do not place any fill or backfill material until subgrade under fill or backfill has been inspected
and approved by Soils Engineer as being free of undesirable material and compacted to
specified density. .
2. Obtain approval of fill and backfill material and source from Soils Engineer prior to placing the
material.
3. Granular fill under floor slabs-on-grade: Place all floor slabs-on-grade on a minimum of 6 IN of
granular fill unless otherwise indicated.
4. Fill and backfill placement
a. Prior to placing fill and backfill material, optimum moisture and maximum density properties for
proposed material shall be obtained from Soils Engineer.
b. Place fill and backfill material in thin lifts as necessary to obtain required compaction density.
c. Compact material by means otequipment of sufficient size and proper type to obtain specified
density;
d. Use hand operated equipment for filling and backfilling next to walls.
e. Do not place fill and backfill when the temperature is less than 40 DegF and when subgrade to
receive fill and backfill material is frozen, wet, loose, or soft.
f. Use vibratory equipment to compact granular material; do not use water.
5. Where fill material is required below foundations, place fill material, conforming to the required density
and moisture content, outside the exterior limits of foundations located around perimeter of structure
the following horizontal distance. whichever is greater:
a. As required to provide fill material to indicated finished grade.
b. 5 FT. _
c. Distance equal to depth of compacted fill below bottom of foundations.
d. As directed by Soils Engineer.
D. Filling and Backfilling Outside of Structures.
1. This paragraph of this Specification applies to fill and backfill placed outside of structures above
bottom level of both foundations and piping but not under paving.
2. Provide material as approved by Soils Engineer for filling and backfilling outside of structures.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section N
IV-154
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3. Fill and backfill placement:
a. Prior to placing fill and backfill material, obtain optimum moisture and maximum density
properties for proposed material from Soils Engineer.
b. Place fill and backfill material in thin lifts as necessary to obtain required compaction density.
c. Compact material with equipment of proper type and size to obtain density specified.
d. Use only hand operated equipment for filling and backfilling next to walls and retaining walls.
e. Do not place fill or backfill material when temperature is less than 40 DegF and when subgrade
to receive material is frozen, wet, loose, or soft.
f. Use vibratory equipment for compacting granular material; do not use water.
4. Backfilling against walls:
a. Do not backfill around any part of structures until each part has reached specified 28-day
compressive strength and backfill material has been approved.
b. Do not start backfilling until concrete forms have been removed, trash removed from excavations,
pointing of masonry work, concrete finishing, dampproofing and waterproofing have been
completed. . .
c. Do not place fills against walls until floor slabs at top, bottom. and at intermediate levels of walls
are in place and have reached 28-day required compressive strength to prevent wall movement.
d. Bring backfill and fill up uniformly around the structures and individual walls, piers, or columns.
E. Backfilling Outside of Structures Under Piping or Paving:
1. When backfilling outside of structures requires placing backfill material under piping or paving, the
material shall be placed from bottom of excavation to underside of piping or paving at the density
required for fill under piping or paving as indicated in this Section.
2. This compacted material shall extend transversely to the centerline of piping or paving a horizontal
distance each side of the exterior edges of piping or paving equal to the depth of backfill measured
from bottom of excavation to underside of piping or paving.
3. Provide special compacted bedding or compacted subgrade material under piping or paving as
required by other sections of these Specifications.
3.6 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS
I
I
I
I
I
A. Erosion Control:
1. Conduct work to minimize erosion of site.
2. Construct stilling areas to settle and detain eroded material.
3. Remove eroded material washed off site.
4. Clean streets daily of any spillage of dirt, rocks or debris from equipment entering or leaving site.
END OF SECTION
I
I
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
IV-155
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
1V-156
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 02221
TRENCHING, BACKFILLING, AND COMPACTING FOR UTILITIES
PART 1 . GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Excavation, trenching, backfilling and compacting for all underground utilities, including but not limited
to:
a. Wastewater piping.
b. Process piping.
c. Sewers, channel, and drain piping.
d. Water piping (potable, plant, process and non-potable).
e. Relocation of existing piping.
f. Electrical ductbanks, conduits, and direct burial cables.
g. Other related utility and process appurtenances.
B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Section II - Instructions to Bidders.
2. Section III - General Conditions.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Referenced Standards:
1. ASTM International (ASTM):
a. C33, Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates.
b. 0698, Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard
Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/ft3 (600 kN-m1m3)).
c. 01557, Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified
Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/ft3 (2,700 kN-m1m3)).
d. 02487, Standard Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil Classification
System).
e. 04253, Standard Test Methods for Maximum Index Density and Unit Weight of Soils Using a
Vibratory Table.
f. 04254, Standard Test Methods for Minimum Index Density and Unit Weight of Soils and
Calculation of Relative Density.
B. Qualifications: Hire an independent soils laboratory to conduct in-place moisture-density tests for
backfilling to assure that all work complies with this Specification.
C. Registered professional engineer licensed in Florida for design of trench shoring systems or other trench
safety plans.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Excavation: All excavation will be defined as unclassified.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings:
1. See Section 01340 for requirements for the mechanics and administration of the submittal process.
2. Product technical data including:
a. Acknowledgement that products submitted meet requirements of standards referenced.
b. Manufacturer's installation instructions.
3. Submit respective pipe or conduit manufacturer's data regarding bedding methods of installation and
general recommendations.
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Contrallmprovements Project
Section IV
IV-157
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
1V-158
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
4. Submit sieve analysis reports on all granular materials.
B. Miscellaneous Submittals:
1. See Section 01340 for requirements for the mechanics and administration of the submittal process.
2. Trench Safety Plan and/or trench shoring drawing:
a. Trench Safety Plan and/or trench shoring drawings submittal is required only as evidence that
plans and drawings have been prepared if required by Authorities Having Jurisdiction.
b. Engineer is not responsible to, and will not, review and approve.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Avoid overloading or surcharge a sufficient distance back from edge of excavation to prevent slides or
caving.
1. Maintain and trim excavated materials in such manner to be as little inconvenience as possible to
public and adjoining property owners.
B. Provide full access to public and private premises and fire hydrants, sidewalks and other points as
designated by Owner to prevent serious interruption of travel.
C. Protect and maintain bench marks, monuments or other established points and reference points and if
disturbed or destroyed, replace items to full satisfaction of Owner and controlling agency.
O. Verify location of existing underground utilities.
PART 2. PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Backfill Material:
1. As approved by Engineer.
a. Free of rock cobbles, roots,-sod or other organic matter, and frozen material.
b. Moisture content at time of placement: 3 percent plus/minus of optimum moisture content as
specified in accordance with ASTM 0698.
PART 3 . EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Remove and dispose of unsuitable materials as directed by Soils Engineer to site provided by Contractor.
3.2 EXCAVATION
A. Unclassified Excavation: Remove rock excavation, clay, silt, gravel, hard pan, loose shale, and loose
stone as directed by Soils Engineer.
B. Excavation for Appurtenances:
1. 12 IN (minimum) clear distance between outer surface and embankment.
C. Groundwater Dewatering:
1. Where groundwater is, or is expected to be, encountered during excavation, install a dewatering
system to prevent softening and disturbance of subgrade to allow pipe, bedding and backfill material
to be placed in the dry, and to maintain a stable trench wall or side slope.
2. Groundwater shall be drawn down and maintained at least 3 FT below the bottom of any trench or
manhole excavation prior to excavation.
3. Review soils investigation before beginning excavation and determine where groundwater is likely to
be encountered during excavation.
a. Employ dewatering specialist for selecting and operating dewatering system.
4. Keep dewatering system in operation until dead load of pipe, structure and backfill exceeds possible
buoyant uplift force on pipe or structure.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
5. Dispose of groundwater to an area which will not interfere with construction operations or damage
existing construction.
6. Install groundwater monitoring wells as necessary.
7. Shut off dewatering system at such a rate to prevent a quick upsurge of water that might weaken the
subgrade.
8. Cost of groundwater dewatering shall be included in the lineal foot unit price of the pipe installation.
D. Trench Excavation:
1. Excavate trenches by open cut method to depth necessary to accommodate work.
a. Support existing utility lines and yard piping where proposed work crosses at a lower elevation.
1) Stabilize excavation to prevent undermining of existing utility and yard piping.
2. Open trench outside buildings, units, and structures:
a. No more than the distance between two manholes, structures, units, or 300 LF, whichever is
less.
b. Field adjust limitations as weather conditions dictate.
3. Any trench or portion of trench, which is opened and remains idle for 7 calendar days, or longer, as
determined by the Owner, may be directed to be immediately refilled, without completion of work, at
no additional cost to Owner.
a. Said trench may not be reopened until Owner is satisfied that work associated with trench will be
prosecuted with dispatch.
4. Observe following trenching criteria:
a. Trench size:
1) Maximum trench width at top of pipe or conduit may not exceed outside diameter of utility
service by more than the following dimensions:
OVERALL DIAMETER OF
UTILITY SERVICE
33 IN and less
more than 33 IN
EXCESS DIMENSION
181N
24 IN
2) Cut trench walls vertically from bottom of trench to 1 FT above top of pipe, conduit, or utility
service.
3) Keep trenches free of surface water runoff.
a) Include cost in Bid.
b) No separate payment for surface water runoff pumping will be made.
E. Trenching for Electrical Installations:
1. Observe Paragraph 3.2C. "Trench Excavation".
2. Modify for electrical installations as follows:
a. Open no more than 600 LF of trench in exterior locations for trenches more than 12 IN but not
more than 30 IN wide.
b. Any length of trench may be opened in exterior locations for trenches which are 12 IN wide or
less.
c. Do not over excavate trench.
d. Cut trenches for electrical runs with minimum 30 IN cover, unless otherwise specified or shown
on Drawings.
e. See Division 16 for additional requirements.
3.3 PREPARATION OF FOUNDATION FOR PIPE LAYING
A. Over-Excavation:
1. Backfill and compact to 90 percent of maximum dry density per ASTM D698.
B. Subgrade Stabilization:
1. Stabilize the subgrade when directed by the Owner.
2. Observe the following requirements when unstable trench bottom materials are encountered.
a. Notify Owner when unstable materials are encountered.
1) Define by drawing station locations and limits.
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Contro/lmprovements Project
Section IV
IV.159
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
1V-160
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
b. Remove unstable trench bottom caused by Contractor failure to dewater, rainfall, or Contractor
operations.
1) Replace with subgrade stabilization with no additional compensation.
3.4 BACKFilLING METHODS
A. Do not backfill until tests to be performed on system show system is in full compliance to specified
requirements.
B. Common Trench Backfill:
1. Perform in accordance with the following:
a. Place backfill in lift thicknesses capable of being compacted to densities specified.
b. Observe specific manufacturer's recommendations regarding backfilling and compaction.
c. Avoid displacing joints and appurtenances or causing any horizontal or vertical misalignment,
separation, or distortion.
C. Water flushing for consolidation is not permitted.
D. Backfilling for Electrical Installations:
1. Observe Paragraph 3.4C. or O. "Backfilling Methods."
2. Modify for electrical installation as follows:
a. Observe notes and details on electrical drawings for fill in immediate vicinity of direct burial
cables.
3.5 COMPACTION
A. General:
1. Place and assure bedding, backfill, and fill materials achieve an equal or "higher" degree of
compaction than undisturbed materials adjacent to the work.
2. In no case shall degree of compaction below "Minimum Compaction" specified be accepted.
B. Compaction Requirements:
1. Unless noted otherwise on Drawings or more stringently by other sections of these Specifications,
comply with following trench compaction criteria:
MINIMUM COMPACTIONS
LOCATION
SOIL TYPE
DENSITY
2. Bedding material:
All locations
Cohesion less soils
75 percent of max
relative density by ASTM
04253 and..D4254
3. Common trench backfill:
Under pavements
roadways surfaces,
within highway
right-of-ways
Cohesive soils
90 percent of max
dry density by
ASTM 0698
Cohesion less soils
60 percent of relative
density by ASTM D4253
and D4254
Under turfed, sodded
plant seeded, non-
traffic areas
Cohesive soils
85 percent of max
dry density by
ASTM D698
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Cohesion less soils
40 percent of relative
density by ASTM D4253
and D4254
3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing:
1. Perform in-place moisture-density tests as directed by the Owner.
2. Perform tests through recognized testing laboratory approved by Owner.
3. Costs of "Passing" tests paid by Owner.
4. Perform additional tests as directed until compaction meets or exceeds requirements.
5. Cost associated with "Failing" tests shall be paid by Contractor.
6. Reference to Engineer in this section will imply Soils Engineer when employed by Owner and directed
by Engineer to undertake necessary inspections as approvals as necessary.
7. Assure Owner has immediate access for testing of all soils related work.
8. Ensure excavations are safe for testing personnel.
END OF SECTION
Marshall street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Contra/Improvements Project
Section IV
1V-161
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Faci/ities
Odor Contra/Improvements Project
Section N
N-162
I
I
Ii
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 02260
TOPSOILlNG AND FINISHED GRADING
PART 1 . GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Topsoiling and finished grading.
B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Section II - Instructions to Bidders.
2. Section 111- General Conditions.
3. Section IV - Supplemental Technical Specifications, Division 02, Section 02110 - Site Clearing.
C. Location of Work: All areas within limits of grading and all areas outside limits of grading which are
disturbed in the course of the work.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings:
1. See Section 01340 for requirements for the mechanics and administration of the submittal process.
2. Project Data: Test reports for furnished topsoil.
1.3 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Verify amount of topsoil stockpiled and determine amount of additional topsoil, if necessary to complete
work.
PART 2 . PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Topsoil:
1. Original surface soil typical of the area.
2. Existing topsoil stockpiled under Section 02110.
3. Capable of supporting native plant growth.
2.2 TOLERANCES
A. Finish Grading Tolerance: 0.1 FT plus/minus from required elevations.
PART 3 . EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Correct, adjust and/or repair rough graded areas.
1. Cut off mounds and ridges.
2. Fill gullies and depressions.
3. Perform other necessary repairs.
4. Bring all sub-grades to specified contours, even and properly compacted.
B. Loosen surface to depth of 2 IN, minimum.
C. Remove all stones and debris over 21N in any dimension.
3.2 ROUGH GRADE REVIEW
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
IV-163
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Contrallmprovements Project
Section IV
1V-164
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
A. Reviewed by Engineer in Section 02110, Site Clearing.
3.3 . PLACING TOPSOIL
A. Do not place when subgrade is wet or frozen enough to cause c1odding.
B. Spread to compacted depth of 4 IN for all disturbed earth areas.
C. If topsoil stockpiled is less than amount required for work, furnish additional topsoil at no cost to Owner.
D. Provide finished surface free of stones, sticks, or other material 1 IN or more in any dimension.
E. Provide finished surface smooth and true to required grades.
F. Restore stockpile area to condition of rest of finished work.
3.4 ACCEPTANCE
A. Upon completion of topsoiling, obtain Engineer's acceptance of grade and surface.
B. Make test holes where directed to verify proper placement and thickness of topsoil.
END OF SECTION
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 06610
FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC FABRICATIONS
FLOOR MATERIALS
PART 1 . GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Fiberglass reinforced plastic floor plate and plank material.
2. . Used for odor control.
B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Section II - Instructions to Bidders.
2. Section 111- General Conditions.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Referenced Standards:
1. ASTM International (ASTM):
a. 0635, Test Method for Rate of Burning and/or Extent and Time of Burning of Self-Supporting
Plastics in a Horizontal Position.
b. E84, Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
2. U.S. Department of Labor, Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA):
a. 29 CFR1910, OSHA Safety and Health Standards for General Industry (referred to herein as
OSHA standards).
3. Building code:
a. Florida Building Code and associated standards, 2004 Edition, including all Clearwater and
Pinellas amendments, referred to herein as Building Code.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Skid-resistant:
1. Manufacturer's standard applied abrasive integral grit coating.
2. Abrasive coated tape is not acceptable.
1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. The Contractor shall furnish, fabricate, and install all fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) floor material, with
all appurtenances, accessories and incidentals necessary to produce a complete, operable and
serviceable installation as shown on the Contract Drawings and as specified herein.
B. System is intended to provide sealed closures/covers to contain odors.
C. Provide tight joints with necessary splice plates, gaskets, seals, etc., to minimize leakage.
1.5 SUBMIIT ALS
A. Shop Drawings:
1. See Section 01340 for requirements for the mechanics and administration of the submittal process.
2. Fabrication and/or layout drawings.
a. Plan showing profile, location, section and details of each item including anchorage or support
system(s).
b. Locations and type of expansion joints.
c. Materials of construction including shop applied coatings.
d. Material sizes, types, styles, part or catalog numbers, complete details for the fabrication and
erection of components including, but not limited to, location, lengths, type and sizes of
fasteners, clip angles, member sizes, and connection details.
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
N-165
e. Listing of all accessory items being provided indicating material, finish, etc.
3. Product technical data including:
a. Acknowledgement that products submitted meet requirements of standards referenced.
b. Manufacturer's installation instructions.
c. Manufacturer's recommendations on reinforcing field cut openings.
d. Manufacturer's published literature including structural design data, structural properties data,
loaclldetlection tables, certificates of compliance, and concrete anchor systems.
4. Manufacturer's full line of standard colors available for each component.
5. Submit sample pieces of each item specified herein for acceptance by the ENGINEER as to quality
and color. Sample pieces shall be manufactured by the same method to be used in the WORK.
B. Miscellaneous Submittals:
1. Complete design calculations of all supporting structure and fastening conditions.
a. Design calculations to be for information only.
b. Engineerwill not review or take any action on submittal.
2. Certification that all components and systems have been designed and fabricated to meet the loading
requirements specified.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
I
I
I
I
I
I
A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable:
1. Floor products:
a. Fibergrate Composite Structures International.
b. McNichols.
c. Strongweld.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
A. Delivery of Materials: Manufactured materials shall be delivered in original, unbroken pallets, packages,
containers, or bundles bearing the label of the manufacturer. Adhesives, resins and their catalysts and
hardeners shall be crated or boxed separately and noted as such to facilitate their movement to a dry
indoor storage facility.
B. Storage of Products: All materials shall be carefully handled to prevent them from abrasion, cracking,
chipping, twisting, other deformations, and other types of damage. Store items in an .enclosed area and
free from contact with soil and water. Store adhesives, resins and their catalysts and hardeners in dry
indoor storage facilities between 70 and 85 degrees Fahrenheit (21 to 29 degrees Celsius) until they are
required.
PART 2. PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
2.2 FABRICATION
A. General:
1. All FRP items furnished under this Section shall be composed of fiberglass reinforcement and resin in
qualities, quantities, properties, arrangements and dimensions as necessary to meet the design
requirements and dimensions as specified in the Contract Documents.
2. Fiberglass reinforcement shall be bi-directional roving in sufficient quantities as needed by the
application ancllor physical properties required.
3. Resin shall be vinyl ester with chemical formulations as necessary to provide the corrosion resistance,
strength and other physical properties as required.
4. All finished surfaces of FRP items and fabrications shall be smooth, resin-rich, free of voids and
without dry spots, cracks, crazes or unreinforced areas. All glass fibers shall be well covered with
resin to protect against their exposure due to wear or weathering.
5. All mechanical plate clips shall be manufactured ofTypa 316SS (stainless steel).
B. Floor Plate:
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Contrallmprovements Project
Section IV
1V-166
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1. The plate shall have a nominal thickness of 1/S". Percentage of glass (by weight) shall not exceed
35% so as to achieve maximum corrosion resistance, and as required to maintain the structural
requirements of the Contract Documents.
2. Non-slip surfacing:
a. Floor plate shall be have a medium gritted surface, integrally molded into the plate.
3. Fire rating:
a. All fire retardant plate products shall (have a tested flame spread rating of 25 or less per ASTM
E-84 Tunnel Test Fire retardant plates shall also have tested bum time of less than 30 seconds
and an extent of bum rate of less than or equal to 10 millimeters per ASTM D635).
4. LoadlDeflection:
a. 1/S. plate is designed for use as a covering only; not recommended for unsupported and traffic
loaded service.
5. Measurements:
a. Plate supplied shall meet the dimensional requirements and tolerances as shown or specified.
1) The Contractor shall provide and/or verify measurements in field for work fabriCated to fit
field conditions as required by manufacturer to complete the work. Determine correct size
and locations of required holes or cutouts from field dimensions before plate fabrication.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
6. Layout:
a. Each floor plate section shall be tied down with appropriate flush anchors or clips.
b. Manufacturer to provide openings and holes where located on the contract drawings.
c. Plate openings which fit around protrusions (pipes, cables, machinery, etc.) shall be field cut or,
when shop fabricated, discontinuous at approximately the centerline of opening so each section
of plate is readily removable.
d. Additional support at opening shall be supplied by contractor.
e. Plate shall be fabricated free from warps, twists, or other defects which affect appearance and
serviceability.
f. Special detailing is required to seal areas under the stair areas.
C. Pultruded Interlocking Floor Planks
1. The pultruded flooring shall have a nominal thickness of 2".
2. All interlocking flooring is to be manufactured by the pultrusion process with a glass content minimum
of 45%, maximum of 55% by weight. The interlocking flooring shall be composed of fiberglass
reinforcement and resin in qualities, quantities, properties, arrangements, and dimensions as
necessary to meet the design requirements and dimensions as specified in the Contract Documents.
3. Fiberglass reinforcement for pultruded flooring shall be a combination of continuous roving,
continuous strand mat, and surfacing veil in sufficient quantities as needed by the application and/or
physical properties required.
4. Resin for pultruded flooring shall be ISOFR, fire retardant isophthalic polyester with chemical
formulation necessary to provide the corrosion resistance, strength and other physical properties as
required.
5. All pultruded interlocking flooring shall be further protected from ultraviolet (UV) attack with 1) integral
UV inhibitors in the resin and 2) a synthetic surfacing veil to help produce a resin rich surface.
6. Non-slip gritted surfacing.
7. Fire rating:
a. All fire retardant plate products shall (have a tested flame spread rating of 25 or less per ASTM
E-S4 Tunnel Test. Fire retardant plates shall also have tested burn time of less than 30 seconds
and an extent of burn rate of less than or equal to 10 millimeters per ASTM 0635).
S. Load/Deflection:
1) Pultruded flooring load/deflection requirements at the required span (shown on the Contract
Drawings) shall be less than manufacturers published maximum recommended loads.
Maximum recommended loads shall be determined by acoustic emission testing.
2) Provide for minimum 100 psf live load over full area.
9. Pultruded flooring supplied shall meet the dimensional requirements and tolerances as shown on the
Contract Drawings.
I
I
I
I
I
I
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
IV-167
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
1V.168
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
a. The Contractor shall provide and/or verify measurements in field for work fabricated to fit field
conditions as required by flooring manufacturer to complete the work. Determine the correct size
and locations of the required holes or coping from the field dimensions before fabrication.
10. Layout
a. The pultruded flooring shall be supported by wall angles.
b. Manufacturer to provide openings and holes where located on the Contract Drawings.
c. Pultruded flooring openings which fit around protrusions (pipes, cables, machinery, etc.) shall be
field cut or, when shop fabricated, discontinuous at approximately the centerline of opening so
each section of grating is readily removable.
D. Sealing:
1. All shop fabricated cuts or drillings shall be coated with vinyl ester resin to provide maximum corrosion
resistance.
2. All field fabricated cuts or drillings shall be coated similarly by the contractor in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions.
E. Hardware:
1. Type 316 stainless steel connection hardware shall be provided.
PART 3. EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
END OF SECTION
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 09850
(NORTHEAST WPC FACILITY - ADD ALTERNATE)
SPRAYED CORROSION-RESISTANT LINING (CRL) (POLYURETHANE)
PART 1 . GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Sprayed polyurethane corrosion-resistant lining.
B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Section II. Instructions to Bidders.
2. Section III. General Conditions.
3. Section IV. Supplemental Specifications, Division 09, Section 09905.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications:
1. Applicator to be licensed or approved, in writing, by manufacturer.
2. Applicator to have successfully completed minimum of three projects in last 5 years with similar
scope.
3. Provide references for minimum of three projects in last 5 years including type of installation, square
footage of material installed and name and telephone number of client contact.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Installer or Applicator: Installer or applicator is the person actually installing or applying the product in the
field at the Project site.
1. Installer and applicator are synonymous.
B. Coating will be considered defective if in the opinion of the Engineer any of the following conditions exist in
the final product:
1. Dry film thicknesses have not been met.
2. Debris is embedded in material.
3. Surface exhibits any defect identified in paragraph 3.2C.
4. Loss of adhesion.
5. Discoloration.
1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Coating must be installed in the following project areas:
1. Influent Channel: All interior concrete surfaces of the influent channel located under grating and floor
plate.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings:
1. See Section 01340.
2. Product technical data including:
a. Acknowledgement that products submitted meet requirements of standards referenced.
b. Manufacturer's installation instructions.
c. Complete physical and chemical characteristics.
d. Chemical-resistance information.
e. Manufacturer's recommendations for adhesives, primer, surface preparation, moisture tolerance
and miscellaneous materials used.
B. Miscellaneous Submittals:
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
OdQr Control Improvements Project
Section IV
1V-169
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Contrallmprovements Project
Section IV
IV-170
I
I
I
I
"I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1. Applicator's qualifications and references.
2. Warranty.
3. Written certification that coating has been applied properly.
4. Proposed methods of surface preparation, including manufacturers approval of these methods and
plan for containment of blast media.
5. Daily record.
C. Samples:
1. 6 x 6 IN samples in thickness and color specified and on substrate expected to be encountered on
project for Engineer's review.
D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals:
1. See Section 01340.
1.6 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Contractor shall coordinate with Owner and Engineer for scheduling ~~rface preparation and coating
activities. The areas to be coated are active inlet channels to a municipal wastewater treatment plant.
Therefore, all preparation and coating work must be conducted during periods of low influent flow to the
plant. Coordination with the Owner is required so that access can be provided, appropriate adjustments to
influent pump station op~ration and diversion of influent flow, if possible, can be made by the Owner.
B. Contractor shall coordinate coating application with water proofing requirements relative to moisture
transmission through exterior walls.
1. Contractor responsible for ensuring adequate moisture and other substrate conditions required by
coating application.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Coating manufacturer shall provide written 3-year warranty covering defects in material.
B. Applicator shall provide written 3-year installation warranty covering defects in workmanship.
1. Warrant Coating Against:
a. Delamination from substrate.
b. Degradation of finish.
c. Cracking and spalling.
d. Deterioration of substrate due to defects in finish.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable:
1. Sprayed polyurethane corrosion-resistant lining:
a. Polibrid.
b. Tnemec.
c. C.l.M. Industries.
d. Futura.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Sprayed Polyurethane Corrosion-Resistant Lining:
1. Solids by volume: Minimum 87 percent mixed.
2. Finish: Gloss.
3. Color: Manufacturer's standard.
4. Sprayable, high build elastomeric polyurethane:
5. Primer: As recommended by manufacturer; primer shall not be excluded.
6. System similar to:
a. Polibrid 705.
I
I
I
b. Tnemec Series 262 or 264.
c. C.I.M. Industries, CIM 1000 or 1061.
d. Futura Geothane 520 or Geothane 5020.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Provide all primers, crack filler, sealants, thinners, etc. as required and as recommended by the coating
manufacturer.
I
I
I
I
I
I
PART 3 . EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Verify suitability of substrate to accept installation.
1. Prepare substrate in accordance with manufacturers written instructions.
2. Fill and seal porous concrete surfaces as recommended by manufacturer.
3. Remove spent blasting material and dust by vacuuming, or other approved means.
3.2 APPLICATION
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
A. Application of material indicates acceptance of the substrate.
B. Apply primer and finish coats in accordance with manufacturers recommendations.
1. Apply primer in single coat to thickness recommended by manufacturer.
2. Apply finish material to a total minimum aD mils dry film thickness.
C. Finished surface shall be smooth and uniform free of runs, sags, waves, depressions, ridges,
honeycombing and other imperfections.
D. Maintain minimum temperatures before, during, and after coating application to assure proper curing.
E. Test wet mil thickness as recommended by manufacturer to provide uniform accurate coverages.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Provide services of manufacturer's authorized representative during coating application, substrate
preparation and after all coating work is completed.
1. Certify that surface has been prepared in accordance with coating manufacturer's recommendations.
2. Certify that substrate moisture content is within manufacturers acceptable limits.
3. Certify that ambient temperature and temperature of substrate to be coated are within manufacturer's
acceptable limits.
4. Certify that coating has been properly applied to required mil thickness.
B. During application of material, applicator to maintain daily record of substrate temperature, substrate
moisture content, ambient air temperature, humidity and wind conditions. Daily record shall be
authenticated by manufacturer's authorized representative.
1. Daily record shall be accessible to Engineer anytime during normal project working hours.
2. Provide certified copy of daily record to Owner as part of project close out documents.
C. Repair all defective coating in accordance with manufacturers printed recommendations.
END OF SECTION
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section N
IV.171
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Contrallmprovements Project
Section IV
1V-172
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 09905
PAINTING AND PROTECTIVE COATINGS
PART 1 . GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Painting and protective coatings.
2. Minimum surface preparation requirements.
B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Section II - Instructions to Bidders.
2. Section III - General Conditions.
3. Section IV - Supplemental Technical Specifications, Division 09, Section 09850 - Sprayed Corrosion
Resistant Lining (CRL) (Polyurethane).
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Referenced Standards:
1. ASTM International (ASTM):
a. 04258..Practice for Surface Cleaning Concrete for Coating.
b. D4259, Practice for Abrading Concrete.
c. 04262, Test Method for pH of Chemically Cleaned or Etched Concrete Surfaces.
d. 04263, Test Method for Indicating Moisture in Concrete by the Plastic Sheet Method.
e. E84, Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
2. National Bureau of Standards (NBS):
a. Certified Coating Thickness Calibration Standards.
3. National Electrical Manufacturers Association/American National Standards Institute (NEMAlANSI):
a. Z535.1, Safety Color Code.
4. The Society of Protective Coatings (SSPC):
a. PA 2, Measurement of Dry Paint Thickness with Magnetic Gages.
b. SP 1, Solvent Cleaning.
c. SP 2, Hand Tool Cleaning.
d. SP 3, Power Tool Cleaning.
5. The Society of Protective CoatingslNACE International (SSPCINACE):
a. SP 6INACE No.3, Commercial Blast Cleaning.
b. SP 7INACE No.4. Brush-off Blast Cleaning.
c. SP 13/NACE No.6, Surface Preparation of Concrete.
S. Qualifications:
1. Coating manufacturer's authorized representative shall provide written statement attesting that
Applicator has been instructed on proper preparation, mixing and application procedures for coatings
specified.
2. Contractor and applicators shall have minimum of 5 years experience in application of similar products
on similar project. Provide references for minimum of three different projects completed in last 5 years
with similar scope of work. Include name and address of project, size of project in value (painting) and
contact person.
C. Miscellaneous:
1. Furnish paint through one manufacturer unless noted otherwise.
D. Deviation from specified mil thickness or product type is not allowed without written authorization of
Engineer.
E. Material may not be thinned unless approved, in writing, by paint manufacturer's authorized representative.
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
1V-173
1.3 DEFINITIONS
I
I
I
A. Installer or Applicator:
1. Installer or applicator is the person actually installing or applying the product in the field at the Project
site.
2. Installer and applicator are synonymous.
B. Corrosive Environment Immersion in, or not more than 6 IN above, or subject to frequent condensation,
spillage or splash of a corrosive material such as water, wastewater, or chemical solution; or chronic
exposure to corrosive, caustic or acidic agent, chemicals, chemical fumes, chemical mixture, or solutions
with pH range of 5 -9.
C. Highly Corrosive Environment: Immersion in, or not more than 6 IN above, or subject to frequent
condensation, spillage or splash of a corrosive material such as water, wastewater, or chemical solution; or
chronic exposure to corrosive, caustic or acidic agent, chemicals, chemical fumes, chemical mixture, or
solutions with pH range below 5 or above 9.
D. Exposed Exterior Surface: Surface which is exposed to weather but not necessarily exposed to view as well
as surface exposed to view. Exterior surfaces are considered corrosive environment.
E. Finished Area: One that has finish called for on Room Finish Schedule or is indicated, on Drawings, to be
painted.
F. Paint includes fillers, primers, sealers, emulsions, oils, alkyds, latex, enamels, thinners, stains, epoxies,
vinyls, chlorinated rubbers, urethanes, shellacs, varnishes, and any other applied coating specified within
this Section.
G. VOC: Volatile Organic Compounds.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
1V-174
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
A. Shop Drawings:
1. See Section 01340 for requirements for the mechanics and administration of the submittal process.
2. Product technical data including:
a. Acknowledgement that products submitted meet requirements of standards referenced.
b. Manufacturer's application instructions.
c. Manufacturer's surface preparation instructions.
d. If products being used are manufactured by Company other than listed .in Article 2.2, provide
complete individual data sheet comparison of proposed products with specified products including
application procedure, coverage rates and verification that product is designed for intended use.
e. Contractor's written plan of action for containing airborne particles created by blasting operation
and location of disposal of spent contaminated blasting media.
f. Coating manufacturer's recommendation on abrasive blasting.
g. Manufacturer's recommendation for universal barrier coat.
3. Manufacturer's statement regarding Applicator instruction on product use.
4. Contractor and applicator experience qualifications.
a. No submittal information will be reviewed until Engineer has received and approved Contractor
and Applicator qualifications.
5. Certification that coating systems proposed for use have been reviewed and approved by Senior
Corrosion Specification Specialist employed by the coating manufacturer.
B. Samples:
1. Manufacturer's full line of colors for Engineer's color selection.
2. After initial color selection by Engineer provide two 3 x 5 IN samples of each color selected.
C. Miscellaneous Submittals:
1. See Section 01340 for requirements for the mechanics and administration of the submittal process.
2. Approval of application equipment.
3. Applicator's daily record:
a. Submit daily record at end of each week in which painting work is performed.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver in original containers, labeled as follows:
1. Name or type number of material.
2. Manufacturer's name and item stock number.
3. Contents, by volume, of major constituents.
4. Warning labels.
5. VOC content.
PART 2 . PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, only the following manufaCturers are acceptable:
1. Tnemec.
2. Ameron Protective Coatings Div.
3. ICI Devoe.
4. Carboline Protective Coatings.
5. Sherwin Williams.
6. Dampney Company, Inc.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. All materials used must contain not more than 2.8 LBSlGAL VQC.
B. For unspecified materials such as thinner, provide manufacturer's recommended products.
C. Paint Systems - General:
1. P=prime coat. F1, F2 . . . Fn = first finish coat,
second finish coat. . ... . nth finish coat, color as selected by Engineer.
2. If two finish coats of same material are required, Contractor may, at his option and by written approval
from paint manufacturer, apply one coat equal to mil thickness of two coats specified.
D. Products specified are manufactured by Tnemec.
E. Paint Systems:
1. SYSTEM #3 - Polyamidoamine Epoxy Primer with Polyamidoamine Epoxy or Aliphatic Acrylic
Polyurethane Enamel Top Coat(s).
a. Prime coat:
1) P1 =1 coat, 5 mils, Series N69 Epoxoline (Polyamidoamine Epoxy), VOC=2.11
b. Finish coat(s):
1) Interior:
a) F1 =1 coat, 5 mils, Series N69 Epoxoline (Polyamidoamine Epoxy)
2) Exterior:
a) F1=1 coat, 2.5 mils, Series 1074 Endura-Shield (Aliphatic Acrylic Polyurethane Enamel),
VOC=2.80
2. SYSTEM #41 - Touch-up of galvanized surfaces not requiring a top coat.
a. Repair damaged galvanized surfaces in accordance with ASTM A780.
b. Prepare damaged surfaces by abrasive blasting or power sanding.
c. Apply galvanizing repair paint to minimum 6 mils OFT in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
PART 3 . EXECUTION
3.1 ITEMS TO BE PAINTED
A. Exposed Exterior Surfaces including:
1. Piping, valves, and fittings.
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
IV-175
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Contrallmprovements Project
Section IV
1V-176
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2. Ductwork and supports.
B. Surfaces in Areas Not Considered Finished:
1. Paint following surfaces in areas not considered as finished area:
a. Piping, valves, and fittings.
3.2 ITEMS NOT TO BE PAINTED
A. General: Do not paint items listed in Article 3.2 unless specifically noted in the Contract Documents to be
painted.
B. Items with Approved Factory Finish.
C. Electrical Equipment:
1. Do not field paint electrical equipment except where painting is specifically stated elsewhere in these
Contract Documents, or where the equipment is subject to a corrosive environment.
D. Surfaces Hidden from View except when in a corrosive or highly corrosive area, including:
1. When not in a corrosive or highly corrosive area:
a. Concrete, concrete masonry units.
b. Conduit.
c. Ducts.
d. Insulation.
e. Galvanized metal surfaces.
f. Note: (Manufacturer's standard coatings, if any, may remain).
2. Fiberglass surfaces except:
a. Fiberglass piping.
b. Piping supports.
3, Interior of pipe, ductwork, and conduits.
4. Moving parts of mechanical and electrical units where painting would interfere with the operation of the
unit.
5. Code labels and equipment identification and rating plates.
3.3 SCHEDULE OF ITEMS TO BE PAINTED AND PAINTING SYSTEMS
A. Pipe, Valves, and Fittings:
1. PVC, FRP, and CPVC: SYSTEM #3.
. B. Galvanized Metals:
1. Field touch-up where top coat is required: SYSTEM #3, prime and first finish coat only.
a. Prime paint only the damaged area.
2. Assembled galvanized steel items: SYSTEM #3.
3. Field touch-up of galvanized surfaces not requiring a finish top coat: SYSTEM #41.
a. Paint only damaged areas.
3.4 PREPARATION
A. General:
1. Prepare surfaces to be painted in accordance with coating manufacturer's instructions and this Section
unless noted otherwise in the Specification.
2. Remove all dust, grease, oil, compounds, dirt and other foreign matter which would prevent bonding of
coating to surface.
B. Protection:
1. Protect surrounding surfaces not to be coated.
2. Remove and protect hardware, accessories, plates, fixtures, finished work, and similar items; or
provide ample in-place protection.
C. Prepare and Paint Before Assembly: Where component is subject to corrosive or highly corrosive
environment, prepare and paint, before assembly, all surfaces which may be subject to environment which
are inaccessible after assembly.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
D. Concrete:
1. Verify that concrete surfaces have been cleaned and that voids have been patched in accordance with
Section 03348.
a. Concrete surfaces shall be cleaned in accordance with ASTM D4258.
2. Mechanically abrade concrete surfaces in accordance ASTM 04259 as recommended by coating
manufacturer.
3. Abrasive blast concrete surfaces in accordance with SSPC SP 131NACE No. 6 to provide profile
recommended by coatings manufacturer.
4. Test pH of surface to be painted in accordance with ASTM 04262.
a. If surface pH is not within coating manufacturer's required acceptable range, use methods
acceptable to coating manufacturer as required to bring pH within acceptable range.
b. Retest pH until acceptable results are obtained.
5. Verify that moisture content of surface to be painted is within coating manufacturer's recommended
acceptable limits.
a. Test moisture content of surface to be coated in accordance with ASTM D4263.
b. After remedial measures have been taken to lower or raise moisture content, retest surface until
acceptable results are obtained.
3.5 APPLICATION
A. General:
1. Thin, mix and apply coatings by brush, roller, or spray in accordance with manufacturer's installation
instructions.
a. Application equipment must be inspected and approved in writing by coating manufacturer.
2. Temperature and weather conditions:
a. Do not paint surfaces when surface temperature is below 50 DegF unless product has been
formulated specifically for low temperature application and application is approved in writing by
Engineer and paint manufacturer's authorized representative.
b. Avoid painting surfaces exposed to hot sun.
c. Do not paint on damp surfaces.
3. Provide complete coverage to mil thickness specified.
a. Thickness specified is dry mil thickness.
b. All paint systems are "to cover." In situations of discrepancy between manufacturer's square
footage coverage rates and mil thickness, mil thickness requirements govern.
c. When color or undercoats show through, apply additional coats until paint film is of uniform finish
and color.
4. If so directed by Engineer, do not apply consecutive coats until Engineer has had an opportunity to
observe and approve previous coats.
5. Apply materials under adequate illumination.
6. Evenly spread to provide full, smooth coverage.
7. Work each application of material into corners, crevices, joints, and other difficult to work areas.
8. Avoid degradation and contamination of blasted surfaces and avoid intercoat contamination.
a. Clean contaminated surfaces before applying next coat.
9. Smooth out runs or sags immediately, or remove and recoat entire surface.
10. Allow preceding coats to dry before recoating.
a. Recoat within time limits specified by coating manufacturer.
b. If recoat time limits have expired reprepare surface in accordance with coating manufacturer's
printed recommendations.
11. Allow coated surfaces to cure prior to allowing traffic or other work to proceed.
12. Coat all aluminum in contact with dissimilar materials.
13. When coating rough surfaces which cannot be backrolled sufficiently, hand brush coating to work into
all recesses.
14. Backroll concrete surfaces with a roller if paint coatings are spray applied.
B. Prime Coat Application:
1. Prime all surfaces indicated to be painted. Apply prime coat in accordance with coating manufacturer's
written instructions and as written in this Section.
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Contrallmprovements Project
Section IV
1V.1n
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
1V-178
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2. Ensure field-applied coatings are compatible with factory-applied coatings. {Ensure new coatings
applied over existing coatings are compatible}.
a. Employ services of coating manufacturer's qualified technical representative.
1) Certify through material data sheets.
2) Perform test patch.
b. If field-applied coating is found to be not compatible, require the coating manufacturer's technical
representative to recommend, in writing, product to be used as barrier coat, thickness to be
applied, surface preparation and method of application.
c. At Contractor's option, coatings may be removed, surface reprepared, and new coating applied
using appropriate paint system listed in Paragraph 2.2E.
1) All damage to surface as result of coating removal shall be repaired to original condition or
better by Contractor at no additional cost to Owner.
3. Apply zinc-rich primers while under continuous agitation.
4. Ensure abrasive blasting operation does not result in embedment of abrasive particles in paint film.
5. Brush or spray bolts, welds, edges and difficult access areas with primer prior to primer application
over entire surface.
6. Touch up damaged primer coats prior to applying finish coats. Restore primed surface equal to surface
before damage.
C. Finish Coat Application:
1. Apply finish coats in accordance with coating manufacturer's written instructions and in accordance
with this Section.
2. Touch up damaged finish coats using same application method and same material specified for finish
coat. Prepare damaged area in accordance with Article 3.4.
3.6 COLOR CODING
A. Color and band piping in accordance with Article 3.9 of this Section.
1. Band piping using maximum of three different colors at 20 FT maximum centers.
2. Place bands:
a. Along continuous lines.
b. At changes in direction.
c. At changes in elevation.
d. On both sides of an obstruction (e.g. wall, ceiling) that painted item passes through.
3. Band width for individual colors (pipe diameter measured to outside of insulation, if applicable):
a. Piping up to 8 IN DIA: 2 IN minimum.
b. Piping greater than 8 IN up to 24 IN DIA: 6 IN minimum.
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Maintain Daily Record:
1. Provide the following information for each coat of paint applied:
a. Date, starting time, end time, and all breaks taken by painters.
b. For exterior painting:
1) Sky condition.
2) Wind speed and direction.
c. Air temperature.
d. Relative humidity.
e. Moisture content of substrate prior to each coat.
f. Provisions utilized to maintain work area within manufacturer's recommended application
parameters.
g. Surface temperature of substrate to which paint is being applied.
2. Format for daily record to be computer generated.
B. Measure wet coating with wet film thickness gages.
C. Measure coating dry film thickness in accordance with SSPC PA 2 using Mikrotest gage calibrated against
NBS "Certified Coating Thickness Calibration Standards."
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1. Engineer may measure coating thickness at any time during project to assure conformance with
Specifications.
D. Measure surface temperature of items to be painted with surface temperature gage specifically designed for
such.
E. Measure substrate humidity with humidity gage specifically designed for such.
F. Provide wet paint signs.
3.8 CLEANING
A. Clean paint spattered surfaces. Use care not to damage finished surfaces.
B. Upon completion of painting, replace hardware, accessories, plates, fixtures, and similar items.
C. Remove surplus materials, scaffolding, and debris. Leave areas broom clean.
3.9 SCHEDULE
A. Piping and Pipe Banding Color Schedule (Colors based on Tnemec product numbers):
1. Match existing piping and banding colors.
2. Wastewater Treatment Plant Piping Color Schedule.
PIPE COLOR
SERVICE
Wastewater Piping:
Plumbing drains
32GR-Gray
Odor Control & Sulfide
Destruction Piping:
Potassium permanganate
Hydrogen peroxide
Chlorine
11WH-White
11 WH-White
11WH-White
END OF SECTION
BANDING COLOR
11 SF-Safety Blue
07SF IYB24-Red/Brown
07SF/05SF- Red/lntemational Orange
07SFI11 SF-Red/Safety Blue
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
/v.179
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Section IV
1V-1BO
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Contrallmprovements Project
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 13221
(NORTHEAST WPC FACILITY - ADD ALTERNATE)
TANK COVER: ALUMINUM
PART 1 . GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A Section Includes:
1. A fully engineered, substantially airtigh~ aluminum cover structure comprised of panels, and beams or
trusses. This specification shall be regarded as a minimum standard for design and fabrication.
B. Scope of Work:
1. Furnish all labor, materials, and equipment to provide a complete, installed system of fixed and
removable, custom fit, flat aluminum covers.
2. The Tank Cover system includes cover panels, structural supports, and attaching hardware.
3. An engineered cover system is required for primary clarifiers 1 and 2 as shown on the Contract
Drawings.
C. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Section II - Instructions to Bidders.
2. Section III - General Conditions.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Referenced Standards:
1. Aluminum Association (M):
a. ADM-1, Aluminum Design Manual.
b. B221, Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire,
Shapes and Tubes.
2. ASTM International (ASTM):
a. A924, Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Metallic-Coated by the Hot-Dip
Process.
3. American Welding Society (AWS):
a. D1.2, Structural Welding Code - Aluminum.
4. Florida Building Code, 2004.
B. Qualifications:
1. Manufacturer shall be a company specialized in providing aluminum covers for wastewater treatment
tanks/troughs for at least five (5) years. When requested by the Engineer. submit written evidence to
show experience qualifications and adequacy of engineering/design and plant capability and facilities
for performance of contract requirements.
2. Erector to be licensed or approved in writing by manufacturer. Erector also to be engaged for at least
five (5) years in the erection of aluminum covers for wastewater treatment tanks.
3. Welders must be qualified within the past two (2) years in accordance with AWS.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Installer or Applicator: Installer or applicator is the person actually installing or applying the product in the
field at the Project site.
1. Installer and applicator are synonymous.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings:
1. See Section 01340 for requirements for the mechanics and administration of the submittal process.
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
1V.1B1
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section N
fV.182
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2. Complete structural calculations showing the governing stresses in all members and connections, and
detailed shop drawings. Preliminary drawings shall be stamped by cover manufacturer's PE. Final
drawings and calculations shall bear the stamp of a Florida PE.
3. Manufacturer's standard guarantee.
4. Product technical data including:
a. Acknowledgement that products submitted meet requirements of standards referenced.
b. Manufacturer's installation instructions.
5. Certifications:
a. Submit letter of certification sealed by a professional engineer registered in the State of Florida
stating the loading magnitudes and loading conditions that the aluminum covers were structurally
designed fOT.
b. Submit letter of certification sealed by a professional engineer confirming that the aluminum
cover is in full compliance with the plans and specifications including any testing provisions
included therein.
c. Erector qualifications.
d. Submit letter of certification of satisfactory performance of the non-skid surface for a minimum
period of 10 years in the wastewater industry for the intended purpose.
B. Operation and Maintenance Manuals:
1. See Section 01340 for requirements for:
a. The mechanics and administration of the submittal process.
b. The content of Operation and Maintenance Manuals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable:
1. Aluminum covers:
a. Hallsten Corporation
b. Temcor.
c. Conservatech.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Truss-Design Cover:
1. Structural frame: ASTM B221 6061-T6 aluminum.
2. Fasteners: Type 316. Stainless steel ASTM F593, F594.
3. Sealant: Silicone, Dow 790; General Electric Silpruf.
4. Gaskets and closures: Closed cell EPDM or silicone.
5. Dormers, doors, vents and hatches: ASTM B221-T6 aluminum.
2.3 COVER
A. General:
1. Configuration: As shown on Drawings.
2. Clear span length of the cover shall be as noted in the Contract Drawings.
3. Clear spans and designed to be self-supporting from the periphery structure, and to allow for thermal
expansion and contraction.
4. Inside width of the cover shall be as noted in the Contract Drawings.
5. Cover weight: Not exceed 3.5 LBS per square foot of surface area.
6. ConnectionS to walls to be slotted with teflon-coated neoprene bearing pads to eliminate lateral and
thrusting loads being applied to the walls. Fabricate structure in accordance with AA ADM-1 and A WS
D1.2.
7. Surface paneling: Designed and fabricated as a watertight system under design load and
temperature conditions.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
8. Seal raw edges of aluminum panels and firmly clamp in an interlocking manner to prevent slipping or
disengagement under all loading conditions and temperature changes.
8. Truss-Design Cover:
1. Structural frame: ASTM 8221, 6061- T6 aluminum.
2. Closure panels and flashing:
a. Aluminum: ASTM 8221, 6061-T6 aluminum.
b. Thickness: 0.040 minimum.
3. Doors, vents, hatches:
a. Aluminum: ASTM 8221, 6061-T6.
b. Thickness: 0.090 minimum.
4. Decking:
a. ASTM 8221, 6061 T6 alloy
5. Panels
a. ASTM 8221, 6061- T6 Corrosion Resistant Aluminum Extrusions
6. Welding Electrodes:
a. Electrodes of an alloy, which shall produce welds with strength and corrosion resistant
characteristics compatible to the base metal.
7. Design Loadings:
a. All structural components shall be designed to support the dead weight of the structure, plus a
live load of 50 pounds per square foot of surface.
b. Must comply with Florida 8uilding Code wind load requirements.
c. The maximum deflection of any component under this load shall not exceed U240 of the span of
that component. In no event shall the dead load deflection exceed the rise of any component in
order to avoid surface ponding.
d. The structural components shall be designed to support a 30o-pound load on a 12" x 12" area
located anywhere on the surface of the structure without permanently deforming the assembly.
8. Design Stresses:
a. All allowable design stresses in structural aluminum shall be in accordance with the ADM-1 for
building-type structures by the Aluminum Association.
9. Skid Resistance
a. Cover shall possess an integral non-skid surface and no exposed area of cover system wider
than one inch shall be without such surface treatment.
b. Aluminum-decking surface of the structure shall be ribbed to provide an aggressively non-skid
surface.
c. Edges of adjacent deck slats shall double interlock so that the slats shall act together.
d. Non-skid surface shall not be achieved by the use of paint or adhesive tapes.
10. Chemical Resistance
a. Complete assembly shall be chemical resistant and shall interlock.
b. Mechanical and replaceable Santoprene seal shall isolate the cover perimeter from the concrete
wall.
c. No foam tape or caulk shall be allowed.
C. Configuration: The aluminum cover shall be composed of panels and beams or trusses. All panels shall
interlock with the adjoining beam or truss without the use of threaded fasteners. The weight of an
individual panel shall not exceed 150 pounds. Each removable panel shall be easy to remove and the
lifting force required shall not exceed the dead weight of the panel.
D. Field inspect condition of existing structure to be covered and verify dimensions. If detrimental conditions
or discrepancies in dimensions are noted during inspection, bring to Engineer's attention, in writing,
immediately. Cover failure of watertightness or structural integrity due to lack of proper investigation of
existing conditions will not relieve Contractor of responsibility.
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A Access Hatches:
1. 3 x 3 FT.
2. Three for each clarifier at equal spaces.
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section N
N-183
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Contrallmprovements Project
Section IV
1V-184
!
I'
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3. Access hatches shall have the identical properties as the rest of the aluminum cover including loads,
deflection and slip resistance specifications.
4. Hatches shall be full panel width.
5. When closed, the hatches will be completely flush therefore posing no tripping hazard. In the open
position, the hatches shall lie flat on the cover and will not need a hold open device.
B. Fasteners:
1. Aluminum shall be isolated from dissimilar materials by means of a stainless steel spacer or an
elastomeric isolator.
2. All panels and beams shall be joined with quickly removable interlocking pins, which shall be
removable without the use of tools.
3. Beams and panels shall be fastened to concrete using stainless steel drill in place of anchor bolts.
C. Steel Accessories: No carbon or alloy steel components shall be used.
D. Duct Connection: .
2.5 FABRICATION
A. Preparation for Welding:
1. All components to be welded shall be free of dirt, grease, and other contaminants and shall fit up
properly for sound welding.
2. Surfaces to be welded may not be cut with torch.
3. Sawing, shearing, or machining may be used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 ERECTION
A. Erect all components in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Do not force structure or panels during erection.
C. Tool all sealant joints slightly concave and remove excess sealant from face of panel.
D. Provide openings for air ducts as shown on Drawings.
E. Provide openings for fresh air intake. Location to be shown on Drawings.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. System fabricator or installer shall provide qualified field supervisor to remain on jobsite until completion of
work.
B. Field refabrication of structural components or panels shall not be accepted.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 15060
PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS: BASIC REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 . GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A Section Includes:
1. Water line to odor control unit
2. Drain line from odor control unit.
B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Section II - Instructions to Bidders.
2. Section III - General Conditions.
3. Section IV - Supplemental Technical Specifications. Division 02, Section 02221 - Trenching,
Backfilling, and Compacting for Utilities.
4. Section IV - Supplemental Technical Specifications, Division 09. Section 09905 - Painting and
Protective Coatings.
5. Section IV - Supplemental Technical Specifications, Division 15, Section 15090 - Pipe Support
Systems.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Referenced Standards:
1. ASTM International (ASTM):
a. PVC (polyvinyl chloride) materials:
1) 01784. Standard Specification for Rigid Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and
Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds.
2) 01785, Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) PVC Plastic Pipe (Schedules 40.80
and 120).
3) 02467. Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule
80.
b. Installation:
1) 02321. Standard Practice for Underground Installation of Thermosplastic Pipe for Sewers
and Other Gravity-Flow Applications.
c. 01785, Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80,
and 120.
d. 02467, Socket Type (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80.
e. 03212, Standard Specification for Joints for Drain and Sewer Plastic Pipe Using Flexible
Elastomeric Seals.
2. American Water Works Association (AWWA):
a. B300, Standard for Hypochlorites.
b. C651 , Standard for Disinfecting Water Mains.
3. Chlorine Institute, Inc. (CI):
a. Pamphlet 6, Piping Systems for Dry Chlorine.
4. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL).
1;3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A Piping Systems Organization and Definition:
1. Piping services are grouped into designated systems according to the chemical and physical
properties of the fluid conveyed, system pressure,. piping size and system materials of construction.
2. See PIPING SPECIFICATION SCHEDULES in PART 3.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
Marshall Street and Norlheast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
N-185
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Contro/lmprovements Project
section IV
lV-f86
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
A. Shop Drawings:
1. See Section 01340 for requirements for the mechanics and administration of the submittal process.
2. Fabrication and/or layout drawings:
a. Exterior yard piping drawings (minimum scale 11N equals 10 FT) with information including:
1) Dimensions of piping lengths.
2) Invert or centerline elevations of piping crossings.
3) Acknowledgement of bury depth requirements.
4) Details of fittings and tapping locations.
b. Schedule of interconnections to existing piping and method of connection.
3. . Product technical data including:
a. Acknowledgement that products submitted meet requirements of standards referenced.
b. Copies of manufacturer's written directions regarding material handling, delivery, storage and
installation.
c. Separate schedule sheet for each piping system scheduled in this Section showing compliance
of all system components. Attach technical product data on gaskets, pipe, fittings, and other
components.
. B. Miscellaneous Submittals:
1. Qualifications of lab performing disinfection analysis on water systems.
2. Test reports:
a. Copies of pressure test results on all piping systems.
b. Reports defining results of dielectric testing and corrective action taken.
c. Disinfection test report.
d. Notification of time and date of piping pressure tests.
C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals:
1. See Section 01340 for requirements for:
a. The mechanics and administration of the submittal process.
b. The content of Operation and Maintenance Manuals.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect pipe coating during handling using methods recommended by manufacturer. Use of bare cables,
chains, hooks, metal bars or narrow skids in contact with coated pipe is not permitted.
B. Prevent damage to pipe during transit. Repair abrasions, scars, and blemishes. If repair of satisfactory
quality cannot be achieved, replace damaged material immediately.
PART 2. PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPING SPECIFICATION SCHEDULES
A. Piping system materials, fittings and appurtenances are subject to requirements of specific piping
specification schedules located at the end of PART 3 of this Section.
2.2 COMPONENTS AND ACCESSORIES
A. Protective Coating and Lining:
1. . Include pipe, fittings, and appurtenances where coatings, linings, paint, tests and other items are
specified.
2. Field paint pipe in accordance with Section 09905.
B. Valves:
1. See schematics and details for definition of manual valves used in each system under 4 IN in size.
a. See Section 15100 schedule for valve types 4 IN and above and for automatic valves used in
each system.
2. See Section 15100.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PART 3. EXECUTION
3.1 EXTERIOR BURIED PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Install expansion devices as necessary to allow expansion and contraction movement.
B. Laying Pipe In Trench:
1. Excavate and backfill trench in accordance with Section 02221.
2. Clean each pipe length thoroughly and inspect for compliance to Specifications.
3. Grade trench bottom ~nd excavate for pipe bell and lay pipe on trench bottom.
4. Install gasket or joint material according to manufacturer's directions after joints have been thoroughly
cleaned and examined.
5. Except for first two joints, before making final connections of joints, install two full sections of pipe with
earth tamped along side of pipe or final with bedding material placed.
6. Lay pipe in only suitable weather with good trench conditions. Never lay pipe in water except where
approved by Engineer.
7. Seal open end of line with watertight plug if pipe laying stopped.
8. Remove water in trench before removal of plug.
C. Lining Up Push-On Joint Piping:
1. Lay piping on route lines shown on Drawings.
2. Deflect from straight alignments or grades by vertical or horizontal curves or offsets.
3. Observe maximum deflection values stated in manufacturer's written literature.
4. Provide special bends when specified or where required alignment exceeds allowable deflections
stipulated.
5. Install shorter lengths of pipe in such length and number that angular deflection of any joint, as
represented by specified maximum deflection, is not exceeded.
3.2 INTERIOR AND EXPOSED EXTERIOR PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Install piping in vertical and horizontal alignment as shown on Drawings.
B. Alignment of piping smaller than 4 IN may not be shown. However, install according to Drawing intent and
with clearance and allowance for:
1. Expansion and contraction.
2. Operation and access to equipment, doors, windows, hoists, moving equipment.
3. Headroom and walking space for working areas and aisles.
4. System drainage and air removal.
C. Install vertical piping runs plumb and horizontal piping runs parallel with structure walls.
D. Pipe Support:
1. Use methods of piping support as shown on Drawings and as required in Section 15090.
2. Where pipes run parallel and at same elevation or grade, they may be grouped and supported from
common trapeze-type hanger, provided hanger rods are increased in size as specified for total
supported weight. The pipe in the group requiring the least maximum distance between supports shall
set the distance between trapeze hangers.
3. Size pipe supports with consideration to specific gravity of liquid being piped.
E. Equipment Drainage and Miscellaneous Piping:
1. Provide drip pans and piping at equipment where condensation may occur.
2. Hard pipe stuffing box leakage to nearest floor drain.
3. Avoid piping over electrical components su~ as motor control centers, panelboards, etc.
a. If piping must be so routed, utilize 16 GA, 316 stainless steel drip pan under piping and over full
length of electrical equipment.
b. Hard pipe drainage to nearest floor drain.
4. Collect system condensate at drip pockets, traps and blowoff valves.
5. Provide drainage for process piping at locations shown on Drawings in accordance with Drawing
details.
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Contro/lmprovements Project
Section IV
1V-187
Marshall street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
1V-1BB
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
F. Unions:
1. Install in position which will permit valve or equipment to be removed without dismantling adjacent
piping.
2. Mechanical type couplings may serve as unions.
3. Additional flange unions are not required at flanged connections.
G. Install expansion devices as necessary to allow expansion/contraction movement.
H. Provide full face gaskets on all systems.
I. Anchorage and Blocking:
1. Block, anchor, or harness exposed piping subjected to forces in which joints are installed to prevent
separation of joints and transmission of stress into equipment or structural components not designed
to resist those stresses.
J. Equipment Pipe Connections:
1. Equipment - General:
a. Align, level, and wedge equipment into place during fitting and alignment of connecting piping.
b. Provide utility connections to equipment shown on Drawings, scheduled or specified.
2. Plumbing and HV AC equipment:
a. Make piping connections to plumbing and HVAC equipment including but not limited to
installation of fittings, strainers, pressure reducing valves, flow control valves and relief valves
provided with or as integral part of equipment.
b. For each water supply piping connection to equipment, furnish and install union and gate or
angle valve.
c. Furnish and install "P" trap for each waste piping connection to equipment if waste is connected
directly to building sewer system.
d. Stub piping for equipment, sinks, lavatories, supply and drain fittings, key stops, "P" traps,
miscellaneous traps and miscellaneous brass through wall or floor and cap and protect until such
time when later installation is performed.
3.3 CONNECTIONS WITH EXISTING PIPING
A. Where connection between new work and existing work is made, use suitable and proper fittings to suit
conditions encountered.
B. Perform connections with existing piping at time and under conditions which will least interfere with service
to customers affected by such operation.
C. Undertake connections in fashion which will disturb system as little as possible.
D. Provide suitable equipment and facilities to dewater, drain, and dispose of liquid removed without damage
to adjacent property.
E. Where connections to existing systems necessitate employment of past installation methods not currently
part of trade practice, utilize necessary special piping components.
F. Where connection involves potable water systems, provide disinfection methods as prescribed in these
Specifications.
G. Once tie-in to each existing system is initiated, continue work continuously until tie-in is made and tested.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Pipe Testing - General:
1. Test piping systems as follows:
a. Test exposed, non-insulated piping systems upon completion of system.
b. Test buried piping (insulated and non-insulated) prior to backfilling and, if insulated, prior to
application of insulation.
2. Utilize pressures, media and pressure test durations as specified on Piping Specification Schedules.
3. Isolate equipment which may be damaged by the specified pressure test conditions.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
4. Perform pressure test using calibrated pressure gages and calibrated volumetric measuring
equipment to determine leakage rates.
a. Select each gage so that the specified test pressure falls within the upper half of the gage's
range.
b. Notify the Engineer 24 HRS prior to each test.
5. Completely assemble and test new piping systems prior to connection to existing pipe systems.
6. Acknowledge satisfactory performance of tests and inspections in writing to Engineer prior to final
acceptance.
7. Bear the cost of all testing and inspecting, locating and remedying of leaks and any necessary
retesting and re-examination.
B. Pressure Testing:
1. Testing medium: Unless otherwise specified in the Piping Specification Schedules, utilize the
following test media.
a. Process and plant air systems:
PIPE LINE SIZE
2 IN and smaller
21N and smaller
Greater than 2 IN
Greater than 2 IN
SPECIFIED TEST PRESSURE
75 psi or less
Greater than 75 psi
3 psi or less
Greater than 3 psi
TESTING MEDIUM
Air or water
Water
Air or water
Water
b. Liquid systems:
PIPE LINE SIZE (DIA)
Up to and including 48 IN
Above 48 IN
All sizes
GRAVITY OR
PUMPED
Gravity
Gravity
Pumped
SPECIFIED TEST
PRESSURE
25 psig or less
25 psig or less
250 psig or less
TESTING
MEDIUM
Air or water
Water
Water
2. Allowable leakage rates:
a. Hazardous gas systems, all exposed piping systems, all pressure piping systems and all buried,
insulated piping systems which are hydrostatically pressure tested shall have zero leakage at the
specified test pressure throughout the duration of the test.
b. Hydrostatic exfiltration and infiltration for sanitary and stormwater sewers (groundwater level is
below the top of pipe):
1) Leakage rate: 200 GAL per inch diameter per mile of pipe per day at average head on test
section of 3 FT.
2) Average head is defined from groundwater elevation to average pipe crown.
3) Acceptable test head leakage rate for heads greater than 3 FT: Acceptable leakage rate
(gallons per inch diameter per mile per day) = 115 x (actual test head to the 1/2 power).
c. Hydrostatic infiltration test for sanitary and stormwater sewers (groundwater level is above the
top of pipe):
1) Allowable leakage rate: 200 GAL per inch diameter per mile of pipe per day when. depth of
groundwater over top of pipe is 2 to 6 FT.
2) Leakage rate at heads greater than 6 FT: Allowable leakage rate (gallons per inch diameter
per mile of pipe per day) = 82 x (actual head to the 1/2 power).
d. Non-hazardous gas and air systems which are tested with air shall have a maximum pressure
drop of 5 percent of the specified test pressure throughout the duration of the test
e. For low pressure (less than 25 psig) air testing, the acceptable time for loss of 1 psig of air
pressure shall be:
PIPE SIZE (IN DIA)
4
6
TIME, MINUTES/100 FT
0.3
0.7
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
IV.189
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Contrallmprovements Project
Section IV
1V-190
I[
II
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
8
10
12
15
18
21
24
27
30
33
36
42
48
1.2
1.5
1.8
2.1
2.4
3.0
3.6
4.2
4.8
5.4
6.0
7.3
7.6
3. Hydrostatic pressure testing methodology:
a. General:
1) All joints, including welds, are to be left exposed for examination during the test.
2) Provide additional temporary supports for piping systems designed for vapor or gas to
support the weight of the test water.
3) Provide temporary restraints for expansion joints for additional pressure load under test.
4) Isolate equipment in piping system with rated pressure lower than pipe test pressure.
5) Do not paint or insulate exposed piping until successful perfonnance of pressure test.
b. Soil, waste, drain and vent systems:
1 ) Test at completion. of installation of each stack or section of piping by filling system with
water and checking joints and fittings for leaks.
2) Eliminate leaks before proceeding with work or concealing piping.
3) Minimum test heights shall be 10FT above highest stack inlet.
4. Air testing methodology:
a. General:
1) Assure air is ambient temperature.
b. Low pressure air testing:
1) Place plugs in line and inflate to 25 psig.
2) Check pneumatic plugs for proper sealing.
3) Introduce low pressure air into sealed line segment until air pressure reaches 4 psig greater
than ground water that may be over the pipe.
a) Use test gage conforming to ANSI B40.1 with 0 to 15 psi scale and accuracy of 1
percent of full range.
4) Allow 2 minutes for air pressure to stabilize.
5) After stabilization period (3.5 psig minimum pressure in pipe) discontinue air supply to line
segment.
6) Record pressure at beginning and end of test.
3.5 CLEANING, DISINFECTION AND PURGING
A. Cleaning:
1. Clean interior of piping systems thoroughly before installing.
2. Maintain pipe in clean condition during installation.
3. Before jointing piping, thoroughly clean and wipe joint contact surfaces and then properly dress and
make joint.
4. Immediately prior to pressure testing, clean and remove grease, metal cuttings, dirt, or other foreign
materials which may have entered the system.
5. At completion of work and prior to Final Acceptance, thoroughly clean work installed under these
Specifications. Clean equipment, fixtures, pipe, valves, and fittings of grease, metal cuttings, and
sludge which may have accumulated by operation of system, from testing, or from other causes.
Repair any stoppage or discoloration or other damage to parts of building, its finish, or fumishings,
due to failure to properly clean piping system, without cost to Owner.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.6 LOCATION OF BURIED OBSTACLES
A. Furnish exact location and description of buried utilities encountered and thrust block placement
B. Reference items to definitive reference point locations such as found property corners, entrances to
buildings, existing structure lines, fire hydrants and related fixed structures.
C. Include such information as location, elevation, coverage, supports and additional pertinent information.
D. Incorporate information on "As-Recorded" Drawings.
3.7 SCHEDULES
A. SPECIFICATION SCHEDULE - SYSTEM 27
1. General:
a. Piping service:
1) Water line.
2) Drain line.
b. Test requirements pressure lines:
1) Test medium: Water.
2) Pressure: 100 psig.
3) Duration: 6 HRS.
2. System components:
a. Pipe size: 12 IN and smaller.
1) Exposed service:
a) Material: PVC, Type 1, Grade 1, Schedule 80.
b) Reference: ASTM 01785.
c) Lining: None.
d) Coating: Paint.
e) Fittings: Solvent welded socket type complying with ASTM 02467.
~ Joints: Solvent welded with unions at valves, penetrations through structures and
equipment connections for pipe 2 IN and less and flanges at those locations for pipe
above 2 IN.
2) Buried service:
a) Material: PVC, Type 1, Grade 1, Schedule 40.
b) Reference: ASTM 01785.
c) Lining: None.
d) Coating: None.
e) Fittings: Solvent welded socket type complying with ASTM 02466.
~ Joints: Solvent welded.
END OF SECTION
. Section IV
1V-191
. Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Contrallmprovements Project
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project '
Section N
N-192
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 15090
PIPE SUPPORT SYSTEMS
PART 1 . GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Pipe support and anchor systems.
B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Section II - Instructions to Bidders.
2. Section III - General Conditions.
3. Section IV - Supplemental Technical Specifications, Division 09, Section 09905 - Painting and
Protective Coatings. .
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Referenced Standards:
1. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME):
a. B31.3, Process Piping.
2. ASTM International (ASTM):
a. A36, Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel.
b. A510, Standard Specification for General Requirements for Wire Rods and Coarse Round Wire,
Carbon Steel.
c. A575, Standard Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Merchant Quality, M-Grades.
d. A576, Standard Specification for Steel Bars, Hot-Wrought, Special Quality.
3. American Welding Society (AWS):
a. 01.1, Structural Welding Code - Steel.
4. Manufacturer's Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc. (MSS):
a. SP-58, Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and Manufacture.
b. SP-69, Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings:
1. See Section 01340 for requirements for the mechanics and administration of the submittal process.
2. Product technical data including:
a. Acknowledgement that products submitted meet requirements of standards referenced.
b. Manufacturer's installation instructions.
c. Itemized list of wall sleeves, anchors, support devices and all other items related to pipe support
system.
d. Scale drawings showing guides, hangers, supports, anchors, structural members and
appurtenances to describe the pipe support system.
3. System pipe support drawings, designed and sealed by a registered Professional Engineer in the
State of Florida.
a. General arrangement plans and elevations.
b. Support details keyed to arrangement drawings.
PART 2 . PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. All materials shall be hot dipped galvanized after fabrication.
Marshall Street and Haltheast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
1V-193
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section I'i
N-194
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1. Stainless steel materials may be substituted for galvanized mild carbon steel.
B. Hanger Rods:
1. Material:
a. ASTM A36.
b. ASTM A510, Grade 1020.
c. ASTM A575, Grade M1020.
d. ASTM A576, Grade 1020.
e. Minimum allowable tensile stress of 12,000 psi at 650 DegF per MSS SP-58.
2. Continuously threaded.
3. Load limit:
NOMINAL ROD DIAMETER
3/8 IN DIA (min)
1/2 IN DIA
5/8 IN DIA
3/4 IN DIA
7/8 IN DIA
11N DIA
MAXIMUM SAFE LOAD, (LBS)
610
1,130
1,810
2,710
3,770
4,960
C. Hangers:
1. Hangers for use other than directly on copper pipe.
2. Hanger type schedule:
APPLICATION
All except noted
All except noted
Steam, condensate and hot water
PIPE SIZE
4 IN and less
Over 4 IN
All
HANGER TYPE
ANVIL Figure 108 with Figure 114
ANVIL Figure 590
ANVIL Figure 181 Figure 82 or equal
D. Beam Clamps for Hanger Rods:
1. Standard duty.
2. ANVIL Figure 133.
E. Trapeze Hangers for Suspended Piping:
1. Material: Steel.
2. Angles, channels, or other structural shapes.
3. Curved roller surfaces at support point corresponding with type of hanger required.
F. Vertical Pipe Supports:
1. At base of riser.
2. Lateral movement:
a. Clamps or brackets:
G. Expanding Pipe Supports:
1. Spring hanger type.
2. MSS SP-58.
H. Pipe Support Saddle:
1. For pipe located 3 FT or less from floor elevation, except as otherwise indicated on Drawings.
2. ANVIL Figure 264.
I. Pipe Support Risers:
1. Schedule 40 pipe.
2. As recommended by saddle manufacturer.
J. Pipe Support Base Plate:
1. _ 4 IN larger than support.
2. Collar 3/16 IN thickne~s, circular in shape; and sleeve type connection to pipe.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3. Collar fitted over outside of support pipe and extended 2 IN from floor plate.
4. Collar welded to floor plate.
5. Edges ground smooth.
6. Assembly hot dipped galvanized after fabrication.
K Pipe Covering Protection Saddle:
1. For insulated pipe at point of support.
2. ANVIL Figure 167, Type 8.
L. Wall 8rackets:
1. For pipe located near walls and 8 FT or more above floor elevation or as otherwise indicated on the
Drawings.
2. ANVIL Figure 199.
2.2 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. See 1.3 Submittals.
8. Supports capable of supporting the pipe for all service and testing conditions.
1. Provide 5 to 1 safety factor for working or design loads.
C. A1low.free expansion and contraction of the piping to prevent excessive stress resulting from service and
testing conditions or from weight transferred from the piping or attached equipment.
\
D. Design supports and hangers to allow for proper pitch of pipes.
E. For chemical and waste piping, design, materials of construction and installation of pipe hangers, supports,
guides, restraints, and anchors:
1. ASME 831.3.
2. MSS SP-58 and MSS SP-69.
3. Except where modified by this Specification.
F. For hot and cold water piping, design, materials of construction and installation of pipe hangers, supports,
guides, restraints, and anchors:
1. ASME 831.1.
2. MSS SP-58 and MSS SP~69.
G. Check all physical clearances between piping, support system and structure.
1. Provide for vertical adjustment after erection.
H. Support vertical pipe runs in pipe chases at base of riser.
1. Support pipes for lateral movement with clamps or brackets.
I. Place hangers on outside of pipe insulation.
1. Use a pipe covering protection saddle for insulated pipe at support point.
J. Pipe Support Spacing:
1. General:
a. Factor loads by specific weight of liquid conveyed if specific weight is greater than water.
b. Locate pipe supports at maximum spacing scheduled unless indicated otherwise on the
Drawings.
c. Provide at least one support for each length of pipe at each change of direction and at each
valve.
2. FRP pipe support schedule:
PIPE SIZES - IN MAXIMUM SPAN - FT
10 and less 10
12 15
18 18
24 24
* Maximum fluid temperature of 120 DegF.
Marshall Street and Norlheast WPC Facilities
Odor Contrallmprovements Project
Section IV
1V-195
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
1V-196
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PART 3 .. EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Provide piping systems exhibiting pulsation, vibration, swaying, or impact with suitable constraints to
correct the condition.
1. Included in this requirement are movements from:
a. Trap discharge.
b. Water hammer.
c. Similar internal forces.
B. Locate piping and pipe supports as to not interfere with open accesses, walkways, platforms, and with
maintenance or disassembly of equipment.
C. Inspect hangers for:
1. Design offset.
2. Adequacy of clearance for piping and supports in the hot and cold positions.
3. Guides to permit movement without binding.
4. Adequacy of anchors.
D. Inspect hangers after erection of piping systems and prior to pipe testing and flushing.
E. Field Painting:
1. Comply with Section 09905.
END OF SECTION
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 15100
VALVES: BASIC REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 . GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Valving, actuators, and valving appurtenances.
B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Section II - Instructions to Bidders.
2. Section III - General Conditions.
3. Section IV - Supplemental Technical Specifications, Division 09, Section 09905 - Painting and
Protective Coatings.
4. Section IV - Supplemental Technical Specifications, DivisionSection 15060 - Pipe and Pipe Fittings:
Basic Requirements.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Referenced Standards:
1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): .
a. B1.20.1, Pipe Threads, General Purpose.
b. B16.34, Valves-Flanged, Threaded and Welding End.
2. ASTM International (ASTM):
a. D256, Standard Test Methods for Determining the Izod Pendulum Impact Resistance of Plastics.
b. D638, Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics.
c. D648, Standard Test Method for Deflection Temperature of Plastics Under Flexural Load.
d. D695, Standard Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid Plastics.
e. D2240, Standard Test Method for Rubber Property-Durometer Hardness.
3. Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc. (MSS).
4. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):
a. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum).
b. MG 1, Motors and Generators.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings:
1. See Section 01340 for requirements for the mechanics and administration of the submittal process.
2. Product technical data including:
a. Acknowledgement that products submitted meet requirements of standards referenced.
b. Manufacturer's installation instructions.
. c. Valve pressure and temperature rating.
d. Valve material of construction.
e. Special linings.
f. Valve dimensions and weight.
g. Valve flow coefficient.
3. Test reports.
B. Operation and Maintenance Manuals:
1. See Section 01340 for requirements for:
a. The mechanics and administration of the submittal process.
b. The content of Operation and Maintenance Manuals.
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
. Section IV
IV-197
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
1V-198
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PART 2 . PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Refer to individual Valve Specification Sections.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Refer to individual Valve Specification Sections.
2.3 VALVE ACTUATORS
A. Valve Actuators - General:
1. Provide actuators as shown on Drawings or specified.
2. Counter clockwise opening as viewed from the top.
3. Direction of opening and the word OPEN to be cast in handwheel or valve bonnet.
4. Size actuator to produce required torque with a maximum pull of 80 L8 at the maximum pressure
rating of the valve provided and withstand without damage a pull of 200 L8 on handwheel or
chainwheel or 300 foot-pounds torque on the operating nut.
5. Unless otherwise specified, actuators for valves to be buried, submerged or installed in vaults or
manholes shall be sealed to withstand at least 20 FT of submergence.
6. Extension Stem:
a. Install where shown or specified.
b. Solid steel with actuator key and nut. diameter not less than stem of valve actuator shaft.
c. Pin all stem connections.
d. Center in valve box or grating opening band with guide bushing.
S. Exposed Valve Manual Actuators:
1. Provide for all exposed valves not having electric or cylinder actuators.
2. Provide lever actuators for plug valves. butterfly valves and ball valves 3 IN DIA and smaller.
a. Lever actuators for butterfly valves shall have a minimum of 5 intermediate lock positions
between full open and full close.
b. Provide at least two levers for each type and size of valve furnished.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. End Connections:
1. Provide the type of end connections for valves as required in the Piping Schedules presented in
Section 15060 or as shown on the Drawings.
2. Comply with the following standards:
a. Threaded: ANSI 81.20.1.
b. Flanged: ANSI 816.1 Class 125 unless otherwise noted or AWWA C207.
c. 8ell and spigot or mechanical (gland) type: AWWA C111.
d. Soldered: ANSI 816.18.
e. Grooved: Rigid joints per Table 5 of AWWA C606.
8. Refer to individual valve sections for specifications of each type of valve on Project.
C. Nuts, Bolts. and Washers: .
1. Wetted or internal to be bronze or stainless steel. Exposed to be zinc or cadmium plated.
D. On Insulated Piping: Provide valves with extended stems to permit proper insulation application without
interference from handle.
E. Epoxy Interior Coating:
1. Provide epoxy interior coating for all ferrous surfaces in accordance with AWWA C550.
PART 3 . EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
A. Install products in accordance with manufacture~s instructions.
B. Painting Requirements:
1. Comply with Section 09905 for painting and protective coatings.
C. Support exposed valves and piping adjacent to valves independently to eliminate pipe loads being
transferred to valve and valve loads being transferred to the piping.
D. For threaded valves, provide union on one side within 2 FT of valve to allow valve removal.
E. Install valves accessible for operation, inspection, and maintenance.
END OF SECTION
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
1V-199
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section N
N.200
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 15104
BALL VALVES
PART 1 . GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Ball valves.
B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Section II - Instructions to Bidders.
. 2. Section III - General Conditions.
3. Section IV - Supplemental Technical Specifications, Division 15, Section 15100 - Valves: Basic
Requirements.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Referenced Standards:
1. ASTM International (ASTM):
a. 01784, Standard Specification for Rigid Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated
Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds.
2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):
a. B16.34, Valves-Flanged, Threaded, and Welding End.
3. Federal Specification (FS):
a. WW-V-35C, Valve, Ball.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings:
1. See Section 01340 for requirements for the mechanics and administration of the submittal process.
2. See Section 15100.
B. Operation and Maintenance Manuals:
1. See Section 01340 for requirements for:
a. The mechanics and administration of the submittal process.
b. The content of Operation and Maintenance Manuals.
PART 2 . PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the manufacturers listed in the applicable articles
below are acceptable.
B. Submit request for substitution in accordance with Specification Section 01640.
2.2 PLASTIC BALL VALVES 112 TO 41N DIA
A. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Chemtrol.
2. Spears.
3. ASAHVAmerica.
B. Materials:
1. Body, stem, ball, handle, end connectors:
a. PVC ASTM D1784-12454B.
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
1V-201
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities .
Odor Contrallmprovements Project
Section IV
1V-202
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2. Ball Seat Teflon.
3. O-rings: Vlton.
C. Design Requirements:
1. Rated at 150 psi at 75 DegF.
2. Double or "true union" design.
3. Blocks both directions, upstream and downstream.
4. Union nut capable of compensating for seat wear.
5. Body with mounting pad for actuators where required.
6. Capable of being disconnected at downstream end under full line pressure.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Furnish actuator integral with valve.
B. Refer to Section 15100 for actuator requirements.
2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Shop test AWWA C507 ball valves in accordance with AWWA C507.
B. Furnish record of test.
PART 3 . EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. See Section 15100.
END OF SECTION
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 15885M
(MARSHALL STREET WPC FACILITY)
BIOLOGICAL ODOR CONTROL SYSTEM
PART 1 . GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This specification is provided for informational purposes only. The Owner shall supply this equipment.
Refer to Section 3.1 for Contractor respOnsibilities.
B. Section Includes:
1. Zabocs 1M Odor control system:
a. Skid-mounted two-stage. biological absorption/adsorption system.
C. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Section II - Instructions to Bidders.
2. Section 111- General Conditions.
3. Section IV - Supplemental Technical Specifications, Division 15. Section 15060 - Pipe and Pipe
Fittings: Basic Requirements.
4. Section IV - Supplemental Technical Specifications. Division 15, Section 15890 - HVAC: Ductwork.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Referenced Standards:
1. Air Movement and Control Association (AMCA).
2. ASTM International (ASTM):
a. D883, Definition of Terms Relating to Plastics.
b. D2563, Recommended Practice for Classifying Visual Defects in Glass Reinforced Plastic
Laminate Products.
D2583, Test for Indentation Hardness of Rigid Plastics by Means of Barcollmpressor. .
c. D4097, Standard Specification for Contact-Molded Glass-Fiber- Reinforced Thermoset Resin
Chemical-Resistant Tanks.
3. National Bureau of Standards (NBS):
a. PS 15-69, Custom contact molded Reinforced Polyester Chemical Resistant Process Equipment.
B. The Engineer reserves the right to reject delivery of any or all pieces of equipment found, upon inspection,
to have any or all of the following: blisters, chips, crazing, exposed glass, cracks burned areas, dry spots,
foreign matter, surface porosity, sharp discontinuity or entrapped air at the surface of the laminate. Any
item that does not satisfy the tolerances as below shall be rejected:
Defect Inside Surface
Blister None
Chips None
Crazing None
Cracks None
Ex osed Glass None
Scratches None
Outside Surface
Max. dimensions: 1/4" diameter by
118" high; Max density: 1 per sq. ft.;
Min. ration: 2" a art
Max. dimension of break: 1/4" and
thickness no greater than 10% of wall
thickness; Max. dens' : 1 r . ft.
Max. length: 1/2"; Max. density: 5
r s . ft.; Min. se ration: 2"
None
None
Max. len th: 1"; Max. de th: 0.010"
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
1V-203
None
None
None
None
Max. 1/8 inches, dia. by 1/32 inches
dee ; Max: 10 er ft2
None
None at the surface 1/16 inches and
10 per s uare in. max
D Sot
Entrapped Air
C. The Engineer reserves the right to be present at the fabricators facility for visual inspection of equipment to
be supplied.
D. Upon completion of the installation, each piece of equipment and each system shall be tested for
satisfactory operation without excessive noise, vibration, overheating, etc. Compliance shall be based on
the equipment manufacturer's specifications and all applicable costs and standards. All equipment must
be adjusted and checked for misalignment, clearances, supports, and adherence to safety standards.
E. The Contractor shall be responsible for the successful startup and testing of each odor control facility. The
Contractor shall provide all necessary facilities, manpower, tools, instrumentation, and laboratory testing
services required during this phase of the work.
1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Mufti-Stage Package System: The Owner shall furnish a complete "once-through two-stage", pre-piped, wired,
and packaged odor control system including two integral treatment stages, exhaust fan, valves, fittings,
ductwork, and all other equipment and accessories as specified to provide a complete and functioning system.
The biological treatment stage shall utilize a granular inorganic media to facilitate absorption and adsorption of
odor compounds. The polishing stage shall utilize a granular media that shall be specifically designed to
adsorb odorous compounds with the ability to support biological degradation of the compounds. The first
stage shall operate with an independently controlled irrigation system to maintain optimum wetted conditions
to support unique microbial growth for biological destruction of the odorous compounds and removal of toxic
metabolites. Systems using any type of organic media and systems using a single inorganic media shall not
be acceptable.
B. Design Basis The mechanical, structural, process and electrical design has been based on a ZABOCSTM odor
control system manufactured by USFilter RJ Environmental Products, Poway, Califomia.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings:
1. See Section 01340 for requirements for the mechanics and administration of the submittal process.
2. Drawings of system showing assemblies, arrangements, piping, electrical, mounting details,
equipment outline dimensions, fitting size and location, motor data, operating weights of all equipment
and sufficient information to allow the Engineer to check clearances, connections, and conformance
with the specifications.
3. Materials of construction of all equipment.
4. Manufacturer's catalog data, operating literature. Specifications, performance data, and calibration
curves for exhaust fan and auxiliary components.
5. Complete instrumentation, control, logic and power wiring diagrams in sufficient detail to allow
installation of the instrumentation, controls, and electrical components.
6. Test reports:
a. Hydrostatic and bum tests on fiberglass vessels per Article 2.6.
7. Calculations:
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
N-204
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
a. Submit detailed design calculations for tension, compression, cantilever, vibration ovaling and
dynamic stability stamped by a registered Structural Engineer.
B. Samples:
1. Vessel, duct, and pipe wall.
e. Operation and Maintenance Manuals:
1. See Section 01340 for requirements for:
a. The mechanics and administration of the submittal process.
b. The content of Operation and Maintenance Manuals.
1.5 MANUFACTURER'S SERVICES
A. The system manufacturer's representative shall be present at the job site for the following time period;
travel time excluded:
1. Sixteen hours for inspection of the installation and training of Owner's staff in operation of the system.
2. Provide one trip for two days for these tasks
PART 2 . PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. The gas treatment system shall be a two-stage, once through biologically active odor removal system,
designed to remove minimum of 99% of H2S vapor in a single pass. The system shall consist of a
humidifier, one biological gas conditioning/treatment stage, and one vertical gas polishing stage in series.
After humidification, the first stage shall facilitate biological destruction of odor compounds absorbed by the
liquid in the system and adsorbed on the inorganic media. The biological section shall include a spray
header to distribute liquid evenly over the media. The complete treatment vessel shall be fabricated of
premium grade FRP.
1. The air shall enter the vessel through the humidification section. After humidification, the first
treatment stage shall contain Biodagene 1M media specifically designed to support biological growth for
degradation of odor compounds. This stage shall provide absorption of odors from the air stream.
The second polishing stage shall contain USFilter Biocarb 1M media specifically designed to adsorb
odor compounds and to support biological degradation of those compounds. This stage shall provide
final removal of odors to the specified level. Standard activated carbon media shall not be acceptable.
Overall media depth shall be a minimum of 48 inches.
2. The first stage of media shall be wetted with fresh potable or re-use make-up water.
3. The overall system size, including the fan, controls, and appurtenances shall not exceed the
dimensions shown on the contract drawings. Access manways shall be provided to allow access to
the system intemals. As a minimum, access manways shall be provided between the treatment
stages. A portion of the system top shall be removable for access to the top of the second stage.
4. The system shall be included with all piping, valves, and intemals. The material of construction of
intemals shall be as follows:
Media Support: HOPE and FRP
Liquid Distributor: pve
Spray Nozzles: pve
5. The system shall have all components pre-mounted and piped on the unitary constructed system.
The system shall be shipped as a single piece. The media shall be shipped separately to the job site
for field installation per the manufacturer's recommendation.
2.2 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable:
1. Odor control system:
a. U.S. Filter
b. No like, equivalent or "or-equal" item is permitted.
2.3 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
1V-205
The system shall be capable of removing foul air at a rate no lower than the rate shown on the following
table.
A Foul air removed from the facility will have an average and peak concentration of hydrogen sulfide (H2S)
and design air flow rate as listed in the following table:
System I.D. Air Flow Rate, efm Ave. Inlet H2S Cone. Peak H2S Cone., ppm
Zb-8020 4,000 15 100
The odor control system shall demonstrate following performance when operating under design flow
conditions listed above.
INLET OUTLET
1-10 ppm H2S 0.1 ppm H2S
Greater than 10 ppm H2S 1 % of inlet
Maximum Pressure Drop: The pressure drop across the odor control system shall not exceed 5.0 in.w.c. at
the maximum air flow rate specified above.
2.4 MATERIALS
A. The vessel and accessories shall be contact molded manufactured in accordance with NBS PS 15-69,
ASTM D 4097 for contact molding. Any material of construction other than FRP with premium grade resin
will not be allowed.
B. Resin used in the system liner shall be a premium vinyl ester type such as Hetron 922 by Ashland
Chemicals, Derakane 411 by Dow Chemical, Vipel F010 by AOC, or approved equal. The resin shall be
reinforced with an inner veil of a suitable synthetic organic fiber such as Nexus 111-00010.
C. Reinforcement: Glass fiber reinforcement used shall be commercial grade corrosion resistance
borosilicate glass.
1. All glass fiber reinforcement shall be Type C, chemical grade, Type E electrical grade.
2. Surfacing veil shall be 10 mil Nexus 111-00010 or equal.
3. Mat shall be Type "En (electrical grade) glass, 1 1/2 oz. per sq. ft with a nominal fiber length of 1.25 +
0.25 inches, with a silane finish and styrene soluble binder.
4. Continuous glass roving, used in choppergun.spray-up applications shall be type "En grade with
chrome or silane coupling agent.
5. Alternate layers of mat and woven roving used for reinforcement.
D. Miscellaneous:
1. Stainless Steel: Unless otherwise specified, all fasteners, and metal attachments, such as anchors,
brackets etc shall be ANSI 316SS.
2. Gaskets: Unless otherwise specified, all gaskets shall be EPDM.
2.5 INSTRUMENTATION AND SYSTEM CONTROLS
The electrical control panel shall provide electrical control for the exhaust fan and water addition system. A
120 V AC 1-phase and 480 V AC, 3-phase feed shall be supplied to the panel for use to power the system.
The control panel enclosure shall be of fiberglass construction and rated NEMA 4><' The panel shall be
mounted to the system assembly and factory tested to full operation with all other components prior to
shipment.
A. The panel shall have the following components or capabilities:
1. Fan switch (ON-OFF).
2. Nutrient pump switch (H-0-A).
3. BlowerVFD.
4. Push-to-Test button for the water valve.
5. Timer relay for on/off control of water valve.
6. Controls and external connections for acclimation kit as described in item 2.8 below.
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
1V-206
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
B. The water control cabinet shall be constructed from a NEMA 12 rated FRP cabinet with all internal piping
SCH 80 PVC. The panel shall be mounted to the system assembly. The cabinet shall contain the
following components:
1. Pressure reducing valve.
2. Nutrient addition point with a flow measurement device.
3. Irrigation solenoid valve.
4. Valve for pre-humidification.
5. Irrigation system pressure gauge.
C. Water pressure regulator, solenoid valve, and rotameter shall be provided for control of water application
rates. These components shall be mounted in the water control cabinet.
2.6 EXHAUST FAN
Exhaust Fan shall have fiberglass reinforced plastic centrifugal backward inclined impeller. Wheel shall be
statically and dynamically balanced. Resin shall be suitable for exposure to the specific service conditions
Shaft shall be 316SS. Shaft seal shall be Teflon or Neoprene.
Bearings shall be heavy duty, self aligning grease lubricated ball type with minimum of 100,000 hour B-10
life. OSHA approved weather cover shall be provided. Motor shall be TEFC, 3600 RPM with a 1.15
service factor and suitable for 3160/230-460V. Fan shall be provided with a constant V-belt drive. The
motor shall be inverter-duty, suitable for use with a VFD
Fan housing shall be constructed of fiberglass and reinforced with rigid bracing to increase structural
integrity. Bearing support brackets shall be positioned to directly oppose belt tension forces. Fan housing
shall be a curved scroll design. The fan inlet shall be slip type and the fan outlet shall have a flanged
nozzle.
ZB-8020
4,000
2.0
5.0
5.0
A. Fan shall be New York Blower, Hartzell or equal. The fan shall have an AMCA seal.
2.7 ACCESSORIES
1. Air inlet, air outlet, spray headers, baffles, media support, drain and all connections shown on the
drawings shall be provided by the manufacturer. Tie down lugs shall be integrally molded into the
walls of the vessel. All external bolts shall be 316SS and designed for the specified loads. Interior
fasteners shall be of corrosion resistant materials such as PVC or FRP.
2. Neoprene Pad: A 1/4" thick, 60 durometer neoprene rubber sheet must be placed underneath the
vessel.
3. Water Flow Control:
a. The direct reading rotameter shall be a variable area type with a Teflon float, EPR "0" rings, and
PVC fittings.
b. The rotameter shall be of the same size as the pipe in which it is installed.
c. The rotameter shall have a direct reading scale.
4. Water Distribution System:
a. The first media stage shall be equipped with an independent water distribution system.
b. The system shall be designed to irrigate the top of the first media bed with complete and even
coverage via spray nozzles.
5. Nutrient Addition:
a. A nutrient containment and metering system shall be provided with the system.
b. Nutrients supplied as a coating to the support media shall not be allowed.
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Controllmptovements Project
Section N
IV-207
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Contrallmprovements Project
Section IV
1V-2OB
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.8 PIPING
All make-up water and drain piping shall be SCH 80 PVC. The Contractor shall insulate and heat trace all
external piping as required by climate conditions.
2.9 FABRICATION
A General:
1. Fabrication shall be in accordance with NBS PS 15-69, ASTM 0 3299 and ASTM 0-4097. All non
molded surfaces shall be coated with resin incorporating paraffin to facilitate a full cure of the surface.
All cut edges, bolt holes, secondary bonds shall be sealed with a resin coat prior to the final
paraffinated resin coat All voids to be filled with a resin paste.
B. Corrosion Liner:
1. The inner surface of all laminates shall be resin rich and reinforced with one NEXUS 111-00010 with a
minimum thickness of 10 mils. The interior corrosion layer shall consist of two layers of 1 1/2 oz. per
sq. ft. chopped strand mat. If the application is by chopper gun spray up the glass fiber shall be 1/2 to
2 in length. The total corrosion liner thickness shall be a minimum of 100 mils and have a resin to
glass ratio of 80/20. All edges of reinforcement to be lapped a minimum of one inch.
C. Structural Laminate:
1. Structural laminates shaUconsist of alternating layers of 1-1/2 oz per sq. ft mat or chopped glass and
24 oz per sq. yard woven roving applied to reach a designed thickness. Actual laminate sequences
shall be per the laminate tables shown on fabrication drawings. The exterior surface shall be
relatively smooth and shall have no glass fibers exposed. The exterior shall be surface coated with
gel coat containing ultra violet light inhibitors.
2.1 0 ACCLIMATION KIT
The Manufacturer shall provide a start-up kit with the system to facilitate biological acclimation and start-up
of the system. The kit shall remain the property of the Manufacturer but shall be used by the
Contractor/Owner for a period of 4 weeks or until system is fully acclimated.
The kit shall consist of a tank for collection of system leachate, pump for distribution of collected leachate
over the biological treatment bed, and all piping and controls necessary to place the startup kit in fully
automatic operation with the odor control system
All liquid connections between the odor control system and the startup kit shall be by flexible hose.
A. All electrical connections between the odor control system and the startup kit shall be of the quick-connect
plug-in type.
2.11 NUTRIENT RESERVOIR
The Nutrient Reservoir shall be integrated into the system. Loose external tanks shall not be allowed.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SITE AND UTILITIES
A. The system shall be located on a foundation as shown on the drawing. The following utilities shall be
provided at the site and located as shown on the drawing. Site preparation, utility service, and installation
are not provided by the Manufacturer under these specifications.
1. Electrical -120 V AC i-phase and 480 V AC, 3-phase services are required.
2. Water Supply - a 1 inch water supply with backflow preventer are required. Water supply must
provide for a minimum of 30 psi continuous pressure at 18.0 GPM and a hardness not to exceed 200
mglL as calcium carbonate.
3. Drain - a 2 inch PVC gravity drain to sewer with a 10. barometric trap is requir~d.
3.2 START -UP AND TRAINING
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
A. The services of a factory representative shall be provided as specified in Section 1.6 to insure proper
installation and start-up of the system. The Manufacturer shall make any changes to the system that may
be necessary to meet the specified performance under inlet conditions as specified.
3.3 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Six manuals shall be submitted prior to final acceptance of the equipment.
3.4 WARRANTY
Contractor shall warrantee the whole system, both in material and workmanship for a period of one year
from the day of beneficial occupancy. This period shall not extend beyond 18 months after delivery of
equipment to job site.
A. The Manufacturer shall provide a price for media replacement that is valid for 5 years.
END OF SECTION
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
1V.209
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
fV-210
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 15885
(NORTHEAST WPC FACILITY)
BIOLOGICAL ODOR CONTROL SYSTEM
PART 1 . GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This specification is provided for informational purposes only. The owner shall supply this equipment.
Refer to Section 3.1 for Contractor responsibilities.
B. Section Includes:
1. Zabocs 1M Odor control system:
a. Skid-mounted two-stage, biological absorption/adsorption system.
C. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Section II - Instructions to Bidders.
2. Section 11\ - General Conditions.
3. Section IV - Supplemental Technical Specifications, Division 15, Section 15060 - Pipe and Pipe
Fittings: Basic Requirements.
4. Section IV - Supplemental Technical Specifications, Division 15, Section 15890 - HVAC: Ductwork.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Referenced Standards:
1. Air Movement and Control Association (AMCA).
2. ASTM International (ASTM):
a. 0883, Definition of Terms Relating to Plastics.
b. 02563, Recommended Practice for Classifying Visual Defects in Glass Reinforced Plastic
Laminate Products.
02583, Test for Indentation Hardness of Rigid Plastics by Means of Barcollmpressor.
c. 04097, Standard Specification for Contact-Molded Glass-Fiber- Reinforced Thermoset Resin
Chemical-Resistant Tanks.
3. National Bureau of Standards (NBS):
a. PS 15-69, Custom contact molded Reinforced Polyester Chemical Resistant Process Equipment.
B. The Engineer reserves the right to reject delivery of any or all pieces of equipment found, upon inspection,
to have any or all of the following: blisters, chips, crazing, exposed glass, cracks burned areas, dry spots,
foreign matter, surface porosity, sharp discontinuity or entrapped air at the surface of the laminate. Any
item that does not satisfy the tolerances as below shall be rejected:
Defect Inside Surface
Blister None
Chips None
Crazing None
Cracks None
Ex osed Glass None
Scratches None
Outside Surface
Max. dimensions: 1/4" diameter by
1/8" high; Max density: 1 per sq. ft.;
Min. ration: 2" a art
Max. dimension of break: 1/4" and
thickness no greater than 10% of wall
thickness; Max. dens' : 1 r . ft.
Max. length: 1/2"; Max. density: 5
r . ft.; Min. se ration: 2"
None
None
Max. len th: 1"; Max. de th: 0.010"
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
1V-211
None
None
None
None
Max. 1/8 inches, dia. by 1/32 inches
dee ; Max: 10 rfF
None
None at the surface 1116 inches and
10 per square in. max
D S t
Entrapped Air
None
None
None
None
Max. 1/8" dia. by 1116" deep; Max: 10
r s . ft.
2 s . in. er s . ft.
1/8" and 4 per sq. in. or 1116" and 10
per s . in. within laminate
C. The Engineer reserves the right to be present at the fabricators facility for visual inspection of equipment to
be supplied,
D. Upon completion of the installation, each piece of equipment and each system shall be tested for
satisfactory operation without excessive noise, vibration, overheating, etc. Compliance shall be based on
the equipment manufacturer's specifications and all applicable costs and standards. All equipment must
be adjusted and checked for misalignment, clearances, supports, and adherence to safety standards.
E. The Contractor shall be responsible for the successful startup and testing of each odor control facility. The
Contractor shall provide all necessary facilities, manpower, tools, instrumentation, and laboratory testing
services required during this phase of the work.
1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Multi-Stage Package System: The Owner shall fumish a complete "once-through two-stage", pre-piped, wired,
and packaged odor control system including two integral treatment stages, exhaust fan, valves, fittings,
ductwork, and all other equipment and accessories as specified to provide a complete and functioning system.
The biological treatment stage shall utilize a granular inorganic media to facilitate absorption and adsorption of
odor compounds. The polishing stage shall utilize a granular media that shall be specifically designed to
adsorb odorous compounds with the ability to support biological degradation of the compounds. The first
'stage shall operate with an independently controlled irrigation system to maintain optimum wetted conditions
to support unique microbial growth for biological destruction of the odorous compounds and removal of toxic
metabolites. Systems using any type of organic media and systems using a single inorganic media shall not
be acceptable.
B. Design Basis The mechanical, structural, process and electrical design has been based on a ZABOCSThl odor
control system manufactured by USFilter RJ Environmental Products, Poway, Califomia.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings:
1. See Section 01340 for requirements for the mechanics and administration of the submittal process.
2. Drawings of system shOWing assemblies, arrangements, piping, electrical, mounting details,
equipment outline dimensions, fitting size and location, motor data, operating weights of all equipment
and sufficient information to allow the Engineer to check clearances, connections, and conformance
with the specifications.
3. Materials of construction of all equipment.
4. Manufacturer's catalog data, operating literature. Specifications, performance data, and calibration
curves for exhaust fan and auxiliary components.
5. Complete instrumentation, control, logic and power wiring diagrams in sufficient detail to allow
installation of the instrumentation, controls, and electrical components.
6. Test reports;
a. Hydrostaticand burn tests on fiberglass vessels per Article 2.6.
7. Calculations:
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Faci/ities
Odor Contra/Improvements Project
Section IV
1V-212
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
a. Submit detailed design calculations for tension, compression, cantilever, vibration ovaling and
dynamic stability stamped by a registered Structural Engineer.
B. Samples:
1. vesSel, duct, and pipe wall.
C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals:
1. See Section 01340 for requirements for:
a. The mechanics and administration of the submittal process.
b. The content of Operation and Maintenance Manuals.
1.5 MANUFACTURER'S SERVICES
A. The system manufacturer's representative shall be present at the job site for the following time period;
travel time excluded:
1. Sixteen hours for inspection of the installation and training of Owner's staff in operation of the system.
2. Provide one trip for two days for these tasks.
PART 2. PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. The gas treatment system shall be a two-stage, once through biologically active odor removal system,
designed to remove minimum of 99% of H2S vapor in a single pass. The system shall consist of a
humidifier, one biological gas conditioning/treatment stage, and one vertical gas polishing stage in series.
After humidification, the first stage shall facilitate biological destruction of odor compounds absorbed by the
liquid in the system and adsorbed on the inorganic media. The biological section shall include a spray
header to distribute liquid evenly over the media. The complete treatment vessel shall be fabricated of
premium grade FRP.
1. The air shall enter the vessel through the humidification section. After humidification, the first
treatment stage shall contain Biodagene 1111 media specifically designed to support biological growth. for
degradation of odor compounds. This stage shall provide absorption of odors from the air stream.
The second polishing stage shall contain USFilter Biocarb TM media specifically designed to adsorb
odor compounds and to support biological degradation of those compounds. This stage shall provide
final removal of odors to the specified level. Standard activated carbon media shall not be acceptable.
Overall media depth shall be a minimum of 48 inches.
2. The first stage of media shall be wetted with fresh potable or re-use make-up water.
3. The overall system size, including the fan, controls, and appurtenances shall not exceed the
dimensions shown on the contract drawings. Access manways shall be provided to allow access to
the system internals. As a minimum, access manways shall be provided between the treatment
stages. A portion of the system top shall be removable for access to the top of the second stage.
4. The system shall be included with all piping, valves, and intemals. The material of construction of
intemals shall be as follows:
Media Support: HOPE and FRP
Liquid Distributor: PVC
Spray Nozzles: PVC
Humidifier Nozzles 316 SS
5. The system shall have all components pre-mounted and piped on the unitary constructed system.
The system shall be shipped as a single piece.
2.2 ACCEPT ABLE MAN.UFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable:
1. Odor control system:
a. U.S. Filter
2. No like, equivalent or "or-equal" item (or substitution) is permitted.
2.3 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
1V-213
The system shall be capable of removing foul air at a rate no lower than the rate shown on the following
table.
A. Foul air removed from the facility will have an average and peak concentration of hydrogen sulfide (H2S)
and design air flow rate as listed in the following table:
System 1.0. Air Flow Rate, efrn Ave. Inlet H28 Cone. Peak H2S Cone., ppm
Z8-5000 500 10 ppm 50 ppm
The odor control system shall demonstrate following performance when operating under design flow
conditions listed above.
INLET
1-10 ppm H2S
Greater than 10 ppm H2S
OUTLET
0.1 ppm H2S
1 % of inlet
Maximum Pressure Drop: The pressure drop across the odor control system shall not exceed 5.0 in.w.c. at
the maximum air flow rate specified above.
2.4 MATERIALS
A. The vessel and accessories shall be contact molded manufactured in accordance with NBS PS 15-69,
ASTM D 4097 for contact molding. Any material of construction other than FRP with premium grade resin
will not be allowed.
B. Resin used in the system liner shall be a premium vinyl ester type such as Hetron 922 by Ashland
Chemicals, Derakane 411 by Dow Chemical, Vipel F010 by AOC, or approved equal. The resin shall be
reinforced with an inner veil of a suitable synthetic organic fiber such as Nexus 111-00010.
C. Reinforcement: Glass fiber reinforcement used shall be commercial grade corrosion resistance
borosilicate glass.
1. All glass fiber reinforcement shall be Type C, chemical grade, Type E electrical grade.
2. Surfacing veil shall be 10 mil Nexus 111-00010 or equal.
3. Mat shall be Type "E" (electrical grade) glass, 1 1/2 oz. per sq. ft with a nominal fiber length of 1.25 +
0.25 inches, with a silane finish and styrene soluble binder.
4. Continuous glass roving, used in chopper gun spray-up applications shall be type "E" grade with
chrome or silane coupling agent.
5. Alternate layers of mat and woven roving used for reinforcement.
D. Miscellaneous:
1. Stainless Steel: Unless otherwise specified, all fasteners, and metal attachments, such as anchors,
brackets etc shaH be ANSI316SS. .
2. Gaskets: Unless otherwise specified, all gaskets shall be EPDM.
2.5 INSTRUMENT A TION AND SYSTEM CONTROLS
A. The electrical control panel shall provide electrical control for the exhaust fan and water addition system. A
120 VAC 1-phase and 480 VAC, 3-phase feed shall be supplied to the panel for use to power the system.
B. The control panel enclosure shall be of fiberglass construction and rated NEMA 4X. The panel shall be
mounted to the system assembly and factory tested to full operation with all other components prior to
shipment.
C. The panel shall have the following components or capabilities:
1. Fan switch (ON-OFF).
2. Nutrient pump switch (H-O-A).
3. Blower VFD.
4. Push-to-Test button for the water valve.
5. Timer relay for on/off control of water valve.
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Contrallmprovements Project
Section IV
1V-214
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
D. The water control cabinet shall be constructed from a NEMA 12 rated FRP cabinet with all internal piping
SCH 80 PVC. The panel shall be mounted to the system assembly. The cabinet shall contain the
following components:
1. Pressure reducing valve.
2. Nutrient pump.
3. Irrigation solenoid valve.
4. Valve for pre-humidification.
5. Irrigation system pressure gauge.
E. Water pressure regulator, solenoid valve, and rotameter shall be provided for control of water application
rates. These components shall be mounted in the water control cabinet
2.6 EXHAUST FAN
A. General. Fan shall be centrifugal design manufactured of FRP with a radial blade wheel. The wheel shall
be statically and dynamically balanced. The fan inlet shall be slip type and the fan outlet shall have a
flanged nozzle. The fan will be provided with a neoprene shaft seal.
B. F an shall be supplied with a TEFC motor with 1.15 service factor suitable for three-phase, 60 Hz, 480 volt
service. The fan shall be direct driven. The motor shall be inverter-duty, suitable for use with a VFD.
C. Performance. The fan shall be tested and rated in accordance with AMCA and shall bear the AMCA seal.
The fan shall be designed for the following specifications:
Exhaust Fan Design Requirements, System \.D.
Air Flow Rate, efm 500
S.P. up to System Inlet, in. we 2.0
Total Pressure Drop, in. we 5.0
Motor HP 3.0
D. Fan shall be manufactured by New York Blower, Hartzell, or equal.
2.7 ACCESSORIES
1. Air inlet, air outlet, spray headers, baffles, media support, drain and all connections shown on the
drawings shall be provided by the manufacturer. Tie down lugs shall be integrally molded into the
walls of the vessel. All external bolts shall be 316SS and designed for the specified loads. Interior
fasteners shall be of corrosion resistant materials such as PVC or FRP.
2. Neoprene Pad: A 1/4" thick, 60 durometer neoprene rubber sheet must be placed underneath the
vessel.
3. Water Flow Control:
a. The direct reading rotameter shall be a variable area type with a Teflon float, EPR "a" rings, and
PVC fittings.
b. The rotameter shall be of the same size as the pipe in which it is installed.
c. The rotameter shall have a direct reading scale.
4. Water Distribution System:
a. The first media stage shall be equipped with an independent water distribution system.
b. The system shall be designed to irrigate the top of the first media bed with complete and even
coverage via spray nozzles.
5. Nutrient Addition:
a. A nutrient containment and metering system shall be provided with the system.
b. Nutrients supplied as a coating to the support media shall not be allowed.
2.8 PIPING
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
1V-215
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
1V-216
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
All make-up water and drain piping shall be SCH 80 PVC. The Contractor shall insulate and heat trace all
external piping as required by climate conditions.
2.9 FABRICATION
A. General:
1. Fabrication shall be in accordan'ce with NBS PS 15-69, ASTM D 3299 and ASTM D-4097. All non
molded surfaces shall be coated with resin incorporating paraffin to facilitate a full cure of the surface.
All cut edges, bolt holes, secondary bonds shall be sealed with a resin coat prior to the final
paraffinated resin coat All voids to be filled with a resin paste.
B. Corrosion Liner:
1. The inner surface of all laminates shall be resin rich and reinforced with one NEXUS 111-00010 with a
minimum thickness of 10 mils. The interior corrosion layer shall consist of two layers of 1 1/2 oz. per
sq. ft. chopped strand mat. If the application is by chopper gun spray up the glass fiber shall be 1/2 to
2 in length. The total corrosion liner thickness shall be a minimum of 100 mils and have a resin to
glass ratio of 80/20. All edges of reinforcement to b~ lapped a minimum of one inch. .
C. Structural Laminate:
1. Structural laminates shall consist of alternating layers of 1~ 1/2 oz per sq. ft mat or chopped glass and
24 oz per sq. yard woven roving applied to reach a designed thickness. Actual laminate sequences
shall be per the laminate tables shown on fabrication drawings. The exterior surface shall be
relatively smooth and shall have no glass fibers exposed. The exterior shall be surface coated with
gel coat containing ultra violet light inhibitors.
2.10 NUTRIENT RESERVOIR
A. The Nutrient Reservoir shall be integrated into the system. Loose external tanks shall not be allowed.
PART 3 . EXECUTION
3.1 SITE AND UTILITIES
A. The system shall be located on a foundation as shown on the drawing. The following utilities shall be
provided at the site and located as shown on the drawing. Site preparation, utility service, and installation
are not provided by the Manufacturer under these specifications.
1. Electrical-120 VAC 1-phase and 480 VAC, 3-phase services are required.
2. Water Supply - a 1 inch water supply with backflow preventer are required. Water supply must
provide for a minimum of 30 psi continuous pressure at 6.0 GPM and a hardness not to exceed 200
mglL as calcium carbonate.
3. Drain - a 2 inch PVC gravity drain to sewer with a barometric trap is required.
3.2 START-UP AND TRAINING
A. The services of a factory representative shall be provided as specified in Section 1.6 to insure proper
installation and start-up of the system. The Manufacturer shall make any changes to the system that may
be necessary to meet the specified performance under inlet conditions as specified.
3.3 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Six manuals shall be submitted prior to final aci:eptance of the equipment.
3.4 WARRANTY
Contractor shall warrantee the whole system, both in material and workmanship for a period of one year
from the day of beneficial occupancy. This period shall not extend beyond 18 months after delivery of
equipment to job site.
A. The Manufacturer shall provide a price for media replacement that is valid for 5 years.
END OF SECTION
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 15890
HV AC: DUCTWORK
PART 1 . GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. HV AC ductwork and accessories.
B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Section II - Instructions to Bidders.
2. Section III - General Conditions.
3. Section IV - Supplemental Technical Specifications, Division 09, Section 09905 - Painting and
Protective Coatings.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Referenced Standards:
1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)/American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME):
a. RTP1 - Reinforced Thermoset Plastic Corrosion Resistant Equipment.
2. ASTM International (ASTM):
a. D3299, Standard Specification for Filament-Wound Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Thermoset Resin
Corrosion-Resistant Tanks.
b. D4385, Classifying Visual Defect in Thermosetting Reinforced Plastic Pultruded Products.
c. E84, Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
3. Air Movement and Control Association, Inc. (AMCA).
a. AMCA 500 - Test Methods for Louvers, Dampers, and Shutters.
4. American Welding Society (AWS).
5. Building Code:
a. Florida Building Code and associated standards, 2004 Edition including all Clearwater and
Pinellas County amendments, referred to herein as Building Code.
6. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).
7. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association (SMACNA):
a. Ducted Electric Heat Guide for Air Handling Systems.
b. HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible.
B. Qualifications:
1. Fabricator: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of the specific product, of type, size required,
whose products have been in use in similar service for not less than 3 years.
2. Installers: Firm with at least 5 years installation experience on products similar to that required for this
Project.
3. System Analyses and Design: Ductwork supplier is responsible for adequate support and jointing of
all ductwork. Supports are shown on the Drawings to show intent and provide a basis for Bid.
Supplier shall analyze the duct systems and submit laying schedules showing required supports, etc.
Duct supportsllayout shall be sealed by a registered Professional Engineer stating that the design
meets the requirements of referenced documents.
C. Duct
1. Factory Inspection:
a. Owner shall be given access to the FRP Ductwork and all quality control records during
fabrication and upon completion for the purpose of verifying compliance to the Contract
Documents.
2. Acceptance:
a. Lack of compliance with any aspect of the specifications and drawings will be grounds for
rejection of the equipment.
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
1V-217
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
1V-2f8
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
b. Repair of rejected equipment - Repair procedures must be approved by the owner prior to
implementation. No more than 5 percent of the surface area of each FRP duct component may
be repaired.
3. The fabricator's inspector (Quality Control Manager) will provide the owner with a complete Quality
Control report for the job. The report will be available within 15 days after the final parts are shipped.
The fabricator will have available after each shipment, the completed QC sheets for review upon
request at any time.
D. Damper Leakage Rating:
1. Damper leakage rating AMCA certified. Damper licensed to bear AMCA Certified Ratings Seal in
accordance with AMCA 511. AMCA Certified Ratings Seal applies to air leakage performance.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Installer or Applicator: Installer or applicator is the person actually installing or applying the product in the
field at the Project site.
1. Installer and applicator are synonymous.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings:
1. See Section 01340 for requirements for the mechanics and administration of the submittal process.
2. Scaled ductwork drawings (1/4 IN equals 1 FT) showing duct and accessory layout and support.
B. Miscellaneous Submittal:
1. Documentation of qualifications for fabricators and installers.
C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals:
1. See Section 01340 for requirements for:
a. The mechanics and administration of the submittal process.
2. The content of Operation and Maintenance Manuals.
D. FRP round duct sample, minimum size 12 inches diameter by 12 inches long, and a 450 elbow with quality
of workmanship and glass/resin being quoted. These will be retained for quality comparison on materials
shipped to jobsite.
PART2. PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable:
1. Fiberglass ductwork:
a. Spunstrand.
b. Ceilcote.
c. Belco.
2. Manual dampers:
a. Swartwout.
b. Ruskin.
c. American Warming.
3. Duct sealers:
a. Chicago Mastic.
b. 3M Co.
c. Permatex.
d. Benjamin Foster.
2.2 COMPONENTS
A. Duct (FRP - Exposed)
1. Materials
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
a. Type: Filament wound rated at design pressures indicated in the drawings. Minimum wall
thickness shall be t.145 for 2" through 30".
b. Grade: Type 1, Grade 2 RTRP, Class E per ASTM D2310 and D2996.
c. All ducts shall be designed for not less than 30 inches water column pressure, and 10 inches
water column vacuum. The design, applicable construction, and inspections shall be in
accordance with SMACNA, and visual inspection criteria in accordance with ASME RTP-1. Table
6, Visual Level II.
d. A minimum structural safety factor of 4 shall be used in the design of ducting.
e. The resin used shall be selected to meet the exposures and temperatures of the air to be
exhausted. Minimum barcol hardness: 36. Fillers other than antimony trioxide added for flame
retardancy when required, shall not be allowed, and should not exceed 5% by weight. A
thixotropic agent for viscosity control may be used as recommended by the resin manufacturer.
No thixotropic agent is to be used in the corrosion liner or on surfaces to be in contact with the
corrosive environment. Flame spread rating shall be 25 or less per ASTM E-84. Catalyst shall be
DHD90r High Point 90 per resin manufadure.
f. Corrosion liner: Inner surface shall contain one ply of 10 ml thick minimum C-glass surfacing veil
saturated with vinylester resin. The surface veil shall be overlapped a minimum of 1". Two (2)
layers of 1-1/2 oz.lsq. ft chopped strand mat shall follow surface veil layers. Corrosion liner is to
gel completely before proceeding with structural laminates. In no case shall the interruption
exceed 12 hours. Total liner thickness to be 100 mils. No thixotropic agent or fire retardant
additive is to be used in the liner resin. Corrosion liner shall contain not less than 20 % or more
than 30% glass by weight. Liner shall pass ASME RTP-1 Table 6, level II visual inspection. Total
glass content 25 to 30 %.
g. Structural layer shall be filament wound of Hetron 992FR, or Derakane 510 premium grade,
vinytester resin and Type E 250 strand yield continuous glass roving. The band width is 2114"
using and average of (7) strands per inch. Filament winding cycle thickness to be 0.06.
maximum. Glass content 55 to 65 %. Winding angle shall be 650:f: 20 for increased vacuum
service.
h. Exterior of all laminates shall contain sufficient resin to insure a relatively smooth surface free from
exposed glass fibers or sharp projections. An ultraviolet stabilizer added to the final coat of resin
that also incorporates paraffinated wax curing elements. For optional exterior finishes, ductwork
located outdoors shall contain an exterior colored surface coat. Color to be selected by owner.
Ductwork indoors shall have 2 coats of PPG 42-7 Intumescent paint to provide a class 1 flame
and smoke rating. ASTM E-84 Steiner Tunnel test results shall be attached as part of the
submittal packet.
i. Standard lengths shall be in accordance with the manufacturers published product data sheets
and approved shop drawings. Wall thickness of the duct furnished shall not at any point be less
than specified minimum wall thickness when measured in accordance with ASTM D3567.
j. Duct stiffness: The duct shall have a minimum pipe stiffness in accordance with ASTM D2412 for
the pipe laying conditions as noted for the design conditions.
B. Fittings (FRP - Exposed)
1. Construction shall be similar to that for the dueling.
2. Radius elbows shall be formed over a removable mold for diameters up to 24"".
3. Joints:
a. Duct joints shall be butt and wrap joint type connections.
b. Fittings shall be butt and wrap joint type connections.
c. Adhesive material for field joining shall be supplied in rolls and resin containers no larger than
five gallons.
d. All joints shall be per SMACNA standard, and per attached laminate schedule.
C. Duct (FRP - Buried)
1. Materials
a. The resin used shall bean isophthalic polyester, tested to meet the requirements of Uniform
Mechanical Code, Chapter 6, and suitable for corrosion against all normal soil and moisture
conditions. No orthophthalic resins or resins with filler exceeding 3% will be approved.
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
1V-219
Marshall street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Contrallmprovements Project
Section IV
1V-220
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
b. All duct and fittings shall have a UL listed Class 1 inner liner for both flame spread and smoke
developed ratings.
c. The structural layer shall be filament wound of resin and glass to meet the specified working
pressures and depths of burial requirements.
D. Fittings (FRP - Buried)
1. Construction shall be similar to that for the ducting. Reducers shall be filament wound as specified for
the duct.
2. Joints:
a. Field joints are to be watertight by using an internal galvanized sheet metal sleeve secured with
sheet metal screws.
b. The joints shall be of the wet lay-up type in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
This includes thoroughly cleaning and sanding areas to be joined and using polyester resin and
fiberglass mat.
E. Insulation (FRP - Buried):
1. Underground ductwork shall be factory pre-insulated including all fittings.
2. The duct shall be I.C.B.O. and B.O.CA listed and installed in strict accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions.
F. Supports and Hangers:
1. Materials:
a. Support angles: Aluminum or stainless steel.
b. Hanger rods: Stainless steel.
c. Anchors: Stainless steel wedge type.
2. Fabrication:
a. Trapeze type units.
G. Manually Operated Dampers:
1. Material:
a. FRP Dampers shall be fabricated with the same materials as the duct. No resin variations will be
acceptable.
b. Blade shall be FRP 2 piece molded including blade stiffeners per schedule on drawing. Damper
blade shall be offset 50 in closed position to form a normal stop on wall of duct.
c. Axle to be pultruded FRP made with same resin and continuous strand roving.
d. Bearing to be Teflon. O-rings shall be Viton. No metal parts or cut edges in airstream will be
allowed.
e. Balancing dampers to be with blade stop, axle shaft seals, and locking hand quadrant.
f. Seal blade edge: Extruded vinyl.
2. Fabrication:
a. Frame thickness: 0.125 IN minimum.
b. Flanges: Comply with NIST PS15-69.
c. Blades: Center pivoted. Complete with composite coring or Balso to meet or exceed 1/360
deflection centered in laminate.
d. Blade seal: Extruded vinyl wiper seal mechanically fastened to blade perimeter.
e. Axles: Bolted to shaft.
f. Control shaft: Axle extends 6 inched beyond frame.
g. Maximum Temperature: 2000F (940C)
h. Provide outboard support for operator linkage where damper motor is to be installed outside of
duct.
i. Provide fold out operator mounting bracket where damper motor is to be installed on face of
damper or inside duct.
j. Assembly: Factory assemble damper components
3. Performance Data (12 to 24 inch diameter)
a. Maximum system pressure: 30 inches w.g. (7.5 kPA)
b. Maximum system velocity: 6,000 feet per minute (1,829 m/min)
c. Leakage with Seals: Based on pressure differential of 1 inch w.g. (0.25 kPa).
1) Percent of Maximum Flow: 0.015.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2) Total Leakage: 26.7 cubic feet per minute (0.8 m3/min).
d. Leakage without Seals: Based on pressure differential of 1 inch w.g. (0.25 kpa).
1) Percent of Maximum Flow: 0.16.
2) Total Leakage: 275 cubic feet per minute (7.8 m3/min).
4. Performance Data (less than 12 inches)
a. Maximum system pressure:
b. Maximum system velocity:
c. Leakage with Seals:
1) Percent of Maximum Flow:
2) Total Leakage:
d. Leakage without Seals:
1) Percent of Maximum Flow:
2) Total Leakage:
5. Accessories:
a. Bolt Holes.
b. Actuator.
PART 3 . EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. FRP Duct and Fittings:
1. Installation shall be in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions including but not limited to
the following: duct to be installed in a trench with provision for good drainage, and an allowance for a
minimum of dry sand to completely encase the duct.
2. Store and handle the duct so as to prevent damage. Carefully inspect each length before installation.
If long sections are to be assembled alongside the trench then lowered into position, the duct run
should be supported along its length to avoid strain that may overstress or buckle the duct or damage
the joints. Lay the duct in the trench so that it bears evenly on the bedding or bottom of the trench
throughout its entire length. Arrows on the duct clearly mark the direction of airflow. In locations where
it is necessary to locate the top of the duct so that it projects into the concrete floor slab, a minimum
thickness of two and one half inches of concrete is recommended over the duct. If the duct is not
underslab it should be below the frost line. If the duct must pass directly under a bearing wall, or under
a road, reinforcement over the duct may be required.
B. Dampers:
1. Install where indicated on Drawings of sizes shown.
2. Install dampers round and free from racking with axle running horizontally.
3. Do not compress or stretch damper frame into duct or opening.
4. Handle damper using frame. Do not lift damper using blade or actuator.
END OF SECTION
Marshall Street and Northeast wpe Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
1V-221
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Contrallmprovements Project
Section IV
1V.222
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 15990
HVAC SYSTEMS: BALANCING AND TESTING
PART 1 . GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Adjusting, balancing, and testing of odor control ductwork and balancing dampers.
B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Section /I - Instructions to Bidders.
2. Section III - General Conditions.
3. Section IV - Supplemental Technical Specifications, Division 15, Section 15890 - HVAC: Ductwork.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Referenced Standards:
1. Associated Air Balance Council (MBC):
a. National Standards for Total System Balance.
2. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE):
a. Systems and Equipment Handbook, Chapter entitled "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing.'
3. National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB): .
a. Procedural Standards for Testing Adjusting Balancing of Environmental Systems.
4. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association (SMACNA):
a. HVAC Systems - Testing, Adjusting and Balancing.
B. Qualifications:
1. Work of this Section to be accomplished by an independent testing and balancing firm certified by one
of the following:
a. Associated Air Balance Council (MBC).
b. National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB).
c. Other certification entity approved by Engineer.
2. The independent firm shall not be the same firm as the firm installing the HVAC/odor control
equipmen~ nor under contract to the firm installing the equipment.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings:
1. See Section 01340 for requirements for the mechanics and administration of the submittal process.
2. Certifications:
a. Letter stating the name and qualifications of the firm proposed.
b. Evidence that relevant subcontractors have been notified of the requirement to coordinate
balance and test elements in the work with the testing and balancing firm.
3. Report forms:
a. Procedures and forms to be used in calibrating of test instruments, balancing systems, and
recording and reporting test data.
B. Miscellaneous Submittals:
1. Completed test reports and data forms upon completion of installation, balance and testing of
HV AC/odor control systems.
a. Insert recorded information on report forms required by specifications and approved for use on
project.
b. Additional written verification and other related information clearly identifying project, date and
specifics of verification.
c. Provide forms typed and signed by the testing and balancing firm.
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
IV.223
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
1V-224
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PART 2 . PRODUCTS. (NOT APPLICABLE TO THIS SECTION)
PART 3 . EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A, Secure approved Shop Drawings of all HV AC/odor control equipment
B. Procedures and Forms:
1. Submit procedures and forms to be used in calibration of test instruments, balancing systems, and
recording and reporting test data.
2. Obtain approval before beginning balancing and testing.
C. Do not begin balancing and testing until HVAC/odorcontrol systems are complete and in full working order.
1. Place HV AC/odor control systems into full operation and continue their operation during each working
day of balancing and testing.
D. Provide qualified heating and ventilating Engineer(s) to supervise and perform balancing and testing.
E. Review design Drawings, specifications, approved Shop Drawings and other related items to become
thoroughly acquainted with the design of HV AC/odor control systems.
F. Check all installed systems against Contract Drawings, Specifications and Shop Drawings to see that
system is installed as required.
1. Report deficiencies to the Engineer.
2. Report deficiencies to Contractor for remedial action including providing corrective measures required
in the function of any part of system to complete balancing.
G. Make necessary adjustments as required to balance the systems.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Balance and Test Air Systems:
1. Test and record system static pressures, suction and discharge.
2. Adjust dampers in supply to design CFM.
3. Prepare and submit reports.
END OF SECTION
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 16010
ELECTRICAL: BASIC REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 . GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Basic requirements for electrical systems.
B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Section II - Instructions to Bidders.
2. Section 111- General Conditions.
3. Section IV - Supplemental Technical Specifications, Division 16, Section 16120 - Wire and Cable-
600 Volt and Below.
4. Section IV - Supplemental Technical Specifications, Division 16, Section 16130 - Raceways and
Boxes.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Referenced Standards:
1. Aluminum Association, Inc. (AA):
a. 1, Aluminum Standards and Data.
2. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI).
3. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):
a. C2, National Electrical Safety Code.
4. ASTM International (ASTM):
a. A123. Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel
Products.
b. A153, Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware.
5. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):
a. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum).
6. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
a. 70, National Electrical Code (NEe).
7. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL).
8. Where Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) test procedures have been established for the product type,
use UL or ETL Testing Laboratories (ETL) approved electrical equipment and provide with the UL or ETL
label.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. For the purposes of providing materials and installing electrical work the following definitions shall be used.
1. Outdoor area: Exterior locations where the equipment is normally exposed to the weather and
including below grade structures, such as vaults, manholes, handholes and in-ground pump stations.
2. Non-architecturally finished interior area: Pump, chemical, mechanical, electrical rooms and other
similar process type roorns.
3. Highly corrosive and corrosive area: Areas identified on the Drawings where there is a varying degree
of spillage or splashing of corrosive materials such as water, wastewater or chemical solutions; or
chronic exposure to corrosive, caustic or acidic agents, chemicals, chemical fumes or chemical
mixtures.
4. Shop fabricated: Manufactured or assembled equipment for which a UL test procedure has not been
established.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings:
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements project
Section IV
IV-225
1. See Section 01340 for requirements for the mechanics and administration of submittal process.
2. General requirements: .. ... .
a. Provide manufacturer's technical information on products to be used, including product
descriptive bulletin.
b. Include data sheets that include manufacturer's name and product rnodel number. .
1) Clearly identify all optional accessories.
c. Acknowledgement that products are Ul or ETl listed or are constructed utilizing Ul orETl
recognized components.
d. Manufacturer's delivery, storage, handling and installation instructions.
e. Product installation details.
f. See individual specification sections for any additional requirements.
B. Operation and Maintenance Manuals:
1. See Section 01340 for requirements for:
a. The mechanics and administration of the submittal process.
b. The content process of Operation and Maintenance Manuals.
C. When a Specification Section includes products specified in another Specification Section, each Section
shall have the required Shop Drawing transmittal form per Section 01340 and all Sections shall be
submitted simultaneously. .
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. See Section 01600.
B. Protect nameplates on electrical equipment to prevent defacing.
1.6 AREA DESIGNATIONS
A. Designation of an area will determine the NEMA rating of the electrical equipment enclosures, types of
conduits and installation methods to be used in that area.
1. Outdoor areas:
a. Wet.
b. Also, corrosive and/or hazardous when specifically designated on the Drawings or in the
Specifications.
2. Indoor areas:
a. Dry.
b. Also, wet, corrosive and/or hazardous when specific;:llly designated on the Drawings or in the
Specifications.
PART 2. PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Refer to specific Division 16 sections and specific material paragraphs below.
B. Provide all components of a similar type by one manufacturer.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Electrical Equipment Support Pedestals and/or Racks:
1. Approved manufacturers:
a. Modular strut:
1) Unistrut Building Systems.
2) B-Une.
3) Globe Strut.
2. Material requirements:
a. Modular strut:
1) Galvanized steel: ASTM A123 or ASTM A153.
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
1V-226
/. . ,..., j' . ~... "
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
'I
I
I
",", ..-. -".-....1...
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2) Stainless steel: AISI Type 316.
3) PVC coated galvanized steel: ASTM A123 or ASTM A153 and 20 m~ PVC coating.
b. Mounting hardware:
1) Galvanized steel.
2) Stainless steel.
c. Anchorage per Section 05505.
B. Field touch-up of galvanized surfaces.
1. Zinc-rich primer.
a. One coat, 3.0 mils, ZRC by ZRC Products.
PART 3 . EXECUTION
3.1 INSl ALLA liON
A. Install and wire all equipment, including prepurchased equipment, and perform all tests necessary to
assure conformance to the Drawings and Specifications and ensure that equipment is ready and safe for
energization.
B. Install equipment in accordance with the requirements of:
1. NFPA 70 (NEe).
2. ANSI C2.
3. The manufacturer's instructions.
C. In general, conduit routing is not shown on the Drawings.
1. The Contractor is responsible for routing all conduits including those shown on one-line and control
block diagrams and home runs shown on floor plans.
2. Conduit routings and stub-up locations that are shown are approximate; exact routing to be as
required for equipment furnished and field conditions.
D. When complete branch circuiting is not shown on the Drawings:
1. A homerun indicating panelboard name and circuit number will be shown and the circuit number will
be shown adjacent to the additional devices (e.g., light fixture and receptacles) on the same circuit.
2. The Contractor is to furnish and install all conduit and conductors required for proper operation of the
circuit.
3. The indicated home run conduit and conductor size shall be used for the entire branch circuit.
4. See Section 16120 for combining multiple branch circuits in a common conduit.
E. Do not use equipment that exceed dimensions or reduce clearances indicated on the Drawings or as
required by the NFPA 70 (NEe).
F. Install equipment plumb, square and true with construction features and securely fastened.
G. Install electrical equipment, including pull and junction boxes, minimum of 6 IN from process, gas, air and
water piping and equipment.
H. Install equipment so it is readily accessible for operation and maintenance, is not blocked or concealed and
does not interfere with normal operating and maintenance requirements of other equipment.
I. Device Mounting Schedule:
1. Unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings, mounting heights are as indicated below:
a. Light switch (to center): 48 IN.
b. Receptacle on exterior wall of building (to center): 18 IN.
c. Receptacle in non-architecturally finished areas (to center): 48 IN.
d. Safety switch (to center of operating handle): 54 IN.
e. Separately mounted motor starter (to center of operating handle): 54 IN.
f. Pushbutton or selector switch control station (to center): 48 IN.
g. Panelboard (to top): 72 IN.
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
IV.227
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
1V.22B
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
J. Avoid interference of efectrical equipment operation and maintenance with structural members, building
features and equipment of other trades.
a. When it is necessary to adjust the intended location of electrical equipment, unless specifically
dimensioned or detailed, the Contractor may make adjustments of up to 6 IN in equipment
location with the Engineer's approval.
K. Provide electrical equipment support system per the following area designations:
1. Dry areas:
a. Galvanized system consisting of: Galvanized steel channels and fittings, nuts and hardware.
b. Field touch-up cut ends and scratches of galvanized components with the specified primer during
the installation, before rust appears.
2. Wet areas:
a. Galvanized system consisting ot Galvanized steel channels and fittings, nuts and hardware.
b. Field touch-up cut ends and scratches of galvanized components with the specified primer during
the installation, before rust appears.
3. Corrosive areas:
a. Stainless steel system consisting of: Stainless steel channels and fittings, nuts and hardware.
b. PVC coated steel system consisting of: PVC coated steel channels and fittings with stainless
steel nuts and hardware.
4. Highly corrosive areas:
a. PVC coated steel system consisting ot PVC coated steel channels and fittings with stainless
steel nuts and hardware.
L. Provide all necessary anchoring devices and supports rated for the equipment load based on dimensions
and weights verified from approved submittals, or as recommended by the manufacturer.
1. Do not cut, or weld to, building structural members.
2. Do not mount safety switches or other equipment to equipment enclosures, unless enclosure
mounting surface is properly braced to accept mounting of external equipment.
M. Provide corrosion resistant spacers to maintain 1/4 IN separation between metallic equipment and/or
metallic equipment supports and mounting surface in wet areas, on below grade walls and on walls of
liquid containment or processing areas such as Basins, Clarifiers, Digesters, Reservoirs, etc.
N. Do not place equipment fabricated from aluminum in direct contact with earth or concrete.
O. Screen or seal all openings into equipment mounted outdoors to prevent the entrance of rodents and
insects.
P. Do not use materials that may cause the walls or roof of a building to discolor or rust.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Verify exact rough-in location and dimensions for connection to electrified equipment, provided by others.
1. See Section 01800 for openings and penetrations in structures.
B. Replace equipment and systems found inoperative or defective and re-test.
C. Cleaning:
1. See Section 01710.
D. The protective coating integrity of support structures and equipment enclosures shall be maintained.
1. Repair galvanized components utilizing a zinc rich paint.
2. Repair painted cOmponents utilizing touch up paint provided by or approved by the manufacturer.
3. Repair PVC coated components utilizing a patching compound, of the same material as the coating,
provided by the manufacturer of the component
4. Repair surfaces which will be inaccessible after installation prior to installation.
5. See Section 16130 for requirements for conduits and associated accessories.
E. Replace nameplates damaged during installation.
END OF SECTION
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 16060
GROUNDING
PART 1 . GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Material and installation requirements for grounding system(s).
B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Section II - Instructions to Bidders.
2. Section 111- General Conditions.
3. Section IV - Supplemental Technical Specifications, Division 16, Section 16010 - Electrical: Basic
Requirements.
4. Section IV - Supplemental Technical Specifications, Division 16, Section 16120 - Wire and Cable-
600 Volt and Below.
5. Section IV - Supplemental Technical Specifications, Division 16, Section 16130 - Raceways and
Boxes.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Referenced Standards:
1. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO):
a. Standard Specification for Highway Bridges.
2. ASTM International (ASTM):
a. B8, Standard Specification for Concentric-lay-Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard, Medium-
Hard, or S6ft.
3. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE):
a. 837, Qualifying Permanent Connections Used in Substation Grounding.
4. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
a. 70, National Electrical Code (NEC).
5. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):
a. 467, Standard for Safety Electrical Grounding and Bonding Equipment.
B. Assure ground continuity is continuous throughout the entire Project.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings:
1. See Section 01340 for requirements for the mechanics and administration of the submittal process.
2. Product technical data.
a. Provide submittal data for all products specified in PART 2 of this Specification except:
1) Grounding clamps, terminals and con,nectors.
2) Exothermic welding system.
b. See Section 16010 for additional requirements.
PART 2 . PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable:
1. Ground rods and bars and grounding clamps, connectors and terminals:
a. Bumdy.
b. Harger Lightning Protection.
c. Heary Brothers.
Marshall Street and Northeast.WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
IV.229
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV.
1V-230
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
d. Joslyn. .
e. Robbins Ughtning Protection.
f. Thomas & Betts (Blackbum).
g. Thompson.
2. Exothermic weld connections:
a. Erico Products Inc., Cadweld.
b. Harger Ughtning Protection.
c. Thermoweld.
3. Prefabricated composite test stations:
a. Quazite Composolite.
b. Armorcast Products Company.
2.2 COMPONENTS
A. Wire and Cable:
1. . Bare conductors: Soft drawn stranded copper meeting ASTM B8.
2. Insulated conductors: Color coded green, per Section 16120.
B. Conduit: As specified i~ Section 16130.
C. Ground Bars:
1. Solid copper:
a. 1/4 IN thick.
b. 2 or 4 IN wide.
c. 24 IN long minimum in main service entrance electrical rooms, 12 IN long elsewhere.
2. Predrilled grounding lug mounting holes.
3. Stainless steel or galvanized steel mounting brackets.
4. Insulated standoffs.
D. Ground Rods:
1. 3/4INx10FT.
2. Copperclad:
a. Heavy uniform coating of electrolytic copper molecularly bonded to a rigid steel core.
b. Corrosion resistant bond between the copper and steel.
c. Hard drawn for a scar-resistant surface.
E. Grounding Clamps, Connectors and Terminals:
1. Mechanical type:
a. Standards: UL 467.
b. High copper alloy content.
2. Compression type for interior locations:
a. Standards: UL 467.
b. High copper alloy content.
c. Non-reversible.
d. Terminals for connection to bus bars shall have two bolt holes.
3. Compression type suitable for direct burial in earth or concrete:
a. Standards: UL 467, IEEE 837.
b. High copper alloy content.
c. Non-reversible.
F. Exothermic Weld Connections:
1. Copper oxide reduction by aluminum process.
2. Molds properly sized for each application.
G. Prefabricated Composite Material Test Stations:
1. Fiberglass reinforced polymer concrete.
2. Body and cover shall sustain a minimum vertical load test of 22,000 LBS over a 10 IN square or be H-
20 rated per AASHTO.
3. Size: 12 IN round or 121N square.
4. Open bottom.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
5. Stackable design as required for specified depth.
6. Engrave cover with the word "GROUND".
PART 3 . EXECUTION
3.1 INST ALLA liON
A. General:
1. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
2. Size grounding conductors and bonding jumpers in accordance with NFPA 70 Article 250, except
where larger sizes are indicated on the Drawings.
3. Remove paint, rust, or other nonconducting material from contact surfaces before making ground
connections.
4. Where ground conductors pass through floor slabs or building walls provide non-metallic sleeves and
install per Section 01800.
5. Do not splice grounding conductors except at ground rods.
6. Install ground rods and grounding conductors in undisturbed, firm soil.
a. Provide excavation required for installation of ground rods and ground conductors.
b. Use driving studs or other suitable means to prevent damage to threaded ends of sectional rods.
c. Unless otherwise specified, connect conductors to ground rods with compressor type connectors
or exothermic weld.
d. Provide sufficient slack in grounding conductor to prevent conductor breakage during backfill or
due to ground movement.
e. Backfill excavation completely, thoroughly tamping to provide good contact between backfill
materials and ground rods and conductors.
7. Do not use exothermic welding if it will damage the structure the grounding conductor is being welded
to.
B. Grounding Electrode System:
1. Provide a grounding electrode system in accordance with NFPA 70 Article 250 and as indicated on
the Drawings.
2. Grounding conductor terminations:
a. Ground bars mounted on wall, use compression type terminal and bolt it to the ground bar with
two bolts.
b. Ground bars in electrical equipment, use compression type terminal and bolt it to the ground bar.
c. Piping systems, use mechanical type connections.
d. Building steel, below grade and encased in concrete, use compression type connector or
exothermic weld.
3. Ground ring grounding system:
a. Ground ring consists of ground rods and a grounding conductor looped around the structure.
b. Placed at a minimum of 10 FT from the structure foundation and 2 FT-6 IN below grade.
c. Provide a minimum of four ground rods placed at the comers of the structure and additional rods
so that the maximum distance between ground rods does not exceed 50 FT.
d. Building/Structure grounding:
1) Bond building/structure metal support columns to the ground ring at all comers of the
structure.
e. Grounding conductor: Bare conductor, size as indicated on the Drawings.
C. Supplemental Grounding Electrode:
1. Provide the following grounding in addition to the equipment ground conductor supplied with the
feeder conductors whether or not shown on the Drawings.
2. Equipment support rack and pedestals mounted outdoors:
a. Connect metallic structure to a ground rod.
b. Grounding conductor: tIS AWG minimum.
D. Low Voltage Transformer Separately Derived Grounding System:
1. Ground separately mounted step-down transformers XO terminal to one of the following:
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV .
1V-231
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
IV-232
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
a. Closest building steel using mechanical type terminal bolted to the steel, compression type
connection or exothermic weld.
b. Closest water pipe using a mechanical type connection.
2. Ground step-down transformer integrally mounted in motor control center to motor control center
ground bus.
E. Raceway Bonding/Grounding:
1. All metallic conduit shall be installed so that it is electrically continuous.
2. All conduits to contain a grounding conductor with insulation identical to the phase conductors, unless
otherwise indicated on the Drawings.
3. NFPA 70 required grounding bushings shall be of the insulating type.
4. Provide double locknuts at all panels. .
5. Bond all conduit, at entrance and exit of equipment, to the equipment ground bus or lug.
6. Provide bonding jumpers if conduits are installed in concentric knockouts.
7. Make all metallic raceway fittings and grounding clamps tight to ensure equipment grounding system
will operate continuously at ground potential to provide low impedance current path for proper
operation of overcurrent devices during possible ground fault conditions.
F. Equipment Grounding:
1. All utilization equipment shall be grounded with an equipment ground conductor.
G. Manhole and Handhole Grounding:
1. Provide a ground rod in each manhole and handhole with exposed metal parts.
a. Expose a minimum of 4 IN.of the rod above the floor for field connections to the rod.
2. Connect all exposed metal parts (e.g., conduits and cable racks) to the ground rod.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Leave grounding system uncovered until observed by Owner.
END OF SECTION
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 16120
WIRE AND CABLE: 600 VOLT AND BELOW
PART 1 . GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Material and installation requirements for:
a. Building wire.
b. Power cable.
c. Control cable.
d. Instrumentation cable.
e. Wire connectors.
f. Insulating tape.
g. Pulling lubricant.
B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Section II - Instructions to Bidders.
2. Section 111- General Conditions.
3. Section IV - Supplemental Technical Specifications, Division 16, Section 16010 - Electrical: Basic
Requirements.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Referenced Standards:
1. Canadian Standards Association (CSA):
a. Test Methods for Electrical Wires and Cables (FT-4 Vertical Cable Tray Test).
2. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE):
a. 1202, Standard for Flame Testing of Cables for Use in. Cable Tray in Industrial and Commercial
Occupancies.
3. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):
a. ICS 4, Industrial Control and Systems: Terminal Blocks.
4. National Electrical Manufacturers Association/Insulated Cable Engineers Association (NEMAlICEA):
a. WC 57/1CEA S-73-532, Standard for Control Cables.
b. WC 70/ICEA S-95-658, Non-Shielded Power Cables Rated 2000 Volts or Less for the
Distribution of Electrical Energy.
5. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
a. 70, National Electrical Code (NEC).
6. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):
a. 44, Standard for Safety Thermoset-Insulated Wires and Cables.
b. 83, Standard for Safety Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables.
c. 467, Standard for Safety Grounding and Bonding Equipment.
d. 486A, Standard for Safety Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for use with Copper Conductors.
e. 486C, Standard for Safety Splicing Wire Connections.
f. 510, Standard for Safety Polyvinyl Chloride, Polyethylene and Rubber Insulating Tape.
g. 910, Test for Cable Flame-Propagation and Smoke-Density Values for Electrical and Optical-
Fiber Cables Used in Spaces Transporting Environmental Air.
h. 1277, Standard for Safety Electrical Power and Control Tray Cables with Optional Optical-Fiber
Members.
i. 1581, Standard for Safety Reference Standard for Electrical Wires, Cables, and Flexible Cords.
j. 2250, Standard for Safety Instrumentation Tray Cable.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Cable: Multi-conductor, insulated, with outer sheath containing either building wire or instrumentation wire.
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Contrallmprovements Project
Section IV
1V-233
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
1V-234
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
B. Instrumentation Cable:
1. Multiple conductor, insulated, twisted or untwisted, with outer sheath.
2. The following are specific types of instrumentation cables:
a. Analog signal cable:
1) Used for the transmission of low current (e.g., 4-20mA DC) or low voltage (e.g., 0-10 Vdc)
signals, using No. 16 AWG and smaller conductors.
2). Commonly used types are defined in the following:
a) TSP: Twisted shielded pair.
b) TST: Twisted shielded triad.
b. Digital signal cable: Used for the transmission of digital signals between computers, PLC's,
RTU's, etc.
C. Power Cable: Multi-conductor, insulated, with outer sheath containing building wire, NO.8 AWG and
larger.
D. Control Cable: Multi-conductor, insulated, with outer sheath containing building wires, No. 14, No. 12 or
No. 10 AWG.
E. Building Wire: Single conductor, inSUlated, with or without outer jacket depending upon type.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings:
1. See Section 01340 for requirements for the mechanics and administration of the submittal process.
2. Product technical data:
a. Provide submittal data for all products specified in Part 2 of this specification except:
1) Wire connectors.
2) Insulating tape.
3) Cable lubricant.
b. See Section 16010 for additional requirements.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. See Section 16010.
PART 2. PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable:
1. Building wire, power and control cable:
a. American Insulated Wire Corporation.
b. General Cable.
c. Manhattan/COT.
d. Southwire Company.
2. Instrumentation cable:
a. Analog cable:
1) Alpha Wire Corporation.
2) American Insulated Wire Corporation.
3) Belden CDT Inc.
4) General Cable.
5) Manhattan/CDT.
3. Wire connectors:
a. Burndy Corporation.
b. Buchanan.
c. Ideal.
d. IIsco.
e. 3M Co.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I'
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
f. Teledyne Penn Union.
g. Thomas and Betts.
h. Phoenix Contact.
4. Insulating and color coding tape:
a. 3M Co.
b. Plymouth Bishop Tapes.
c. Red Seal Electric Co.
2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Building Wire:
1. Conductor shall be copper with 600 V rated insulation.
2. Conductors shall be stranded, except for conductors used in lighting and receptacle circuits which
may be stranded or solid.
3. Surface mark with manufacturers name or trademark, conductor size, insulation type and UL label.
4. Conform to NEMAlICEA WC 70/S-95-658 and UL 83 for type THHNITHWN and THHNITHWN-2
insulation.
5. Conform to NEMA/lCEA WC 70/S-95-658 and UL 44 for type XHHW-2 insulation.
B. Power Cable:
1. Conductor shall be copper with 600 V rated insulation.
2. Surface mark with manufacturers name or trademark, conductor size, insulation type and UL label.
3. Conform to NEMAlICEA WC 70/S-95-658 and UL 83 and UL 1277 for type THHN/THWN insulation
with an overall PVC jacket.
4. Number of conductors as required, including a bare ground condudor.
5. Individual conductor color coding:
a. ICEA Method 4.
b. See Part 3 of this specification for additional requirements.
6. Conform to NFPA 70 Type TC.
C. Control Cable:
1. Conductor shall be copper with 600 V rated insulation.
2. Surface mark with manufacturer's name or trademark, conductor size, insulation type and UL label.
3. Conform to NEMA/lCEA WC 57/S-73-532 and UL 83 and UL 1277 for type THHN/THWN insulation
with an overall PVC jacket.
4. Number of conductors as required, provided with or without bare ground conductor of the same AWG
size. When a bare ground conductor is not provided, an additional insulated conductor shall be
provided and used as the ground conductor (e.g., 6/c No. 14 wIg and 7/c No. 14 are equal).
5. Individual conductor color coding:
a. NEMAlICEAMethod 1, Table E-2.
b. See Part 3 of this Specification for additional requirements.
6. Conform to NFPA 70 Type TC.
D. Electrical Equipment Control Wire:
1. Conductor shall be copper with 600 V rated insulation.
2. Conductors shall be stranded.
3. Surface mark with manufacturers name or trademark, conductor size, insulation type and UL label.
4. Conform to UL 44 for Type SIS insulation.
5. Conform to UL 83 for Type MTW insulation.
E. Instrumentation Cable:
1. Surface mark with manufacturers name or trademark, conductor size, insulation type and UL label.
2. Analog cable:
a. Tinned copper conductors.
b. 300 V or 600 V PVC insulation with PVC jacket.
c. Twisted with 100 percent foil shield coverage with drain wire.
d. Six twists per foot minimum.
e. Individual conductor color coding: ICEA Method 1, Table K-2.
f. Conform to UL 2250, UL 1581 and NFPA 70 Type ITC.
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Contro/lmprovements Project
Section IV
1V-235
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Contrallmprovements Project
Section IV
1V-236
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3. Digital cable:
a. As recommended by equipment (e.g., PLC, RTU) manufacturer.
b. Conform to UL 910 and NFPA 70 Type ITC.
F. Wire Connectors:
1. Twist/screw on type:
a. Insulated pressure or spring type solderless connector.
b. 600 V rated.
c. Ground conductors: Conform to UL 486C and/or UL 467 when required by local codes.
d. Phase and neutral conductors: Conform to UL 486C.
2. Compression and mechanical screw type:
a. 600 V rated.
b. Ground conductors: Conform to UL 467.
c. Phase and neutral conductors: Conform to UL 486A.
3. Terminal block type:
a. High density, screw-post barrier-type with white center marker strip.
b. 600 V and ampere rating as required, for power circuits.
c. 600 V, 20 ampere rated for control circuits.
d. 300 V, 15 ampere rated for instrumentation circuits.
e. Conform to NEMA ICS 4 and UL 486A.
G. Insulating and Color Coding Tape:
1. Pressure sensitive vinyl.
2. Premium grade.
3. Heat, cold, moisture, and sunlight resistant.
4. Thickness, depending on use conditions: 7,8.5, or 10 mil.
5. For cold weather or outdoor location, tape must also be all-weather.
6. Color:
a. Insulating tape: Black.
b. Color coding tape: Fade-resistant color as specified herein.
7. Comply with UL 510.
H. Pulling Lubricant: Cable manufacturer's standard containing no petroleum or other products which will
deteriorate insulation.
PART 3. EXECUTION
3.1 INSTAllATION
A. Permitted Usage of Insulation Types:
1. Type XHHW-2:
a. Building wire and power and control cable in architectural and non-architectural finished areas.
b. Building wire and power and control cable in conduit below grade.
2. Type THHN/THWN and THHN/THWN-2:
a. Building wire and power and control cable No.8 AWG and smaller in architectural and non-
architectural finished areas.
3. Type SIS and MTW:
a. For the wiring of control equipment within Control panels and field wiring of control equipment
within switchgear, switchboards, motor control centers.
B. Conductor Size Limitations:
1. Feeder and branch power conductors shall not be smaller than No. 12 AWG unless otherwise
indicated on the Drawings.
2. Control conductors shall not be smaller than No. 14 AWG unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.
3. Instrumentation conductors shall not be smaller than No. 18 AWG unless otherwise indicated on the
Drawings.
C. Color Code All Wiring as Follows:
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1. Building wire:
240 V, 208 V, 240/120 V, 480 V, 480/277
208/120 V V
Phase 1 Black Brown
Phase 2 Red * Orange
Phase 3 Blue Yellow
Neutral White White or Gray
Ground Green Green
* Orange when it is a high leg of a 120/240 V Delta system.
a. Conductors No.6 AWG and smaller: Insulated phase, neutral and ground conductors shall be
identified by a continuous colored outer finish along its entire length.
b. Conductors larger than No.6 AWG:
1) Insulated phase and neutral conductors shall be identified by one of the following methods:
a) Continuous colored outer finish along its entire length.
b) 31N of colored tape applied at the termination.
2) Insulated grounding conductor shall be identified by one of the following methods:
a) Continuous green outer finish along its entire length.
b) Stripping the insulation from the entire exposed length.
c) Using green tape to cover the entire exposed length.
3) The color coding shall be applied at all accessible locations, including but not limited to:
Junction and pull boxes, wireways, manholes and handholes. .
2. Power cables ICEA Method 4 with:
a. Phase and neutral conductors identified with 31N of colored tape, per the Table herein, applied
at the terminations.
b. Ground conductor: Bare.
3. Control cables NEMAIICEA Method 1, Table E-2:
a. When a bare ground is not provided, one of the colored insulated conductors shall be re-
identified by stripping the insulation from the entire exposed length or using green tape to cover
the entire exposed length.
b. When used in power applications the colored insulated conductors used as phase and neutral
conductors may have to be re-identified with 3 IN of colored tape, per the Table herein, applied at
the terminations.
D. Install all wiring in raceway unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.
E. Feeder, branch, control and instrumentation circuits shall not be combined in a raceway, cable tray,
junction or pull box, except as permitted in the following:
1. Where specifically indicated on the Drawings.
2. Where field conditions dictate and written permission is obtained from the Engineer.
3. Control circuits shall be isolated from feeder and branch power and instrumentation circuits but
combining of control circuits is permitted.
a. The combinations shall comply with the following:
1) 12 Vdc, 24 Vdc and 48 Vdc may be combined.
2) 125 Vdc shall be isolated from all other AC and DC circuits.
3) AC control circuits shall be isolated from all DC circuits.
4. Instrumentation circuits shall be isolated from feeder and branch power and control circuits but
combining of instrumentation circuits is permitted.
a. The combinations shall comply with the following:
1) Analog signal circuits may be combined.
2) Digital signal circuits may be combined but isolated from analog signal circuits.
5. Multiple branch circuits for lighting, receptacle and other 120 Vac circuits are allowed to be combined
into a common raceway.
a. Contractor is responsible for making the required adjustments in conductor and raceway size, in
accordance with all requirements of the NEC, induding but not limited to:
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
1V-237
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities'
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
1V-238
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I'
I
I
I
I
I
I
1) Up sizing conductor size for required ampacity de-ratings for the number of current carrying
conductors in the raceway. -
2) The neutral conductors may not be shared.
3) Up sizing raceway size for the size and quantity of conductors.
F. Ground the drain wire of shielded instrumentation cables at one end only.
1. The preferred grounding location is at the load (e.g., control panel), not at the source (e.g., field
mounted instrument).
G. Splices and terminations for the following circuit types shall be made in the indicated enclosure type using
the indicated method.
1. Feeder and branch power circuits:
a. Device outlet boxes:
1) Twist/screw on type connectors.
b. Junction and pull boxes and wireways:
1 ) Twist/screw on type connectors for use on No. 8 and smaller wire.
2) Compression, mechanical screw or terminal block or terminal strip type connectors for use
on NO.6 AWG and larger wire.
c. Motor terminal boxes:
1) Twist/screw on type connectors for use on No. 10 AWG and smaller wire.
2) Mechanical screw type connectors for use on No.8 AWG and larger wire.
d. Manholes or handholes:
1) Twist/screw on type connectors pre-filled with epoxy for use on No.8 AWG and smaller
wire.
2) Watertight compression or mechanical screw type connectors for use on NO.6 AWG and
larger wire.
2. Control circuits:
a. Junction and pull boxes: Terminal block type connector.
b. Manholes or handholes: Twist/screw on type connectors pre-filled with epoxy.
c. Control panels and motor control centers: Terminal block or strips provided within the equipment
or field installed within the equipment by the Contractor.
3. Instrumentation circuits can be spliced where field conditions dictate and written permission is
obtained from the Engineer.
a. Maintain electrical continuity of the shield when splicing twisted shielded conductors.
b. Junction and pull boxes: Terminal block type connector.
c. Control panels and motor control centers: Terminal block or strip provided within the equipment
or field installed within the equipment by the Contractor.
4. Non-insulated compression and mechanical screw type connectors shall be insulated with tape or hot
or cold shrink type insulation to the insulation level of the cbnductors.
H. Insulating Tape Usage:
1. For insulating connections of NO.8 AWG wire and smaller: 7 mil vinyl tape.
2. For insulating splices and taps of NO.6 AWG wire or larger: 10 mil vinyl tape.
3. For insulating connections made in cold weather or in outdoor locations: 8.5 mil, all weather vinyl
tape.
I. Color Coding Tape Usage: For color coding of conductors.
END OF SECTION
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 16130
RACEWAYS AND BOXES
PART 1 . GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Material and installation requirements for:
a. Conduits.
b. Conduit fittings.
c. . Conduit supports.
d. Wireways.
e. Outlet boxes.
f. Pull and junction boxes.
B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Section II - Instructions to Bidders.
2. Section 111- General Conditions.
3. Section 16010 - Electrical: Basic Requirements.
4. Section 16135 - Electrical: Exterior Underground.
5. Section 16140 - Wiring Devices.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Referenced Standards:
1. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI).
2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):
a. C80.1, Rigid Steel Conduit - Zinc-Coated.
b. C80.3, Electrical Metallic Tubing - Zinc-Coated.
3. ASTM International (ASTM):
a. A 123, Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel
Products.
b. A153, Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware.
c. D2564, Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Piping
Systems.
4. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):
a. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum).
b. OS 1, Sheet-Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports.
c. RN 1, Polyvinyl-Chloride (PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit and
Intermediate Metal Conduit.
d. TC 2, Electrical Plastic Tubing (EPT) and Conduit (EPC-40 and EPC-80).
e. TC 3, PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing.
5. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
a. 70, National Electrical Code (NEC).
6. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):
a. 1, Standard for Safety Flexible Metal Conduit.
b. 6, Standard for Safety Rigid Metal Conduit
c. 50, Standard for Safety Enclosures for Electrical Equipment.
d. 360, Standard for Safety liquid-Tight Flexible Steel Conduit.
e. 467, Standard for Safety Grounding and Bonding Equipment.
f. 514A, Standard for Safety Metallic Outlet Boxes.
g. 514B, Standard for Safety Fittings for Cable and Conduit.
h. 651, Standard for Safety Schedule 40 and 80 Rigid PVC Conduit.
i. 797, Standard for Safety Electrical Metallic Tubing.
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Contrallmprovements Project
Section IV
IV-239
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
1V.240
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
j. 870, Standard for Safety Wrreways. Auxiliary Gutters, and Associated Fittings.
k. 886, Standard for Safety Outlet Boxes and Fittings for Use in Hazardous (Classified) Locations.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings:
1. See Section 01340 for requirements for the mechanics and administration of the submittal process.
2. Product technical data:
a. Provide submittal data for all products specified in PART 2 of this Specification except:
1) Conduit fittings.
2) Support systems.
b. See Section 16010 for additional requirements.
3. Fabrication and/or layout drawings:
a. Identify dimensional size of pull and junction boxes to be used.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. See Section 16010.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable:
1; Rigid metallic conduits:
a. Allied Tube and Conduit Corporation.
b. Triangle PWC Inc.
c. Western Tube and Conduit Corporation.
d. Wheatland Tube Company.
e. L TV Steel Company.
2. PVC coated rigid metallic conduits and repair kits:
a. Occidental Coating Company.
b. Perma-Cote.
c. Rob-Roy Ind.
d. Raychem "GeITek" tape.
3. Rigid non-metallic conduit:
a. Carlon.
b. Cantex.
c. Osburn Associates.
4. Flexible conduit:
a. AFC Cable Systems.
b. Anamet, Inc.
c. Electri-Flex.
d. Flexible Metal Hose Company.
e. International Metal Hose Company.
f. Triangle PWC Inc.
g. LTV Steel Company.
5. Wireway:
a. Hoffman Engineering Company.
b. Wiegmann.
c. Square D.
6. Conduit fittings and accessories:
a. Appleton.
b. Carlon.
c. Cantex.
d. Crouse-Hinds.
e. Killark.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
f. Osburn Associates.
g. ez Gedney Company.
h. RACe.
L Steel City.
j. Thomas and Betts.
7. Support systems:
a. Unistrut Building Systems.
b. B-Line Systems Inc.
c. Kindorf.
d. Minerallac Fastening Systems.
e. Caddy.
8. Outlet, pull and junction boxes:
a. Appleton Electric Co.
b. Crouse-Hinds.
c. Killark.
d. O-Z1Gedney.
e. Steel City.
f. Raco.
g. Bell.
h. Hoffman Engineering Co.
i. Wiegmann.
j. B-Line Circle AW.
k. Adalet.
I. Ritta!.
B. Submit request for substitution in accordance with Specification Section 01640.
2.2 RIGID MET ALLIe CONDUITS
A. Rigid Galvanized Steel Conduit (RGS):
1. Mild steel with continuous welded seam.
2. Metallic zinc applied by hot-dip galvanizing or electro-galvanizing.
3. Threads galvanized after cutting.
4. Internal coating: Baked lacquer, varnish or enamel for a smooth surface.
5. Standards: ANSI C80.1, UL 6.
B. PVC-Coated Rigid Steel Conduit (PVC-RGS):
1. Nominal 40 mil Polyvinyl Chloride Exterior Coating:
a. Coating: Bonded to hot-dipped galvanized rigid steel conduit conforming to ANSI C80.1.
b. The bond between the PVC coating and the conduit surface: Greater than the tensile strength of
the coating.
2. Nominal 2 mil, minimum, urethane interior coating.
3. Urethane coating on threads.
4. Conduit: Epoxy prime coated prior to application of PVC and urethane coatings.
5. Female Ends:
a. Have a plastic sleeve extending a minimum of 1 pipe diameter or 2 IN, whichever is less beyond
the opening.
b. The inside diameter of the sleeve shall be the same as the outside diameter of the conduit to be
used with it
6. Standards: ANSI C80.1, UL 6, NEMA RN 1.
2.3 RIGID NON-METALLIC CONDUIT
A. Schedules 40 (PVC-40) and 80 (PVC-80):
1. Polyvinyl-chloride (PVe) plastic compound which includes inert modifiers to improve weatherability
and heat distribution.
2. Rated for direct sunlight exposure.
3. Fire retardant and low smoke emission.
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
1V-241
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
1V-242
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
4. Shall be suitable for use with 90 DegC wire and shall be marked nmaximum 90 DegCn.
5. Standards: NEMA TC 2, UL 651.
2.4 FLEXIBLE CONDUIT
A. Flexible Galvanized Steel Conduit (FLEX):
1. Formed of continuous, spiral wound, hot-dip galvanized steel strip with successive convolutions
securely interlocked.
2. Standard: UL 1.
B. PVC-Coated Flexible Galvanized Steel (liquid-tight) Conduit (FLEX-L T):
1. Core formed of continuous, spiral wound, hot-dip galvanized steel strip with successive convolutions
securely interlocked.
2. Extruded PVC outer jacket positively locked to the steel core.
3. Liquid and vaportight
4. Standard: UL 360.
2.5 WIREWAY
A. General:
1. Suitable for lay-in conductors.
2. Designed for continuous grounding.
3. Covers:
a. Hinged or removable in accessible areas.
b. Non-removable when passing through partitions.
4. Finish: Rust inhibiting primer and manufacturers standard paint inside and out except for stainless
steel type.
5. Standards: UL 870, NEMA 250.
B. General Purpose (NEMA 1 rated) Wireway:
1. 14 or 16 gage steel without knockouts.
2. Cover: Solid, non-gasketed and held in place by captive screws.
C. Raintight (NEMA 3R) Wiring Trough:
1. 14 or 16 GA galvanized steel without knockouts.
2. Cover: Non-gasketed and held in place by captive screws.
D. Watertight (NEMA 4X rated) Wireway:
1. 14 GA Type 304 or 316 stainless steel bodies and covers without knockouts and 10 GA stainless steel
flanges.
2. Cover: Fully gasketed and held in place with captive clamp type latches.
3. Flanges: Fully gasketed and bolted.
E. Dusttight (NEMA 12 rated) Wireway:
1. 14 GA steel bodies and covers without knockouts and 10 GA steel flanges.
2. Cover: Fully gasketed and held in place with captive clamp type latches.
3. Flanges: Fully gasketed and bolted.
2.6 CONDUIT FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES
A. Fittings for Use with RGS and lMC:
1. General:
a. In hazardous locations listed for use in Class I, Groups C and D locations.
2. Locknuts:
a. Threaded steel or malleable iron.
b. Gasketed or non-gasketed.
c. Grounding or non-grounding type.
3. Bushings:
a. Threaded, insulated metallic.
b. Grounding or non-grounding type.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
4. Hubs: Threaded, insulated and gasketed metallic for raintight connection.
5. Couplings:
a. Threaded straight type: Same material and finish as the conduit with which they are used on.
b. Threadless type: Gland compression or self-threading type, concrete tight.
6. Unions: Threaded galvanized steel or zinc plated malleable iron.
7. Conduit bodies (ells and tees):
a. Body: Zinc plated cast iron or cast copper free aluminum with threaded hubs.
b. Standard and mogul size.
c. Cover:
1) CliJ:H>n type with stainless steel screws.
2) Gasketed or non-gasketed galvanized steel, zinc plated cast iron or cast copper free
aluminum.
8. Conduit bodies (round):
a. Body: Zinc plated cast iron or cast copper free aluminum with threaded hubs.
b. Cover: Threaded screw on type, gasketed, galvanized steel, zinc plated cast iron or cast copper
free aluminum.
9. Sealing fittings:
a. Body: Zinc plated cast iron or cast copper free aluminum with threaded hubs.
b. Standard and mogul size.
c. With or without drain and breather.
d. Fiber and sealing compound: UL listed for use with the sealing fitting.
10. Hazardous location flexible coupling (HAl-FLEX):
a. Liquid tight and arc resistant.
b. Electrically conductive so no bonding jumper is required.
c. Dry and wet areas:
1) Bronze braided covering over flexible brass core.
2) Bronze end fittings.
3) Zinc-plated steel or malleable iron unions and nipples.
d. Corrosive areas:
1) Stainless steel braided covering over flexible stainless steel core.
2) Stainless steel end fittings.
3) Aluminum unions and nipples.
11. Service entrance head:
a. Malleable iron, galvanized steel or copper free aluminum.
b. Insulated knockout cover for use with a variety of sizes and number of conductors.
12. Expansion couplings:
a. 2 IN nominal straight-line conduit movement in either direction.
b. Galvanized steel with insulated bushing.
c. Gasketed for wet locations.
d. Internally or externally grounded.
13. Expansion/deflection couplings:
a. 3/4 IN nominal straight-line conduit movement in either direction.
b. 3D-degree nominal deflection from the normal in all directions.
c. Metallic hubs, neoprene outer jacket and stainless steel jacket clamps.
d. Internally or externally grounded.
e. Watertight, rain tight and concrete tight.
14. Standards: UL 467, UL 514B, UL 886.
B. Fittings for Use with PVG-RGS:
1. The same material and construction as those fittings listed under paragraph "Fittings for Use with
RGS and IMC" and coated as defined under paragraph "PVC Coated Rigid Steel Conduit (PVC-
RGS)."
C. Fittings for Use with EMT:
1. Connectors:
a. Straight, angle and offset types furnished with locknuts.
b. Zinc plated steel.
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Contrallmprovements Project
Section IV
IV-243
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Contrallmprovements Project
Section /V
/V-244
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
c. Insulated gland compression type.
d. Concrete and raintighl
2. Couplings:
a. Zinc plated steel.
b. Gland compression type.
c. Concrete and raintight.
3. Conduit bodies (ells and tees):
a. Body: Copper free aluminum with threaded hubs.
b. Standard and mogul size.
c. Cover:
1) Screw down type with steel screws.
2) Gasketed or non-gasketed galvanized steel or copper free aluminum.
4. Standard: UL 514B.
D. Fittings for Use with FLEX:
1. Connector:
a. Zinc plated malleable iron.
b. Squeeze or clamp-type.
2. Standard: UL 514B.
E. Fittings for Use with FLEX-L T and FLEX-NM:
1. Connector:
a. Straight or angle type.
b. Metal construction, insulated and gasketed.
c. Composed of locknut, grounding ferrule and gland compression nut.
d. Liquid tight.
2. Standards: UL 467, UL 514B.
F. Fittings for Use with Rigid Non-Metallic PVC Conduit
1. Coupling, adapters and conduit bodies:
a. Same material, thickness, and construction as the cohduits with which they are used.
b. Homogeneous plastic free from visible cracks, holes or foreign inclusions.
c. Bore smooth and free of blisters, nicks or other imperfections which could damage the conductor.
2. Solvent cement for welding fittings shall be supplied by the same manufacturer as the conduit and
fittings.
3. Standards: ASTM 02564, NEMATC 3, UL 651, UL 514B.
G. Weather and Corrosion Protection Tape:
1. PVC based tape, 10 mils thick.
2. Protection against moisture, acids, alkalis, salts and sewage and suitable for direct bury.
3. Used with appropriate pipe primer.
2.7 ALL RACEWAY AND FITTINGS
A Mark Products:
1. Identify the nominal trade size on the product.
2. Stamp with the name or trademark of the manufacturer.
2.8 OUTLET BOXES
A. Metallic Outlet Boxes:
1. Hot-dip galvanized steel.
2. Conduit knockouts and grounding pigtail.
3. Styles:
a. 2 IN x 3 IN rectangle.
b. 4 IN square.
c. 4 IN octagon.
d. Masonry/tile.
4. Accessories:
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
a. Flat blank cover plates.
b. Barriers.
c. Extension, plaster or tile rings.
d. Box supporting brackets in stud walls.
e. Adjustable bar hangers.
5. Standards: NEMA OS 1, UL S14A.
B. Cast Outiet Boxes:
1. Zinc plated cast iron or die-cast copper free aluminum with manufacturers standard finish.
2. Threaded hubs and grounding screw.
3. Styles:
a. "FS" or "FD".
b. "Bell".
c. Single or multiple gang and tandem.
d. "EDS" or "EFS" for hazardous locations.
4. Accessories: 40 mil PVC exterior coating and 2 mil urethane interior coating.
5. Standards: UL 514A, UL 886.
2.9 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES
A. NEMA 1 Rated:
1. Body and cover: 14 GA minimum, galvanized steel or 14 GA minimum, steel finished with rust
inhibiting primer and manufacturers standard paint inside and out.
2. With or without concentric knockouts on four (4) sides.
3. Flat cover fastened with screws.
B. NEMA 4 Rated:
1. Body and cover: 14 GA steel finished with rust inhibiting primer and manufacturers standard paint
inside and out.
2. Seams continuously welded and ground smooth.
3. No knockouts.
4. External mounting flanges.
5. Hinged or non-hinged cover held closed with stainless steel screws and clamps.
6. Cover with oil resistant gasket.
C. NEMA 4X Rated (metallic):
1. Body and cover: 14 GA Type 304 or 316 stainless steel.
2. Seams continuously welded and ground smooth.
3. No knockouts.
4. External mounting flanges.
5. Hinged door and stainless steel screws and clamps.
6. Door with oil-resistant gasket.
D. NEMA 4X Rated (non-metallic):
1. Body and cover: Ultraviolet light protected fiberglass-reinforced polyester boxes.
2. No knockouts.
3. External mounting flanges.
4. Hinged door with quick release latches and padlocking hasp.
5. Door with oil resistant gasket
E. NEMA 7Rated:
1. Cast gray iron alloy or copper-free aluminum with manufacturers standard finish.
2. Drilled and tapped openings or tapered threaded hub.
3. Cover bolted-down with stainless steel bolts or threaded cover with neoprene gasket
4. External mounting flanges.
5. Grounding lug.
6. Accessories: 40 mil PVC exterior coating and 2 mil urethane interior coating.
F. NEMA 12 Rated:
1. Body and cover:
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities'
Odor Contrallmprovements Project
. Section IV
1V-245
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities, .
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
1V-246
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
"I
I
I
I
a. 14 GA steel finished with rust inhibiting primer and manufacturers standard paint inside and out
b. Type 5052 H-32 aluminum, unpainted.
2. Seams continuously welded and ground smooth.
3. No knockouts;
4. External mounting flanges.
5. Non-hinged cover held closed with captivated cover screws threaded into sealed wells or hinged
cover held closed with stainless steel screws and clamps.
6. Flat door with oil resistant gasket.
G. Miscellaneous Accessories:
1. Rigid handles for covers larger than 9 SF or heavier than 25 LBS.
2. Split covers when heavier than 25 LBS. .
3. Weldnuts for mounting optional panels and terminal kits.
4. Terminal blocks: Screw-post barrier-type, rated 600 volt and 20 ampere minimum.
H. Standards: NEMA 250, UL 50.
2.10 SUPPORT SYSTEMS
A. Multi-conduit surface or trapeze type support and pull or junction box supports:
1. Material requirements.
a. Galvanized steel: ASTM A123 or ASTM A153.
b. Stainless steel: AISI Type 316.
c. PVC coat galvanized steel: ASTM A 123 or ASTM A 153 and 20 mil PVC coating.
B. Single conduit and outlet box support fasteners:
1. Material requirements:
a. Zinc plated steel.
b. Stainless steel.
c. Malleable iron.
d. PVC coat malleable iron or steel: 20 mil PVC coating.
e. Steel protected with zinc phosphate and oil finish.
2.11 OPENINGS AND PENETRATONS IN WALLS AND FLOORS
A. Sleeves, smoke and fire stop fitting through walls and floors:
1. See Section 01800.
PART 3 . EXECUTION
3.1 RACEWAY INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A. Shall be in accordance with the requirements of:
1. NFPA 70.
2. Manufacturer instructions.
B. Size of Raceways:
1. Raceway sizes are shown on the Drawings, if not shown on the Drawings, then size in accordance
with NFPA 70.
2. Unless specifically indicated otherwise, the minimum raceway size shall be:
a. Conduit: 3/4 IN.
b. Wireway: 2-1/2 IN x 2-1/2 IN.
C. Field Bending and Cutting of Conduits:
1. Utilize tools and equipment recommended by the manufacturer of the conduit, designed for the
purpose and the conduit material to make all field bends and cuts.
2. Do not reduce the internal diameter of the conduit when making conduit bends.
3. Prepare tools and equipment to prevent damage to the PVC coating.
4. Degrease threads after threading and apply a zinc rich paint. "
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
5. Debur interior and exterior after cutting.
D. Male threads of conduit systems shall be coated with an electrically conductive anti-seize compound.
E. The protective coating integrity of conduits, fittings, outlet, pull and junction boxes and accessories shall be
maintained.
1. Repair galvanized components utilizing a zinc rich paint.
2. Repair painted components utilizing touch up paint provided by or approved by the manufacturer.
3. Repair PVC coated components utilizing a patching compound, of the same material as the coating,
provided by the manufacturer of the conduit or a self-adhesive, highly conformable, cross-linked
silicone composition strip, followed by a protective coating of vinyl tape.
a. Total nominal thickness: 40 mil.
4. Repair surfaces which will be inaccessible after installation prior to installation.
F. Remove moisture and debris from conduit before wire is pulled into place.
1. Pull mandrel with diameter nominally 1/4 IN smaller than the interior of the conduit, to remove
obstructions.
2. Swab conduit by pulling a clean, tight-fitting rag through the conduit.
3. Tightly plug ends of conduit with tapered wood plugs or plastic inserts until wire is pulled.
G. Only nylon or polyethylene rope shall be used to pull wire and cable in conduit systems.
H. Where portions of a raceway are subject to different temperatures and where condensation is known to be
a problem, as in cold storage areas of buildings or where passing from the interior to the exterior of a
building, the raceway shall be sealed to prevent circulation of warm air to colder section of the raceway.
I. Fill openings in walls, floors, and ceilings and finish flush with surface.
1. See Section 01800.
3.2 RACEWAY ROUTING
A. Raceways shall be routed in the field unless otherwise indicated.
1. Conduit and fittings shall be installed, as required, for a complete system that has a neat appearance
and is in compliance with all applicable codes.
2. Run in straight lines parallel to or at right angles to building lines.
3. Do not route conduits:
a. Through areas of high ambient temperature or radiant heat.
b. In suspended concrete slabs.
4. Conduit shall not interfere with, or prevent access to, piping, valves, ductwork, or other equipment for
operation, maintenance and repair.
5. Provide pull boxes or conduit bodies as needed so that there is a maximum of 360 degrees of bends
in the conduit run or in long straight runs to limit pulling tensions.
B. All rigid conduits within a structure shall be installed exposed except as follows:
1. As indicated on the Drawings. .
2. Embedded in floor slabs or buried under floor serving equipment in non-architecturally finished areas
that are not located on or near a wall or column and the ceiling height is greater than 12 FT.
3. Embedded in floor slabs or buried under floor slabs where shown on the Contract Drawings or with
the Engineer's permission.
C. Maintain minimum spacing between parallel conduit and piping runs in accordance with the following when
the runs are greater than 30 FT:
1. Between instrumentation and telecommunication: 1 IN.
2. Between instrumentation and 125 V, 48 V and 24 Vdc, 21N.
3. Between instrumentation and 600 V and less AC power or control: 6 IN.
4. Between instrumentation and greater than 600 Vac power. 121N.
5. Between 125 V, 48 V and 24 Vdc and 600 V and less AC power or control: 2 IN.
6. Between 125 V, 48 V and 24 Vdc and greater than 600 Vac power. 21N.
7. Between 600 V and less AC and greater than 600 Vac: 2 IN.
8. Between process, gas, air and water pipes: 61N.
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
1V-247
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
/V-248
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
D. Conduits shall be installed to eliminate moisture pockets.
1. Where water cannot drain to openings, provide drain fittings in the low spots of the conduit run.
E. Conduit shall not be routed on the exterior of structures except as specifically indicated on the Drawings.
F. Where sufficient room exists within the housing of roof-mounted equipmen~ the conduit shall be stubbed
up inside the housing.
G. Provide all required openings in walls, floors, and ceilings for conduit penetration.
1. See Section 01800.
3.3 RACEWAY APPLICATIONS
A Permitted raceway types per wire or cable types:
1. Power wire or cables: All raceway types.
2. Control wire or cables: All raceway types.
3. Instrumentation cables: Metallic raceway except non-metallic may be used underground.
4. Motor leads from a VFD:. RGS or shielded VFD cables in all other raceways.
B. Permitted raceway types per area designations:
1. Dry areas:
a. RGS.
2. Wet areas:
a. RGS.
3. Corrosive areas:
a. PVC-RGS.
4. Highly corrosive areas:
a. PVC-RGS.
5. NFPA 70 hazardous areas:
a. RGS.
b. PVC-RGS when required by other area designations.
C. Permitted raceway types per routing locations:
1. In concrete block or brick walls:
a. PVC-40.
2. Embedded in poured concrete walls and floors:
a. PVC-40.
b. RGS wrapped with factory applied weather and corrosion protection tape when emerging from
concrete into areas designated as dry, wet, corrosive or highly corrosive.
c. PVC-RGS when emerging from concrete into areas designated as wet, corrosive or highly
corrosive.
3. Beneath floor slab-on-grade:
a. PVC-40.
4. Through floor penetrations, see ~~~ij9n[Q[~Q~:
a. RGS wrapped with factory applied weather and corrosion protection tape when emerging from
concrete into areas designated as dry, wet, corrosive or highly corrosive.
b. PVC-RGS in areas designated as wet, corrosive or highly corrosive.
5. Direct buried conduits and ductbanks:
a. PVC-80.
b. 90 degree elbows for transitions to above grade:
1) RGS wrapped with factory applied weather and corrosion protection tape.
2) PVC-RGS. ..
c. Long sweeping bends greater than 15 degrees:
1) RGS wrapped with factory applied weather and corrosion protection tape.
2) PVC-RGS.
6. Concrete encased ductbanks:
a. PVC-40.
b. PVC-EB.
c. 90 degree elbows for transitions to above grade:
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1) RGS wrapped with factory applied weather and corrosion protection tape.
2) PVC-RGS.
d. Long sweeping bends greater than 15 degrees:
1) RGS for sizes 21N and larger.
D. FLEX conduits shall be installed for connections to light fixtures, HVAC equipment and other similar
devices above the ceilings.
1. The maximum length shall not exceed:
a. 3 FT to all other equipment.
E. FLEX-L T and FLEX-NM conduits shall be install as the final conduit connection to light fixtures, dry type
transfonners, motors, electrically operated valves, instrumentation primary elements, and other electrical
equipment that is liable to vibrate.
1. The maximum length shall not exceed:
a. 3 FT to motors.
b. 2 FT to all other equipment.
F. HAl-FLEX coupling shall be installed as the final conduit to motors, electrically operated valves,
instrumentation primary elements and electrical equipment that is liable to vibrate.
1. The maximum length shall not exceed:
a. 3 FT to motors.
b. 2 FT to all other equipment.
G. NEMA 1 Rated Wireway:
1. Surface mounted in electrical rooms.
2. Surface mounted above removable ceilings tiles of an architecturally finished area.
H. NEMA 3R Wiring Trough:
1. Surface mounted in exterior locations.
I. NEMA 4X Rated Wireway:
1. Surface mounted in areas designated as wet and or corrosive.
J. NEMA 12 Rated Wireway:
1. Surface mounted in areas designated as dry in architecturally and non-architecturally finished areas.
K. Underground Conduit: See Section 16135.
3.4 CONDUIT FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES
A. Conduit Seals:
1. Installed in conduit systems located in hazardous areas as required by the NFPA 70.
B. Rigid non-metallic conduit and fittings shall be joined utilizing solvent cement.
1. Immediately after installation of conduit and fitting, the fitting or conduit shall be rotated 1/4 turn to
provide uniform contact.
C. Install Expansion Fittings:
1. Where conduits are exposed to the sun and conduit run is greater than 200 FT.
2. Elsewhere as identified on the Drawings.
D. Install Expansion/Deflection Fittings:
1. Where conduits enter a structure.
a. Except electrical manholes and handholes.
b. Except where the ductbank is tied to the structure with rebar.
2. Where conduits span structural expansions joints.
3. Elsewhere as identified on the Drawings.
E. Threaded connections shall be made wrench-tight.
F. Conduit joints shall be watertight:
1. Where subjected to possible submersion.
2. In areas classified as wet.
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
1V-249
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Contrallmprovements Project
SeCtion IV
1V-250
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3. Underground.
G. Terminate Conduits:
1. In metallic ouUet boxes:
a. RGS and (MC:
1) Conduit hub and locknut.
2) Insulated bushing and two (2) locknuts.
3) Use grounding type locknut or bushing when required by NFPA 70.
2. In NEMA 1 rated enclosures:
a. RGS and IMC:
1) Conduit hub and locknut.
2) Insulated bushing and two (2) locknuts.
3) Use grounding type locknut or bushing when required by NFPA 70.
3. In NEMA 12 rated enclosures:
a. Watertight, insulated and gasketed hub and locknut.
b. Use grounding type locknut or bushing when required by NFPA 70.
4. In NEMA 4 and 4X rated enclosures:
a. Watertight, insulated and gasketed hub and locknut.
5. In NEMA 7 rated enclosures:
a. Into an integral threaded hub.
6. When stubbed up through the floor into floor mount equipment:
a. With an insulated grounding bushing on metallic conduits.
b. With end bells on non-metallic conduits.
H. Threadless couplings shall only be used to join new conduit to existing conduit when the existing conduit
end is not threaded and it is not practical or possible to cut threads on the existing conduit with a pipe
threader.
3.5 CONDUIT SUPPORT
A. Permitted multi-conduit surface or trapeze type support system per area designations and conduit types:
1. Dry or wet and/or hazardous areas:
a. Galvanized system consisting of: Galvanized steel channels and fittings, nuts and hardware and
conduit clamps.
2. Corrosive areas:
a. Stainless steel system consisting of: Stainless steel channels and fittings, nuts and hardware
and conduit clamps.
b. PVC coated steel system consisting of: PVC coated galvanized steel channels and fittings and
conduit clamps with stainless steel nuts and hardware.
3. Highly corrosive areas:
a. PVC coated steel system consisting of: PVC coated galvanized steel channels and fittings and
conduit clamps with' stainless steel nuts and hardware.
4. Conduit type shall be compatible with the support system material.
a. Galvanized steel system may be used with RGS and (MC.
b. Stainless steel system may be used with RGS, IMC and PVC-RGS.
c. PVC coated galvanized steel system may be used with PVC-RGS, PVC-40 and PVC-BO.
B. Permitted single conduit support fasteners per area designations arid conduit types:
1. Dry or wet and/or hazardous areas:
a. Material: Zinc plated steel, stainless steel and malleable iron.
b. Types of fasteners: Straps, hangers with bolts, clamps with bolts and bolt on beam clamps.
2. Corrosive areas:
a. Material: Stainless steel and PVC coat malleable iron or steel.
b. Types of fasteners: Straps, hangers with bolts, clamps with bolts and bolt on beam clamps.
3. Highly corrosive areas:
a. Material: PVC coat malleable iron or steel.
b. Types of fasteners: Straps. hangers with bolts, clamps with bolts and bolt on beam clamps.
4. Conduit type shall be compatible with the support fastener material.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
a. Zinc plated steel, steel protected with zinc phosphate and oil finish and malleable iron fasteners
may be used with RGS and IMC.
b. Stainless steel system may be used with RGS, IMC and PVC-RGS.
c. PVC coated fasteners may be used with PVC-RGS, PVC-40 and PVC-80.
C. Conduit Support General Requirements:
1. Maximum spacing between conduit supports per NFPA 70.
2. Support conduit from the building structure.
3. Do not support conduit from process, gas, air or water piping; or from other conduits.
4. Provide hangers and brackets to limit the maximum uniform load on a single support to 25 LBS or to
the maximum uniform load recommended by the manufacturer if the support is rated less than 25
LBS.
a. Do not exceed maximum concentrated load recommended by the manufacturer on any support.
b. Conduit hangers: Continuous threaded rods combined with struts or conduit damps: Do not use
perforated strap hangers and iron bailing wire.
c. Do not use suspended ceiling support systems to support raceways.
d. Hangers in metal roof decks:
1) Utilize fender washers.
2) Not extend above top of ribs.
3) Not interfere with vapor barrier, insulation, or roofing.
5. Conduit support system fasteners:
a. Use sleeve-type expansion anchors as fasteners in masonry wall construction.
b. Do not use concrete nails and powder-driven fasteners.
3.6 OUTLET I PULL AND JUNCTION BOX INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
2. See Section 16010 and the Drawings for area classifications.
3. Fill unused punched-out, tapped, or threaded hub openings with insert plugs.
4. Size boxes to accommodate quantity of conductors endosed and quantity of conduits connected to
the box.
B. OuUet Boxes:
1. Permitted uses of metallic outlet boxes:
a. Housing of wiring devices:
1) Recessed in poured concrete, concrete block and brick walls of exterior building walls.
2. Permitted uses of cast outlet boxes:
a. Housing of wiring devices surface mounted in non-architecturally finished dry, wet corrosive,
highly corrosive and hazardous areas.
b. Pull and junction box surface mounted in non-architecturally finished dry, wet corrosive and
highly corrosive areas.
3. Mount device outlet boxes where indicated on the Drawings and at heights as scheduled in Section
16010.
4. Set device outlet boxes plumb and vertical to the floor.
5. OuUet boxes recessed in walls:
a. Install with appropriate stud wall support brackets or adjustable bar hangers so that they are flush
with the face of the wall.
b. Locate in ungrouted cell of concrete block with bottom edge of box flush with bottom edge of
block and flush with the face of the block.
6. Place barriers between switches in boxes with 277 V switches on opposite phases.
7. Back-to-back are not permitted.
8. When an ouUet box is connected to a PVC coated condui~ the box shall also be PVC coated.
C. Pull and Junction Boxes:
1. Install pull or junction boxes in conduit runs where indicated or required to facilitate pulling of wires or
making connections.
a. Make covers of boxes accessible.
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Contrallmprovements Project
Section IV
1V-251
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities '
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section IV
1V-252
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2. Permitted uses of NEMA 1 enclosure:
a. Pull or junction box surface mounted above removable ceiling tiles of an architecturally finished
area.
3. Permitted uses of NEMA 4 enclosure:
a. Pull or junction box surface mounted in areas designated as wet.
4. Permitted uses of NEMA 4X metallic enclosure:
a. Pull or junction box surface mounted in areas designated as wet and/or corrosive.
5. Permitted uses of NEMA 7 enclosure:
a. Pull or junction box surface mounted in areas designated as Class I hazardous.
1) Provide PVC coating in corrosive and highly corrosive areas when PVC coated conduit is
used.
6. Permitted uses of NEMA 12 enclosure:
a. Pull or junction box surface mounted in areas designated as dry.
END OF SECTION
~
'.
WESTFIELD INSURANCE COMPANY
ONE PARK CIRCLE
WESTFIELD CENTER, OHIO 44251
1 800 331 8208
BOND NO: 0019079
. This is the front page of the performance/payment bond issued in compliance with Florida
Statute Chapter 255.05
Contractor Name TLC DIVERSIFIED, INC.
Address 2719 17m STREET EAST
PALMETTO, FL. 34221
Phone # 941 722-0621
Owner Name CITY OF CLEARWATER
Address PO BOX 4748
CLEARWATER, FL 33758
Phone # 727 562-4750
Contract Number 05-0062 UT
Project Description MARSHALL STREET/NORTHEAST WPC FACILITIES
ODORCONTROLPROffiCT
I.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
~ "'
BOND NUMBER: 0019079
CONTRACT BOND
ST A TE OF FLORIDA
COUNTY OF MANATEE
KNOW ALL MEN BY TRESE PRESENTS: That we TLC DIVERSIFIED INC.. Contractor
and WESTFIELD INSURANCE COM' ANY (Surety) whose home address is WESTFIELD
CENTER. MEDINA COUNTY, STATE OF omo
HEREINAFTER CALLED THE "Surety", are held and firmly bound into the City of Clearwater,
Florida (hereinafter called the "Owner") io the penal sum of TWO BUNDRED AND TWENTY-
EIGHT THOUSAND TWENTY-NINE DOLLARS AND FIFrY CENTS ($228,029.50) for the
AWARDED BASE BID payment of which we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators,
succe~rs, and assigns for the faithful performance of a certain written contract, dated the ,.,,-- day
of~~ , 2007 . entered into between the Cootractor and the City of Clearwater for:
)
MARSHALL STREETINORTHEAST WPC FACILITIES
ODOR CONTROL IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT (0S-0062-UT)
a copy of which said contract is incorp<mlted herein by reference and is made a part hereof as if fully
copied herein.
NOW THEREFORE, THE CONDmONS OF THIS OBLIGATION ARE SUCH, that if the
Contractor shall in all respects comply with the terms and conditions of said contract, including the
one-year guarantee of material and labor, and his obligations thereunder, including the contract
documents (which include the Advertisement for Bids, Fonn of Proposal, Form of Contract, Form of
Surety Bond, Instructions to Bidders, General Conditions and Technical Specifications) and the
Plans and Specifications therein referred to. and made a part thereof, and such alterations as may be
made in said Plans and Specifications as therein provided for, and shall indemnify and save harmless
the said Owner against and from all costs, expenses, damages, injury or conduct, want of care or
skill, negligence or default, including patent infringements on the part of the said Contractor agents
or employees, in the execution or performance of said contract, including errors in the plans
furnished by the Contractor, and further, if such "Contractor" or "Contractors" shall promptly make
payments to all persons supplying him, them or it, labor, material, and supplies used directly or
indirectly by said Contractor, ContractorS, Sub-Contractor, or Sub-Contractors, in the prosecution of
. the work provided for in said Contract, this obligation shall be void, otherwise, the Contractor and
Suretyjointly and severally agree to pay to the Owner any difference between the sum to which the
said Contractor would be entitled on the completion of the Contract, and that which the Owner may
be obliged to pay for the completion of said work by contract or otherwise, & any damages., direct or
indirect, or consequential, which said Owner may sustain on account of such work., or on account of
the failure of the said Contractor to properly and in all things, keep and execute all the provisions of
said contract.
Page I
I,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
..
CONTRACT BOND
(2)
And the said Contractor and Surety hereby further bind themselves, their successors, executors,
administrators, and assigns, jointly and severally, that they win amply and fully protect the said
Owner against, and will pay any and. all amounts, damages, costs and judgments which may be
recovered against or which the Owner may be called upon to pay to any person or corporation by
reason of any damages arising from the performance of said work, or of the repair or maintenance
thereof, or the manner of doing the same or the neglect of the said Contractor or his agents or
servants or the improper perfonnance of the said work by the Contractor or his agents or servants, or
the infringements of any patent rights by reason of the use of any material furnished or work done; as
aforesaid, or otherwise.
And the said Contractor and Surety hereby further bind themselves, their successors, heirs,
execut~, administrators, and assigns, jointly and severally, to repay the owner any sum which the
Owner may be compelJed to pay because of any lien for labor material furnished fur the work,
embraced by said Contract.
And the said Surety, for the value received; hereby stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of
time, alteration or addition to the tenns of the contract or to the work to be performed thereunder Or
the specifications accompanying the same shall in any way affect ;ts obligations on this bond, and it
does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, alteration OT addition to the terms of
the contract or to the work or to the specifications.
IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, witness the hands and seals of the parties hereto this ,+L-
day of (...Q ~ruar'1' 2007 - .
TLC DIVERSIFIED. 1Ne.
...LJ CONTRACTOR
t;jf> ~ - _ ~--..
Thurston Lamberson, President
:';1( Weotfie Id Insurance
AITO
Theodor
Co.
...-
./
..... -
- ....~....
-. .
P "Be 2
I
f.
I
CERTIFIED COPY
POWER NO. 099220204
Westfield Insurance Co.
Westfield National Insurance Co.
Ohio Farmers Insurance Co.
Westfield Center, Ohio
I
Genera I
Power
of Attorney
I
Know All Men by These Presents, That WESTFIELD iNSURANCE COMPANY, WESTFIELD NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY and OHIO
FARMERS INSURANCE COMPANY, corporations, hereinafter referred to individually as a -Company' and collectively as 'Companies,- duly
organized and existing under the laws ot the State of Ohio, and having its prindpal office in Westfield Center, Medina County, Ohio, do by these
presents make, constitute and appoint
THEODORE J. JEDUCK, ROBERT H. BONO, JOINTLY OR SEVERALLY
I
I
of DAVIE and State of FL its true and lawful Attomey(s)-in-Fact, with full power and autllority hereby conferred in its name,
place an.d stead, to execute, acknowledge and deliver any and all bonds, recognizances, under1akings, or other instrunents or contracts of
surelyship- - - - - - - - -- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -- - - - - - - - - - - - -. - - - - - - - - - -- - - --.
I
LIMITATION: THIS ~OWER OF. ATTORNEY CANNOT BE USED TO EXECUTE NOTE GUARANTEE, MORTGAGE DEACIENCY, MORTGAGE
GUARANTEE, OR BANK DEPOSITORY BONDS.
and to bind any of the Companies tf1ereoy as fully and to the same extent as il such bonds were signed by the President, sealed with the corporate
seal of tf1e applicable Company and duly attested by its Secretary, hereby ratffymg and confirming all that the said Attorney(s)-in-Fact may do in
the prermses. Said .appomtment is made under and by authority of the following resolution adopted by the Board of Directors of each of the
WESTFIELD INSURANCE COMPANY, WESTFIELD NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY and OHIO FARMERS INSURANCE COMPANY:
-Be It Resolved, that the President, any Senior Executive, any Secretary or any Fidelity & Surety Operations Executive or other Executive shall
be and is hereby vested witf1 full power and authority to appoint anyone or more SUitable persons as Attorney(sHn-Fact to represent and act for
and on behalf of the Company subject to the following provisions:
The Attorney-in-Fact. may be given rull power and authority for and in the name of and on behalf of the Company. to execute, acknowledge and
deliver, any and all bonds, recognizances, contracts, agreements Of indemnity and other conditional or obligatory undertakings and any and all
notices and documents canceling or terminating the Company's liability thereunder, and any such Instruments so executed by any such
Attorney-in-Fact shall be as binding upon the Company as it signed by the President and sealed and attested by the Corporate secretary.-
-Be it Further ResolveD, that the signature of any such designated person and the seal of the Company heretofore or hereafter affixed to any
power of attorney or any certificate relatmg tf1ereto by facsimile, and any power of attorney or certificate bearing facsimHe signatures or facsimile
seal shall be valid and binding upon the Company with respect to any bond or unoenaldng to whiCh It is attad1ed.- (Each adoptee at a meeting
held on February 8, 2000).
In Witness Whereof, WESTFIELD INSURANCE COMPANY, WESTFIELD NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY and OHIO FARMERS INSURANCE
COMPANY have caused thl;lSe presents to be signed by their Senior- ExecutiYe and their corporate seals te be hereto affixed this 20th day at
MAY A.D., 2003 .
Corporate /'~
Seals /.. ~ ~.....:...~~"
Affixed .."'.' _ ". ~ 1-
~ -l \0\
?~-SEAL: ?a
....; :;l:i
, wII, :~:
i~. I:t:J
_\"'0.. r.Ir'O 1~
. ~~. ~
State OfOhi~
County of Medina 55.:
,"""fI~.~
.......'..;,ONAl. ;~"~~~
,.., """1':...........:'Y.so "'.
~ Q .' ..0-?-..
f~t/ \~%
:1-: SEAL :m:
\:t::::::.::::.::::::<o/
~~~~.~.."
...:~c;,,~""
.;" ~.....-.._- ~,
i ~.., - .... \
;;:'q;:.:..III.~."":'~ -
=~: ~~~l:;J;
: co: ::s::;
'i...-.!. :ir=
;'~'. 1848 ..~ f
% .. ......~..._... .~.l
~''''''~' ................
".............
WESTFIELD INSURANCE COMPANY
WESTFIELD NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY
OHIO FARMERS INSURANCE COMPANY
I
I
I
I
By:
Richard L. Kinnaird, Jr.. Senior Executive
;Pz.
I
I
On thi~ 20th day of MAY A.D., 2003 , before me personally came Richard L. Kinnaird, Jr. to me known, who, being by me duly
sworn, did depose and say, that he resides in Medina, Ohio; that he is Senior Executive of WESTFIELD INSURANCE COMPANY, WESTFIELD
NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY and OHIO FARMERS INSURANCE COMPANY, the companies described in and which executed the abOve
instrument; that he knows the seals of said Companies; that the seals affixed to said instrument are such corporate seals; that they were so affixed
by order ot the Boards of Directors of said compames: and that he si9i1ed I1Js naA2me ttlef"etO b...y like order. ~.
Notarial ...-.....
Seal ,.>,""". \ A L ~
Affi_ r~~Ai;;)":.
State Of OI1io '\ ~_1 ~
County of Medina ss.: \. >--<l .. ~'..
-"~.. ""1:: 0 f" 0........
------........
William J. Kahelin, A mey at Law, Notary Public
My Commission Does Not Expire (Sec. 147.03 Ohio Revised Code)
I
I
I
I, Frank A. Carrino, Secretary of WESTFIELD INSURANCE COMPANY, WESTFIELD NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY and OHIO FARMERS
INSURANCE. COMPANY, do hereby certify that the above and foregomg is a true and correct copy of a Power of Attorney, executed by said
Companies, which is stili in full rorce and effect: and furthermore, the resolutions of the Boards of Directors, set out in the Power of Attorney are
In fuJl force and effect.
In Wirness Whereof, j have hereunto set my hand and affixed the seals of said companies at Westfield Center, Ohio, this
A.D.,
........~ . '.: - . ~",..~.~~~~('.~,tJ.~
;/' ,.~.~~c'..... .... \~~......~f.'\-& ....
~_>Q..... - ..-.,,~ ~ . 5,,"":.'.' ....0.~
'''t. - ,,~- . v. . il -
t'iA:JSIt.. T \~1~ f 0/ \;;. ~
.~! ~ 3~ ~~j SEAL ig~
1: ~\ ' . .-!~ ~ ~:. :0 J
'\ '" ". r.Ir'O/'''' <. "'-". .,'0:
~...... '--./ .<.<::..'..;,...-.::>......
'~ "41"""'"
day of
I
I
..~~""-~""'Jh""~~
;0" ....c,.
~.. -..-- ,
:'~- - -'.'~'"
~~. .... ~
i:::!f~EIlJj\'b ;
= : .K::o=~. :;:"
~~.. 1848 J~ ff
'\ .4.... ... .._. .-....r...:
~ --.._.- .....
~ .....
'.......I"..I...................,.........~
~;nl1.~el~
S6cretllT}'
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
CONTRACT
This CONTRACT made and entered into this 7't-- day of 1: , 2007 by and between the
City of Clearwater, Florida, a municipal corporation, hereinafter design ted as the "City", and TLC
DIVERSIFIED. INC. of the City of PALMETTO, County of MANATEE and State of Florida,
hereinafter designated as the "Contractor".
WITNESSETH:
That the parties to this contract each in consideration of the undertakings, promises and agreements
on the part of the other herein contained, do hereby undertake, promise and agree as follows:
The Contractor, and his or its successors, assigns, executors or administrators, in consideration of the
sums of money as herein after set forth to be paid by the City and to the Contractor, shall and will at
their own cost and expense perfonn all labor, furnish all materials, tools and equipment for the
following:
MARSHALL STREET/NORTHEAST WPC FACILITIES ODOR CONTROL
IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT (05-0062-UT) FOR THE AWARDED BASE BID SUM OF
TWO HUNDRED AND TWENTY-EIGHT THOUSAND TWENTY-NINE DOLLARS AND
FIFTY CENTS ($228,029.50)
In accordance with such proposal and technical supplemental specifications and such other special
provisions and drawings, if any, w~ich will be submitted by the City, together with any
advertisement, instructions to bidders, general conditions, proposal and bond, which may be hereto
attached, and any drawings if any, which may be herein referred to, are hereby made a part of this
contract, and all of said work to be performed and completed by the contractor and its successors and
assigns shall be fully completed in a good and workmanlike manner to the satisfaction of the City.
If the Contractor should fail to comply with any of the terms, conditions, provisions or stipulations
as contained herein within the time specified for completion of the work to be performed by the
Contractor, then the City, may at its option, avail itself of any or all remedies provided on its behalf
and shall have the right to proceed to complete such work as Contractor is obligated to perform in
accordance with the provisions as contained herein.
THE CONTRACTOR AND HIS OR ITS SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS DOES HEREBY
AGREE TO ASSUME THE DEFENSE OF ANY LEGAL ACTION WHICH MAY BE
BROUGHT AGAINST THE CITY AS A RESULT OF THE CONTRACTOR'S ACTIVITIES
ARISING OUT OF THIS CONTRACT AND FURTHERMORE, IN CONSIDERATION OF
THE TERMS, STIPULATIONS AND CONDITIONS AS CONTAINED HEREIN, AGREES
TO HOLD THE CITY FREE. AND HARMLESS FROM ANY AND ALL CLAIMS FOR
DAMAGES, COSTS OF SUITS, JUDGMENTS OR DECREES RESULTING FROM ANY
CLAIMS MADE UNDER THIS CONTRACT AGAINST THE CITY OR THE
CONTRACTOR OR THE CONTRACTOR'S SUB-CONTRACTORS, AGENTS, SERVANTS
OR EMPLOYEES RESULTING FROM ACTIVITIES BY THE AFOREMENTIONED
CONTRACTOR, SUB-CONTRACTOR, AGENT SERVANTS OR EMPLOYEES.
Page 3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
CONTRACT
(2)
In addition to the foregoing provisions, the Contractor agrees to confonn to the following requirements:
In connection with the perfonnance of work under this contract, the Contractor agrees not to
discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, sex, religion, color, or
national origin. The aforesaid provision shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
employment, upgrading, demotion, or transfer; recruitment or recruitment advertising; lay-off or
tennination; rates of payor other fonns of compensation; and selection for training, including
apprenticeship. The Contractor agrees to post hereafter in conspicuous places, available for employees
or applicants for employment, notices to be provided by the contracting officer setting forth the
provisions of the non-discrimination clause.
The Contractor further agrees to insert the foregoing provisions in all contracts hereunder, including
contracts or agreements with labor unions and/or worker's representatives, except sub-contractors for
standard commercial supplies or raw materials.
It is mutually agreed between the parties hereto that time is of the essence of this contract, and in the
event that the work to be performed by the Contractor is not completed within the time stipulated
herein, it is then further agreed that the City may deduct from such sums or compensation as may be
due to the Contractor the sum of $1.000.00 per day for each day that the work to be performed by the
Contractor remains incomplete beyond the time limit specified herein, which sum of $1.000.00 per
day shall only and solely represent damages which the City has sustained by reason of the failure of
the Contractor to complete the work within the time stipulated, it being further agreed that this sum is
not to be construed as a penalty but is only to be construed as liquidated damages for failure of the
Contractor to complete and perfonn all work within the time period as specified in this contract.
It is further mutually agreed between the City and the Contractor that if, any time after the execution of
this contract and the surety bond which is attached hereto for the faithful performance of the tenns and
conditions as contained herein by the Contractor, that the City shall at any time deem the surety or
sureties upon such performance bond to be unsatisfactory or if, for any reason, the said bond ceases to
be adequate in amount to cover the performance of the work the Contractor shall, at his or its own
expense, within ten (10) days after receipt of written notice from the City to do so, furnish an additional
bond or bonds insuch tenn and amounts and with such surety or sureties as shall be satisfactory to the
City. If such an event occurs, no further payment shall be made to the Contractor under the tenns and
provisions of this contract until such new or additional security bond guaranteeing the faithful
performance of the work under the terms hereof shall be completed and furnished to the City in a fonn
satisfactory to it.
Page 4
.....
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
'"
CONTRACT
(3)
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties to the agreement have hereunto set their hands and seals and
have executed this Agreement, in duplicate, the day and year first above written.
CITY OF CLEARWATER
IN PINELLAS COUNTY, FLORIDA
(Seal)
By#~b.~
William B. Home, II
City Manager
Attest:
Countersigned:
~z. Ji,.
~0. ia E. Goudeau,
City lerk
---
(b.
By: -~#W
~ Hibbard,
Mayor-Councilmember
Approved as to form &Q€l-
-legal ~lif:M8i0R@Y:
Q
~C]~
Carlos F. Co on
Assistant City Attorney
(Contractor must indicate whether Corporation,
Partnership, Company or Individual.)
(The person signing shall, in his own
handwriting, sign the Principal's name, his own
name, and his title; where the person is signing
for a Corporation, he must, by Affidavit, show
his authority to bind the Corporation).
TLC Diversified, Inc.
(CO::clOr) _
~ ,,~~,)
Thurston Lamberson,
President
Page 5
:-
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
_____m
CONTRACTOR'S AFFIDAVIT FOR FINAL PAYMENT
(CORPORATION FORM)
STATE OF FLORIDA
COUNTY OF MANATEE
On this day personally appeared before me, the undersigned authority, duly authorized to
administer oaths and take acknowledgments, , who after being duly sworn,
deposes and says:
That he is the (TITLE) of TLC DIVERSIFIED.
INC. a Florida Corporation, with its principal place of business located at 2719 17TH STREET
EAST. PALMETTO. FLORIDA 34221 (herein, the "Contractor").
That the Contractor was the general contractor under a contract executed on the day of
,2007, with the CITY OF CLEARWATER, FLORIDA, a municipal corporation, as
Owner, and that the Contractor was to perform the construction of:
MARSHALL STREET/NORTHEAST WPC FACILITIES ODOR CONTROL
IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT (05-0062-UT) FOR THE SUM OF TWO HUNDRED AND
TWENTY-EIGHT THOUSAND TWENTY-NINE DOLLARS AND FIFTY CENTS
($228,029.50)
That said work has now been completed and the Contractor has paid and discharged all sub-contractors,
laborers and material men in connection with said work and there are no liens outstanding of any nature
nor any debts or obligations that might become a lien or encumbrance in connection with said work
against the described property.
That he is making this affidavit pursuant to the requirements of Chapter 713, Florida Statutes,
and upon consideration of the payment of (Final Full Amount of Contract) in
full satisfaction and discharge of said contract.
That the Owner is hereby released from any claim which might arise out of said Contract.
The word "liens" as used in this affidavit shall mean any and all arising under the operation of
the Florida Mechanic's Lien Law as set forth in Chapter 713, Florida Statutes.
Sworn and subscribed to before me
TLC DIVERSIFIED. INC.
AFFIANT
This _ day of
, 2007.
BY:
NOT ARY PUBLIC
My Commission Expires:
PRESIDENT
Page 6
,
I ,.~.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS
AlA Document A310
BID BOND
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that we
TLC DIVERSIFIED, INC., INC.
as Principal. hereinafter called the Principal, and
WESTFIELD INSURANCE COMPANY
a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of OHIO
as Surety, hereinafter called the Surety, are held and finnly bound unto
CITY OF CLEARWA TER
as Obligee, hereinafter called the Obligee, in the sum of TEN PERCENT (10%) OF PROPOSED BID-Dollars ($ -10%-),
for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, the said Principal and the Surety, bind ourselves, our heirs,
executors. administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents.
WHEREAS, the Principal has submitted a bid for
MARSHALL STREET & NE WPB ODOR CONTROL IMP PROJECTS
NOW, THEREFORE. if the Obligee shall accept the bid of the Principal and the Principal shall enter into a Contract with the Obligee in
accordance with the terms of such bid, and give such bond or bonds as may be specified in the bidding or Contract Documents with
good and sufficient surety for the faithful performance of such Contract and for the prompt payment of labor and material fumished in
the prosecution thereof, or in the event of the failure of the Principal to enter such Contract and give such bond or bonds. if the
Principal shall pay to the Obligee the difference not to exceed the penalty hereof between the amount specified in said. bid and such
larger amount for which the Obligee may in good faith contract with another party to perform the Work covered by said bid, then this
obligation shall be null and void, otherwise to remain in full force and effect.
Signed and sealed this 10TH day of NOVEMBER
2006
?iY~~
(Wrtne
TLC DIVERSIFIED. INC.
(Seal)
~
~
~
PRESIDENT
"T~",r!o.~1'J
~""\oe.('"~ N
/~t(-d~
(Witness)
....... ~:
. .
- .
Printed in cooperation with the American Institute of Architecls (AlA) by CANF&D . CANF&D vouches IhaI the Iangullge in this document conforms exacIIy to the 18nguage. ~. in AlA Document A310
Bid Bond - AlA, February 1970 ED. THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVE., N.W., WASHINGTON, D. C. 20006. . .;.
-
I
.. ::C;," ~#!4
I
General
Power
of Attorney
POWER NO. 0992202 04
Westfield Insurance Co.
Wes1lfield National Insurance Co.
lDhio Farmers Insurance Co.
Westfield Center. Ohio
I
CERTIFIED COpy
I
Know All Men by These Presents. That WESTFIELD INSURANCE CO.MPANY, WESTFIE~D NATIC:NAL INSUR~NCE CO~PANY an~ .OHIO
FARMERS INSURANCE COMPANY, corporations, hereinafter referred ,to Indlvl,duallY,,3s a Company and collectively as Co'!'panles, duly
organized and exIsting under the laws of the State of Ohio, and having Its pnnclpal offll:e In Westfield Center, Medina County, OhiO, do by these
presents make, constitute and appoint
THEODORE J. JEDLlCK, ROBERT H. BOND, JOINTLY OR SEVERALLY
I
I
ot DAVIE and State of FL its true and lawful Attorney(s)-/n-Fact, with full power and authority hereby conferred In Its name,
place and stead, to execute, acknowledge and deliver any and all bonds. recognlzan.:es, undertakings, or other Instruments or contrllcts ot
suretyship, , , , , . " , .. . . . . . , . . . . - - . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . _ . . . . . . . . . . . . _ . . _ .. . _ . '.
LIMITATION: THIS POWER OF ATTORNEY CANNOT BE USED TO EXECUTE NOT!: GUARANTEE, MORTGAGE DEFICIENCY, MORTGAGE
GUARANTEE, OR BANK DEPOSITORY BONDS. .
and to bind any of the Companies thereby as fully and to the same extent as If such bonds were signed by the President, sealed with the corporate
seal of the applicable Company and duly attested by Its Secretary, hereby ratifying and confirming all that the said Attorney(s)-In-Fact may do In
the premises. Said appointment Is made under and by authority ,of the following resolution adopted by the Board of Directors of each of the
WESTFIELD INSURANCE COMPANY, WESTFIELD NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY anc' OHIO FARMERS INSURANCE COMPANY:
.Be It Resolved, that the President, any Senior Executive, any Secretary or any Fidelity & Surety Operations Executive or other Executive shall
be and Is hereby vested with full power and authority to appoint anyone or more suitable per~ons as Attorney(s)-In-Fact to represent and act ror
and on behalf of the Company subject to the following provisions: ' '
The Attorney-in-Fact. may be given full power and authority for and In the name of anel on behalf of the Company. to execute, aCknOWledge and
deliver, any and all bonds, recognizances, contracts, agreements of Indemnity and other conditional or obligatory undertakings and any and all
notices and documents canceling or terminating the Company's liability thereunder, and any such Instruments so e.xecuted by any such
Attomey-ln-Fact shall be as binding upon the Company as If signed by the President and sealed and attested by the Corporate Secretary:
.Be it Further Resolved, that the signature or any such designated person and the seal of the Company heretofore or hereaner affixed to any
power of attorney or any certificate relating thereto by facsimile, and any power of attornt,y or certificate bearing facsimile signatures or facsimile
seal shall be valid and binding upon tM Company with respect to any bond or undertal<11g to which It Is attached.. (Each adopted at a meeting
held on February 8, 2000).
In Witness Whereof, WESTFIELD INSURANCE COMPANY, WESTFIELD NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY and OHIO FARMERS INSURANCE
COMPANY have caused these presents to be signed by their Senior Execulive and their corporate seals to be heretoaftixed this 20th day of
MAY A.D., 2003 . .
......I.........~ """"111' I r""".
Corporate ."Uft.( ,;",' ", i,ONAl/A. "',
Seals .... ,~.........:~C4' ~~ .' ~9- ,....... "15'"
Affixed ~/ ..... 'Ct'~ l'o...... ......~;'.~
~:S't! J( t \~ if/ SEAL \~~
. \ st. ~ 1/ ;~~ J!;i
~...... nn ........ \~.... /0/
...........-./' """""" .............,.'. "........
State of OhIO'~ "',.,...."~"i'.."""
County of Medina ss.:
. .......\iSii;';':'.. WESTFIE'LD INSURANCE COMPANY
,<~"'-:.:."'~;:" WESTFIELD NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY
'~"'t~WERl \c..\ OHIO FARMERS INSURANCE COMPANY
. poi:: 8 ~iC i if'
=0' I:.E UvJ6~-
\%\ 1848 /~j I J
'$o~ . ". ... ..- .~..~ ~( _
.~ ........ ....
"'''''''''' ""....., .
III".....'" By.
Richard L. Kinnaird, Jr., Senior Executive
I
I
I
I
I
I
On this 20th day of MAY A.D., :2003 , before me personally came Richard L.. tClnnalrd, Jr. to me known, who, being by me duly
sworn, did depose and say, that he resides In Medina, Ohio; that he is Senior Executive of WESTFIELD INSURANCE COMPANY, WESTFIELD
NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY and OHIO FARMERS INSURANCE COMPANY, the companies described In and which executed the ebove
Instrument; that he knows the seals of said Companies; that the seals affixed to said Instrument are such corporate seals' that they were so aftlxed
by order of the Boards or Directors of said.. Companies; and that he signed his name therelo by like order. ~'
Notarial ~",'"........., @ I
Seal """,~ \ Po l ......... .
Affixed ~-<.~..,\i'ii~.~...~.... 'J'
llr~) c.
State Of Ohio ~" '%1...; ~lIb~~~;s~~~~~~sANot rE:~rr:~S~~~14~~~a6hiou:~~~sed Code)
County of Medina ss.: " ~ . ol' ..'
..... ,. f: 0 F 0 .,..,
........f'..U.'..","
I
I
I
I
I, M. Brooks Rorapaugh, Secretary of WESTFIELD INSURANCE COMPANY, WESTFIELD NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY and OHIO
FARMERS INSURANCE COMPANY, do hereby certify that the above .and.foregoing Is a true and correct copy of a Power of Attorney, executod by
said Companies, which Is still In full force and effect; and furthermOre, $1'''3 l'esC)jutions of the Boards of Directors, set out In the Power of Attorney
are In full force and effect.' .' _,' _ -:-:.', ", .~
In Witness 'f~ereor. I have hereunto set my hand and attt~~theseais: .51.said Com:>anies at Westfield Center, Ohio, this Ie} day of
!vovt"J"..........:,,,;:..:;Joo{ ,,,,,.. . ~ ----
4' ,URA ~Jt ....,..".\~(")NAL';.'I,.., ..~.."I~II, .
~ ,~...-....!.!c;-.... ,.' ....I'-;..........i\-,s- ". ./.....~~~~~~"......
~/' '"'" \(t\ /0.... "'.."-<;>"'~ ,~., ~.::.~'"
t s( SEAL \~9 fi( SEAL "'1~\ !:!(t.\\.~TERt~.lil
~"'''' nn ....~t \~\ .~/ \~'" ~84e /~i M; Brooks Florapaugh, Secre ry
............ ~..-;. .... ,.,t. ........ \ . .... .. ........"...1
"'''''''' ..,.......... ...... "='4l).,..... ....... ......,.....
1'1" . ,I"~"~ " '"
"""."1"'" ~III'''.II'I\''''''
I
I
I
BPOAC2 (combined) (06.02)
_u
IftRY'ililfj!~~i<<)BHJf01Jl(~1Ii
--- LICENSE NBR
'~,~fl~~~1:;t~~~f~1f~, ... .....
'1~':-::~15i'- >-1fi ~'ll>,i ~;,o~f'S";;(3ERTIF;[ED-jj;;--~,.,--'--, '<', ''''-'' ,',,',
j{W1J~:'ii~fifi~ q'~~J~i~ionS -;g~ Ch~i5'leri.,4 ,~~,:;FS.
;-E_~:pir#_tioI1;;;__<:lat,~:AUG 3~,~;~ 20,9~
::\!L(II~o~~1 (~, .:,
'2719',17TH STREET EAST
B~LME~TO" ,FL~...,,-342-2.1 ~;Wj;,;. ,-::\:"";":";" ~~~r" ~\~""""""h'
Vg(AII) " {~~~j::!U1:!f~!t,
~
-
i_
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
, : . " ,-~., :. . '.
!i:DI
- - j;..:~~
,:~~r ~mo
~.~ -:\, ~~fP
~~~~~!;~~
L___
I, --""._--
-
-
~p':Jt;
,::i!}d::;
~~tt
1~~~~V81\
lt~{~~f*~;
-
(;..~)J:.
r~1..:-;'_':;'_.
~~)~ :~:;,~,
:~_:_.;'~~~1
',:,::::-=n,~'
'J~~r;-
,=~" ..",-.:..
~:.':::-_":!.. .~"r-::
;'-::r_\.,.'. ""'._
'~~~,~
'.-" '" ~I-_'" ,';,
~.~%~i
-
;:.../l:...;.~
._-. .,.;.~;o
;~.:{:~:
. ~:.:~::.{{~ lj.
:..:~~~~- -"~~-;-:;~~
rf~f. '
I)
:~i~2~ __~t~
'-::;~*~gF--
ftl~t~~
~;~d,~~ri
II~cJl:f,jl
~~J.~
t~~t~
~~:
i~;F:
-
-
i:iK{~ ~'.
'i~t-f~ ~
~~~~ :~
f~~i~~ ~
~
I~
~';"'.\;._:-.
.~"=-~
t_"""!"'":":'"
I~;i;
iF},~ i~
-
-
-
--
I.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
AFFIDAVIT
(To be filled in and executed if the bidder is a corporation)
5T ATE OF FLORIDA )
COUNTY OF ~a t..)4~ e..e.. )
::r C Q t\...I N 4L LQ..... be.. rs 0 I';:) being duly sworn, deposes and says that he/she is Secretary of
I L.t.... 0 :\Jef".~ ~{: ~ol, ':tNlc..
a corporation organized and existing under and by virtue of the laws of the State of Florida, and having its
principal office at:
~1'~ \'1-\-"'- &-\-. E.
Number
~ Q. \ }o\e.:\'\-o
City
r\Q1\IlL\-llP
County .
\=" L ..3",~.:\, Street &
State
Affiant further says that he is familiar with the records, minute books and by-laws of
"\" L <:.- "l:>\\l ~r~'A>, ~o\ I ~ N c...
(Name of Corporation)
. AffiantfurthersaysthatT~\Ar~-\-(';~ ~....\o~r.soN is ~,e.~\ae.hl+
(Officer's Name) (Title)
of the corporation, is duly authorized to sign the Proposal for c..o Nt r Q..L:\- ~ OS - 0 OlD;;). - L\ \"
for said corporation by virtue of ~ cy (" li) \J .. So" () 1\3 E) ~ 'b 't k w ~
(state whether a provision of by laws Resolution of the Board of
Directors. If by Re ution g ve date n
Sworn to before me this 30 t \-\ day of --.J\) 0 V.
,2006.
Title or rank, and Serial No., if any
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section V
V.8
.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
~
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT
STATE OF FLORIDA )
COUNTY OF ~Q l\Jct -\- ~ e- )
\~u('~-\- ON ~,",,\o~r~~..,j
being, first duly sworn, deposes and says that he is
~re ~"o\e.t.J+
of \L c... -:0", \let'" Sa.', ~', e..J. I IN c..
the party making the foregoing Proposal or Bid; that such Bid is genuine and not collusive or sham: that said
bidder is not financially interested in or otherwise affiliated in a business way with any other bidder on the same
contract; that said bidder has not colluded, conspired, connived, or agreed, directly or indirectly, with any bidders
or person, to put in a sham bid or that such other person shall refrain from bidding, and has not in any manner,
directly or indirectly, sought by agreement or collusion, or communication or conference, with any person, to fix the
bid price or affiant or any other bidder, or to fix any overhead, profit or cost element of said bid price, or that of any
other bidder, or to secure any advantage against the City of Clearwater, Florida, or any person or persons
interested in the proposed contract; and that all statements contained in said proposal or bid are true; and further,
that such bidder has not directly or indirectly submitted this bid, or the contents thereof, or divulged information or
data relative thereto to any association or to any member or agent thereof.
~
?
-:-~
Affiant
. \~"'f's+ot.,) LQ,t-\\oerso/IJ
Sworn to and subscribed before me this 30ih day of t\J 0 \J.
,2006.
~of~~*~
. Notary Public
~""'~ KAY L CUNNINGHAM
0Jl ~ MY COMMISSION # 00302744
"~IIF ",,'II' EXPIRES: March 23,2008
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section V
V-9
.
I.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PROPOSAL
(1 )
TO THE CITY OF CLEARWATER, FLORIDA, for
M ~ r So ~C\. \\ .~;;;. (" to to -\-
O"\or ~o~t~o\
~~c..~ \'. \- ~ e.. So.
~ r-a J. \0o,\~e.~t W ~ e...
+. kfr O\Je. M. e.,.,-\' ~ r> '0 j e.. c.... -\-
and doing such other work incidental thereto, all in accordance with the contract documents, marked
c..ON;'<"o..c..\- 4\: 0S- DO\.o-:;).- \...\.\
Every bidder must take notice of the fact that even though his proposal be accepted and the documents signed by
the bidder to whom an award is made and by those officials authorized to do so on behalf of the City of
Clearwater, Florida, that no such award or signing shall be considered a binding contract without a certificate from
the Finance Director that funds are available to cover the cost of the work to be done, or without the approval of
the City Attorney as to the form and legality of the contract and. all the pertinent documents relating thereto having
been approved by said City Attorney; and such bidder is hereby charged with this notice.
The signer of the Proposal, as bidder, also declares that the only person, persons, company or parties interested
in this Proposal, are named in this Proposal, that he has carefully examined the Advertisement, Instructions to
Bidders, Contract Specifications, Plans, Supplemental Specifications, General Conditions, Special Provisions, and
Contract Bond, that he or his representative has made such investigation as is necessary to determine the
character and extent of the work and he proposes and agrees that if the Proposal be accepted, he will contract
with the City of Clearwater, Florida, in the form of contract; hereto annexed, to provide the necessary labor,
materials, machinery, equipment, tools or apparatus, do all the work required to complete the contract within the
time mentioned in the General Conditions and according to the requirements of the City of Clearwater, Florida, as
herein and hereinafter set forth, and furnish the required surety bonds for the following prices to wit:
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section V
V-10
.- rru
I,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
---
I
-
I
I
I
I
I
I
~-
I
I
PROPOSAL
(2)
If the foregoing Proposal shall be accepted by the City of Clearwater, Florida, and .the undersigned shall fail to
execute a satisfactory contract as stated in the Advertisement herein attached, then the City may, at its option
determine that the undersigned has abandoned the contract, and thereupon this Proposal shall be null and void,
and the certified check or bond accompanying this Proposal, shall be forfeited to become the property of the-City
of Clearwater, Florida, and the full amount of said check shall be retained by' the City, or if the Proposal Bond be
given, the full amount of such bond shall be paid to the City as stipulated or liquidated damages; otherwise, the
bond or certified check accompanying this Proposal, or the amount of said check, shall be returned to the
undersigned as specified herein.
Attached hereto is a bond or certified check on W e.&1- -\', to \ 0\ :t: N Su (" c.. ~ c..~
~c t-\f~I'.\'i ~forthesumof 'O~O
\\~C'lU~\-
(being a minimum of 10% of Contractor's total bid amount).
~+ ~'.ol
[) I"l AhClU.,vt -a;ol
($ \ o6J 0 't )
The full names and residences of all persons and parties interested in the foregoing bid are as follows:
(If corporation, give the names and addresses of the President and Secretary. If firm or partnership, the names
and addresses of the members or partners. The Bidder shall list not only his name but also the name of any
person with whom bidder has any type of agreement whereby such person's improvements, enrichment,
employment or possible benefit, whether sub-contractor, materialman, agent, supplier, or employer is contingent
upon the award of the contract to the bidder).
NAMES:
ADDRESSES:
5 539 ~N J. ~ \1~" ~~rc.\(l W
~ c.. \ t-\e.;. -t 0 t: L 3 C\ a a.. \
.
\~""('" ~;'OtoJ ho.",be,r SooN
~O~~~L L~~ber~oN
SQ,.I-\~
Signature of Bidd~
\" ~",('.s..-\ 0...,
(The bidder must indicate whethe Corporation Partnership, Company or Individual).
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvement Project
Section V
V-11
.
I,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PROPOSAL
(3)
The person signing shall, in his own handwriting, sign the Principal's name, his own name and his title. Wherethe
person signing for a corporation is other than the President or Vice-President, he must, by affidavit, show his
authority, to bind the corporation.
B~
\' ~ ""r.!,.;-.oN L""M be.... 4()~
Business Address of Bidder: ~.., \ q
~
"'
Title:
'Y C' e .s. ~ 0\.. t.)-+
~;..
~E
,,+""
City and State: ~ Co\. \ "" e. -\- \-- 00 "\ ~ L
Zip Code ~ L\ do::.\ ,
Dated at ?n \ f'\P -1-\-0 . ~ L
, this 30-th day of N ()\J eM be....
,AD., 2006
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvement Project
Section V
V-12
.'~
I,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
CITY OF CLEARWATER
ADDENDUM SHEET
PROJECT: . E.. ~e.. t= tU.. ~ ~+ eo So 0 J.o r C.ON t 0 \
:t. ""~ rov e t-\e""+~ ro~ec.'\-
Acknowledgment is hereby made of the following addenda received since issuance of Plans and Specifications.
Addendum No. ~ Date: \\ ~ ;}. <6 - 0 \..D
Addendum No. Date:
Addendum No. Date:
Addendum No. Date:
Addendum No. Date:
Addendum No. Date:
Addendum No. Date:
Addendum No. Date:
Addendum No. Date:
Addendum No. Date:
Addendum No. Date:
\" L ~ ":b ',\) e.'~'..\': e.d J l ro.)c.,
~ame of Bidder)
--. ~L_
. ~ ~
(Signature of Officer)
\h\.\r s-\ Oo.J L~"",'o~("~o,.,)
~ rf...~,:. oh IV;'
(Title of Officer)
~ D \I.. '3 () ~ cc ~
(Date)
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities Section V
Odor Control Improvements Project V-13
I
I,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Ii
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
-
CITY OF CLEARWATER
ADDENDUM SHEET
PROJECT:
Acknowledgment is hereby made of the following addenda received since issuance of Plans and Specifications.
Addendum No. Date:
Addendum No. Date:
Addendum No. Date:
Addendum No. Date:
Addendum No. Date:
Addendum No. Date:
Addendum No. Date:
Addendum No. Date:
Addendum No. Date:
Addendum No. Date:
Addendum No. Date:
(Name of Bidder)
(Signature of Officer)
(Title of Officer)
(Date)
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvements Project
Section V
V-13
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
BIDDER'S PROPOSAL
PROJECT: Marshall Street and Northeast Water Pollution Control Facilities Odor Control Improvements
Proiect
-,~~l)fi'iJ
ITEM
NO.
1 Mobilization
:,:Mijr~hinI$~tg~t;rwRQ'la.l~l~.........
ITEM
NO.
2
3
4
DESCRIPTION
Furnish and Install Channel
Covers
Furnish and Install FRP Ductwork,
Valves and Fittings (including
su orts
Furnish and Install Concrete
E uipment Pad
Furnish and Install Water Line and
Drain Line (including all valves
and fittings) for the Odor Control
Unit
Furnish and Install Bollards
Install Owner Fumished Odor
Control Unit
Furnish and Install Electrical
Su I to Odor Control Unit
5
6
7
8
EST.
UNIT QTY UNIT PRICE TOTAL
LS 1 '1 0 1,900.
LS 1 L.\a
80 L-t~ go ~
LS 1 \a 00. Dt0
LS 1
5 ~oo -5) ooD.
I ..
EA 7 \ SOD. t ~OO.
LS 1 0, 7;;~
LS 1 q l/Q, q) 170.
SUBTOTAL: Marshall Street WPC Base Bid q S, .;2 --
~.
.i':NQ-i16Ji~~f,WgQ~~~:~':el.g!i!jJill~.~,!Mr'f~::![t&
ITEM
NO.
g
10
DESCRIPTION
Furnish and Install Channel
Covers
Furnish and Install FRP Ductwork,
Valves and Fittings (including
su orts and condensate drain
Furnish and Install Concrete
E ui ment Pad
Furnish and Install Water Line and
Drain Line (including all valves
and fittings) for the Odor Control
Unit
Install Owner Furnished Odor
Control Unit
UNIT
LS
UNIT PRICE
11
12
13
3L\o
LS
1
LS
1
-So /'80.
/.; 050.
So
U OS D.
LS
1
~.
75'
1) 50S,
LS
1
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Faci/ities
Odor Contro//mprovements Project
-
Section V
V-14
L 5.:5 0 Q
TOTAL: Northeast WPC Additive Alternative 1
i:N.Qrt6giifwpc'A.d4!t!V~"Alt~rn'~tiv~2::;1;;:;:;::!:::')::M;:ii:ir.1:::n.:.~}:;im:i:;:;,:;:;::';.~ili::j1~;":.::!~:;:;:::;;:;;;:;;:;?":':'" ,.;:;<;<,;:;.,
Apply Coating to Interior Walls of
Channel (including surface
preparation, flow routing, and
coatin ap lication
-I.
1
/- -",
-I
1
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
,-' '.
1
I
5 ("dO
SUBTOTAL: Northeast WPC Base B
TOTAL: General, Marshall Street WPCand Northeast WPC Base Bids
::)Nqnljg~~t:WPC:Aa.ditiv~:Alt~roitjv~::,1:.;f;j;::i::j:~j:!i':2::f~:;~';!';j;:'!::!':;!:ji';:::;J..:;.m;.::i:.::':'~f;:
ITEM EST.
NO. DESCRIPTION UNIT QTY
15 Furnish and Install Clarifier LS 1
Launder Covers
Furnish and Install Additional FRP
Ductwork, Valves and Fittings
includin su orts
14
Furnish and Install Electrical
Su I to Odor Control Unit
1
~ ~ J ~ 00.
LS
16
LS
1
TOTAL: Northeast WPC Additive Alternative 2
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvement Project
SUMMARY OF BID ITEMS
MARSHALL STREET WPC AND NORTHEAST WPC ODOR CONTROL IMPROVEMENTS
!J-
$-.J <6 , Co 50.
CD
$qs) d')~.;'-
qJ~~aq..S~
a - CO
~ ~. f) sO. ;;--
/
Q -~
l. SO~j,
,
$
$
$
$
$
$
~o
d ;l g) ();:) Cj. ~
3 7 3. ltJ{)~~
,
~ ~
l 0 . d DD.
.
17
LS
1
~--- ----
GENERAL (Item 1)
MARSHALL STREET WPC BASE BID (Items 2-8)
MARSHALL STREET WPC BASE BID Contingency
NORTHEAST WPC BASE BID (Items 9-14)
NORTHEAST WPC BASE BID Contingency
TOTAL {GENERAL, BASE BIDS, (Items 1.14), and
CONTINGENCIES}
ADDITIVE ALTERNATIVE 1 (Items 15-16)
ADDITIVE ALTERNATIVE 2 (Item 17)
Section V
V-15
I.
1
I
1
1
I
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
1
-
TOTAL BID ITEMS
$
S'()
C; /q ..3~ q~
,
(Numbers)
TOTAL BID ITEMS $ 5 ~ ~ "'.... N cl (' ~,A. U" 'N P_-\ ~e.....J -\ ~C> ""be( ,., ot J
-t"'rt.'8 ~"l.rvd,..-p.A. -;""'''_''''''"'fN',t..tl!' (L1I.A.s~ t ----~ords)
CONTRACTOR: \" L C- ~ ',v e.. r s:..', f', e.. cl.. I I N c:.. .
THE BIDDER'S TOTAL ABOVE IS HIS TOTAL BID BASED ON HIS UNIT PRICES AND LUMP SUM PRICES
AND THE ESTIMATED QUANTITIES REQUIRED. THIS FIGURE IS FOR INFORMATION ONLY AT THE TIME
OF OPENING BIDS. THE CITY WILL MAKE THE TABULATION FROM THE UNIT PRICES AND LUMP SUM
PRICE BID. IF THERE IS AN ERROR IN THE TOTAL BY THE BIDDER, IT SHALL BE CHANGED AS ONLY
THE UNIT PRICES AND LUMP SUM PRICE SHALL GOVERN.
Award of contract will be made for that combination of base bid and alternate bid items in the best interest
of the City, however, unless otherwise specified, all work awarded will be awarded to only one Contractor,
as stipulated in Item 18 of the Instructions to Bidders.
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Control Improvement Project
Section V
V.16
I-
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
-----
DRUG-FREE WORKPLACE FORM
The undersigned vendor in accordance with Florida Statute 287.087 hereby certifies that
\" L c...
-:u ; \.l e. f s,', ~ ~ e... ct \ 'I "-' c.... ,
(Name of Business)
does:
1. Publish a statement notifying employees that the unlawful manufacture, distribution, dispensing,
possession, or use of a controlled substance is prohibited in the workplace and specifying the
actions that will be taken against employees for violations of such prohibition.
2. Inform employees about the dangers of drug abuse in the workplace, the business's policy of
maintaining a drug-free workplace, any available drug counseling, rehabilitation, and employee
assistance programs, and the penalties that may be imposed upon employees for drug abuse
violations.
3, Give each employee engaged in providing the commodities or contractual services that are under
bid a copy of the statement specified in subsection (1).
4. In the statement specified in subsection (1), notify the employees that, as a condition of working
on the commodities or contractual services that are under bid, the employee will abide by the
terms of the statement and will notify the employer of any conviction of, or plea of guilty or nolo
contendere to, any violation of Chapter 893 or of any controlled substance law of the United
States or any state, for a violation occurring in the workplace no later than five (5) days after such
conviction.
5. hnpose a sanction on, or require the satisfactory participation in a drug abuse assistance or
rehabilitation program if such is available in the employee's community, by any employee who is
so convicted.
6. Make a good faith effort to continue to maintain a drug-free workplace through implementation of
this section.
As the person authorized to sign the statement, I certify that this firm complies fully with the above
requirements.
~
-~
Bidder's Signature
, '" \.l t' .5:.+0 ~ \....0.'-\ ~-4t ('" ~o "'-l
to ()"
30 dOO 1.,
)
Date
PUR062.036
rev. 10/97
I
I,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Ii
I:
I
I
I
I'
I
I
I
I
-
CITY OF CLEARWATER
ADDENDUM SHEET
PROJECT:
Acknowledgment is hereby made of the following addenda received since issuance of Plans and Specifications.
Addendum No. Date:
Addendum No. Date:
Addendum No. Date:
Addendum No. Date:
Addendum No. Date:
Addendum No. Date:
Addendum No. Date:
Addendum No. Date:
Addendum No. Date:
Addendum No. Date:
Addendum No. Date:
(Name of Bidder)
(Signature of Officer)
(Title of Officer)
(Date)
Marshall Street and Northeast WPC Facilities
Odor Controllmprove,,!ents Project
Section V
V-13
~.
.'
~
,,-
1A CORD... CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE \ DATE (MMlDDIYYYY)
01/25/07
PRODUCER 1-813-229-8021 THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION
M. B. Wilson Co., Ino. ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE
HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AMEND, EXTEND OR
300 W. Platt St. ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW.
Ste 200
Tampa, FL 33606 INSURERS AFFORDING COVERAGE NAIC#
INSURED INSURER A: JAMBS RIVBR INS CO 12203
TLC Diversified, Ino.
INSURERB: Transportation Ins Co 20494
2719 17th Street Bast INSURERC:va11ey Porge Ins Co 20508
Palmetto, FL 34221 INSURER 0: Westfield Ins Co 24112
INSURER E:
THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING
ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR
MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH
POLICIES. AGGREGATE LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS.
II~~: ~?'L S"DAUCI1 POLICY NUMBER POLICY EFFECTIVE PR~!fY EXPIRATION LIMITS
N R~
D ~NERAL LIABILITY TRA3972460 04/01/06 04/01/07 EACH OCCURRENCE $1,000,000
X ~MERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY PREMISES lEa occurence) $ 150,000
f-- CLAIMS MADE 0 OCCUR
MED EXP (Anyone person) $10,000
X contraotua1 Liability PERSONAL &ADV INJURY $1,000,000
-
~ $500 Prop Dmg Ded GENERAL AGGREGATE $2,000,000
~'LAGGREfilE LIMIT APn PER: PRODUCTS-COMP/OPAGG $2,000,000
POLICY X I ~rgi LOC
C ~OMOBILE LIABILITY 20B3116659 04/01/06 04/01/07 COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT
$1,000,000
X ANY AUTO (Ee eccldent)
I--
I-- ALL OWNED AUTOS BODILY INJURY
$
SCHEDULED AUTOS (Per person)
-
X HIRED AUTOS BODILY INJURY
- $
X NON-OWNED AUTOS (Per eccldenl)
-
- PROPERTY DAMAGE $
(Per eccldent)
RGE LIABILITY AUTO ONLY - EAACCIDENT $
ANY AUTO OTHER THAN EA ACC $
AUTO ONLY: AGG $
A ~ESSIUMBRELLA LIABILITY 000091481 04/01/06 04/01/07 EACH OCCURRENCE $ 5,000,000
X OCCUR D CLAIMS MADE AGGREGATE $5,000,000
$
==l DEDUCTIBLE $
RETENTION $ $
C WC283116676 04/01/06 04/01/07 I WCSTATU-, I IOTH-
WORKERS COMPENSATION AND X TORY LIMITS ER
EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY $500,000
ANY PROPRIETORlPARTNERlEXECUTIVEX E.L. EACH ACCIDENT
OFFICER/MEMBER EXCLUDED? E.L. DISEASE - EA EMPLOYEE $500,000
~~~c~~:~~rs~~NS below E.L. DISEASE - POLICY LIMIT $500,000
OTHER 2082844497
B Installation Floater 04/01/06 04/01/07 Limi t : 500,000
Deduotib1e: 1,000
DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS I LOCATIONS I VEHICLES I EXCLUSIONS ADDED BY ENDORSEMENT I SPECIAL PROVISIONS
Certifioate Holder is Listed as "Additional Insured"
RB: Marshall Street/NB WPC paoi1ities Odor Control Improvements Projeot (05-0062-OT)
SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE 'THE EXPIRATION
City of Clearwater DATE 'THEREOF, 'THE ISSUING INSURER WILL ENDEAVOR TO MAIL ~ DAYS WRITTEN
NOTICE TO THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER NAMED TO THE LEFT, BUT FAILURE TO DO SO SHALL
Attn: A1ioe R. Bokman IMPOSE NO OBLIGATION OR LIABILITY OF ANY KIND UPON THE INSURER, ITS AGENTS OR
P.O. Box 4748
REPRESENTATIVES.
Clearwater, FL 3375B-4748 AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE ~ ~
USA A:..o-
ACORD 25 (2001/08) JL002
5586782
@ACORDCORPORATION 1988
COVERAGES
CERTIFICATE HOLDER
CANCELLATION
,f
..
IMPORTANT
If the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED, the policy(ies) must be endorsed. A statement
on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s).
If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED, subject to the terms and conditions of the policy, certain policies may
require an endorsement. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate
holder in lieu of such endorsement(s).
DISCLAIMER
The Certificate of Insurance on the reverse side of this form does not constitute a contract between
the issuing insurer(s), authorized representative or producer, and the certificate holder, nor does it
affirmatively or negatively amend, extend or alter the coverage afforded by the policies listed thereon.
ACORD 25 (2001108)